2019 EXPLORER Owner's Manual - Dealer E Process

2019 EXPLORER Owner’s Manual

2019 EXP

LOR

ER O

wner’s M

anualSeptember 2018Second Printing

Litho in U.S.A.

KL2J 19A321 AA

ford.caowner.ford.com

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest ofcontinuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any timewithout notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in aretrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.Errors and omissions excepted.© Ford Motor Company 2018

All rights reserved.Part Number: 201807 20180822173702

California Proposition 65

WARNING: Operating, servicing andmaintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highwaymotor vehicle can expose you to chemicalsincluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,phthalates, and lead, which are known to theState of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm. To minimizeexposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle theengine except as necessary, service your vehiclein a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or washyour hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.For more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals andrelated accessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash your hands after handling.

IntroductionAbout This Manual ..........................................7Symbols Glossary ............................................7Data Recording .................................................9Perchlorate ........................................................11Ford Credit .........................................................11Replacement Parts Recommendation

............................................................................12Special Notices ...............................................12Mobile Communications Equipment

............................................................................13Export Unique Options ................................14

EnvironmentProtecting the Environment .......................15

At a GlanceInstrument Panel Overview .......................16

Child SafetyGeneral Information ......................................18Installing Child Restraints ...........................19Booster Seats .................................................29Child Restraint Positioning .........................31Child Safety Locks .........................................33

SeatbeltsPrinciple of Operation .................................35Fastening the Seatbelts .............................36Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................39Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Chime ............................................................40Seatbelt Reminder .......................................40Child Restraint and Seatbelt

Maintenance ...............................................42Seatbelt Extension .......................................42

Personal Safety System™Personal Safety System™ .........................43

Supplementary RestraintsSystem

Principle of Operation .................................44Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................45Front Passenger Sensing System ...........46Side Airbags ....................................................48Passenger Knee Airbag ...............................49Safety Canopy™ ...........................................49Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ........51Airbag Disposal ..............................................52

Keys and Remote ControlsGeneral Information on Radio

Frequencies .................................................53Remote Control .............................................53Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control

..........................................................................59

MyKey™Principle of Operation .................................60Creating a MyKey ...........................................61Clearing All MyKeys ......................................62Checking MyKey System Status ..............62Using MyKey With Remote Start

Systems ........................................................63MyKey – Troubleshooting ..........................63

Doors and LocksLocking and Unlocking ................................65Keyless Entry ..................................................68

LiftgateManual Liftgate ..............................................70Power Liftgate ..................................................71

SecurityPassive Anti-Theft System ........................75Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................76

1

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, Second-Printing

Table of Contents

Steering WheelAdjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles

With: Manual Adjustable SteeringColumn ..........................................................77

Adjusting the Steering Wheel - VehiclesWith: Power Adjustable SteeringColumn ..........................................................77

Audio Control ..................................................79Voice Control ...................................................79Cruise Control ................................................80Information Display Control .....................80Heated Steering Wheel ..............................80

PedalsAdjusting the Pedals .....................................81

Wipers and WashersWindshield Wipers ........................................82Autowipers ......................................................82Windshield Washers ....................................83Rear Window Wiper and Washers ..........83

LightingGeneral Information ....................................84Lighting Control .............................................84Autolamps .......................................................85Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................85Headlamp Exit Delay ...................................86Daytime Running Lamps ...........................86Automatic High Beam Control .................87Front Fog Lamps ...........................................88Direction Indicators ......................................88Interior Lamps ................................................88Ambient Lighting ..........................................89

Windows and MirrorsPower Windows ............................................90Global Opening ...............................................91Exterior Mirrors ................................................91Interior Mirror ..................................................94

Sun Visors ........................................................94Moonroof .........................................................94

Instrument ClusterGauges ..............................................................96Warning Lamps and Indicators ...............99Audible Warnings and Indicators ..........102

Information DisplaysGeneral Information ...................................104Information Messages ................................115

Climate ControlManual Climate Control ............................129Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles

With: Sony AM/FM/CD .........................130Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles

With: Premium AM/FM/CD .................132Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate

.........................................................................134Rear Passenger Climate Controls .........136Heated Rear Window .................................137Heated Exterior Mirrors ..............................137Cabin Air Filter ..............................................138Remote Start ................................................138

SeatsSitting in the Correct Position .................139Head Restraints ...........................................139Manual Seats ................................................142Power Seats ...................................................143Memory Function ........................................146Rear Seats ......................................................147Heated Seats ................................................154Climate Controlled Seats .........................155

Garage Door OpenerUniversal Garage Door Opener ...............157

2


Table of Contents

Auxiliary Power PointsAuxiliary Power Points ...............................162

Storage CompartmentsCenter Console .............................................164Overhead Console ......................................165

Starting and Stopping theEngine

General Information ...................................166Ignition Switch ..............................................166Keyless Starting ...........................................166Starting a Gasoline Engine .......................167Switching Off the Engine ..........................170Engine Block Heater ...................................170

Fuel and RefuelingSafety Precautions ......................................172Fuel Quality - Gasoline ...............................172Fuel Quality - E85 ........................................173Fuel Filler Funnel Location .......................174Running Out of Fuel ....................................174Refueling .........................................................176Fuel Consumption .......................................179

Engine Emission ControlEmission Law ...............................................180Catalytic Converter ......................................181

TransmissionAutomatic Transmission ..........................184

Four-Wheel DrivePrinciple of Operation ...............................188Using Four-Wheel Drive ...........................188

BrakesGeneral Information ...................................193

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes.........................................................................193

Parking Brake ................................................194Hill Start Assist .............................................194

Traction ControlPrinciple of Operation ...............................196Using Traction Control ..............................196

Stability ControlPrinciple of Operation ................................197Using Stability Control ..............................198

Terrain ControlUsing Terrain Control .................................199Using Hill Descent Control .....................200

Parking AidsPrinciple of Operation ...............................202Rear Parking Aid ..........................................202Front Parking Aid ........................................203Side Sensing System ................................204Active Park Assist .......................................206Rear View Camera .......................................212180 Degree Camera ....................................215

Cruise ControlPrinciple of Operation ................................217Using Cruise Control ...................................217Using Adaptive Cruise Control ...............218

Driving AidsDriver Alert .....................................................225Lane Keeping System ...............................226Blind Spot Information System ..............231Cross Traffic Alert .......................................232Steering ..........................................................235Pre-Collision Assist ....................................236

3


Table of Contents

Load CarryingRear Under Floor Storage ........................239Cargo Nets .....................................................239Luggage Covers ...........................................240Roof Racks and Load Carriers ...............240Load Limit .......................................................241

TowingTowing a Trailer ............................................247Trailer Sway Control ..................................248Recommended Towing Weights ..........248Essential Towing Checks .........................250Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -

2.3L EcoBoost™ ......................................252Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -

3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™ ..........252

Driving HintsBreaking-In ....................................................255Economical Driving ....................................255Driving Through Water ..............................256Floor Mats .....................................................256

Roadside EmergenciesRoadside Assistance .................................258Hazard Flashers ..........................................259Fuel Shutoff ..................................................259Jump Starting the Vehicle .......................260Post-Crash Alert System .........................262Transporting the Vehicle ..........................262Towing Points ...............................................263

Customer AssistanceGetting the Services You Need .............264In California (U.S. Only) ...........................265The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto

Line Program (U.S. Only) ....................266Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration

Program (Canada Only) ......................267

Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. andCanada .......................................................267

Ordering Additional Owner's Literature........................................................................269

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)........................................................................269

Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)........................................................................269

FusesFuse Specification Chart ...........................271Changing a Fuse .........................................280

MaintenanceGeneral Information ..................................282Opening and Closing the Hood .............282Under Hood Overview - 2.3L EcoBoost™

........................................................................283Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Duratec

........................................................................284Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Ecoboost™

........................................................................285Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.3L EcoBoost™

........................................................................286Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L Duratec/3.5L

Ecoboost™ ...............................................287Engine Oil Check .........................................287Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................288Engine Coolant Check ..............................289Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -

2.3L EcoBoost™ .....................................293Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -

3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™ ..........293Brake Fluid Check .......................................295Power Steering Fluid Check ...................296Washer Fluid Check ...................................296Changing the 12V Battery ........................296Checking the Wiper Blades ....................298Changing the Wiper Blades ....................298Adjusting the Headlamps .......................299Changing a Bulb .........................................300Changing the Engine Air Filter ...............304

4


Table of Contents

Vehicle CareGeneral Information ..................................306Cleaning Products .....................................306Cleaning the Exterior ................................306Waxing ...........................................................308Cleaning the Engine ..................................308Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades

.......................................................................308Cleaning the Interior ..................................309Cleaning the Instrument Panel and

Instrument Cluster Lens ......................309Cleaning Leather Seats .............................310Repairing Minor Paint Damage ................311Cleaning the Wheels ...................................311Vehicle Storage ..............................................311

Wheels and TiresGeneral Information ...................................314Tire Care ..........................................................316Using Summer Tires ..................................329Using Snow Chains ....................................329Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........330Changing a Road Wheel ..........................334Technical Specifications ..........................338

Capacities and Specifications

Engine Specifications - 2.3L EcoBoost™.......................................................................340

Engine Specifications - 3.5L Duratec.......................................................................340

Engine Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™.........................................................................341

Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L EcoBoost™ .....342Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec ............343Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™ .....344Vehicle Identification Number ...............345Vehicle Certification Label ......................346Transmission Code Designation ...........346Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L

EcoBoost™ ...............................................347

Capacities and Specifications - 3.5LDuratec ........................................................351

Capacities and Specifications - 3.5LEcoboost™ ...............................................355

Bulb Specification Chart .........................360

Audio SystemGeneral Information ..................................362Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/

CD .................................................................363Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/

FM/CD ........................................................364Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/

SYNC ...........................................................366Digital Radio .................................................370Satellite Radio ..............................................372USB Port .........................................................375Media Hub .....................................................375

SYNC™General Information ..................................376Using Voice Recognition ..........................378Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ..........380SYNC™ Applications and Services ......392Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player

........................................................................397SYNC™ Troubleshooting ........................406

SYNC™ 3General Information ...................................414Home Screen ...............................................426Using Voice Recognition ...........................427Entertainment .............................................434Climate ...........................................................444Phone .............................................................446Navigation .....................................................452Apps ................................................................460Settings ..........................................................463SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting .....................477

5


Table of Contents

AccessoriesAccessories ....................................................491

Ford ProtectFord Protect .................................................493

Scheduled MaintenanceGeneral Maintenance Information ......495Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........498Special Operating Conditions Scheduled

Maintenance .............................................501Scheduled Maintenance Record ..........503

AppendicesElectromagnetic Compatibility ..............514End User License Agreement .................516Declaration of Conformity .......................542Type Approvals ............................................542

6


Table of Contents

ABOUT THIS MANUALThank you for choosing Ford. Werecommend that you take some time toget to know your vehicle by reading thismanual. The more that you know aboutyour vehicle, the greater the safety andpleasure you will get from driving it.

WARNING: Driving whiledistracted can result in loss of vehiclecontrol, crash and injury. We stronglyrecommend that you use extremecaution when using any device that maytake your focus off the road. Yourprimary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. Werecommend against the use of anyhand-held device while driving andencourage the use of voice-operatedsystems when possible. Make sure youare aware of all applicable local lawsthat may affect the use of electronicdevices while driving.

Note: This manual describes productfeatures and options available throughoutthe range of available models, sometimeseven before they are generally available. Itmay describe options not fitted to thevehicle you have purchased.Note: Some of the illustrations in thismanual may show features as used indifferent models, so may appear differentto you on your vehicle.Note: Always use and operate your vehiclein line with all applicable laws andregulations.Note: Pass on this manual when sellingyour vehicle. It is an integral part of yourvehicle.This manual may qualify the location of acomponent as left-hand side or right-handside. The side is determined when facingforward in the seat.

E154903

Right-hand side.ALeft-hand side.B

SYMBOLS GLOSSARYThese are some of the symbols you maysee on your vehicle.

E162384

Air conditioning system

E231157

Air conditioning system lubricanttype

Anti-lock braking system

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Battery

Battery acid

Brake fluid - non petroleumbased

Brake system

7


Introduction

E270480

Brake system

Cabin air filter

Check fuel cap

Child safety door lock or unlock

Child seat lower anchor

Child seat tether anchor

E71340

Cruise control

Do not open when hot

Engine air filter

Engine coolant

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil

Explosive gas

Fan warning

E71880

Fasten seatbelt

E231160

Flammable

E67017

Front airbag

Front fog lamps

Fuel pump reset

Fuse compartment

Hazard flashers

Heated rear window

Windshield defrosting system

Interior luggage compartmentrelease

Jack

E161353

Keep out of reach of children

Lighting control

Low tire pressure warning

Maintain correct fluid level

Note operating instructions

8


Introduction

E270945

Horn control

Panic alarm

E139213

Parking aid

Parking brake

Power steering fluid

Power windows front/rear

Power window lockout

E231159

Requires registered technician

Safety alert

See Owner's Manual

E231158

See Service Manual

Service engine soon

E270849

Passenger airbag activated

E270850

Passenger airbag deactivated

Side airbag

E167012

Shield the eyes

E138639

Stability control

E163957

Hill descent control

E272858

Trail control

E270969

Windshield wiping system

Windshield wash and wipe

DATA RECORDINGService Data RecordingService data recorders in your vehicle arecapable of collecting and storingdiagnostic information about your vehicle.This potentially includes information aboutthe performance or status of varioussystems and modules in the vehicle, suchas engine, throttle, steering or brakesystems. In order to properly diagnose andservice your vehicle, Ford Motor Company(Ford of Canada in Canada), and serviceand repair facilities may access or shareamong them vehicle diagnosticinformation received through a directconnection to your vehicle whendiagnosing or servicing your vehicle.Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Fordof Canada, in Canada) may, wherepermitted by law, use vehicle diagnosticinformation for vehicle improvement orwith other information we may have aboutyou, (for example, your contactinformation), to offer you products orservices that may interest you. Data maybe provided to our service providers such

9


Introduction

as part suppliers that may help diagnosemalfunctions, and who are similarlyobligated to protect data. We retain thisdata only as long as necessary to performthese functions or to comply with law. Wemay provide information where requiredin response to official requests to lawenforcement or other governmentauthorities or third parties acting withlawful authority or court order, and suchinformation may be used in legalproceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), ifyou choose to use connected apps andservices, such as SYNC Vehicle HealthReport or MyFord Mobile App, you consentthat certain diagnostic information mayalso be accessed electronically by FordMotor Company and Ford authorizedservice facilities, and that the diagnosticinformation may be used to provideservices to you, personalizing yourexperience, troubleshoot, and to improveproducts and services and offer youproducts and services that may interestyou, where permitted by law. For Canadaonly, for more information, please reviewthe Ford of Canada privacy policy atwww.ford.ca, including our U.S. datastorage and use of service providers inother jurisdictions who may be subject tolegal requirements in Canada, the UnitedStates and other countries applicable tothem, for example, lawful requirements todisclose personal information togovernmental authorities in thosecountries. See SYNC™ (page 376).

Event Data RecordingThis vehicle is equipped with an eventdata recorder. The main purpose of anevent data recorder is to record, incertain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an airbagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle;

this data will assist in understandinghow a vehicle’s systems performed.The event data recorder is designed torecord data related to vehicle dynamicsand safety systems for a short periodof time, typically 30 seconds or less.The event data recorder in this vehicleis designed to record such data as:• How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;• Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/orthe brake pedal; and

• How fast the vehicle was traveling;and

• Where the driver was positioningthe steering wheel.

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances inwhich crashes and injuries occur.Note: Event data recorder data isrecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; no datais recorded by the event data recorderunder normal driving conditions and nopersonal data or information (e.g., name,gender, age, and crash location) isrecorded (see limitations regarding 911Assist and Traffic, directions andInformation privacy below). However,parties, such as law enforcement, couldcombine the event data recorder datawith the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.To read data recorded by an event datarecorder, special equipment is required,and access to the vehicle or the eventdata recorder is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, otherparties, such as law enforcement, thathave such special equipment, can read

10


Introduction

the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the event data recorder.Ford Motor Company and Ford ofCanada do not access event datarecorder information without obtainingconsent, unless pursuant to court orderor where required by law enforcement,other government authorities or otherthird parties acting with lawfulauthority. Other parties may seek toaccess the information independentlyof Ford Motor Company and Ford ofCanada.Note: Including to the extent that anylaw pertaining to Event Data Recordersapplies to SYNC or its features, pleasenote the following: Once 911 Assist (ifequipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assistmay, through any paired and connectedcell phone, disclose to emergencyservices that the vehicle has been in acrash involving the deployment of anairbag or, in certain vehicles, theactivation of the fuel pump shut-off.Certain versions or updates to 911 Assistmay also be capable of being used toelectronically or verbally provide to 911operators the vehicle location (such aslatitude and longitude), and/or otherdetails about the vehicle or crash orpersonal information about theoccupants to assist 911 operators toprovide the most appropriate emergencyservices. If you do not want to disclosethis information, do not activate the 911Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 376).Additionally, when you connect toTraffic, Directions and Information (ifequipped, U.S. only), the service usesGPS technology and advanced vehiclesensors to collect the vehicle’s currentlocation, travel direction, and speed(“vehicle travel information”), only tohelp provide you with the directions,traffic reports, or business searchesthat you request. If you do not want

Ford or its vendors to receive thisinformation, do not activate theservice. For more information, seeTraffic, Directions and Information,Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™(page 376).

PERCHLORATECertain components in your vehicle suchas airbag modules, seatbelt pretensionersand remote control batteries may containperchlorate material. Special handlingmay apply for service or vehicle end of lifedisposal.

For more information visit:

Web Address

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-ouswaste/perchlorate

FORD CREDITUS OnlyFord Credit offers a full range of financingand lease plans to help you acquire yourvehicle. If you have financed or leased yourvehicle through Ford Credit, thank you foryour business.We offer a number of convenient ways foryou to contact us, and to manage youraccount.Call 1-800-727-7000.For more information about Ford Creditand access to Account Manager, go towww.ford.com/finance.

11


Introduction

REPLACEMENT PARTSRECOMMENDATIONWe have built your vehicle to the higheststandards using quality parts. Werecommend that you demand the use ofgenuine Ford and Motorcraft partswhenever your vehicle requires scheduledmaintenance or repair. You can clearlyidentify genuine Ford and Motorcraft partsby looking for the Ford, FoMoCo orMotorcraft branding on the parts or theirpackaging.

Scheduled Maintenance andMechanical RepairsOne of the best ways for you to make surethat your vehicle provides years of serviceis to have it maintained in line with ourrecommendations using parts thatconform to the specifications detailed inthis Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford andMotorcraft parts meet or exceed thesespecifications.

Collision RepairsWe hope that you never experience acollision, but accidents do happen.Genuine Ford replacement collision partsmeet our stringent requirements for fit,finish, structural integrity, corrosionprotection and dent resistance. Duringvehicle development we validate thatthese parts deliver the intended level ofprotection as a whole system. A great wayto know for sure you are getting this levelof protection is to use genuine Fordreplacement collision parts.

Warranty on Replacement PartsGenuine Ford and Motorcraft replacementparts are the only replacement parts thatbenefit from a Ford Warranty. The FordWarranty may not cover damage causedto your vehicle as a result of failednon-Ford parts. For additional information,refer to the terms and conditions of theFord Warranty.

SPECIAL NOTICESNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyFor a detailed description of what iscovered and what is not covered by yourvehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,see the Warranty Manual that is providedto you along with your Owner’s Manual.

Special InstructionsFor your added safety, your vehicle is fittedwith sophisticated electronic controls.

WARNING: You risk death orserious injury to yourself and others if youdo not follow the instruction highlightedby the warning symbol. Failure to followthe specific warnings and instructionscould result in personal injury.

WARNING: NEVER use a rearwardfacing child restraint on a seat protectedby an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it,DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILDcan occur.

12


Introduction

On Board Diagnostics Data LinkConnector

WARNING: Do not connectwireless plug-in devices to the data linkconnector. Unauthorized third partiescould gain access to vehicle data andimpair the performance of safety relatedsystems. Only allow repair facilities thatfollow our service and repair instructionsto connect their equipment to the datalink connector.

Your vehicle has an OBD Data LinkConnector (DLC) that is used inconjunction with a diagnostic scan tool forvehicle diagnostics, repairs andreprogramming services. Installing anaftermarket device that uses the DLCduring normal driving for purposes such asremote insurance company monitoring,transmission of vehicle data to otherdevices or entities, or altering theperformance of the vehicle, may causeinterference with or even damage tovehicle systems. We do not recommendor endorse the use of aftermarket plug-indevices unless approved by Ford. Thevehicle Warranty will not cover damagecaused by an aftermarket plug-in device.

Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucksand Utility Type Vehicles

WARNING: Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate thanother types of vehicles.

Before you drive your vehicle, please readthis Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicleis not a passenger car. As with othervehicles of this type, failure to operate thisvehicle correctly may result in loss ofvehicle control, vehicle rollover, personalinjury or death.

Using Your Vehicle With aSnowplowDo not use this vehicle forsnowplowing.Your vehicle does not have a snowplowingpackage.

Using Your Vehicle as anAmbulanceDo not use this vehicle as anambulance.Your vehicle does not have the FordAmbulance Preparation Package.

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONSEQUIPMENT


Using mobile communications equipmentis becoming increasingly important in theconduct of business and personal affairs.However, you must not compromise yourown or others’ safety when using suchequipment. Mobile communications canenhance personal safety and security whenappropriately used, particularly inemergency situations. Safety must beparamount when using mobile

13


Introduction

communications equipment to avoidnegating these benefits. Mobilecommunication equipment includes, butis not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,portable email devices, text messagingdevices and portable two-way radios.

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONSFor your particular global region, yourvehicle may be equipped with features andoptions that are different from the featuresand options that are described in thisOwner’s Manual. A market uniquesupplement may be supplied thatcomplements this book. By referring to themarket unique supplement, if provided,you can properly identify those features,recommendations and specifications thatare unique to your vehicle. This Owner’sManual is written primarily for the U.S. andCanadian Markets. Features or equipmentlisted as standard may be different on unitsbuilt for export. Refer to this Owner’sManual for all other requiredinformation and warnings.

14


Introduction

PROTECTING THEENVIRONMENTYou should play your part in protecting theenvironment. Correct vehicle usage andthe authorized disposal of waste, cleaningand lubrication materials are significantsteps toward this aim.

For details about Ford MotorCompany's sustainability progress andinitiatives visit:

Web Address

www.sustainability.ford.com

15


Environment

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

E192491

Air vents.ADirection indicators. SeeDirection Indicators (page 88).High beam. See LightingControl (page 84).

B

Information display controls. SeeInformation Display Control(page 80).

C

Instrument cluster. See WarningLamps and Indicators (page99).

D

Wiper lever. See Wipers andWashers (page 82).

E

180 degree camera. See 180Degree Camera (page 215).

F

Parking aid switch. See ParkingAids (page 202).

G

Information and entertainmentdisplay.

H

Hazard warning flasher switch.See Hazard Flashers (page 259).

I

Audio unit. See Audio System(page 362).

J

Climate controls. See ClimateControl (page 129).

K

Heated rear window switch. SeeHeated Rear Window (page137).

L

16


At a Glance

Ignition switch. See IgnitionSwitch (page 166). See KeylessStarting (page 166).

M

Voice control. See VoiceControl (page 79). Audiocontrol. See Adjusting theSteering Wheel (page 77).

N

Horn.OSteering wheel adjustment. SeeAdjusting the Steering Wheel(page 77).

P

Cruise control buttons. SeeUsing Cruise Control (page217).

Q

Power liftgate release button.See Power Liftgate (page 71).

R

Lighting control. See LightingControl (page 84).

S

17


At a Glance

GENERAL INFORMATIONSee the following sections for directionson how to properly use safety restraintsfor children.

WARNING: Always make sure yourchild is secured properly in a device thatis appropriate for their height, age andweight. Child safety restraints must bebought separately from your vehicle.Failure to follow these instructions andguidelines may result in an increased riskof serious injury or death to your child.

WARNING: All children are shapeddifferently. The National Highway TrafficSafety Administration and other safetyorganizations, base theirrecommendations for child restraints onprobable child height, age and weightthresholds, or on the minimumrequirements of the law. We recommendthat you check with a NHTSA CertifiedChild Passenger Safety Technician

(CPST) to make sure that you properlyinstall the child restraint in your vehicleand that you consult your pediatrician tomake sure you have a child restraintappropriate for your child. To locate achild restraint fitting station and CPST,contact NHTSA toll free at1-888-327-4236 or go towww.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contactTransport Canada toll free at1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.cato find a Child Car Seat Clinic in yourarea. Failure to properly restrain childrenin child restraints made especially fortheir height, age and weight, may resultin an increased risk of serious injury ordeath to your child.

WARNING: On hot days, thetemperature inside the vehicle can risevery quickly. Exposure of people oranimals to these high temperatures foreven a short time can cause death orserious heat related injuries, includingbrain damage. Small children areparticularly at risk.

18


Child Safety

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Recommended restrainttype

Child size, height, weight, or ageChild

Use a child safety seat(sometimes called an

infant carrier, convertibleseat, or toddler seat).

Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less(generally age four or younger).

Infants ortoddlers

Use a belt-positioningbooster seat.

Children who have outgrown or no longerproperly fit in a child safety seat (gener-ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four

and less than age 12, and between 40 lb(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your

child restraint manufacturer).

Small children

Use a vehicle seatbelthaving the lap belt snugand low across the hips,shoulder belt centered

across the shoulder andchest, and seatback

upright.

Children who have outgrown or no longerproperly fit in a belt-positioning boosterseat (generally children who are at least

4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-mended by child restraint manufacturer).

Larger children

• You are required by law to properly usesafety seats for infants and toddlers inthe United States and Canada.

• Many states and provinces require thatsmall children use approved boosterseats until they reach age eight, aheight of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your localand state or provincial laws for specificrequirements about the safety ofchildren in your vehicle.

• When possible, always properlyrestrain children 12 years of age andunder in a rear seating position of yourvehicle. Accident statistics suggest thatchildren are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seating positionsthan in a front seating position. SeeFront Passenger Sensing System(page 46).

INSTALLING CHILDRESTRAINTSChild Seats

E142594

19


Child Safety

Use a child safety seat (sometimes calledan infant carrier, convertible seat, ortoddler seat) for infants, toddlers andchildren weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less(generally four-years-old or younger).

Using Lap and Shoulder Belts

WARNING: Do not place arearward facing child restraint in front ofan active airbag. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injuryor death.

WARNING: Properly securechildren 12 years old and under in a rearseating position whenever possible. Ifyou are unable to properly secure allchildren in a rear seating position,properly secure the largest child on thefront seat. If you must use a forwardfacing child restraint on the front seat,move the seat as far back as possible.Failure to follow these instructions couldresult in personal injury or death.

WARNING: Depending on whereyou secure a child restraint, anddepending on the child restraint design,you may block access to certain seatbeltbuckle assemblies and LATCH loweranchors, rendering those featurespotentially unusable. To avoid risk ofinjury, make sure occupants only useseating positions where they are able tobe properly restrained.

When installing a child restraint withcombination lap and shoulder belts:• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that

seating position.• Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle until you hear a snap and feel itlatch. Make sure the tongue is securelyfastened in the buckle.

• Keep the buckle release buttonpointing up and away from the childrestraint, with the tongue between thechild restraint and the release button,to prevent accidental unbuckling.

• Place the vehicle seat upon which thechild restraint will be installed in theupright position.

• For second-row seating positions,adjust the recliner slightly to improvechild restraint fit. If needed, remove thehead restraints.

• For third-row seating positions, stowthe head restraints to improve childrestraint fit. See Head Restraints(page 139).

• Put the seatbelt in the automaticlocking mode. See Step 5. This vehicledoes not require the use of a lockingclip.

Perform the following steps wheninstalling the child restraint withcombination lap and shoulder belts:Note: Although the child restraintillustrated is a forward facing child restraint,the steps are the same for installing a rearfacing child restraint.Note: The lock-off device on some childrestraints may not accommodate theshoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.Follow all instructions provided by themanufacturer of the child restraint regardingthe necessary and proper use of the lock-offdevice. In some instances these deviceshave been provided only for use in vehicleswith seatbelt systems that would otherwiserequire a locking clip.

20


Child Safety

Standard Seatbelts

E142528

1. Position the child restraint in a seatwith a combination lap and shoulderbelt.

E142529

2. After positioning the child restraint inthe proper seating position, pull downon the shoulder belt and then grasp theshoulder belt and lap belt togetherbehind the belt tongue.

E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap beltportions together, route the tonguethrough the child restraint accordingto the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions. Make sure that you did nottwist the belt webbing.

E142531

4. Insert the belt tongue into the properbuckle (the buckle closest to thedirection the tongue is coming from)for that seating position until you heara snap and feel the latch engage. Makesure that you securely latched thetongue by pulling on it.

21


Child Safety

E142875

5. To put the retractor in the automaticlocking mode, grasp the shoulderportion of the belt and pull downwarduntil you pull all of the belt out.

Note: The automatic locking mode isavailable on the front passenger and rearseats.6. Allow the belt to retract to remove

slack. The belt clicks as it retracts toindicate it is in the automatic lockingmode.

7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractorto make sure the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode. You shouldnot be able to pull more belt out. If theretractor did not lock, unbuckle the beltand repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E142533

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.Force the seat down with extra weight,for example, by pressing down orkneeling on the child restraint whilepulling up on the shoulder belt in orderto force slack from the belt. This isnecessary to remove the remainingslack that exists once you add the extraweight of the child to the child restraint.It also helps to achieve the propersnugness of the child restraint to yourvehicle. Sometimes, a slight leantoward the buckle provides extra helpto remove remaining slack from thebelt.

9. If the child restraint has a tether strap,attach it.

E142534

10. Before placing the child in the seat,forcibly move the seat forward andback to make sure the seat is securelyheld in place. To check this, grab theseat at the belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and forward andback. There should be no more than1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for properinstallation.

We recommend checking with a NHTSACertified Child Passenger SafetyTechnician to make certain the childrestraint is properly installed. In Canada,check with Transport Canada for referralto a Child Car Seat Clinic.

22


Child Safety

Inflatable Seatbelts

E142528

1. Position the child restraint in a seatwith a combination lap and shoulderbelt.

E146522

2. After positioning the child restraint inthe proper seating position, grasp theshoulder belt and lap belt togetherbehind the belt tongue.

E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap beltportions together, route the tonguethrough the child restraint accordingto the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions. Make sure that you did nottwist the belt webbing.

E146523

4. Insert the belt tongue into the properbuckle (the buckle closest to thedirection the tongue is coming from)for that seating position until you heara snap and feel the latch engage. Makesure that you securely latched thetongue by pulling on it.

23


Child Safety

E146524

5. To put the retractor in the automaticlocking mode, grasp the lap portion ofthe inflatable seatbelt and pull upwarduntil you pull all of the belt out.

Note: The automatic locking mode isavailable on the front passenger and rearseats.Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, theinflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locksthe child restraint for installation. The abilityfor the shoulder portion of the belt to movefreely is normal, even after the lap belt hasbeen put into the automatic locking mode.Note: The lock-off device on some childrestraints may not accommodate theshoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.Follow all instructions provided by themanufacturer of the child restraint regardingthe necessary and proper use of the lock-offdevice. In some instances, these deviceshave been provided only for use in vehicleswith seatbelt systems that would otherwiserequire a locking clip.6. Allow the belt to retract to remove

slack. The belt clicks as it retracts toindicate it is in the automatic lockingmode.

7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractorto make sure the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode. You shouldnot be able to pull more belt out. If theretractor did not lock, unbuckle the beltand repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E146525

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.Force the seat down with extra weight,for example, by pressing down orkneeling on the child restraint whilepulling down on the lap belt in order toforce slack from the belt. This isnecessary to remove the remainingslack that exists once you add the extraweight of the child to the child restraint.It also helps to achieve the propersnugness of the child restraint to yourvehicle. Sometimes, a slight leantoward the buckle will additionally helpto remove remaining slack from thebelt.

9. If the child restraint has a tether strap,attach it.

24


Child Safety

E142534

10. Before placing the child in the seat,forcibly move the seat forward andback to make sure the seat is securelyheld in place. To check this, grab theseat at the belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and forward andback. There should be no more than1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for properinstallation.

We recommend checking with a NHTSACertified Child Passenger SafetyTechnician to make certain the childrestraint is properly installed. In Canada,check with Transport Canada for referralto a Child Car Seat Clinic.

Using Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren (LATCH)

WARNING: Do not attach twochild safety restraints to the sameanchor. In a crash, one anchor may notbe strong enough to hold two childsafety restraint attachments and maybreak, causing serious injury or death.

WARNING: Depending on whereyou secure a child restraint, anddepending on the child restraint design,you may block access to certain seatbeltbuckle assemblies and LATCH loweranchors, rendering those featurespotentially unusable. To avoid risk ofinjury, make sure occupants only useseating positions where they are able tobe properly restrained.

The LATCH system has three vehicleanchor points: two lower anchors wherethe seat backrest and seat cushion meet(called the seat bight) and one top tetheranchor behind that seating position.LATCH compatible child restraints havetwo rigid or webbing mountedattachments that connect to the two loweranchors at the LATCH equipped seatingpositions in your vehicle. This type ofattachment method eliminates the needto use seatbelts to attach the childrestraint. However, you can still use theseatbelt to attach the child restraint. Forforward-facing child restraints, you mustalso attach the top tether strap to theproper top tether anchor if a top tetherstrap has been provided with your childrestraint.Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors forchild restraint installation at the seatingpositions marked with the child restraintsymbol.

25


Child Safety

Second Row Bucket Seats and ThirdRow Passenger Side

E190825

Second Row Bench Seats and ThirdRow Passenger Side

E190826

E144054

The LATCH anchors are at the rear sectionof the rear seat between the cushion andseat backrest below the symbols asshown. Follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions to properlyinstall a child restraint with LATCHattachments.Follow the instructions on attaching childrestraints with tether straps. See UsingTether Straps later in this chapter.

Attach LATCH lower attachments of thechild restraint only to the anchors shown.

Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from theOutermost Seating Positions (CenterSeating Use)

WARNING: The standardizedspacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in(280 mm) center to center. Do not useLATCH lower anchors for the centerseating position unless the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions permit andspecify using anchors spaced at least asfar apart as those in this vehicle.

The lower anchors at the center of thesecond row bench seat are spaced 20.5 in(52 cm) apart. The standardized spacingfor LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (28 cm)center to center. You cannot install a childrestraint with rigid LATCH attachments atthe center seating position. You can onlyuse LATCH compatible child restraints,with attachments on belt webbing, at thisseating position provided that the childrestraint manufacturer’s instructionspermit use with the anchor spacing stated.Do not attach a child restraint to any loweranchor if an adjacent child restraint isattached to that anchor.Each time you use the child restraint, checkthat you properly attach the seat to thelower anchors and tether anchor, ifapplicable. Tug the child restraint from sideto side and forward and back where it issecured to your vehicle. The seat shouldmove less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you dothis for a proper installation.If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being injured ina crash greatly increases.

26


Child Safety

Combining Seatbelt and LATCH LowerAnchors for Attaching Child RestraintsWhen used in combination, either theseatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors maybe attached first, provided a properinstallation is achieved. Attach the tetherstrap afterward, if included with the childrestraint.

Using Tether StrapsMany forward-facing childrestraints include a tether strapwhich extends from the back of

the child restraint and hooks to ananchoring point called the top tetheranchor. Tether straps are available as anaccessory for many older child restraints.

Contact the manufacturer of your childrestraint for information about ordering atether strap, or to obtain a longer tetherstrap if the tether strap on your childrestraint does not reach the appropriatetop tether anchor in your vehicle.Once you install the child restraint usingeither the seatbelt, the lower anchors ofthe LATCH system, or both, you can attachthe top tether strap.The tether strap anchors in your vehicleare in the following positions (shown fromtop view):Second Row Bucket Seats and ThirdRow Passenger Side

E190827

Second Row Bench Seats and ThirdRow Passenger Side

E190828

Perform the following steps to install achild restraint with tether anchors:Note: If you install a child restraint with rigidLATCH attachments, do not tighten thetether strap enough to lift the child restraintoff your vehicle seat cushion when the childis seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snugwithout lifting the front of the child restraint.Keeping the child restraint just touching yourvehicle seat gives the best protection in asevere crash.

E190829

27


Child Safety

Tether Strap Placement• For second row outermost seat

positions, route the child restrainttether strap over the seat backrest,under the head restraint and betweenthe head restraint posts. If needed,remove the head restraint to improvethe fit of the child restraint or tetherstrap.

• For the second row center seatposition, route the child restraint tetherstrap over the top of the head restraint.If needed, remove the head restraint toimprove the fit of the child restraint ortether strap. See Head Restraints(page 139).

• For the third row seat position, routethe child restraint tether strap over theseat backrest, under the head restraintand between the head restraint posts.If needed, fold the head restraint downto improve the fit of the child restraintor tether strap. See Head Restraints(page 139).

1. Route the tether strap.2. Locate the correct anchor for the

selected seating position.3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as

shown. The tether hook may betwisted ½ turn to improve installation.If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly,the child restraint may not be retainedproperly in the event of a crash.

E190833

4. Tighten the child restraint tether strapaccording to the manufacturer'sinstructions.

If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being injured ina crash greatly increases.If your child restraint system has a tetherstrap, and the child restraint manufacturerrecommends its use, we also recommendits use.Second Row Bucket Seats (40/40)

E190830

28


Child Safety

Second Row Bench Seats (60/40)

E190831

Third Row Seats

E190832

Note: The cargo tie downs at the rear edgeof the floor are not tether anchors.

BOOSTER SEATS

WARNING: Do not put theshoulder section of the seatbelt or allowthe child to put the shoulder section ofthe seatbelt under their arm or behindtheir back. Failure to follow thisinstruction could reduce theeffectiveness of the seatbelt andincrease the risk of injury or death in acrash.

Note: Some booster seat seatbelt guidesmay not accommodate the shoulder portionof the inflatable seatbelt.Use a belt-positioning booster seat forchildren who have outgrown or no longerproperly fit in a child safety seat (generallychildren who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)tall, are greater than age four (4) and lessthan age twelve (12), and between 40 lb(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by yourchild restraint manufacturer). Many stateand provincial laws require that childrenuse approved booster seats until theyreach age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m)tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).Booster seats should be used until you cananswer YES to ALL of these questionswhen seated without a booster seat:

29


Child Safety

E142595

• Can the child sit all the way backagainst their vehicle seat backrest withknees bent comfortably at the edge ofthe seat cushion?

• Can the child sit without slouching?• Does the lap belt rest low across the

hips?• Is the shoulder belt centered on the

shoulder and chest?• Can the child stay seated like this for

the whole trip?Always use booster seats in conjunctionwith your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.

Types of Booster Seats

E68924

• Backless booster seats

If your backless booster seat has aremovable shield, remove the shield. If avehicle seating position has a low seatbackrest or no head restraint, a backlessbooster seat may place your child's head(as measured at the tops of the ears)above the top of the seat. In this case,move the backless booster to anotherseating position with a higher seat backrestor head restraint and lap and shoulderbelts, or consider using a high back boosterseat.

E70710

• High back booster seatsIf, with a backless booster seat, you cannotfind a seating position that adequatelysupports your child's head, a high backbooster seat would be a better choice.Children and booster seats vary in size andshape. Choose a booster that keeps thelap belt low and snug across the hips,never up across the stomach, and lets youadjust the shoulder belt to cross the chestand rest snugly near the center of theshoulder. The following drawings comparethe ideal fit (center) to a shoulder beltuncomfortably close to the neck and ashoulder belt that could slip off theshoulder. The drawings also show how thelap belt should be low and snug across thechild's hips.

30


Child Safety

E142596

E142597

If the booster seat slides on the vehicleseat upon which it is being used, placing arubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpetliner under the booster seat may improvethis condition. Do not introduce any itemthicker than this under the booster seat.Check with the booster seatmanufacturer's instructions.

CHILD RESTRAINTPOSITIONING

WARNING: Do not place arearward facing child restraint in front ofan active airbag. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injuryor death.

WARNING: Properly securechildren 12 years old and under in a rearseating position whenever possible. Ifyou are unable to properly secure allchildren in a rear seating position,properly secure the largest child on thefront seat. If you must use a forwardfacing child restraint on the front seat,move the seat as far back as possible.Failure to follow these instructions couldresult in personal injury or death.

WARNING: Always carefullyfollow the instructions and warningsprovided by the manufacturer of anychild restraint to determine if therestraint device is appropriate for yourchild's size, height, weight, or age. Follow

31


Child Safety

the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions and warnings provided forinstallation and use in conjunction withthe instructions and warnings providedby your vehicle manufacturer. A safetyseat that is improperly installed orutilized, is inappropriate for your child'sheight, age, or weight or does notproperly fit the child may increase therisk of serious injury or death.

WARNING: Do not allow apassenger to hold a child on their lapwhen your vehicle is moving. Failure tofollow this instruction could result inpersonal injury or death in the event of asudden stop or crash.

WARNING: Do not use pillows,books or towels to boost your child'sheight. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in personal injury or death.

WARNING: Properly secure childrestraints or booster seats when they arenot in use. They could become projectilesin a sudden stop or crash. Failure tofollow this instruction could result inpersonal injury or death.

WARNING: Do not put theshoulder section of the seatbelt or allowthe child to put the shoulder section ofthe seatbelt under their arm or behindtheir back. Failure to follow thisinstruction could reduce theeffectiveness of the seatbelt andincrease the risk of injury or death in acrash.

WARNING: Do not leave childrenor pets unattended in your vehicle.Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in personal injury or death.

32


Child Safety

Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children

Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X

CombinedWeight ofChild and

ChildRestraint

RestraintType

SeatbeltOnly

Seatbeltand LATCH

(LowerAnchorsand TopTether

Anchor)

Seatbeltand TopTetherAnchor

LATCH(Lower

AnchorsOnly)

LATCH(Lower

Anchorsand TopTether

Anchor)

XXUp to 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Rear facingchild

restraint

XOver 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Rear facingchild

restraint

XXXUp to 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Forwardfacingchild

restraint

XXOver 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Forwardfacingchild

restraint

Note: The child restraint must rest tightlyagainst the vehicle seat upon which it isinstalled. It may be necessary to lift orremove the head restraint. See Seats (page139).

CHILD SAFETY LOCKSWhen these locks are set, the rear doorscannot be opened from the inside.

33


Child Safety

E112197

The childproof locks are located on therear edge of each rear door and must beset separately for each door.

Left-Hand SideTurn counterclockwise to lock andclockwise to unlock.

Right-Hand SideTurn clockwise to lock andcounterclockwise to unlock.

34


Child Safety

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNING: Always drive and ridewith your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.

WARNING: Children must alwaysbe properly restrained.

WARNING: Never let a passengerhold a child on his or her lap while thevehicle is moving. The passenger cannotprotect the child from injury in a crash.

WARNING: All occupants of yourvehicle, including the driver, shouldalways properly wear their seatbelts,even when an airbag supplementalrestraint system is provided. Failure toproperly wear your seatbelt couldseriously increase the risk of injury ordeath.

WARNING: It is extremelydangerous to ride in a cargo area, insideor outside of a vehicle. In a crash, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed. Do not allowpeople to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats andseatbelts. Make sure everyone in yourvehicle is in a seat and properly using aseatbelt. Failure to follow this warningcould result in serious personal injury ordeath.

WARNING: In a rollover crash, anunbelted person is significantly morelikely to die than a person wearing aseatbelt.

WARNING: Each seating positionin your vehicle has a specific seatbeltassembly made up of one buckle andone tongue designed to be used as a pair.Use the shoulder belt on the outsideshoulder only. Never wear the shoulderbelt under the arm. Never use a singleseatbelt for more than one person.

WARNING: Even with advancedrestraints systems, properly restrainchildren 12 and under in a rear seatingposition. Failure to follow this couldseriously increase the risk of injury ordeath.

WARNING: Seatbelts and seatsmay be hot in a vehicle that is in thesunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats mayburn a small child. Check seat covers andbuckles before you place a childanywhere near them.

All seating positions in your vehicle havelap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupantsof the vehicle should always properly weartheir seatbelts, even when an airbagsupplemental restraint system is provided.The seatbelt system consists of:• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic

locking mode, (except driver seatbeltand rear inflatable seatbelt).

• Height adjuster at the front outboardseating positions.

• Seatbelt pretensioner at the frontoutboard seating positions.

• Belt tension sensor at the frontoutboard passenger seating position.

E71880

• Seatbelt warning light and chime.

35


Seatbelts

E67017

• Crash sensors and monitoring systemwith readiness indicator.

The seatbelt pretensioners and rearinflatable seatbelts are designed toactivate in frontal, near-frontal and sidecrashes, and in rollovers. The seatbeltpretensioners at the front seating positionsare designed to tighten the seatbelts firmlyagainst the occupant’s body whenactivated. This helps increase theeffectiveness of the seatbelts. In frontalcrashes, the seatbelt pretensioners can beactivated alone or, if the crash is ofsufficient severity, together with the frontairbags.

FASTENING THE SEATBELTSStandard belts shown, inflatable beltssimilarThe front outboard and rear safetyrestraints in the vehicle are combinationlap and shoulder belts.

E142587

1. Insert the belt tongue into the properbuckle (the buckle closest to thedirection the tongue is coming from)until you hear a snap and feel it latch.Make sure you securely fasten thetongue in the buckle.

E142588

2. To unfasten, press the release buttonand remove the tongue from thebuckle.

Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy

WARNING: Always ride and drivewith your seatback upright and properlyfasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portionof the seatbelt snugly and low acrossthe hips. Position the shoulder portion ofthe seatbelt across your chest. Pregnantwomen must follow this practice. Seethe following figure.

E142590

36


Seatbelts

Pregnant women should always wear theirseatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of acombination lap and shoulder belt lowacross the hips below the belly and wornas tight as comfort allows. Position theshoulder belt to cross the middle of theshoulder and the center of the chest.

Seatbelt Locking Modes

WARNING: If your vehicle isinvolved in a crash, have the seatbeltsand associated components inspectedas soon as possible. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injuryor death.

All safety restraints in the vehicle arecombination lap and shoulder belts. Thedriver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitivelocking mode. The front outboardpassenger and rear seatbelts have boththe vehicle sensitive locking mode and theautomatic locking mode.

Vehicle Sensitive ModeThis is the normal retractor mode, whichallows free shoulder belt lengthadjustment to your movements andlocking in response to vehicle movement.For example, if the driver brakes suddenlyor turns a corner sharply, or the vehiclereceives an impact of about 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the combinationseatbelts lock to help reduce forwardmovement of the driver and passengers.In addition, the retractor is designed to lockif you pull the webbing out too quickly. Ifthe seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lowerthe height adjuster to allow the seatbeltto retract. If the retractor does not unlock,pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a

small length of webbing back toward thestowed position. For rear seatbelts, reclinethe rear seat backrest or push the seatbackrest cushion away from the seatbelt.Feed a small length of webbing backtoward the stowed position.

Automatic Locking ModeIn this mode, the shoulder beltautomatically pre-locks. The belt stillretracts to remove any slack in theshoulder belt. The automatic locking modeis not available on the driver seatbelt.

When to Use the Automatic LockingModeUse this mode when you install a childsafety seat, except a booster, in thepassenger front or rear seating positions.Properly restrain children 12 years old andunder in a rear seating position wheneverpossible. See Child Safety (page 18).

How to Use the Automatic LockingModeNon-Inflatable Seatbelts

E142591

1. Buckle the combination lap andshoulder belt.

37


Seatbelts

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pulldownward until you pull the entire beltout. As the belt retracts, you will heara clicking sound. This indicates theseatbelt is now in the automaticlocking mode.

Rear Outermost Inflatable Seatbelts(Second Row Only–If Equipped)

E146363

1. Buckle the combination lap andshoulder belt.

2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt andpull upward until you pull the entirebelt out.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the beltretracts, you will hear a clicking sound.This indicates the seatbelt is now in theautomatic locking mode.

How to Disengage the AutomaticLocking ModeUnbuckle the combination lap andshoulder belt and allow it to retractcompletely to disengage the automaticlocking mode and activate the vehiclesensitive (emergency) locking mode.

Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)

WARNING: Do not attempt toservice, repair, or modify thesupplementary restraint system orassociated components. Failure tofollow this instruction could result inpersonal injury or death.

The rear inflatable seatbelts are in theshoulder portion of the seatbelts of thesecond-row outermost seating positions.Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts arecompatible with most infant and childsafety car seats and belt positioning boosterseats when you properly install them. Thisis because they are designed to fill with acooled gas at a lower pressure and at aslower rate than traditional airbags. Afterinflation, the shoulder portion of theseatbelt remains cool to the touch.The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of thefollowing:• An inflatable bag in the shoulder

seatbelt webbing.• Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic

locking mode.• The same warning light, electronic

control and diagnostic unit as used forthe front seatbelts.

• Impact sensors in various parts of thevehicle.

How does the rear inflatable seatbeltsystem work?

WARNING: If a supplementaryrestraint system component hasdeployed, it will not function again. Havethe system and associated componentsinspected as soon as possible. Failure tofollow this instruction could result inpersonal injury or death.

38


Seatbelts

The rear inflatable seatbelts function likestandard restraints in everyday usage.

E146364

During a crash of sufficient force, theinflatable belt inflates from inside thewebbing.

E146365

The fully inflated seatbelt's increaseddiameter more effectively holds theoccupant in the appropriate seatingposition, and spreads crash forces overmore area of the body than regularseatbelts. This helps reduce pressure onthe chest and helps control head and neckmotion for passengers.

The rear inflatable seatbelts are designedto inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes,side impact crashes and rollovers. The factthat the rear inflatable seatbelt did notinflate in a crash does not mean thatsomething is wrong with the system.Rather, it means the forces were not of thetype sufficient to cause activation.

SEATBELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT

WARNING: Position the seatbeltheight adjuster so that the seatbelt restsacross the middle of your shoulder.Failure to adjust the seatbelt correctlycould reduce its effectiveness andincrease the risk of injury in a crash.

E201573

1. Adjust the height of the shoulder beltso the belt rests across the middle ofyour shoulder.

2. Slide the adjuster up to raise the belt.Press the button and slide it down tolower the belt.

39


Seatbelts

SEATBELT WARNING LAMPAND INDICATOR CHIME E71880

This lamp illuminates and anindicator chime will sound if thedriver seatbelt has not been

fastened when the vehicle's ignition isturned on.

Conditions of operation

ThenIf

The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates andthe indicator chime sounds for a few

seconds.

The driver seatbelt is not buckled beforethe ignition switch is turned to the on posi-

tion...

The seatbelt warning lamp and indicatorchime turn off.

The driver seatbelt is buckled while thewarning lamp is illuminated and the indic-

ator chime is sounding...

The seatbelt warning lamp and indicatorchime remain off.

The driver seatbelt is buckled before theignition switch is turned to the on position...

SEATBELT REMINDERBelt-Minder™This feature supplements the seatbeltwarning function by providing additionalreminders that intermittently sound a toneand illuminate the seatbelt warning lightwhen you are in the driver seat or you havea front seat passenger and a seatbelt isunbuckled.

The system uses information from thefront passenger sensing system todetermine if a front seat passenger ispresent and therefore potentially in needof a warning. To avoid the system turningon the Belt-Minder feature for objects youplace on the front passenger seat, only thefront seat passengers receive warnings asdetermined by the front passenger sensingsystem.If the Belt-Minder warnings expire(warnings for about five minutes) for onepassenger (driver or front passenger), theother passenger can still cause theBelt-Minder feature to turn on.

40


Seatbelts

ThenIf

The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckleyour seatbelts before you switch the igni-tion on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse afteryou switch the ignition on...

The Belt-Minder feature activates, theseatbelt warning light illuminates and awarning tone sounds for 6 seconds every25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutesor until you and the front seat passengerbuckle your seatbelts.

You or the front seat passenger do notbuckle your seatbelts before your vehiclereaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2minutes elapse after you switch the ignitionon...

The Belt-Minder feature activates, theseatbelt warning light illuminates and awarning tone sounds for 6 seconds every25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutesor until you and the front seat passengerbuckle your seatbelts.

The seatbelt for the driver or frontpassenger is unbuckled for about 1 minutewhile the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph(9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2 minuteselapse after you switch the ignition on...

Deactivating and Activating theBelt-Minder Feature

WARNING: While the systemallows you to switch it off, this system isdesigned to improve your chances ofbeing safely belted and surviving a crash.We recommend you leave the systemswitched on. To reduce the risk of injury,do not switch the system on or off whiledriving your vehicle.

Note: The driver and front passengerwarnings switch on and off independently.When you perform this procedure for oneseating position, do not buckle the otherposition as this will terminate the process.Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly beforeproceeding with the programmingprocedure.

Before following the procedure, make surethat:• The parking brake is set.• The transmission is in park (P).• The ignition is off.• The driver and front passenger

seatbelts are unbuckled.1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the

vehicle.2. Wait until the seatbelt warning light

turns off (about 1 minute). After Step2, wait an additional 5 seconds beforeproceeding with Step 3. Once you startStep 3, you must complete theprocedure within 20 seconds.

3. For the seating position you areswitching off, buckle then unbuckle theseatbelt four times at a moderatespeed, ending in the unbuckled state.After Step 3, the seatbelt warning lightturns on.

41


Seatbelts

4. While the seatbelt warning light is on,buckle and then unbuckle the seatbelt.After Step 4, the seatbelt warning lightflashes for confirmation.

• This will switch the feature off for thatseating position if it is currently on.

• This will switch the feature on for thatseating position if it is currently off.

CHILD RESTRAINT ANDSEATBELT MAINTENANCEInspect the vehicle seatbelts and childrestraint systems periodically to make surethey work properly and are not damaged.Inspect the vehicle seatbelts to make surethere are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace ifnecessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,including retractors, buckles, front seatbeltbuckle assemblies, buckle supportassemblies (slide bar-if equipped),shoulder belt height adjusters (ifequipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback(if equipped), rear inflatable seatbelts (ifequipped), child restraint LATCH andtether anchors, and attaching hardware,should be inspected after a crash. Readthe child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions for additional inspection andmaintenance information specific to thechild restraint.We recommend that all seatbeltassemblies in use in vehicles involved in acrash be replaced. However, if the crashwas minor and an authorized dealer findsthat the belts do not show damage andcontinue to operate properly, they do notneed to be replaced. Seatbelt assembliesnot in use during a crash should also beinspected and replaced if either damageor improper operation is noted.Properly care for seatbelts. See Cleaningthe Interior (page 309).

SEATBELT EXTENSION

WARNING: Persons who fit intothe vehicle's seatbelt should not use anextension. Unnecessary use could resultin serious personal injury in the event ofa crash.

WARNING: Only use extensionsprovided free of charge by Ford MotorCompany dealers. The dealer will providean extension designed specifically forthis vehicle, model year and seatingposition. The use of an extensionintended for another vehicle, model yearor seating position may not offer you thefull protection of your vehicle’s seatbeltrestraint system.

WARNING: Never use seatbeltextensions to install child restraints.

WARNING: Do not use a seatbeltextension with an inflatable seatbelt.

WARNING: Do not use extensionsto change the fit of the belt across thetorso, over the lap or to make theseatbelt buckle easier to reach.

If, because of body size or driving position,it is not possible to properly fasten theseatbelt over your lap and shoulder, anextension that is compatible with theseatbelts is available free of charge fromFord Motor Company dealers. Only Fordseatbelt extensions made by the originalequipment seatbelts manufacturer shouldbe used with Ford seatbelts. Ask yourauthorized dealer if your extension iscompatible with your Ford vehicle restraintsystem.

42


Seatbelts

This system provides an improved overalllevel of frontal crash protection to frontseat occupants and is designed to helpfurther reduce the risk of airbag-relatedinjuries. The system analyzes differentoccupant conditions and crash severitybefore activating the appropriate safetydevices to help better protect occupantsin a variety of frontal crash situations.Your vehicle's Personal Safety Systemconsists of:• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag

supplemental restraints.• Front seat outermost seatbelts with

pretensioners, energy managementretractors and seatbelt usage sensors.

• Driver seat position sensor.• Front passenger sensing system.• Passenger airbag off and on indicators.• Front crash severity sensors.• Restraints control module with impact

and safing sensors.• Restraint system warning light and

tone.• The electrical wiring for the airbags,

crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners,front seatbelt usage sensors, driverseat position sensor, front passengersensing system and indicator lights.

How Does the Personal SafetySystem Work?The Personal Safety System can adapt thedeployment strategy of the safety devicesaccording to crash severity and occupantconditions. A collection of crash andoccupant sensors provides information tothe restraints control module. During acrash, the restraints control module maydeploy the seatbelt pretensioners, one orboth stages of the dual-stage airbagsbased on crash severity and occupantconditions.

43


Personal Safety System™


WARNING: Airbags do not inflateslowly or gently, and the risk of injuryfrom a deploying airbag is the greatestclose to the trim covering the airbagmodule.



WARNING: Do not place your armson the airbag cover or through thesteering wheel. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injury.

WARNING: Keep the areas in frontof the airbags free from obstruction. Donot affix anything to or over the airbagcovers. Objects could become projectilesduring airbag deployment or in a suddenstop. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in personal injury or death.

WARNING: Airbags can kill orinjure a child in a child restraint. Neverplace a rear-facing child restraint in frontof an active airbag. If you must use aforward-facing child restraint in the frontseat, move the seat upon which the childrestraint is installed all the way back.


WARNING: Several airbag systemcomponents get hot after inflation. Toreduce the risk of injury, do not touchthem after inflation.


The airbags are a supplemental restraintsystem and are designed to work with theseatbelts to help protect the driver andright front passenger from certain upperbody injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;there is a risk of injury from a deployingairbag.Note: You will hear a loud bang and see acloud of harmless powdery residue if anairbag deploys. This is normal.The airbags inflate and deflate rapidlyupon activation. After airbag deployment,it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powderyresidue or smell the burnt propellant. Thismay consist of cornstarch, talcum powder(to lubricate the bag) or sodiumcompounds (for example, baking soda)that result from the combustion processthat inflates the airbag. Small amounts ofsodium hydroxide may be present whichmay irritate the skin and eyes, but none ofthe residue is toxic.

44


Supplementary Restraints System

While the system is designed to helpreduce serious injuries, contact with adeploying airbag may also cause abrasionsor swelling. Temporary hearing loss is alsoa possibility as a result of the noiseassociated with a deploying airbag.Because airbags must inflate rapidly andwith considerable force, there is the risk ofdeath or serious injuries such as fractures,facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,particularly to occupants who are notproperly restrained or are otherwise out ofposition at the time of airbag deployment.Thus, it is extremely important thatoccupants be properly restrained as faraway from the airbag module as possiblewhile maintaining vehicle control.Routine maintenance of the airbags is notrequired.

DRIVER AND PASSENGERAIRBAGS

WARNING: Do not place your armson the airbag cover or through thesteering wheel. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injury.

WARNING: Keep the areas in frontof the airbags free from obstruction. Donot affix anything to or over the airbagcovers. Objects could become projectilesduring airbag deployment or in a suddenstop. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in personal injury or death.


E151127

The driver and front passenger airbags willdeploy during significant frontal and nearfrontal crashes.The driver and passenger front airbagsystem consists of:• Driver and passenger airbag modules.• Front passenger sensing system.

E67017

· Crash sensors and monitoringsystem with readiness indicator.See Crash Sensors and Airbag

Indicator (page 51).

Proper Driver and Front PassengerSeating Adjustment

WARNING: National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)recommends a minimum distance of atleast 10 in (25 cm) between anoccupant's chest and the driver airbagmodule.

To properly position yourself away fromthe airbag:• Move your seat to the rear as far as you

can while still reaching the pedalscomfortably.

• Recline the seat slightly (one or twodegrees) from the upright position.

45



After all occupants have adjusted theirseats and put on seatbelts, it is veryimportant that they continue to sitproperly. A properly seated occupant sitsupright, leaning against the seatback, andcentered on the seat cushion, with theirfeet comfortably extended on the floor.Sitting improperly can increase the chanceof injury in a crash event. For example, ifan occupant slouches, lies down, turnssideways, sits forward, leans forward orsideways, or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash is greatlyincreased.

Children and Airbags


E142846

Children must always be properlyrestrained. Accident statistics suggest thatchildren are safer when properly restrainedin the rear seating positions than in thefront seating position. Failure to followthese instructions may increase the risk ofinjury in a crash.

FRONT PASSENGER SENSINGSYSTEM


WARNING: Sitting improperly, outof position or with the seatback reclinedtoo far can take weight off the seatcushion and affect the decision of thepassenger sensing system, resulting inserious injury or death in the event of acrash. Always sit upright against yourseat back, with your feet on the floor.

WARNING: Any alteration ormodification to the front passenger seatmay affect the performance of the frontpassenger sensing system. This couldseriously increase the risk of injury ordeath.

This system works with sensors that arepart of the front passenger seat andseatbelt to detect the presence of aproperly-seated occupant and determineif the front passenger frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

E181984

46



The front passenger sensing system usesa passenger airbag status indicator thatilluminates indicating that the frontpassenger frontal airbag is either on(enabled) or off (disabled).The indicators are in the center stack ofthe instrument panel.Note: The indicators illuminate briefly whenyou first switch the ignition on to confirmthey are functional.The front passenger sensing system isdesigned to disable (will not inflate) thefront passenger frontal airbag when thefront passenger seat is unoccupied, or arear facing infant seat, a forward-facingchild restraint, or a booster seat isdetected. Even with this technology,parents are strongly encouraged toalways properly restrain children in the rearseat.• When the front passenger sensing

system disables (will not inflate) thefront passenger frontal airbag, theairbag off indicator illuminates andstays lit to remind you that the frontpassenger frontal airbag is disabled.

• If you have installed the child restraintand the airbag on indicator illuminates,switch the vehicle off, remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe restraint according to the childrestraint manufacturer's instructions.

The front passenger sensing system isdesigned to enable (may inflate) the frontpassenger frontal airbag anytime thesystem senses that a person of adult sizeis sitting properly in the front passengerseat.• When the front passenger sensing

system enables the front passengerfrontal airbag (may inflate), the airbagon indicator illuminates and remainsilluminated.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the frontpassenger seat, but the airbag off indicatoris lit, it is possible that the person is notsitting properly in the seat. If this happens:• Switch the vehicle off and ask the

person to place the seat backrest inthe full upright position.

• Have the person sit upright in the seat,centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended.

• Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about twominutes. This allows the system todetect that person and enables thepassenger frontal airbag.

• If the airbag off indicator remains liteven after this, advise the person toride in the rear seat.

Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag StatusIndicator

Occupant

DisabledOFF: LitEmpty

ON: Unlit

DisabledOFF: LitChild

ON: Unlit

EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult

ON: Lit

47



After all occupants have adjusted theirseats and put on seatbelts, it is veryimportant that they continue to sitproperly. A properly seated occupant sitsupright, leaning against the seat backrest,and centered on the seat cushion, withtheir feet comfortably extended on thefloor. Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury in a crash event. Forexample, if an occupant slouches, liesdown, turns sideways, sits forward, leansforward or sideways, or puts one or bothfeet up, the chance of injury during a crashgreatly increases.

E67017

Make sure the front passengersensing system is operatingproperly. See Crash Sensors

and Airbag Indicator (page 51).

Do not attempt to repair or service thesystem. Take your vehicle immediately toan authorized dealer.If it is necessary to modify an advancedfront airbag system to accommodate aperson with disabilities, contact the FordCustomer Relationship Center. SeeGetting the Services You Need (page264).

SIDE AIRBAGS

WARNING: Do not place objectsor mount equipment on or near theairbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks(of the front seats), or in front seat areasthat may come into contact with adeploying airbag. Failure to follow theseinstructions may increase the risk ofpersonal injury in the event of a crash.

WARNING: Do not use accessoryseat covers. The use of accessory seatcovers may prevent the deployment ofthe side airbags and increase the risk ofinjury in an accident.

WARNING: Do not lean your headon the door. The side airbag could injureyou as it deploys from the side of theseatback.

WARNING: Do not attempt toservice, repair, or modify the airbag, itsfuses or the seat cover on a seatcontaining an airbag as you could beseriously injured or killed. Contact yourauthorized dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING: If the side airbag hasdeployed, the airbag will not functionagain. The side airbag system (includingthe seat) must be inspected and servicedby an authorized dealer. If the airbag isnot replaced, the unrepaired area willincrease the risk of injury in a crash.

The side airbags are located on theoutboard side of the seatbacks of the frontseats. In certain sideways crashes, theairbag on the side affected by the crashwill be inflated. The airbag was designedto inflate between the door panel andoccupant to further enhance the protectionprovided occupants in side impact crashes.

48



E152533

The system consists of the following:• A label or embossed side panel

indicating that side airbags are fittedto your vehicle.

• Side airbags located inside the driverand front passenger seatbacks.

• Front passenger sensing system.

E67017

• Crash sensors and monitoring systemwith readiness indicator. See CrashSensors and Airbag Indicator (page51).

Note: The passenger sensing system willdeactivate the passenger seat-mountedside airbag if it detects an empty passengerseat.The design and development of the sideairbag system included recommendedtesting procedures that were developedby a group of automotive safety expertsknown as the Side Airbag TechnicalWorking Group. These recommendedtesting procedures help reduce the risk ofinjuries related to the deployment of sideairbags.

PASSENGER KNEE AIRBAGThe knee airbag is located under theinstrument panel. During a crash, therestraints control module may activate thepassenger knee airbag based on crashseverity and occupant conditions. Undercertain crash and occupant conditions, thepassenger knee airbag may deploy but thepassenger front airbag may not activate.As with front and side airbags, it isimportant to be properly seated andrestrained to reduce the risk of death orserious injury.

SAFETY CANOPY™

WARNING: Do not place objectsor mount equipment on or near theheadliner at the siderail that may comeinto contact with a deploying curtainairbag. Failure to follow theseinstructions may increase the risk ofpersonal injury in the event of a crash.

WARNING: Do not lean your headon the door. The curtain airbag couldinjure you as it deploys from theheadliner.


49




WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,do not obstruct or place objects in thedeployment path of the airbag.


The Safety Canopy will deploy duringsignificant side crashes or when a certainlikelihood of a rollover event is detectedby the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopyis mounted to the roof side-rail sheetmetal, behind the headliner, above eachrow of seats. In certain sideways crashesor rollover events, the Safety Canopy willbe activated, regardless of which seats areoccupied. The Safety Canopy is designedto inflate between the side window areaand occupants to further enhanceprotection provided in side impact crashesand rollover events.

E75004

The system consists of the following:• Safety canopy curtain airbags above

the trim panels over the front and rearside windows identified by a label orwording on the headliner or roof-pillartrim.

• A flexible headliner which opens abovethe side doors to allow air curtaindeployment

E67017

· Crash sensors and monitoringsystem with readiness indicator.See Crash Sensors and Airbag

Indicator (page 51).

Always properly restrain children 12 yearsold and under in the rear seats. The SafetyCanopy will not interfere with childrenrestrained using a properly installed childor booster seat because it is designed toinflate downward from the headliner abovethe doors along the side window opening.The design and development of the SafetyCanopy included recommended testingprocedures that were developed by agroup of automotive safety experts knownas the Side Airbag Technical WorkingGroup. These recommended testingprocedures help reduce the risk of injuriesrelated to the deployment of side airbags(including the Safety Canopy).

50



CRASH SENSORS ANDAIRBAG INDICATOR

WARNING: Modifying or addingequipment to the front end of yourvehicle (including hood, bumper system,frame, front end body structure, towhooks and hood pins) may affect theperformance of the airbag system,increasing the risk of injury. Do notmodify or add equipment to the frontend of your vehicle.

Your vehicle has a collection of crash andoccupant sensors which provideinformation to the restraints controlmodule. The restraints control moduledeploys (activates) the front seatbeltpretensioners, rear inflatable seatbelts,driver airbag, passenger airbag, seatmounted side airbags, passenger kneeairbag and the Safety Canopy. Based onthe type of crash, the restraints controlmodule will deploy the appropriate safetydevices.The restraints control module alsomonitors the readiness of the above safetydevices plus the crash and occupantsensors. The readiness of the safetysystem is indicated by a warning indicatorlight in the instrument cluster or by abackup tone if the warning light is notworking. Routine maintenance of theairbag is not required.A difficulty with the system is indicated byone or more of the following:

E67017

The readiness light will notilluminate immediately after youswitch the ignition on.

• The readiness light either flashes orstays lit.

• A series of five beeps will be heard. Thetone pattern will repeat periodicallyuntil the problem, the light or both arerepaired.

If any of these things happen, evenintermittently, have the supplementalrestraint system serviced at an authorizeddealer immediately. Unless serviced, thesystem may not function properly in theevent of a crash.The seatbelt pretensioners and the frontairbag supplemental restraint system aredesigned to activate when the vehiclesustains frontal deceleration sufficient tocause the restraints control module todeploy a safety device.The fact that the seatbelt pretensionersor front airbags did not activate for bothfront seat occupants in a crash does notmean that something is wrong with thesystem. Rather, it means the restraintscontrol module determined the accidentconditions (crash severity, belt usage)were not appropriate to activate thesesafety devices.• The design of the front airbags is to

activate only in frontal and near-frontalcrashes (not rollovers, side impacts orrear impacts) unless the crash causessufficient frontal deceleration.

• The design of the seatbeltpretensioners is to activate in frontal,near-frontal and side crashes and inrollovers.

• The design of the side airbags is toinflate in certain side impact crashes.Side airbags may activate in othertypes of crashes if the vehicleexperiences sufficient sideways motionor deformation.

51



• The knee airbag(s) may deploy basedon crash severity and occupantconditions.

• The design of the Safety Canopy is toinflate in certain side impact crashesor rollover events. The Safety Canopymay activate in other types of crashesif the vehicle experiences sufficientsideways motion or deformation, or acertain likelihood of rollover.

AIRBAG DISPOSALContact your authorized dealer as soon aspossible. Airbags must be disposed of byqualified personnel.

52



GENERAL INFORMATION ONRADIO FREQUENCIESThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with Industry Canadalicense-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) This devicemust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation.Note: Changes or modifications notexpressively approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.The term IC before the radio certificationnumber only signifies that Industry Canadatechnical specifications were met.The typical operating range for yourtransmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).Vehicles with the remote start feature willhave a greater range.One of the following could cause adecrease in operating range:• Weather conditions.• Nearby radio towers.• Structures around the vehicle.• Other vehicles parked next to your

vehicle.The radio frequency used by your remotecontrol can also be used by other radiotransmitters, for example amateur radios,medical equipment, wireless headphones,wireless remote controls, cell phones,battery chargers and alarm systems. If thefrequencies are jammed, you will not beable to use your remote control. You canlock and unlock the doors with the key.Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle beforeleaving it unattended.

Note: If you are in range, the remote controlwill operate if you press any buttonunintentionally.Note: The remote control contains sensitiveelectrical components. Exposure to moistureor impact may cause permanent damage.

Intelligent Access (If Equipped)

The system uses a radio frequency signalto communicate with your vehicle andauthorize your vehicle to unlock when oneof the following conditions are met:• You activate the front exterior door

handle switch.• You press the luggage compartment

button.• You press a button on the transmitter.If excessive radio frequency interferenceis present in the area or if the transmitterbattery is low, you may need tomechanically unlock your door. You canuse the mechanical key blade in yourintelligent access key to open the driverdoor in this situation. See RemoteControl (page 53).

REMOTE CONTROLIntegrated Keyhead Transmitter (If

Equipped)

Use the key blade to start your vehicle andunlock or lock the driver door from outsideyour vehicle. The integrated keyheadtransmitter functions as a programmedignition key that operates all the locks andstarts your vehicle, as well as a remotecontrol.

53


Keys and Remote Controls

E191532

Press the button to release the key blade.Press and hold the button to fold the keyblade back in when not in use.

E151795

Note: Your vehicle keys came with asecurity label that provides important keycut information. Keep the label in a safeplace for future reference.

Intelligent Access KeyNote: You may not be able to shift out ofpark (P) unless the intelligent access key isinside your vehicle.

E253517

Your remote control operates the powerlocks and the remote start system. Thekey must be in your vehicle to use the pushbutton start.

Removable Key BladeYour remote control also contains aremovable key blade that you can use tounlock your vehicle.

54



E254065

Press the release button and pull the keyblade out.

E151795

Note: Your vehicle keys came with asecurity label that provides important keycut information. Keep the label in a safeplace for future reference.

Replacing the BatteryNote: Refer to local regulations whendisposing of transmitter batteries.Note: Do not wipe off any grease on thebattery terminals or on the back surface ofthe circuit board.Note: Replacing the battery does not erasethe programmed key from your vehicle. Yourremote control should operate normally.

A message appears in the informationdisplay when the remote control batteryis low. See Information Messages (page115).

Integrated Keyhead TransmitterThe remote control uses one coin-typethree-volt lithium battery.Press the button to release the key bladebefore beginning the procedure.

E191533

1. Insert a suitable tool, for example ascrewdriver, in the position shown andgently push the clip.

2. Press the clip down to release thebattery cover.

E151799

3. Carefully remove the cover.

55



E151800

Note: Do not touch the battery contacts orthe printed circuit board with thescrewdriver.4. Insert the screwdriver as shown to

release the battery.

E151801

5. Remove the battery.6. Install a new battery with the + facing

upward.7. Reinstall the battery cover.

Intelligent Access KeyThe remote control uses one coin-typethree-volt lithium battery.

E254065

1. Push the release button and pull thekey blade out.

56



E218401

2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hiddenbehind the key blade head to removethe battery cover.

E218402

3. Insert a suitable tool, for example ascrewdriver, in the position shown andcarefully remove the battery.

4. Install a new battery with the + facingupward.

5. Reinstall the battery housing coveronto the transmitter and install the keyblade.

Memory Feature (If Equipped)

You can use the remote control to recallmemory positions.If programmed to a pre-set position, theremote control recalls memory positionswhen you unlock your vehicle. If you havethe easy entry and exit feature enabledand the ignition is off, the seat moves tothe easy entry position. The seat movesto the driver memory position when youswitch the ignition on.

Linking a Preset Position to YourRemote Control or Intelligent AccessKeySee Memory Function (page 146).

57



Car Finder

E138623

Press the button twice withinthree seconds. The horn soundsand the direction indicators

flash. We recommend you use this methodto locate your vehicle, rather than usingthe panic alarm.

Sounding the Panic AlarmNote: The panic alarm only operates whenthe ignition is off.

E138624

Press the button to sound thepanic alarm. Press the buttonagain or switch the ignition on to

turn it off.

Remote Start (If Equipped)

WARNING: To avoid exhaustfumes, do not use remote start if yourvehicle is parked indoors or in areas thatare not well ventilated.

Note: Do not use remote start if your fuellevel is low.

E138625

The remote start button is on theremote control.

This feature allows you to start yourvehicle from the outside. Your remotecontrol has an extended operating range.If your vehicle has automatic climatecontrol, you can configure it to operatewhen you remote start your vehicle. SeeClimate Control (page 129). A manualclimate control system runs at the settingit was set to when you switched yourvehicle off.

Many states and provinces haverestrictions for the use of remote start.Check your local and state or provinciallaws for specific requirements regardingremote start systems.The system does not work if:• The ignition is on.• The anti-theft alarm triggers.• You disable the feature.• The hood is open.• The transmission is not in park (P).• The battery voltage is below the

minimum operating voltage.• The service engine soon light is on.

Remote Control Feedback (IfEquipped)An LED on the remote control providesstatus feedback of remote start or stopcommands.

StatusLED

Remote startsuccessful

Solid green

Remote stopsuccessful

Solid red

Request failed orstatus not received

Blinking red

Status incompleteBlinking green

Remote Starting Your VehicleNote: You must press each button withinthree seconds of each other. If you do notfollow this sequence, your vehicle does notstart remotely, the direction indicators donot flash twice and the horn does not sound.

58



E138626

To remote start your vehicle:1. Press the lock button to lock all the

doors.2. Press the remote start button twice.

The exterior lamps flash twice.The horn sounds if the system fails to start,unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runsthe blower fan at a slower speed to reducenoise. You can switch it on or off in theinformation display.Note: If you have remote started yourvehicle with an integrated keyheadtransmitter, you must switch on the ignitionbefore driving your vehicle. With anintelligent access transmitter, you mustpress the brake pedal before driving yourvehicle.The power windows do not work duringremote start and the radio does not turnon automatically.The parking lamps remain on and yourvehicle will run for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,depending on the setting.

Extending the Engine Running TimeRepeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle stillrunning to extend the run time for anotherremote start period. If you have theduration set to 15 minutes, the durationextends by another 15 minutes. Forexample, if the vehicle has run from thefirst remote start for five minutes, thevehicle continues to run now for a total of30 minutes. You can extend the remotestart up to a maximum of 35 minutes.

Wait at least five seconds before remotestarting after the engine stops running.

Turning Your Vehicle Off After RemoteStarting

E138625

Press the button once. Yourvehicle and the parking lampsturn off.

You may have to be closer to your vehiclethan when starting due to ground reflectionand the added noise of your runningvehicle.You can switch this feature on or off in theinformation display.

REPLACING A LOST KEY ORREMOTE CONTROLReplacement keys or remote controls canbe purchased from an authorized dealer.Authorized dealers can program remotecontrols for your vehicle. See PassiveAnti-Theft System (page 75).

59



PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONMyKey allows you to program keys withrestricted driving modes to promote gooddriving habits. You can program therestrictions to all keys except one. Any keysthat you did not program are administratorkeys or admin keys.You can use admin keys to:• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle

restrictions.• Program certain MyKey settings.• Clear all MyKey restrictions.After you program a MyKey, you can viewthe following information through theinformation display:• The total number of admin keys and

MyKeys for your vehicle.• The total distance a MyKey driver

traveled with your vehicle.Note: Every MyKey receives the samerestrictions and settings. You cannotprogram them individually.Note: For vehicles equipped with apush-button start switch: When both aMyKey and an admin key are present whenyou start your vehicle, the system recognizesthe admin key only.

Standard SettingsNot every vehicle includes the featureslisted below. If your vehicle has thisequipment, then you cannot change thefollowing settings when using a MyKey:• Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™.

MyKey mutes the audio system untildrivers, and in some instances,passengers, fasten their seatbelts.Note: If your vehicle includes anAM/FM radio or a very basic audiosystem, then the radio may not mute.

• Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuelwarning activates earlier for MyKeydrivers, giving them more time to refuel.

• Certain driver alerts, stability systemsor parking aids turn on automaticallywhen you use the MyKey system. Forexample, Blind Spot InformationSystem (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lanedeparture warning or forward collisionwarning. Note: MyKey drivers may beable to turn the lane departure warningfeature off, but this feature turns backon automatically with every new keycycle.

• Restricted touchscreen operation insome markets. For example, MyKeymay prevent manual navigationdestination input while the vehicle is inany gear other than park (P) or whenthe vehicle reaches a certain rate ofspeed.

• Satellite radio adult contentrestrictions, if this feature is availablein your market.

Optional SettingsYou can configure certain vehicle featuresettings when you first create a MyKey. Youcan also change the settings afterwardwith an admin key.

60


MyKey™

Note: Not every feature applies to everyvehicle in every market. When they areavailable for your vehicle, then they appearin your information display, providingchoices to switch them on or off, or to selecta more specific setting.• Various vehicle speed limits so the

MyKey driver cannot exceed certainspeeds. The information display showswarnings followed by an audible tonewhen the MyKey driver reaches the setspeed. You cannot override the setspeed by fully depressing theaccelerator pedal.

WARNING: Do not set MyKeymaximum speed limit to a limit that willprevent the driver from maintaining asafe speed considering posted speedlimits and prevailing road conditions. Thedriver is always responsible to drive inaccordance with local laws andprevailing conditions. Failure to do socould result in accident or injury.

• Various vehicle speed reminders soMyKey drivers know when their vehiclespeed approaches the limits. Warningsappear in your information display anda tone sounds when the MyKey driversexceed the set vehicle speed.

• The audio system's maximum volumelimits to 45% so MyKey drivers canconcentrate on the road. A messageappears in the information displaywhen MyKey drivers attempt to exceedthe limited volume. MyKey alsodisables the automatic volume control.Note: If your vehicle includes anAM/FM radio or a very basic audiosystem, then the radio may not limit.

• Always on setting. This setting forcescertain features to remain on andactive for MyKey drivers. For example,E911 or emergency assistance and thedo not disturb features stay on even ifa MyKey driver uses the feature'scontrol to switch it off. When youselect, you will not be able to turn offAdvance Trac or traction control (ifyour vehicle has this feature).

CREATING A MYKEYUse the information display to create aMyKey:1. Insert the key you want to program into

the ignition. See Starting a GasolineEngine (page 167). If your vehicle isequipped with a push-button start,place the remote control into thebackup slot. See Passive Anti-TheftSystem (page 75).

2. Switch the ignition on.

61


MyKey™

3. Access the main menu in theinformation display and then scrollthrough the menus to change thesettings of your MyKey. From theMyKey menu select the option CreateMyKey. See Information Displays(page 104).

4. When prompted, hold the OK buttonuntil you see a message informing youto label this key as a MyKey. Theprogrammed restrictions apply whenyou key off, open and close the driverdoor and restart your vehicle with theprogrammed key or transmitter.

MyKey is successfully created. Make sureyou label it so you can distinguish it fromthe admin keys.You can also program configurablesettings for the key(s). See Programmingand Changing Configurable Settings.

Programming and ChangingConfigurable SettingsUse the information display to access yourconfigurable MyKey settings.1. Switch the ignition on using an admin

key or transmitter you want to program.2. Access the main menu in the

information display and then scrollthrough the menus to change thesettings of your MyKey. SeeInformation Displays (page 104).

3. Follow the instructions in the display.Note: You can clear or change your MyKeysettings at any time during the same keycycle as you created the MyKey. Once youhave switched the vehicle off, however, youwill need an admin key to change or clearyour MyKey settings.

CLEARING ALL MYKEYSWhen you clear your MyKeys, you removeall restrictions and return all MyKeys totheir original admin key status at once. Toclear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, usethe information display.1. Switch the ignition on using an admin

key.2. Access the main menu in the

information display and then scrollthrough the menus to begin clearingyour MyKey programming. SeeInformation Displays (page 104).

3. Follow the instructions in the display.4. A confirmation message appears in the

display after you finish clearing yourMyKeys.

Note: When you clear your MyKeys, youremove all restrictions and return all MyKeysto their original admin key status. Youcannot remove the MyKey restrictionsindividually.

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEMSTATUSYou can find information about yourprogrammed MyKeys by using theinformation display. See InformationDisplays (page 104).

MyKey DistanceTracks the distance when drivers use aMyKey. The only way to delete theaccumulated distance is by using an adminkey to clear all MyKeys. If the distance doesnot accumulate as expected, then theintended user is not using the MyKey, or anadmin key user recently cleared and thenrecreated a MyKey.

62


MyKey™

Number of MyKeysIndicates the number of MyKeysprogrammed to your vehicle. Use thisfeature to detect how many MyKeys youhave for your vehicle and determine whenall MyKeys have been deleted.

Number of Admin KeysIndicates how many admin keys areprogrammed to your vehicle. Use thisfeature to determine how many adminkeys you have for your vehicle, and detectif an additional MyKey has beenprogrammed.

USING MYKEY WITH REMOTESTART SYSTEMSMyKey is not compatible with nonFord-approved, aftermarket remote startsystems. If you choose to install a remotestart system, see an authorized dealer fora Ford-approved remote start system.

MYKEY – TROUBLESHOOTING

Potential causesCondition

· The key or transmitter used to start thevehicle does not have admin privileges.

I cannot create a MyKey.

· Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure youplace the transmitter into the backup slot.See Passive Anti-Theft System (page75).· The key or transmitter used to start thevehicle is the only admin key. There alwayshas to be at least one admin key.· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system isdisabled or in unlimited mode.


I cannot program the configurable settings.

· There are no MyKeys programmed to thevehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 61).


I cannot clear the MyKeys.

· No MyKeys are created. See Creating aMyKey (page 61).

63


MyKey™

Potential causesCondition

· Purchase a new key or transmitter fromyour authorized dealer.

I lost the only admin key.

· Program a spare key or transmitter. Youmay need to see your authorized dealer.See Passive Anti-Theft System (page75).

I lost a key.

· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.MyKey distances do not accumulate.· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeysand created new MyKeys.· The key system has been reset.

64


MyKey™

LOCKING AND UNLOCKINGYou can use the power door lock controlor the remote control to lock and unlockyour vehicle.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock control is on the driverand front passenger door panels.

E138628

Unlock.ALock.B

Remote ControlYou can use the remote control at anytime.

Unlocking the Doors

E138629

Press the button to unlock thedriver door.Press the button again within

three seconds to unlock all doors. Thedirection indicators will flash.

Press and hold both the lock and unlockbuttons on the remote control for threeseconds to change between driver door orall doors unlock mode. The directionindicators will flash twice to indicate achange to the unlocking mode. Driver doormode only unlocks the driver door when

you press the unlock button once. All doormode unlocks all doors when you pressthe unlock button once. The unlockingmode applies to the remote control,keyless entry keypad and intelligentaccess.

Locking the Doors

E138623

Press the button to lock alldoors. The direction indicatorswill flash.

Press the button again within threeseconds to confirm that all the doors areclosed. The doors will lock again, the hornwill sound and the direction indicators willflash if all the doors and the liftgate areclosed.Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, orif the hood is open on vehicles with ananti-theft alarm or remote start, the hornsounds twice and the direction indicatorsdo not flash.

Locking and Unlocking the Doorswith the Key BladeLocking with the KeyTurn the top of the key toward the front ofyour vehicle.

Unlocking with the KeyTurn the top of the key toward the rear ofyour vehicle.Note: If the child safety locks are on andyou pull the interior handle, you will onlyturn off the emergency locking, not the childsafety lock. You can only open the doorsusing the external door handle.

65


Doors and Locks

Activating Intelligent Access (If

Equipped)

You can unlock and lock the vehiclewithout taking the keys out of your pocketor purse when your intelligent access keyis within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.Intelligent access uses a sensor on theback of the door handle for unlocking anda separate sensor on the face of each doorhandle for locking.The system does not function if:• Your vehicle battery has no charge.• The key battery has no charge.• The key frequencies are jammed.Note: The system may not function if thekey is close to metal objects or electronicdevices, for example keys or a cell phone.Note: If the system does not function, usethe key blade to lock and unlock yourvehicle. See Remote Control (page 53).

Unlocking Using Intelligent Access

E248555

With your intelligent access key within 3 ft(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlocksensor on the back of the door handle fora brief period and then pull on the doorhandle to unlock, being careful to nottouch the lock sensor at the same time orpulling the door handle too quickly. Theintelligent access system requires a briefdelay to authenticate your intelligentaccess key fob.

Locking Using Intelligent Access

E248556

With your intelligent access key within 3 ft(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer doorhandle lock sensor for approximately onesecond to lock, being careful to not touchthe unlock sensor on the back of the doorhandle at the same time. After locking, youcan immediately pull on the door handleto confirm locking occurred withoutinadvertently unlocking.

Opening the LiftgatePress the exterior liftgate release buttonon the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.See Manual Liftgate (page 70).

Smart Unlocks for IntegratedKeyhead Transmitter (If Equipped)

This helps to prevent you from lockingyourself out of your vehicle if the key is stillin the ignition.When you open one of the front doors andlock your vehicle with the power door lockcontrol, all the doors will lock then unlockand the horn will sound twice if the key isstill in the ignition.You can still lock your vehicle with the keyin the ignition by either:• Using the keyless entry keypad with the

driver door closed.• Pressing the lock button on the remote

control even if the doors are not closed.If both front doors are closed, you can lockyour vehicle by any method, regardless ofwhether the key is in the ignition or not.

66


Doors and Locks

Smart Unlocks for IntelligentAccess Keys (If Equipped)

This helps to prevent you from locking yourkey inside the passenger compartment orrear cargo area.When you electronically lock your vehiclewith any door open, transmission in park(P) and the ignition off, the system willsearch for an intelligent access key in thepassenger compartment after you closethe last door. If the system finds a key, allof the doors will immediately unlock andthe horn sounds twice, indicating that akey is inside.You can override the smart unlock featureand intentionally lock the intelligent accesskey inside your vehicle.To override smart unlock, lock your vehicleafter you have closed all doors by:• Using the keyless entry keypad.• Pressing the lock button on another

intelligent access key.• Touching the locking area on the front

of the door handle with anotherintelligent access key in your hand.

When you open one of the front doors andlock your vehicle using the power door lockcontrol, all doors lock then unlock if:• The ignition is on.• The ignition is off and the transmission

is not in park (P).

Autolock (If Equipped)

Autolock locks all the doors when:• All doors are closed.• The ignition is on.• You shift into any gear putting your

vehicle in motion.• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater

than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Autolock repeats when:• You open then close any door while the

ignition is on and your vehicle speed is9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.

• Your vehicle reaches a speed greaterthan 12 mph (20 km/h).

AutounlockAutounlock unlocks all the doors when:• The ignition is on, all the doors are

closed, and your vehicle has beenmoving at a speed greater than 12 mph(20 km/h).

• Your vehicle comes to a stop and youswitch the ignition off or to theaccessory position.

• You open the driver door within 10minutes of switching the ignition off orto accessory.

Note: The doors do not autounlock if youelectronically lock your vehicle after youswitch the ignition off and before you openthe driver door.

Enabling or Disabling AutounlockYou can enable or disable the autounlockfeature in the information display or anauthorized dealer can do it for you. SeeGeneral Information (page 104).

Illuminated EntryThe interior lamps and some exteriorlamps illuminate when you unlock thedoors with the remote control.The lamps turn off if:• The ignition is on.• You press the remote control lock

button.• 25 seconds have elapsed.

67


Doors and Locks

The lamps do not turn off if:• You switch them on with the lighting

control.• Any door is open.

Illuminated ExitThe interior lamps and some exteriorlamps illuminate when all doors are closedand you switch the ignition off.The lamps turn off if all the doors remainclosed and:• 25 seconds have elapsed.• You lock your vehicle from the outside.

Battery SaverIf you leave the courtesy lamps, interiorlamps or headlamps on, the battery savershuts them off 10 minutes after you switchthe ignition off.

Battery Saver for Intelligent AccessKeys (If Equipped)If you leave the ignition switched on andthe engine is not running, the battery saverwill turn the ignition off when it detects acertain amount of battery drain, or after45 minutes have elapsed.

KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

SECURICODE™ Keyless EntryKeypadThe keypad is near the driver window. Itilluminates when touched.Note: If you enter your entry code too faston the keypad, the unlock function may notwork. Enter your entry code again moreslowly.

E138637

You can use the keypad to do thefollowing:• Lock or unlock the doors.• Program and erase user codes.• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.You can operate the keypad with thefactory-set five-digit entry code. The codeis on the owner's wallet card in the glovebox and is available from an authorizeddealer. You can also program up to five ofyour own five-digit personal entry codes.

Programming a Personal Entry Code1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five

seconds.3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You

must enter each number within fiveseconds of each other.

4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to savepersonal code 1.

The doors lock then unlock to confirm thatprogramming was successful.

68


Doors and Locks

To program additional personal entrycodes, repeat steps 1 through 3, then forstep 4:• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.Hints:• Do not set a code that uses five of the

same number.• Do not use five numbers in sequential

order.• The factory-set code works even if you

have set your own personal code.

Erasing a Personal Code1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad

within five seconds.3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.

You must do this within five secondsof completing step 2.

All personal codes erase and only thefactory-set five-digit code works.

Anti-Scan FeatureThe keypad goes into an anti-scan modeif you enter the wrong code seven times.This mode turns off the keypad for oneminute and the keypad lamp flashes.The anti-scan feature turns off after anyof the following occur:• One minute of keypad inactivity.• You press the unlock button on the

remote control.• You switch your vehicle on.• You unlock the vehicle using intelligent

access.

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Locking All DoorsPress and hold 7·8 and 9·0 on the keypadsimultaneously with the driver door closed.You do not need to enter a code first.

Unlocking All DoorsEnter the factory-set code or your personalcode, then press 3·4 on the keypad withinfive seconds.

Unlocking Only the Driver DoorEnter the factory-set or your personalfive-digit code. You must press eachnumber within five seconds of each other.The interior lamps illuminate.Note: All doors unlock if the two-stageunlocking feature is turned off. See Lockingand Unlocking (page 65).

69


Doors and Locks

MANUAL LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED)


WARNING: Make sure to close andlatch the liftgate to prevent drawingexhaust fumes into your vehicle. This willalso prevent passengers and cargo fromfalling out. If you must drive with theliftgate open, keep the vents or windowsopen so outside air comes into yourvehicle. Failure to follow this warningcould result in serious personal injury.

Note: Be careful when opening or closingthe liftgate in a garage or other enclosedarea to avoid damaging the liftgate.Note: Do not hang anything, for example abike rack, from the glass or liftgate. Thiscould damage the liftgate and itscomponents.Note: Do not leave the liftgate open whiledriving. This could damage the liftgate andits components.

Opening the LiftgateManually

E138632

Press the button located in the top of theliftgate pull cup handle to unlatch theliftgate, and then pull on the outsidehandle.

With the Remote Control

E138630

Press the button twice withinthree seconds.

Closing the Liftgate

E155976

A handle is located inside the liftgate tohelp with closing.

70


Liftgate

POWER LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED)


WARNING: Make sure that youfully close the liftgate to prevent exhaustfumes from entering your vehicle. If youare unable to fully close the liftgate,open the air vents or the windows toallow fresh air to enter your vehicle.Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in personal injury or death.

WARNING: Keep keys out of reachof children. Do not allow children tooperate or play near an open or movingpower liftgate. You should supervise theoperation of the power liftgate at alltimes.

Note: Make sure that you close the liftgatebefore operating or moving your vehicle,especially in an enclosure, like a garage ora parking structure. This could damage theliftgate and its components.Note: Do not hang anything, for examplea bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. Thiscould damage the liftgate and itscomponents.The liftgate only operates with thetransmission in park (P).

If there is a problem with the open or closerequest, a tone sounds for one of thefollowing reasons:• The ignition is on and the transmission

is not in park (P).• The battery voltage is below the

minimum operating voltage.• The liftgate is not fully closed and your

vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph(5 km/h).

If the liftgate starts to close after it hasfully opened, this indicates there may beexcessive weight on the liftgate or apossible strut failure. A repetitive tonesounds and the liftgate closes undercontrol. Remove any excessive weightfrom the liftgate. If the liftgate continuesto close after opening, have the systemchecked by an authorized dealer.

Opening and Closing the Liftgate

WARNING: Make sure all personsare clear of the power liftgate areabefore using the power liftgate control.

Note: Make sure the area behind yourvehicle is free from obstruction and thatthere is enough room for you to operate theliftgate. Objects too close to your vehicle,for example a wall, garage door or anothervehicle may come into contact with themoving liftgate. This could damage theliftgate and its components.Note: Be careful when opening or closingthe liftgate in a garage or other enclosedarea to avoid damaging the liftgate.Note: Do not leave the liftgate open whenyou are driving. This could damage theliftgate and its components.

71


Liftgate

From the Instrument Panel

E138633

With the transmission in park(P), press the button on theinstrument panel.

With the Remote Control

E138630

Press the button twice withinthree seconds.

With the Outside Control Button

Opening the Liftgate1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote

control or power door unlock control.If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlockswhen you press the liftgate releasebutton.

E138632

2. Press the control button located in thetop of the liftgate pull-cup handle.

Note: Allow the power system to open theliftgate. Manually pushing or pulling theliftgate may activate the system’s obstacledetection feature and stop the poweroperation or reverse its direction, replicatea strut failure, or damage mechanicalcomponents.

Closing the Liftgate

WARNING: Keep clear of theliftgate when using the rear switch.

E138636

Press and release the liftgate button.

Stopping the Liftgate MovementNote: Do not apply sudden excessive forceto the liftgate while it is in motion. Thiscould damage the power liftgate and itscomponents.You can stop the liftgate movement bydoing any of the following:• Pressing the liftgate control button.• Pressing the liftgate button on the

remote control twice.• Pressing the liftgate button on the

instrument panel.• Moving your foot under and away from

the center rear bumper in a single-kickmotion.*

*This method only works for vehicles withthe hands-free liftgate feature.

Setting the Liftgate Open Height1. Open the liftgate.

72


Liftgate

2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressingthe control button on the liftgate whenit reaches the desired height.

Note: Once the liftgate has stoppedmoving, you can also manually move it tothe desired height.3. Press and hold the liftgate control

button on the liftgate until you hear atone, indicating programming iscomplete.

Note: You can only use the liftgate controlbutton to program the height.Note: You cannot program the height if theliftgate position is too low.The new open liftgate height is recalledwhen the power liftgate is opened. Tochange the programmed height, repeat theabove procedure. Once you open thepower liftgate, you can manually move itto a different height.Note: The system recalls the newprogrammed height until you reprogram it,even if you disconnect the battery.When operating the power liftgate afteryou have programmed a lower height thanfully open, you can fully open the liftgateby manually pushing it upward to themaximum open position.

Obstacle DetectionWhen ClosingThe system stops when it detects anobstacle. A tone sounds and the systemreverses to open. Once you remove theobstacle, you can power close the liftgate.

Note: Entering your vehicle while theliftgate is closing can cause your vehicle tobounce and activate obstacle detection. Toprevent this, let the power liftgate closecompletely before you enter your vehicle.Before driving off, check the instrumentcluster for a liftgate or door ajar message orwarning indicator. Failure to do this couldresult in unintentionally leaving the liftgateopen while driving.

When OpeningThe system stops when it detects anobstacle and a tone sounds. Once youremove the obstacle, you can continue tooperate the liftgate.

Hands-Free Feature (If Equipped)

Make sure you have a passive key within3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.1. Stand behind your vehicle, and face the

liftgate.2. Move your foot, in a single-kick motion,

without pausing, under and away fromthe rear bumper detection area.

3. The liftgate opens or closes.Vehicles Without a Trailer Hitch

E253664

The detection area is in the center of therear bumper.

73


Liftgate

Vehicles With a Trailer Hitch

E253799

The detection area is on the left-hand sideand right-hand side of the hitch, betweenthe exhaust and the hitch.Avoid the following actions when using thehands-free opening feature:• Making physical contact with the

bumper.• Holding your foot under the bumper.• Sweeping your foot from side to side,

or kicking at an odd angle.Note: Allow the power system to open theliftgate. Manually pushing or pulling theliftgate may activate the system’s obstacledetection feature and stop the poweroperation or reverse its direction, replicatea strut failure, or damage mechanicalcomponents.Note: Splashing water may cause thehands-free liftgate to open. Keep thepassive key away from the rear bumperdetection area when you wash your vehicle.

74


Liftgate

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFTSYSTEMNote: The system is not compatible withnon-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.Use of these systems may result in vehiclestarting problems and a loss of securityprotection.Note: Metallic objects, electronic devicesor a second coded key on the same keychain may cause vehicle starting problemsif they are too close to the key when startingthe engine. Prevent these objects fromtouching the coded key while starting theengine. Switch the ignition off, move allobjects on the key chain away from thecoded key and restart the engine if aproblem occurs.Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded keyin the vehicle. Always take your keys andlock all doors when leaving the vehicle.

SecuriLock®The system is an engine immobilizationsystem. It is designed to help prevent theengine from being started unless a codedkey programmed to your vehicle is used.Using the wrong key may prevent theengine from starting. A message mayappear in the information display.If you are unable to start the engine with acorrectly coded key, a malfunction hashappened and a message may appear inthe information display.

Automatic ArmingThe vehicle arms immediately after youswitch the ignition off.

Automatic DisarmingSwitching the ignition on with a coded keydisarms the vehicle.

Replacement KeysNote: Your vehicle comes equipped withtwo integrated keyhead transmitters or twointelligent access keys.The integrated keyhead transmitterfunctions as a programmed ignition keythat operates all the locks and starts thevehicle, as well as a remote control.The intelligent access key functions as aprogrammed key that operates the driverdoor lock and activates the intelligentaccess with push button start system, aswell as a remote control.If your programmed transmitters orstandard SecuriLock coded keys(integrated keyhead transmitters only) arelost or stolen and you do not have an extracoded key, you will need to have yourvehicle towed to an authorized dealer. Youneed to erase the key codes from yourvehicle and program new coded keys.Store an extra programmed key away fromthe vehicle in a safe place to help preventany inconveniences. See your authorizeddealer to purchase additional spare orreplacement keys.

Programming a Spare IntegratedKeyhead TransmitterNote: You can program a maximum of eightcoded keys to your vehicle. All eight can beintegrated keyhead transmitters.You can program your own integratedkeyhead transmitter or standardSecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. Thisprocedure will program both the engineimmobilizer keycode and the remote entryportion of the remote control to yourvehicleOnly use integrated keyhead transmittersor standard SecuriLock keys.

75


Security

You must have two previouslyprogrammed coded keys and the newunprogrammed key readily accessible. Seeyour authorized dealer to have the sparekey programmed if two previouslyprogrammed coded keys are not available.Read and understand the entire procedurebefore you begin.1. Insert the first previously programmed

coded key into the ignition.2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep

the ignition on for at least threeseconds, but no more than 10 seconds.

3. Switch the ignition off and remove thefirst coded key from the ignition.

4. After three seconds but within 10seconds of switching the ignition off,insert the second previously coded keyinto the ignition.

5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keepthe ignition on for at least threeseconds, but no more than 10 seconds.

6. Switch the ignition off and remove thesecond previously programmed codedkey from the ignition.

7. After three seconds but within 10seconds of switching the ignition offand removing the previouslyprogrammed coded key, insert the newunprogrammed key into the ignition.

8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keepthe ignition on for at least six seconds.

9. Remove the newly programmed codedkey from the ignition.

If the key has been successfullyprogrammed it will start the engine andoperate the remote entry system (if thenew key is an integrated keyheadtransmitter).If programming was not successful, wait10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.If you are still unsuccessful, take yourvehicle to your authorized dealer.

Programming a Spare IntelligentAccess KeySee your authorized dealer to haveadditional keys programmed to yourvehicle.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM (IF EQUIPPED)

The system will warn you of anunauthorized entry to your vehicle. It willbe triggered if any door, the luggagecompartment or the hood is openedwithout using the key, remote control orkeyless entry keypad.The direction indicators will flash and thehorn will sound if unauthorized entry isattempted while the alarm is armed.Take all remote controls to an authorizeddealer if there is any potential alarmproblem with your vehicle.

Arming the AlarmThe alarm is ready to arm when there isnot a key in your vehicle. Electronically lockyour vehicle to arm the alarm.

Disarming the AlarmDisarm the alarm by any of the followingactions:• Unlock the doors or luggage

compartment with the remote controlor keyless entry keypad.

• Switch your vehicle on or start yourvehicle.

• Use a key in the driver door to unlockyour vehicle, then switch your vehicleon within 12 seconds.

Note: Pressing the panic button on theremote control will stop the horn and signalindicators, but will not disarm the system.

76


Security

ADJUSTING THE STEERINGWHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:MANUAL ADJUSTABLESTEERING COLUMN

WARNING: Do not adjust thesteering wheel when your vehicle ismoving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in thecorrect position. See Sitting in the CorrectPosition (page 139).

E259854

1. Unlock the steering column.2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position.

E259855

3. Lock the steering column.

ADJUSTING THE STEERINGWHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:POWER ADJUSTABLESTEERING COLUMN

WARNING: Do not adjust thesteering wheel when your vehicle ismoving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in thecorrect position. See Sitting in the CorrectPosition (page 139).

77


Steering Wheel

E261582

Use the control on the side of the steeringcolumn to adjust the position.To adjust:• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the

control.• Telescope: Press the front or rear of

the control.

End of Travel PositionThe steering column sets a stoppingposition just short of the end of the columnposition to prevent damage to the steeringcolumn. A new stopping position sets ifthe steering column encounters an objectwhen tilting or telescoping.To reset the steering column to its normalstopping position:1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing

the motion of the steering column.2. Press and hold the steering column

control until the steering column stopsmoving.

3. Press the steering column controlagain.

Note: The steering column may begin tomove again.4. When the steering column stops,

continue holding the control for a fewseconds.

5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.A new stopping position sets. The nexttime you tilt or telescope the steeringcolumn, it stops just short of the end of thecolumn position.

Memory Feature (If Equipped)

You can save and recall the steeringcolumn position with the memoryfunction. See Memory Function (page146).Pressing the adjustment control during amemory recall cancels the operation.

Easy Entry and Exit FeatureThe column moves up when you switchthe ignition off. Switch the ignition on toreturn the system to its previous settings.You can switch this feature on or off in theinformation display. See InformationDisplays (page 104).Note: If you press any adjustment ormemory button when in easy exit mode, thesystem cancels the operation.Note: Depending on your vehicle, thecolumn may move up and in.

78


Steering Wheel

AUDIO CONTROLType One

E273149

Volume up.ASeek up or next.BVolume down.CSeek down or previous.DMedia.E

E273150

Answer call.AMute.BEnd call.C

Type Two

E213209

Seek up or next.AVolume up or down.BMute.CSeek down or previous.D

Seek and MediaPress the seek button to:• Tune the radio to the next or previous

stored preset.• Play the next or the previous track.Press and hold the seek button to:• Tune the radio to the next station up

or down the frequency band.• Seek through a track.Press the media button repeatedly to:• Scroll through available audio modes.

VOICE CONTROLThe controls are on the steering wheel.

E142599

Press and release to activatevoice recognition.

Press and release to enter phonemode or answer a phone call.

79


Steering Wheel

E265040

Press and release to end a phonecall.

CRUISE CONTROLType One

E200995

See Using Cruise Control (page 217).Type Two

E200996

See Using Adaptive Cruise Control(page 218).

INFORMATION DISPLAYCONTROL

E203207

See Information Displays (page 104).

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (IF

EQUIPPED)

Switch the heated steering wheel on andoff using the touchscreen.

Touch the button to switch theheated steering wheel on andoff.

Note: You can use the heated steeringwheel only when the engine is running.Note: The system uses a sensor and isdesigned to control the temperature of thesteering wheel and to prevent it fromoverheating.Note: In warm temperatures, the steeringwheel quickly reaches its maximumtemperature and the system reduces thecurrent to the heating element. This couldcause you to think that the system hasstopped working but it has not. This isnormal.

80


Steering Wheel

ADJUSTING THE PEDALS (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Never use the controlswhile your feet are on the acceleratorand brake pedals and the vehicle ismoving.

You can find the control on the left side ofthe steering column. Press and hold theappropriate side of the control to move thepedals.

A B

E162916

A. FartherB. CloserYou can save and recall the pedal positionswith the memory feature. See MemoryFunction (page 146).Note: Adjust the pedals only when yourvehicle is in P (Park).

81


Pedals

WINDSHIELD WIPERSNote: Fully defrost the windshield beforeyou switch the windshield wipers on.Note: Make sure you switch the windshieldwipers off before entering a car wash.Note: If streaks or smears appear on thewindshield, clean the windshield and thewiper blades. If that does not resolve theissue, install new wiper blades.Note: Do not operate the wipers on a drywindshield. This may scratch the glass,damage the wiper blades or cause the wipermotor to burn out. Always use thewindshield washers before wiping a drywindshield.

E252764

• Rotate away from you for a long wipeinterval.

• Rotate toward you for a short wipeinterval.

Use the rotary control to adjust theintermittent wipe interval.

Speed Dependent Wipers (If Equipped)

When your vehicle speed increases, theinterval between wipes decreases.

AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: Fully defrost the windshield beforeyou switch the windshield wipers on.Note: Make sure you switch the windshieldwipers off before entering a car wash.

Note: If streaks or smears appear on thewindshield, clean the windshield and thewiper blades. If that does not resolve theissue, install new wiper blades.Note: If you switch autolamps andautowipers on, the headlamps turn on whenthe windshield wipers continuously operate.Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,snow or salty road mist can causeinconsistent and unexpected wiping orsmearing.The feature uses a rain sensor that is in thearea around the interior mirror. The rainsensor monitors the amount of moistureon the windshield and turns on the wipers.It adjusts the wiper speed by the amountof moisture that the sensor detects on thewindshield. You can switch this feature onand off in the information display. SeeInformation Displays (page 104).

E208222

Use the rotary control to adjust thesensitivity of the autowipers. When youselect low sensitivity, the wipers operatewhen the sensor detects a large amountof water on the windshield. When youselect high sensitivity, the wipers operatewhen the sensor detects a small amountof water on the windshield.Keep the outside of the windshield clean.The rain sensor is very sensitive and thewipers may operate if dirt, mist or insectshit the windshield.

82


Wipers and Washers

In these conditions, you can do thefollowing:• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers

to reduce the amount of smearing onthe windshield.

• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.• Switch autowipers off.

Autowipers SettingsAutowipers default to on and remain onuntil you switch them off in the informationdisplay. When you switch off autowipers,the wipers operate in intermittent mode.

WINDSHIELD WASHERSNote: Do not operate the wipers on a drywindshield. This may scratch the glass,damage the wiper blades or cause the wipermotor to burn out. Always use thewindshield washers before wiping a drywindshield.Note: Do not operate the washers whenthe washer reservoir is empty. This maycause the washer pump to overheat.

E208224

• A brief press causes a single wipewithout washer fluid.

• A brief press and hold causes thewipers to swipe three times withwasher fluid.

• A long press and hold turns on thewipers and washer fluid for up to 10seconds.

A wipe occurs a few seconds after washingto clear any remaining washer fluid. Youcan switch this feature on or off in theinformation display.

Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)

Operating the windshield washer alsooperates the front camera washer.

REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHERSNote: Make sure you switch the windshieldwipers off before entering a car wash.

Rear Window Wiper Blade

E208225

Rotate the control to switch on the rearwiper.

Rear Window WasherRotate and hold the control to the top orbottom position to switch on the rearwindow washer. When you release thelever, wiping continues for a short periodof time.

Rear Camera WasherOperating the rear washer also turns onthe rear camera washer.

83


Wipers and Washers

GENERAL INFORMATIONCondensation in the Exterior FrontLamps and Rear LampsExterior front lamps and rear lamps havevents to accommodate normal changesin air pressure.Condensation can be a natural by-productof this design. When moist air enters thelamp assembly through the vents, there isa possibility that condensation can occurwhen the temperature is cold. Whennormal condensation occurs, a fine mistcan form on the interior of the lens. Thefine mist eventually clears and exitsthrough the vents during normal operation.Clearing time may take as long as 48 hoursunder dry weather conditions.Examples of acceptable condensation are:• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,

drip marks or large droplets).• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the

lens.Examples of unacceptable condensationare:• A water puddle inside the lamp.• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets

present on the interior of the lens.If you see any unacceptable condensation,have your vehicle checked by an authorizeddealer.

LIGHTING CONTROL

E142449

Lamps off.AParking lamps, instrument panellamps, license plate lamps andrear lamps.

B

Headlamps.C

Headlamp High Beam

E167827

Push the lever away from you toswitch the high beam on.

Push the lever forward again or pull thelever toward you to switch the high beamsoff.

84


Lighting

Flashing the Headlamp High Beam

E163268

Slightly pull the lever toward you andrelease it to flash the headlamps.

AUTOLAMPS

WARNING: The system does notrelieve you of your responsibility to drivewith due care and attention. You mayneed to override the system if it does notturn the headlamps on in low visibilityconditions, for example daytime fog.

E142451

When the lighting control is in theautolamps position, the headlamps turnon in low light situations, or when thewipers turn on.

The headlamps remain on for a period oftime after you switch the ignition off. Usethe information display controls to adjustthe period of time that the headlampsremain on.Note: If you switch the autolamps on, youcannot switch the high beams on until thesystem turns the low beams on.

Windshield Wiper ActivatedHeadlampsWhen you switch the autolamps on, theheadlamps turn on within 10 seconds ofswitching the wipers on. They turn offapproximately 60 seconds after you switchthe windshield wipers off.The headlamps do not turn on with thewipers:• During a single wipe.• When using the windshield washers.• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.Note: If you switch the autolamps and theautowipers on, the headlamps turn on whenthe windshield wipers continuously operate.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTINGDIMMER

E231828

85


Lighting

Press repeatedly or press and hold untilyou reach the desired level.

HEADLAMP EXIT DELAYSet the delay time to keep the headlampson for up to three minutes after switchingoff the ignition.Follow the steps below to change thedelay time:Note: Complete steps 1 through 6 within 10seconds.1. Switch the ignition off.2. Select the autolamp position on the

lighting control.3. Switch the lighting control to the off

position.4. Switch the ignition on.5. Switch the ignition off.6. Select the autolamp position on the

lighting control. The headlamps andparking lamps turn on.

7. Switch the lighting control to the offposition when reaching the requireddelay time. The headlamps and parkinglamps turn off.

Set the headlamp exit delay to one of thefollowing settings:• Off.• 10 seconds.• 20 seconds.• 120 seconds.Note: Adjust the time delay using thedisplay controls in the information display.See Information Displays (page 104).

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING: The daytime runninglamps system does not activate the rearlamps and may not provide adequatelighting during low visibility drivingconditions. Make sure you switch theheadlamps on, as appropriate, during alllow visibility conditions. Failure to do somay result in a crash.

Type One - Conventional (Non-Configurable)The daytime running lamps turn on when:1. Switching the ignition on.2. The transmission is not in park (P) for

vehicles with automatic transmissions,or releasing the parking brake forvehicles with manual transmissions.

3. The lighting control is in the off, parkinglamp or autolamps positions.

4. The headlamps are off.

Type Two - ConfigurableSwitch the daytime running lamps on oroff using the information display. SeeInformation Displays (page 104).The daytime running lamps turn on when:1. The lamps are on in the information

display.2. Switching the ignition on.3. The transmission is not in park (P) for

vehicles with automatic transmissions,or releasing the parking brake forvehicles with manual transmissions.

4. The lighting control is in the autolampsposition.

5. The headlamps are off.

86


Lighting

The other lighting control switch positionsdo not turn on the daytime running lamps.If the daytime running lamps are off in theinformation display, the lamps stay off inall switch positions.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAMCONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: The system does notrelieve you of your responsibility to drivewith due care and attention. You mayneed to override the system if it does notturn the high beams on or off.

The system turns on high beams if it is darkenough and no other traffic is present. If itdetects an approaching vehicle’sheadlamps or tail lamps, or street lightingahead, the system turns off high beamsbefore they can distract other road users.Low beams remain on.Note: The system may not operate properlyif the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshieldfree from obstruction or damage.Note: The system may not operate properlyin cold or inclement conditions. You canswitch on the high beams by overriding thesystem.Note: If the system detects a blockage, forexample bird droppings, bug splatter, snowor ice, the system goes into low beam modeuntil you clear the blockage. A message mayappear in the information display if thecamera is blocked.Note: Using much larger tires or equippingvehicle accessories such as snowplows canmodify your vehicle's ride height anddegrade automatic high beam controlperformance.

A camera sensor, centrally mountedbehind the windshield of your vehicle,continuously monitors conditions to turnthe high beams on and off.Once the system is active, the high beamsturn on if:• The ambient light level is low enough.• There is no traffic in front of your

vehicle.• The vehicle speed is greater than

approximately 32 mph (51 km/h).The system turns the high beams off if:• The ambient light level is high enough

that high beams are not required.• The system detects an approaching

vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.• The vehicle speed falls below

approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).• The system detects severe rain, snow

or fog.• The camera is blocked.

Switching the System On and OffSwitch the system on using the informationdisplay. See Information Displays (page104).

E142451

Switch the lighting control to theautolamps position. See Autolamps(page 85).

87


Lighting

Overriding the SystemPush the lever away from you to switchbetween high beam and low beam.

Automatic High Beam IndicatorThe indicator illuminates toconfirm when the system isready to assist.

FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)

E232249

Press to switch the fog lamps on or off.You can switch the fog lamps on when thelighting control is in any position exceptautomatic high beam or off.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

E163272

Push the lever up or down to usethe direction indicators.

Note: Tap the lever up or down to make thedirection indicators flash three times.

INTERIOR LAMPSThe lamps turn on when:• Any door is opened.• You adjust the instrument panel

dimmer until the courtesy lamps turnon.

• You press a remote control button.

Dome LampWithout Fog Lamps

E208462

With Fog Lamps

E208463

88


Lighting

Press the button to switch the lamps onor off.

Front Interior Lamps (If Equipped)

E163273

The front interior lamp switches are on theoverhead console.

Rear Interior LampsThe rear interior lamps may be above therear seat or above the rear windows.

Press to switch the lamps on oroff.

E262193

Press to switch the left-handindividual dome lamp on and off.

Press to switch the right-handindividual dome lamp on and off.

Battery SaverIf you leave the courtesy lamps, interiorlamps or headlamps on, the battery savershuts them off 10 minutes after you switchthe ignition off.The parking lamps do not turn off if youswitch them on.

AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)

Use the touchscreen to select thefollowing:

Select the settings option on thefeature bar.

E279027

Select ambient lighting.

E273192

Switching Ambient Lighting OnTouch a color once.

Changing the ColorTouch any color once.

Adjusting the BrightnessDrag the selected color up or down.

Switching Ambient Lighting OffTouch the selected color once or drag theselected color down to zero brightness.

89


Lighting

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING: Do not leave childrenunattended in your vehicle and do notlet them play with the power windows.Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in personal injury.

WARNING: When closing thepower windows, verify they are free ofobstruction and make sure that childrenand pets are not in the proximity of thewindow openings.

E146043

Note: You may hear a pulsing noise whenjust one of the windows is open. Lower theopposite window slightly to reduce thisnoise.Press the switch to open the window.Lift the switch to close the window.

One-Touch DownPress the switch fully and release it. Pressagain or lift it to stop the window.

One-Touch UpLift the switch fully and release it. Press orlift it again to stop the window.

Resetting One-Touch UpStart the engine.1. Lift and hold the window switch until

the you fully close the door window.Continue to hold the switch for a fewseconds after you close the window.

2. Release the window switch.3. Press and hold the window switch until

you fully open the door window.4. Release the window switch.5. Lift and hold the window switch until

you fully close the window.6. Test for correct window operation by

carrying out the one-touch down andone-touch up features.

Bounce-BackThe window will stop automatically whileclosing. It reverses some distance if thereis an obstacle in the way.

Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNING: When you override thebounce-back feature the window willnot reverse if it detects an obstacle. Takecare when closing the windows to avoidpersonal injury or damage to yourvehicle.

Pull up the window switch and hold withina few seconds of the window reaching thebounce-back position. The window travelsup with no bounce-back protection. Thewindow stops if you release the switchbefore the window fully closes.

90


Windows and Mirrors

Window Lock

E144072

Press the control to lock or unlock the rearwindow controls. It illuminates when youlock the rear window controls.

Accessory DelayYou can use the window switches forseveral minutes after you switch theignition off or until you open either frontdoor.

GLOBAL OPENING (IF EQUIPPED)

You can use the remote control to openthe windows and vent the moonroof withthe ignition off.Note: You can enable or disable this featurein the information display, or see anauthorized dealer. See GeneralInformation (page 104).Note: To operate this feature, accessorydelay must not be active.

Remote Control Front WindowsYou can open the windows for a short timeafter you unlock your vehicle with theremote control. After you unlock yourvehicle, press and hold the remote controlunlock button to open the windows.Release the button once movement starts.Press the lock or unlock button to stopmovement.

Moonroof (If Equipped)

You can vent the moonroof after youunlock your vehicle with the remotecontrol. After you unlock your vehicle, pressand hold the remote control unlock buttonto vent the moonroof. Release the buttononce movement starts. Press the lock orunlock button to stop movement.

EXTERIOR MIRRORSPower Exterior Mirrors

WARNING: Do not adjust themirrors when your vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in the loss of control of yourvehicle, serious personal injury or death.

91


Windows and Mirrors

E144073

Left-hand mirror.AAdjustment control.BRight-hand mirror.C

To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicleon (with the ignition in accessory mode orthe engine running) and then:1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.

The control lights.2. Use the adjustment control to adjust

the position of the mirror.3. Press the mirror control again. The

control light turns off.

Fold-Away Exterior MirrorsPush the mirror toward the door windowglass. Make sure that you fully engage themirror in its support when returning it to itsoriginal position.

Auto-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)

The exterior mirrors automatically fold intoward the glass after you place thetransmission into park (P), turn off thevehicle, open and close the driver's sidedoor and lock the vehicle. The exteriormirrors automatically unfold and return totheir driving position after you unlock thevehicle and open and close the driver's sidedoor.

You can switch this feature on and offthrough the information display. SeeGeneral Information (page 104).

E170431

You can fold the mirrors on demand bypressing the power-folding mirror controlon the door. The control lights and themirrors fold in toward the glass. Press thecontrol again to unfold the mirrors. Thecontrol light turns off.Note: If you use the power-folding controlto fold the mirrors on demand with the autofold feature on, you must use the controlagain to unfold them.

Loose MirrorIf you manually fold your power-foldingmirrors, they may not work properly evenafter you re-position them. You need toreset them if:• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.• The mirrors feel loose.• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or

unfolded position.• One of the mirrors is not in its normal

driving position.To reset the power-fold feature, use thepower-folding mirror control to fold andunfold the mirrors. You may hear a loudnoise as you reset the power-foldingmirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat thisprocess as needed each time you manuallyfold the mirrors.

92


Windows and Mirrors

Heated Exterior MirrorsSee Heated Rear Window (page 137).

Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)

You can save and recall the mirrorpositions through the memory function.See Memory Function (page 146).

Auto-dimming Feature (If Equipped)

The driver exterior mirror dims when theinterior auto-dimming mirror turns on.

Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)

When the vehicle is running, theforward-facing portion of the appropriatemirror housing blinks when you switch onthe direction indicator.

Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)

The lamps on the bottom part of the mirrorhousing light when you use yourtransmitter to unlock the doors or whenyou open a door.

Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If

Equipped)

WARNING: Objects in the mirrorare closer than they appear.

Blind spot mirrors have an integratedconvex mirror built into the upper outboardcorner of the exterior mirrors. They canassist you by increasing visibility along theside of your vehicle.

Check the main mirror first before a lanechange, then check the blind spot mirror.If no vehicles are present in the blind spotmirror and the traffic in the adjacent laneis at a safe distance, signal that you aregoing to change lanes. Glance over yourshoulder to verify traffic is clear, andcarefully change lanes.

A

B

C

E138665

The image of the approaching vehicle issmall and near the inboard edge of themain mirror when it is at a distance. Theimage becomes larger and begins to moveoutboard across the main mirror as thevehicle approaches (A). The imagetransitions from the main mirror and beginsto appear in the blind spot mirror as thevehicle approaches (B). The vehicletransitions to your peripheral field of viewas it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).

93


Windows and Mirrors

Blind Spot Information System (If

Equipped)

See Blind Spot Information System(page 231).

INTERIOR MIRROR

WARNING: Do not adjust themirrors when your vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in the loss of control of yourvehicle, serious personal injury or death.

Note: Do not clean the mirror housing orglass with harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum-based cleaning products.You can adjust the interior mirror to yourpreference. Some mirrors also have asecond pivot point. This lets you move themirror head up or down and from side toside.

Manual Dimming MirrorPull the tab below the mirror toward youto reduce the effect of bright light frombehind.

Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)

Note: Do not block the sensors on the frontand back of the mirror. A rear centerpassenger or raised rear center headrestraint may also block light from reachingthe sensor.The mirror dims to reduce the effect ofbright light from behind. It returns tonormal when the bright light from behindis no longer present or if you shift intoreverse (R).

SUN VISORS

E138666

Rotate the sun visor toward the sidewindow and extend it rearward for extrashade.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

E162197

Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.

MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Do not let children playwith the moonroof or leave themunattended in the vehicle. They mayseriously hurt themselves.

94


Windows and Mirrors

WARNING: When closing themoonroof, you should verify that it is freeof obstructions and make sure thatchildren and pets are not in the proximityof the roof opening.

The moonroof controls are located on theoverhead console and have a one-touchopen and close feature. To stop it duringone-touch operation, press the control asecond time.

Opening and Closing theSunscreen

E193983

Press and release the control to open thesunscreen.Note: The sunscreen stops at the first panelfor the dual panel moonroof. Press andrelease again to continue to open thesunscreen past the second panel.Pull and release the control to close thesunscreen. The moonroof, if open,automatically closes prior to closing thesunscreen.

Opening and Closing the MoonroofPress and release the SLIDE control toopen the moonroof. The sunscreen, ifclosed, automatically opens prior toopening the moonroof. The moonroofstops short of the fully opened position.

Note: This position helps to reduce windnoise or rumbling which may happen withthe moonroof fully open. Press and releasethe control again to fully open themoonroof.Pull and release the SLIDE control to closethe moonroof.

Bounce-BackThe moonroof stops automatically whileclosing. It reverses some distance if thereis an obstacle in the way.Pull and hold the SLIDE control within twoseconds of a bounce-back event tooverride this function. While bounce-backis active, the closing force increases foreach of the next three times that you closethe moonroof.

Venting the MoonroofPress and release the TILT control to ventthe moonroof. Pull and hold the TILTcontrol to close the moonroof.

95


Windows and Mirrors

GAUGES

Type 1

E193714

Tachometer.AInformation display. SeeInformation Displays (page104).

B

Speedometer.CFuel gauge.DEngine coolant temperaturegauge.

E

96


Instrument Cluster

Type 2

E193715

Left information display. SeeInformation Displays (page104).

A

Speedometer.BRight information display. SeeInformation Displays (page104).

C

97


Instrument Cluster

Type 3

E203205

Tachometer.AInformation display. SeeInformation Displays (page104).

B

Speedometer.CFuel gauge.DEngine coolant temperaturegauge.

E

Information DisplayOdometerLocated in the bottom of the informationdisplay. Registers the accumulateddistance your vehicle has traveled.

CompassDisplays the vehicle's heading direction.

Trip ComputerSee General Information (page 104).

Vehicle Settings and PersonalizationSee General Information (page 104).

98


Instrument Cluster

Engine Coolant TemperatureGaugeShows the temperature of the enginecoolant. At normal operating temperature,the needle remains in the center section.If the needle enters the red section, theengine is overheating. Stop the engine,switch the ignition off and determine thecause once the engine has cooled down.Note: Do not restart the engine until thecause of the overheating has been resolved.

WARNING: Do not remove thecoolant reservoir cap when the coolingsystem is hot. Wait 10 minutes for thecooling system to cool down. Cover thecoolant reservoir cap with a thick clothto prevent the possibility of scalding andslowly remove the cap. Failure to followthis instruction could result in personalinjury.

Fuel GaugeThe fuel gauge indicates about how muchfuel is in the fuel tank.The arrow adjacent to the fuel pumpsymbol indicates on which side of yourvehicle the fuel filler door is located.Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightlywhen your vehicle is moving or on a slope.

Low Fuel ReminderA low fuel level reminder displays andsounds when the distance to emptyreaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty forMyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)for all vehicle keys.Note: The low fuel reminder can appear atdifferent fuel gauge positions depending onfuel economy conditions. This variation isnormal.

WARNING LAMPS ANDINDICATORSThe following warning lamps andindicators alert you to a vehicle conditionthat may become serious. Some lampsilluminate when you start your vehicle tomake sure they work. If any lamps remainon after starting your vehicle, refer to therespective system warning lamp for furtherinformation.Note: Some warning indicators appear inthe information display and function thesame as a warning lamp, but do not displaywhen you start your vehicle.

Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)

E144524

The speed control systemindicator light changes color toindicate what mode the system

is in. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control(page 218).On (white light): Illuminates when youswitch on the adaptive cruise controlsystem. Turns off when the speed controlsystem is turned off.Engaged (green light): Illuminates whenyou engage the adaptive cruise controlsystem. Turns off when you disengage thespeed control system.

Anti-Lock Braking SystemIf it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. You continue to

have the normal braking system (withoutABS) unless the brake system warninglamp is also illuminated. Have the systemchecked by an authorized dealer.

99


Instrument Cluster

Automatic High Beam Control (If

Equipped)

It illuminates when this featureis on. See Automatic HighBeam Control (page 87).

BatteryIf it illuminates while driving, itindicates a malfunction. Switchoff all unnecessary electrical

equipment and have the system checkedby an authorized dealer immediately.

Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)

E151262

It illuminates when you switchthis feature off or in conjunctionwith a message. See Blind Spot

Information System (page 231).

Brake System

E144522

It illuminates when you engagethe parking brake with theignition on.

If it illuminates when you are driving, checkthat the parking brake is not engaged. Ifthe parking brake is not engaged, thisindicates low brake fluid level or a brakesystem malfunction. Have the systemchecked immediately by an authorizeddealer.

WARNING: Driving your vehiclewith the warning lamp on is dangerous.A significant decrease in brakingperformance may occur. It may take youlonger to stop your vehicle. Have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.Driving extended distances with theparking brake engaged can cause brakefailure and the risk of personal injury.

Cruise Control (If Equipped)

E71340

It illuminates when you switchthis feature on.

Direction IndicatorIlluminates when you switch onthe left or right directionindicator or the hazard warning

flasher. If the indicators stay on or flashfaster, check for a burned out bulb. SeeChanging a Bulb (page 300).

Door AjarDisplays when the ignition is onand any door is not completelyclosed.

Engine Coolant TemperatureIlluminates when the enginecoolant temperature is high.Stop the vehicle as soon as

possible, switch off the engine and let cool.See Engine Coolant Check (page 289).

Engine OilIf it illuminates with the enginerunning or when you are driving,this indicates a malfunction.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe todo so and switch the engine off. Check theengine oil level. See Engine Oil Check(page 287).Note: Do not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level being correct.Have the system checked by an authorizeddealer immediately.

100


Instrument Cluster

Fasten Safety Belt

E71880

It illuminates and a chimesounds to remind you to fastenyour safety belt. See Seatbelt

Reminder (page 40).

Front Airbag

E67017

If it fails to illuminate when youstart your vehicle, continues toflash or remains on, it indicates

a malfunction. Have the system checkedby an authorized dealer.

Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)

Lights when you switch the frontfog lamps on.

Heads Up Display (If Equipped)

E156133

A red beam of lights illuminateson the windshield in certaininstances when using adaptive

cruise control and/or the collision warningsystem. It also illuminates momentarilywhen you start your vehicle to make surethe display works.

High BeamIt illuminates when you switchthe high beam headlamps on. Itflashes when you use the

headlamp flasher.

Hood Ajar

E159324

Displays when the ignition is onand the hood is not completelyclosed.

Lane Keeping Aid (If Equipped)

E144813

Lights when the lane keepingsystem is activated.

Liftgate Ajar

E162453

Lights when the liftgate is notcompletely closed.

Low Fuel LevelIt illuminates when the fuel levelis low or the fuel tank is nearlyempty. Refuel as soon as

possible.

Low Tire Pressure WarningIt illuminates when your tirepressure is low. If the lampremains on with the engine

running or when driving, check your tirepressure as soon as possible.It also illuminates momentarily when youswitch the ignition on to confirm the lampis functional. If it does not illuminate whenyou switch the ignition on, or begins toflash at any time, have the system checkedby an authorized dealer.

Low Washer Fluid

E132353

It illuminates when thewindshield washer fluid is low.

Parking LampsIt illuminates when you switchthe parking lamps on.

Powertrain FaultIlluminates when the systemdetects a powertrain or an 4WDfault. Contact an authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

101


Instrument Cluster

Service Engine SoonIf it illuminates when the engineis running this indicates amalfunction. The On Board

Diagnostics system has detected amalfunction of the vehicle emission controlsystem.If it flashes, engine misfire may beoccurring. Increased exhaust gastemperatures could damage the catalyticconverter or other vehicle components.Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavyacceleration and deceleration) and haveyour vehicle immediately serviced.It illuminates when you switch the ignitionon prior to engine start to check the bulband to indicate whether your vehicle isready for Inspection and Maintenance(I/M) testing.Normally, it illuminates until the engine iscranked and automatically turns off if nomalfunctions are present. However, if after15 seconds it flashes eight times, thisindicates that your vehicle is not ready forInspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.See Catalytic Converter (page 181).

Stability Control

E138639

It flashes when the system isactive. If it remains illuminatedor does not illuminate when you

switch the ignition on, this indicates amalfunction. During a malfunction thesystem switches off. Have the systemchecked by an authorized dealerimmediately. See Using StabilityControl (page 198).

Stability Control Off

E130458

It illuminates when you switchthe system off. It goes out whenyou switch the system back on

or when you switch the ignition off. SeeUsing Stability Control (page 198).

Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped)

E161509

Illuminates when you activatethe tow/haul feature. If the lightflashes steadily, have the system

serviced immediately. Damage to thetransmission could occur. See AutomaticTransmission (page 184).

AUDIBLE WARNINGS ANDINDICATORSKey in Ignition Warning Chime (If

Equipped)

Sounds when you open the driver's doorand you have left the key in the ignition.

Engine On Warning ChimeA warning chime will sound when any dooris opened if the vehicle exceeds a relativelylow speed.

Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)

Sounds the horn twice when you exit thevehicle and the keyless vehicle is in RUN,indicating the vehicle is still on.

Headlamps On Warning ChimeSounds when you remove the key from theignition and open the driver's door and youhave left the headlamps or parking lampson.

Parking Brake On Warning ChimeSounds when you have left the parkingbrake on and drive your vehicle. If thewarning chime remains on after you havereleased the parking brake, have thesystem checked by your authorized dealerimmediately.

102


Instrument Cluster

Automatic Transmission WarningChimeSounds when you have not moved thetransmission selector lever to position P.A message will be shown in the display.

103


Instrument Cluster

GENERAL INFORMATION


You can control various systems on yourvehicle using the information displaycontrols on the steering wheel.Corresponding information appears in theinformation display.

E204495

This icon gives you the ability toswitch a feature on or off. Acheck in the box indicates the

feature is enabled, and uncheckedindicates the feature is disabled.

Information Display Controls(Type 1)

E193720

• Press the up and down arrow buttonsto scroll through and highlight theoptions within a menu.

• Press the right arrow button to enter asubmenu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit asubmenu.

• Press the OK button to choose andconfirm settings or messages.

Trip 1 & 2You can access the menu using theinformation display control.Note: Some options may appear slightlydifferent or not at all if the items areoptional.

104


Information Displays

Trip 1 & 2

Digital Speedo

Distance to E

Trip Odometer

Trip Timer

Fuel Used

Average Fuel

All Values

Total Odometer (located in the lower right of the display)*

*This also displays in other menus.

• Digital Speedo - Shows a digital displayof your vehicle speed.

• Distance to E — Shows theapproximate distance your vehicle cantravel before running out of fuel.

• Trip Odometer — Registers thedistance of individual journeys.

• Trip Timer — The timer stops when youturn your vehicle off and restarts whenyou restart your vehicle.

• Fuel Used — Shows the amount of fuelused for a given trip.

• Average Fuel — Shows the average fueleconomy for a given trip.

• All Values — Shows the Distance to E,Trip Odometer, Trip Timer and AverageFuel.

Note: Press and hold OK on the currentscreen to reset the respective trip, distance,time and fuel information.

Fuel Economy

Information

Distance to Empty

Instantaneous Fuel Economy

Average MPG

Fuel History

All Values

105



• Distance to Empty - Shows theapproximate distance your vehicle cantravel before running out of fuel.

• Instantaneous Fuel Economy - Showsa visual graph of your instantaneousfuel economy along with your Avg MPGsince the function was last reset.

• Average MPG — Shows the averagefuel economy since last reset.

• Fuel History - Shows a bar chart of yourfuel history.

• All Values — Shows all fuel economyvalues (DTE, Inst Fuel Econ, Avg Fuel).

Note: You can reset your average fueleconomy by pressing and holding the OKbutton on the left hand steering wheelcontrols.

Driver AssistIn this mode, you can configure differentdriver setting choices.Note: Some options may appear slightlydifferent or not at all if the items areoptional.

Driver Assist

Traction Ctrl

Blindspot

Cross Traffic

Enter the submenu and select your settingCruise Control

Driver Alert

Hill Start Assist

Intellig. 4WD

Enter the submenu for items such assystem modes and alert intensity

Lane Keeping

Enter the submenu and select your settingPre-Collision

Rear Park Aid

Tire Monitor

Trailer Sway

SettingsIn this mode, you can configure differentdriver setting choices.

Note: Some items are optional and maynot appear.

106



Settings

Enter the submenu and select your settingAlarmVehicle

Auto Engine Off

Enter the submenu and select your settingChimes

Enter the submenu and select your settingDTE calculation

Easy Entry/Exit

Enter the submenu and select your settingLighting

Enter the submenu and select your settingLocks

Enter the submenu and select your settingPower Mirror

Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life Reset

Enter the submenu and select your settingPower Liftgate

Enter the submenu and select your settingRemote Start

Enter the submenu and select your settingWindows

Enter the submenu and select your settingWipers

Enter the submenu and select your settingMyKey StatusMyKey

Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKey

Enter the submenu and select your setting911 Assist

Enter the submenu and select your settingDo Not Disturb

Enter the submenu and select your settingTraction Ctrl

Enter the submenu and select your settingMax Speed

Volume Limiter

Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys

Enter the submenu and select your settingDistanceDisplay

Enter the submenu and select your settingTemperature

Enter the submenu and select your settingTire Pressure

Enter the submenu and select your settingLanguage

Note: Some MyKey items only appear if aMyKey is set.

107




E193721


• Press the right arrow button to enter asub-menu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit amenu.

• Press and hold the left arrow button atany time to return to the main menudisplay (escape button).


Main MenuFrom the main menu bar on the left sideof the information display, you can choosefrom the following categories:• Display Mode.• Trip 1 & 2.• Fuel Economy.• Driver Assist.• Settings.Scroll up or down to highlight one of thecategories and then press the right arrowkey or OK to enter into that category. Pressthe left arrow key as needed to exit backto the main menu.

Display ModeUse the up or down arrow buttons tochoose between the following displayoptions.

Display Mode

Option 4*Option 3Option 2Option 1*Display Mode

--XXXXX mi (km) toempty

XX--Round tacho-meter

--X-Vertical tacho-meter

108



Display Mode

Tire pressure on demand screen

Digital speedometer - XXX MPH - Press OK for km/h

Intelligent 4WD - 4WD Gauge with Terrain Management System*Vehicles with Intelligent 4WD only. You can choose to have only the fuel gauge show inthis mode. Refer to Display > Gauge Display found in the table under the Settings sectionlater in this chapter.

XXX mi (km) to emptyShows approximate fuel level before thefuel tank reaches empty. The value isdynamic and can change (raise or lower)depending on driving style.

Fuel gaugeSwitch the ignition on. The fuel gaugeindicates approximately how much fuel isin the fuel tank. The arrow next to the fuelpump symbol shows the fuel filler doorside of your vehicle. When the fuel levelbecomes low, the level indicator changesto amber. When the fuel level becomescritically low, the level indicator changesto red.Note: The fuel gauge level may vary slightlywhen your vehicle is moving or when drivingon a slope.Note: When a MyKey is in use, low fuelwarnings display earlier.

Bar or Round tachometerIndicates the engine speed in revolutionsper minute. Driving with your tachometerpointer continuously at the top of the scalemay damage the engine. During SelectShiftAutomatic™ transmission (SST) use, thecurrently selected gear appears in thedisplay.

Engine coolant temperature gaugeIndicates engine coolant temperature. Atnormal operating temperature, the levelindicator is in the normal range. If theengine coolant temperature exceeds thenormal range, stop your vehicle as soon assafely possible, switch off the engine andlet the engine cool.

Intelligent 4WD (if equipped)Displays power distribution between thefront and rear wheels. More power to eitherthe front or rear wheels displays by morearea filled in. Intelligent 4WD also displaysthe currently selected terrain managementmode.

Trip 1 & 2You can access the menu using theinformation display control.Note: Some options may appear slightlydifferent or not at all if the items areoptional.

109



Trip 1 & 2

All Values

• All Values — shows all trip values (TripTimer, Trip Odometer and AverageFuel).

• Trip Odometer — Shows youraccumulated trip distance.

• Average Fuel — Shows your averagefuel economy for a given trip.

• Trip Timer— The timer stops when youturn your vehicle off and restarts whenyou restart your vehicle.

Note: You can reset your trip informationby pressing and holding the OK button onthe left hand steering wheel controls.

Fuel EconomyUse the left or right arrow buttons tochoose the desired fuel economy display.

Fuel Economy

Inst Fuel Economy - Hold OK to Reset

Fuel History

• Inst Fuel Economy - shows a visualgraph of your instantaneous fueleconomy, average fuel economy anddistance to empty.

• Fuel History - shows a bar chart of yourfuel history from the past 30 min,average fuel economy and distance toempty.


Driver AssistIn this mode, you can configure differentdriver setting choices.Note: Some items are optional and maynot appear.

Driver Assist

Traction Control

Blindspot

Cross Traffic Alert


Driver Alert

Hill Start Assist

110



Driver Assist

Enter the submenu for items such as system modes andalert intensity

Lane Keeping Sys


Rear Park Aid

Trailer Sway



Settings


Auto Engine Off


Easy Entry/Exit



Enter the submenu and select your settingPower Mirror

Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life Reset










111



Settings


Volume Limiter


Enter the submenu and select your settingDistanceDisplay Setup


Enter the submenu and select your settingGauge Display





E203206

• Press and hold the left arrow button atany time to return to the main menudisplay (escape button).



• Press the right arrow button to enter asub-menu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit amenu.

Main MenuFrom the main menu bar on the left sideof the information display, you can choosefrom the following categories:• Trip 1 & 2.• Fuel Economy.• Driver Assist.• Settings.Scroll up or down to highlight one of thecategories and then press the right arrowkey or OK to enter into that category. Pressthe left arrow key as needed to exit backto the main menu.

112



Trip 1 & 2You can access the menu using theinformation display control.

Note: Some options may appear slightlydifferent or not at all if the items areoptional.

Trip 1 & 2

All Values

• All Values — shows all trip values (TripTimer, Trip Odometer and AverageFuel).

• Trip Odometer — Shows youraccumulated trip distance.

• Average Fuel — Shows your averagefuel economy for a given trip.

• Trip Timer— The timer stops when youturn your vehicle off and restarts whenyou restart your vehicle.

Note: You can reset your trip informationby pressing and holding the OK button onthe left hand steering wheel controls.

Fuel EconomyUse the left or right arrow buttons tochoose the desired fuel economy display.

Fuel Economy

Instant Fuel Economy - Hold OK to Reset

Fuel History

• Inst Fuel Economy - shows a visualgraph of your instantaneous fueleconomy, average fuel economy anddistance to empty.

• Fuel History - shows a bar chart of yourfuel history from the past 30 min,average fuel economy and distance toempty.


Driver AssistIn this mode, you can configure differentdriver setting choices.Note: Some items are optional and maynot appear.

Driver Assist

Traction Control

Enter the submenu and select your settingIntelligent 4WD

Blindspot

Cross Traffic Alert

113



Driver Assist


Driver Alert

Hill Start Assist

Enter the submenu for items such as system modes andalert intensity

Lane Keeping Sys


Rear Park Aid

Tire Pressure

Trailer Sway



Settings



Enter the submenu and select your settingChimes

Easy Entry/Exit

Auto Engine Off



Enter the submenu and select your settingMirror

Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life





114



Settings







Volume Limiter


Enter the submenu and select your settingDistanceDisplay Setup




Enter the submenu and select your settingSpeedo in km/h


INFORMATION MESSAGESNote: Depending on the vehicle optionsequipped with your vehicle, not all of themessages will display or be available.Certain messages may display abbreviatedor shortened depending upon which clustertype you have.

E203207

Press the OK button to acknowledge andremove some messages from theinformation display. Other messagesdelete automatically after a short time.You need to confirm certain messagesbefore you can access the menus.

115



4WD

ActionMessage

The four wheel drive system has automatically disabled itselfdue to the system overheating.

4WD TemporarilyDisabled

The four wheel drive system has automatically disabled itselfdue to the system overheating or you are using the spare tire.

4WD Off

The four wheel drive system resumes normal function andclears this message after driving a short distance with the

road tire re-installed or after the system cools.

4WD Restored

The four wheel drive system is not operating properly and thepowertrain fault indicator illuminates. See Warning Lampsand Indicators (page 99). If the warning stays illuminatedor continues to illuminate, contact an authorized dealer as

soon as possible.

4WD MalfunctionService Required

Displayed when the transfer case fluid requires service.Change 4WD PowerTransfer Unit Lube

Displayed when the transfer case fluid has been changed andreset to new.

4WD Power TransferUnit Lube Set to New

Adaptive Cruise Control

ActionMessage

A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise fromengaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 218).

Adaptive CruiseMalfunction

Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot functionproperly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 218).

Adaptive Cruise NotAvailable

The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due tobad weather or ice/mud/water in front of radar. Driver cantypically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive

Cruise Control (page 218).

Adaptive Cruise NotAvailable Sensor

Blocked See Manual

AdvanceTrac™

ActionMessage

The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Service AdvanceTrac

The driver has disabled or enabled the traction control.AdvanceTrac Off On

116



Alarm

ActionMessage

Unauthorized entry triggered the alarm. See Anti-TheftAlarm (page 76).

Vehicle Alarm To StopAlarm, Start Vehicle

Automatic Engine Shutdown

ActionMessage

The engine is preparing to shutdown.Engine Shuts Off In XXSeconds

The engine has shutdown to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off For FuelEconomy

The engine is preparing to shutdown. You can press OK onthe left steering wheel button to override the shutdown.

Engine Shuts Off in XXSeconds Press OK to

Override

Automatic High Beam Control

ActionMessage

The front camera sensor has reduced visibility. Clean thewindshield.

Front Camera Low Visib-ility Clean Screen

The system requires service due to a malfunction. Contact anauthorized dealer.

Front Camera Malfunc-tion Service Required

The front camera sensor has malfunctioned. Wait a shortperiod of time for the sensor to cool down.

Front Camera Tempor-arily Not Available

117



Battery and Charging System

ActionMessage

The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays onor continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon

as possible.

Check Charging System

The battery management system detects an extended lowvoltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features

to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electricalloads as soon as possible to improve the system voltage.

Once the system voltage recovers, the disabled features willoperate as normal.

Low Battery FeaturesTemporarily Turned Off

The battery management system determines that the batteryis at a low state of charge. Switch the ignition off as soon aspossible to protect the battery. This message clears once youstart the vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered.Turning off unnecessary electrical loads allows faster battery

state-of-charge recovery.

Turn Power Off to SaveBattery

Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System

ActionMessage

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Blindspot System Fault

The system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealeras soon as possible. See Blind Spot Information System

(page 231).

Blindspot Not AvailableSensor Blocked See

Manual

The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot InformationSystem (page 231).

Vehicle Coming From X

The blind spot information system and cross traffic alertsystem sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information

System (page 231).

Cross Traffic Not Avail-able Sensor Blocked

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Cross Traffic SystemFault

118



Brake System

ActionMessage

The brake fluid level is low. Check the brake system immedi-ately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 295).

Brake Fluid Level LOW

The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safeplace. Contact an authorized dealer.

Check Brake System

The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you driveyour vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stayson after you release the parking brake, contact an authorized


Park Brake Engaged

Doors and Locks

ActionMessage

The driver door is not completely closed.Driver Door Ajar

The passenger door is not completely closed.Passenger Door Ajar

The rear left door is not completely closed.Rear Left Door Ajar

The rear right door is not completely closed.Rear Right Door Ajar

The liftgate is not completely closed.Liftgate Ajar

The hood is not completely closed.Hood Ajar

The system has disabled the door switches.Switches InhibitedSecurity Mode

The factory keypad code displays in the information displayafter the system resets the keypad. See Passive Anti-Theft

System (page 75).

Factory Keypad CodeXXXXX

Driver Alert

ActionMessage

Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning RestNow

Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning RestSuggested

119



Electronic Stability Control

ActionMessage

The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.ESC Service required

Displays the traction control system status.ESC Off

Displays the traction control system status.ESC On

Engine

ActionMessage

Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop yourvehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool. If the

problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. See EngineCoolant Check (page 289).

High Engine Temper-ature Stop Safely

Engine service is required. Contact an authorized dealer.Engine Fault ServiceNow

Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 287).Engine Oil Level LowCheck Level

Fuel

ActionMessage

An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level LOW

The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet

Hill Descent Control

ActionMessage

Displays when you deactivate hill descent control mode.Hill Descent Control OFF

Displays when hill descent speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h).For Hill Descent ReduceSpeed

Displays when hill descent control mode requires you to shiftthe transmission into gear.

For Hill Descent SelectGear

Displays when the hill control mode requires you to resumecontrol.

Hill Descent DriverResume Control

120



ActionMessage

Displays when a hill descent system fault is present.Hill Descent ControlFault

Displays when you disable the hill descent control mode tocool the brake system.

Hill Descent Control OffSystem Cooling

Displays when you activate the hill descent control mode.Hill Descent ControlReady

Hill Start Assist

ActionMessage

Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer.See Hill Start Assist (page 194).

Hill Start Assist NotAvailable

Keys and Intelligent Access

ActionMessage

A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.To START Press Brake

The system does not detect the key. See Keyless Starting(page 166).

No Key Detected

When you press the Start Stop button to shut off the engine,the system does not detect an Intelligent Access key inside

your vehicle.

Restart Now or Key isNeeded

Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.Full Accessory PowerActive

There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Contactan authorized dealer for service.

Starting System Fault

You have successfully programmed an intelligent access keyto the system.

Key Program Successful

You have failed to program an intelligent access key to thesystem.

Key Program Failure

You have programmed the maximum number of keys to thesystem.

Max Number of KeysLearned

121



ActionMessage

You have not programmed enough keys to the system.Not Enough KeysLearned

The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.See Remote Control (page 53).

Key Battery Low ReplaceSoon

Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle with the intelli-gent access key and the engine is on.

Engine ON

Lane Keeping System

ActionMessage

The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealeras soon as possible.

Lane Keeping Sys.Malfunction Service

Required

The system has detected a condition that has caused thesystem to be temporarily unavailable.

Front Camera Tempor-arily Not Available

The system has detected a condition that requires a cleanwindshield to operate properly.

Front Camera Low Visib-ility Clean Screen

The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealeras soon as possible.

Front Camera Malfunc-tion Service Required

The system requests the driver to keep their hands on thesteering wheel.

Keep Hands on SteeringWheel

Maintenance

ActionMessage

Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible. Switch off theengine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continuesto come on with your engine running, contact an authorized


LOW Engine Oil Pressure

The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.Change Engine Oil Soon

The oil life left reaches 0%.Oil Change Required

The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Overtem-perature

122



ActionMessage

The washer fluid is low and needs refilling.Washer Fluid Level Low

Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This maynot allow some features to operate properly. Contact an

authorized dealer.

Transport Mode ContactDealer

Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This maynot allow some features to operate properly. Contact an

authorized dealer.

Factory Mode ContactDealer

MyKey

ActionMessage

You cannot program a MyKey during key programming.MyKey Not Created

MyKey is active.MyKey Active DriveSafely

When starting your vehicle, a MyKey is in use and the MyKeyspeed limit is on.

Speed Limited to XXMPH/km/h

When a MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and yourvehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).

Vehicle Near Top Speed

MyKey is active.Check Speed DriveSafely

A MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is active.Buckle Up to UnmuteAudio

You attempted to program a spare key using two existingMyKeys.

Could Not ProgramIntegrated Key

123



Park Aid

ActionMessage

The system has detected a condition that requires service.Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation

(page 202).

Check Park Aid

The system has detected a condition that requires service.Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page

202).

Check Rear Park Aid

Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off

Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off

Park Brake

ActionMessage

You have set the parking brake and you have driven the vehiclemore than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after youhave released the parking brake, contact an authorized dealer.

Park Brake Engaged

Power Steering

ActionMessage

The power steering system has detected a condition thatrequires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering MalfunctionService Now

The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicleat a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.

Service Power SteeringNow

The power steering system has detected a condition withinthe power steering system, or passive entry or passive start

system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering Assist Fault

You need to turn the steering wheel in order to disengage thesteering lock.

Steering column lock:Remove and re-insert

key while turning wheelto unlock

124



Pre-Collision Assist

ActionMessage

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorizeddealer.

Pre-Collision WarningMalfunction

You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud orwater in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the

sensor to resolve. See Pre-Collision Assist (page 236).

Pre-Collision WarningNot Available SensorBlocked See Manual

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorizeddealer.

Pre-Collision WarningNot Available

Remote Start

ActionMessage

A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift buttonto drive your vehicle after a remote start.

To Drive: Press Brakeand Gear Shift Button

Seats

ActionMessage

Objects are by the passenger seat. After you move the objectsaway from the seat, if the warning stays on or continues tocome on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Occupant SensorBLOCKED Remove

Objects Near PassengerSeat

A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall NotPermitted While Driving

Shows where you have saved your memory setting.Memory X Saved

125



Starting System

ActionMessage

A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle.To START Press Brake

The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting tostart your vehicle.

Cranking Time Exceeded

The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.Engine Start PendingPlease Wait

The system has cancelled the pending start.Pending Start Cancelled

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

ActionMessage

One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. SeeTire Pressure Monitoring System (page 330).

LOW Tire Pressure

The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If thewarning stays on or continues to come on, contact an

authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System(page 330).

Tire Pressure MonitorFault

A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire isin use. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contactan authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (page 330).

Tire Pressure SensorFault

Terrain Management System

ActionMessage

Displays terrain management normal mode is currently active.Normal Mode Active

Displays terrain management snow, gravel, grass mode iscurrently active.

Snow, Gravel, GrassMode Active

Displays terrain management mud, ruts mode is currentlyactive.

Mud, Rut Mode Active

126



ActionMessage

Displays terrain management sand mode is currently active.Sand Mode Active

Displays when the terrain management system detects anerror.

Terrain ManagementSystem Fault

Displayed when terrain management mode cannot bechanged at the time of your request.

Mode Change NotAccepted, Retry

Traction Control

ActionMessage

Displays the status of the traction control system. See UsingTraction Control (page 196).

Traction Control Off

Displays the status of the traction control system. See UsingTraction Control (page 196).

Traction Control On

Trailer

ActionMessage

Displays when the trailer sway control has detected a trailersway. See Trailer Sway Control (page 248).

Trailer Sway ReduceSpeed

Transmission

ActionMessage

Contact an authorized dealer.Transmission Malfunc-tion Service Now

The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in asafe place as soon as possible.

Transmission Overtem-perature Stop Safely

The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in asafe place as soon as possible.

Transmission Over-heating Stop Safely

Contact an authorized dealer.Transmission ServiceRequired

The transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.Transmission Too HotPress Brake

127



ActionMessage

The transmission has overheated and has limited functionality.Transmission LimitedFunction See Manual

The transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up beforeyou drive.

Transmission WarmingUp Please Wait

A reminder to shift into park.Transmission Not in Park

A request for you to apply the brake as needed by the trans-mission.

Press Brake Pedal

The transmission has adjusted the shift strategy.Transmission Adjusted

The transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.Transmission Adapt-Mode

The transmission is locked and unable to select gears.Transmission Indicat-Mode Lockup On

The transmission is unlocked and free to select gears.Transmission Indicat-Mode Lockup Off

128



MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLDirecting Air to the InstrumentPanel Air Vents

Press and release the button todirect airflow to instrumentpanel air vents.

Directing Air to the Footwell AirVents

Press and release the button todirect airflow to footwell airvents.

Setting the Blower Motor Speed

E265389

Turn the control to adjust the volume ofair circulated in the vehicle.

Setting the Temperature

E265862

Turn the control to set the temperature.

Switching the Air Conditioning Onand Off

Press and release the button.

Use air conditioning with recirculated airto improve cooling performance andefficiency.Note: In certain conditions (for example,maximum defrost) the air conditioningcompressor may continue to operate eventhough you switch off the air conditioning.

Switching the Climate Control Onand Off


Switching Defrost On and OffPress and release the button todistribute air through thewindshield air vents and

de-mister.

129


Climate Control

Air directed to the instrument panel andfootwell air vents turns off. You can alsouse this setting to defog and clear thewindshield of a thin covering of ice.

Switching Maximum AirConditioning On and Off

Press and release the button formaximum cooling.

The left-hand and right-hand settings setto LO, recirculated air flows through theinstrument panel air vents, air conditioningturns on and the blower motor adjusts tothe highest speed.

Switching Recirculated Air On andOff

Press and release the button toswitch between outside air andrecirculated air.

The air currently in the passengercompartment recirculates. This mayreduce the time needed to cool the interior(when used with A/C) and reduceunwanted odors from entering your vehicle.Note: Recirculated air may turn off (orprevent you from switching on) in all air flowmodes except MAX A/C to reduce the riskof fogging. Recirculation may also turn onand off in various air distribution controlcombinations during hot weather in orderto improve cooling efficiency.

Locking the Rear Climate Control

E266664


When illuminated, you can only operatethe rear passenger settings through thefront controls.

Setting the Rear Blower MotorSpeed

Press and release + or - to adjustthe volume of air circulated inthe rear passenger

compartment.

Setting the Rear Temperature

E265400

Press and release + or - to setthe temperature in the rearpassenger compartment.

Switching the Rear ClimateControl On and Off


AUTOMATIC CLIMATECONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:SONY AM/FM/CDNote: You can switch temperature unitsbetween Fahrenheit and Celsius. See yourSYNC information.

Setting the Blower Motor SpeedPress and release + or - to adjustthe volume of air circulated inthe vehicle.

Setting the Temperature

E265400

Press and release + or - on the left-handside of the climate control to set theleft-hand temperature.Note: This control also adjusts theright-hand side temperature when youswitch off dual zone mode.

130


Climate Control

Press and release + or - on the right-handside of the climate control to set theright-hand temperature.

Switching Auto Mode On and OffPress and release the button toswitch on automatic operation,then set the temperature.

The system adjusts the blower motorspeed, air distribution, air conditioningoperation, and outside or recirculated airto reach and maintain the temperature youhave set.Note: You can also switch off dual zonemode by pressing and holding the buttonfor more than two seconds.


de-mister.







Switching the Climate ControlledSeats On and Off

E265282

Press and release the button tocycle through the various climatecontrolled seat settings and off.

See Climate Controlled Seats (page 155).

Switching Dual Zone Mode On andOff

E265280

Press and release the button toswitch on temperature controlfor the right-hand side of the

vehicle.

Switching the Heated Seats Onand Off

Press and release the button tocycle through the various heatsettings and off.

See Heated Seats (page 154).




131


Climate Control

Switching Maximum Defrost Onand Off

Press and release the button formaximum defrosting.

The left-hand and right-hand settings setto HI, air flows through the windshield airvents, and the blower motor adjusts to thehighest speed.You can also use this setting to defog andclear the windshield of a thin covering ofice.Note: To prevent window fogging, youcannot select recirculated air whenmaximum defrost is on.Note: The heated rear window also turnson when you select maximum defrost.




AUTOMATIC CLIMATECONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:PREMIUM AM/FM/CDNote: You can switch temperature unitsbetween Fahrenheit and Celsius. See yourSYNC information.

Directing Air to the InstrumentPanel Air Vents

Press and release the button todirect airflow to instrumentpanel air vents.

Directing Air to the Footwell AirVents

Press and release the button todirect airflow to footwell airvents.

Setting the Blower Motor SpeedPress and release + or - to adjustthe volume of air circulated inthe vehicle.

Setting the TemperaturePress the toggle button on the left-handside of the climate control upward ordownward to set the left-handtemperature.Note: This control also adjusts theright-hand side temperature when youswitch off dual zone mode.Press the toggle button on the right-handside of the climate control upward ordownward to set the right-handtemperature.

Switching Auto Mode On and OffPress and release the button toswitch on automatic operation,then set the temperature.

132


Climate Control

The system adjusts the blower motorspeed, air distribution, air conditioningoperation, and outside or recirculated airto reach and maintain the temperature youhave set.Note: You can also switch off dual zonemode by pressing and holding the buttonfor more than two seconds.


de-mister.








E265280

Press and release the button toswitch on temperature controlfor the right-hand side of the

vehicle.








Press and release the button formaximum defrosting.

The left-hand and right-hand settings setto HI, air flows through the windshield airvents, and the blower motor adjusts to thehighest speed.You can also use this setting to defog andclear the windshield of a thin covering ofice.Note: To prevent window fogging, youcannot select recirculated air whenmaximum defrost is on.Note: The heated rear window also turnson when you select maximum defrost.



133


Climate Control


HINTS ON CONTROLLING THEINTERIOR CLIMATEGeneral HintsNote: Prolonged use of recirculated air maycause the windows to fog up.Note: You may feel a small amount of airfrom the footwell air vents regardless of theair distribution setting.Note: To reduce humidity build-up insideyour vehicle, do not drive with the systemswitched off or with recirculated air alwaysswitched on.Note: Do not place objects under the frontseats as this may interfere with the airflowto the rear seats.Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves fromthe air intake area at the base of thewindshield.

Note: To improve the time to reach acomfortable temperature in hot weather,drive with the windows open until you feelcold air through the air vents.

Manual Climate ControlNote: To reduce fogging of the windshieldduring humid weather, adjust the airdistribution control to the windshield airvents position.

Automatic Climate ControlNote: Adjusting the settings when yourvehicle interior is extremely hot or cold isnot necessary. The system automaticallyadjusts to heat or cool the interior to yourselected temperature as quickly as possible.For the system to function efficiently, theinstrument panel and side air vents shouldbe fully open.Note: If you select AUTO during coldtemperatures, the system directs airflow tothe windshield and side window vents. Inaddition, the fan may run at a slower speeduntil the engine warms up.Note: If you select AUTO during hottemperatures and the inside of the vehicleis hot, the system automatically usesrecirculated air to maximize interior cooling.Fan speed may also reduce until the aircools.

134


Climate Control

Quickly Heating the Interior

Automatic climate controlManual climate control

Press AUTO.Adjust the fan speed to the highestsetting.

1

Adjust the temperature control to thedesired setting.

Adjust the temperature control to thefull heat setting.

2

Direct air to the footwell using the airdistribution buttons.

3

Recommended Settings for Heating


Press AUTO.Adjust the fan speed to the centersetting.

1

Adjust the temperature control to thedesired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as astarting point, then adjust the setting asnecessary.

Adjust the temperature control to themidway point of the hot settings.

2

Direct air to the footwell using the airdistribution buttons.

3

Quickly Cooling the Interior


Select MAX A/C.Select MAX A/C.1

Drive with the windows open until youfeel cold air through the air vents.

2

135


Climate Control

Recommended Settings for Cooling


Press AUTO.Adjust the fan speed to the centersetting.

1


Adjust the temperature control to themidway point of the cold settings.

2

Direct air to the instrument panel usingthe air distribution buttons.

3

Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather


Press the defrost button.Direct air to the windshield using the airdistribution buttons.

1


Press A/C.2

Adjust the temperature control to thedesired setting.

3

Adjust the fan speed to the highestsetting.

4

REAR PASSENGER CLIMATECONTROLSDirecting Air to the Overhead AirVents

Press and release the button todirect airflow to the overhead airvents.

Directing Air to the Rear FootwellAir Vents

Press and release the button todirect airflow to rear footwell airvents.

Rear Climate Control LockIndicator

When illuminated, you can onlyoperate the rear passengersettings through the front

controls.

136


Climate Control

Setting the Rear Blower MotorSpeed

E265389

Turn the control to adjust the volume ofair circulated in the rear passengercompartment.

Setting the Rear Temperature

E265862

Turn the control to set the temperature inthe rear passenger compartment.

Switching the Rear Heated SeatsOn and Off



HEATED REAR WINDOW

E184884

Press the button to clear the rearwindow of thin ice and fog. Theheated rear window turns off

after a short period of time.Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razorblades or other sharp objects to clean orremove decals from the inside of the heatedrear window. The vehicle warranty may notcover damage to the heated rear windowgrid lines.

HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORSWhen you switch the heated rear windowon, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrorswith a scraper or adjust the mirror glasswhen it is frozen in place.Note: Do not clean the mirror housing orglass with harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum-based cleaning products. Thevehicle warranty may not cover damagecaused to the mirror housing or glass.

137


Climate Control

CABIN AIR FILTERYour vehicle is equipped with a cabin airfilter, which gives you and your passengersthe following benefits:• It improves your driving comfort by

reducing particle concentration.• It improves the interior compartment

cleanliness.• It protects the climate control

components from particle deposits.You can locate the cabin air filter behindthe glove box.Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filterinstalled at all times. This prevents foreignobjects from entering the system. Runningthe system without a filter in place couldresult in degradation or damage to thesystem.Replace the filter at regular intervals. SeeScheduled Maintenance (page 495).For additional cabin air filter information,or to replace the filter, see an authorizeddealer.

REMOTE STARTThe climate control system adjusts theinterior temperature during remote start.You can switch this feature on or off andadjust the settings using the informationdisplay controls. See InformationDisplays (page 104).You cannot adjust the climate controlsetting during remote start operation.Switch the ignition on to makeadjustments.

Based on your remote start settings, thefollowing vehicle-dependent features mayor may not remain on after remote startingyour vehicle:• Climate controlled seats.• Heated steering wheel.• Heated mirrors.• Heated rear window.• Windshield wiper de-icer.Note: For dual zone climate controlledseats, the passenger seat setting defaultsto match the driver seat during remote start.

Automatic SettingsIf Auto is on, the system sets the interiortemperature to 72°F (22°C) and heats orcools the vehicle interior as required toachieve comfort.Note: In cold weather, the heated rearwindow and heated mirrors turn on.

Last SettingsIf Last Settings is on, the system uses thesettings last selected before you turnedoff the vehicle.

Heated and Cooled FeaturesIn Auto mode, certain heated features mayswitch on during cold weather, and cooledfeatures during hot weather.

138


Climate Control

SITTING IN THE CORRECTPOSITION

WARNING: Sitting improperly, outof position or with the seatback reclinedtoo far can take weight off the seatcushion and affect the decision of thepassenger sensing system, resulting inserious injury or death in the event of acrash. Always sit upright against yourseat back, with your feet on the floor.

WARNING: Do not recline theseatback too far as this can cause theoccupant to slide under the seatbelt,resulting in serious injury in the event ofa collision.

WARNING: Do not place objectshigher than the top of the seat backrest.Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in personal injury or death in theevent of a sudden stop or crash.

E68595

When you use them properly, the seat,head restraint, seatbelt and airbags willprovide optimum protection in the eventof a crash.

We recommend that you follow theseguidelines:• Sit in an upright position with the base

of your spine as far back as possible.• Do not recline the seat backrest so that

your torso is more than 30° from theupright position.

• Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of it is level with the top of yourhead and as far forward as possible.Make sure that you remaincomfortable.

• Keep sufficient distance betweenyourself and the steering wheel. Werecommend a minimum of 10 in(25 cm) between your breastbone andthe airbag cover.

• Hold the steering wheel with your armsslightly bent.

• Bend your legs slightly so that you canpress the pedals fully.

• Position the shoulder strap of theseatbelt over the center of yourshoulder and position the lap straptightly across your hips.

Make sure that your driving position iscomfortable and that you can maintain fullcontrol of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING: Fully adjust the headrestraint before you sit in or operate yourvehicle. This will help minimize the riskof neck injury in the event of a crash. Donot adjust the head restraint when yourvehicle is moving.

139


Seats

WARNING: The head restraint isa safety device. Whenever possible itshould be installed and properlyadjusted when the seat is occupied.Failure to adjust the head restraintproperly could reduce its effectivenessduring certain impacts.

Note: Adjust the seatback to an uprightdriving position before adjusting the headrestraint. Adjust the head restraint so thatthe top of it is level with the top of your headand as far forward as possible. Make surethat you remain comfortable. If you areextremely tall, adjust the head restraint toits highest position.Front seat head restraints

E138642

Second-row center seat head restraint(If equipped)

E138645

The head restraints consist of:

An energy absorbing headrestraint.

A

Two steel stems.BGuide sleeve adjust and releasebutton.

C

Guide sleeve unlock and removebutton.

D

Adjusting the Head RestraintRaising the Head RestraintPull the head restraint up.

Lowering the Head Restraint1. Press and hold button C.2. Push the head restraint down.

Removing the Head Restraint1. Pull the head restraint up until it

reaches its highest position.2. Press and hold buttons C and D.3. Pull the head restraint up.

140


Seats

Installing the Head RestraintAlign the steel stems into the guide sleevesand push the head restraint down until itlocks.

Second-row outboard seat headrestraints

E201128



A

Two steel stems.BGuide sleeve unlock and removebutton.

C

Fold button.D

Folding the Head Restraint1. Press and hold button D.2. Pull the head restraint back up to reset.

Removing the Head Restraint1. Fold the head restraint.2. Press and hold both C buttons.3. Pull the head restraint up.

Installing the Head RestraintAlign the steel stems into the guide sleevesand push the head restraint down until itlocks.

Third-row head restraints

E190836



A

Two steel stems.BFold strap.C

Folding the Head RestraintPull the fold strap (C). Pull the headrestraint back up to reset.Note: Press the stow or fold button on thepower folding seats to automatically foldthe head restraint.

Tilting Head RestraintsThe front head restraints tilt for extracomfort. To tilt the head restraint, do thefollowing:

141


Seats

E144727

1. Adjust the seatback to an uprightdriving or riding position.

2. Pivot the head restraint forward towardyour head to the desired position.

After the head restraint reaches theforward-most tilt position, pivot it forwardagain to release it to the rearward, un-tiltedposition.

MANUAL SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

Moving the Seat Backward andForward

WARNING: Do not adjust thedriver seat or seat backrest when yourvehicle is moving. This may result insudden seat movement, causing the lossof control of your vehicle.

WARNING: Make sure the seatfully locks into place by rocking itbackward and forward. Not securing theseat into the locked position can bedangerous in a crash and could causeserious personal injury or death.

E190838

Recline Adjustment


WARNING: Do not place cargo orany objects behind the seat backrestbefore returning it to the original position.Pull on the seat backrest to make surethat it has fully latched after returningthe seat backrest to its original position.An unlatched seat may becomedangerous if you stop suddenly or havea crash.

E190837

142


Seats

Lumbar Adjustment (If Equipped)

E190839

POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Do not adjust thedriver seat or seat backrest when yourvehicle is moving. This may result insudden seat movement, causing the lossof control of your vehicle.

WARNING: Do not place cargo orany objects behind the seatback beforereturning it to the original position.

10-Way Seat Controls

E176038

143


Seats

Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If

Equipped)

E176039

8-Way Seat Controls

E275199

Adjusting the Multi-Contour FrontSeats With Active Motion (If Equipped)

Note: The engine must be running or thevehicle must be in accessory mode toactivate the seats.

Note: Allow a few seconds for any selectionto activate. The seat backrest and cushionmassage cannot function at the same time.

144


Seats

E156301

Lumbar and Bolster ModeMassage Mode

Upper lumbarBack massage intensityadjustment

A

Lumbar decreaseMassage intensity decreaseand off*

B

Lower lumbar**Cushion massage intensityadjustment

C

Lumbar increaseMassage intensity increaseD

-On and offE

*The massage feature defaults to analternating massage mode with backmassage intensity adjustment. The lumbarand bolster feature defaults to the middlelumbar mode.**Press C a second time to adjust the backbolster. Press C a third time to adjust thecushion bolster.You can also adjust this feature throughthe touchscreen. When switched on, thesystem displays directions for you to adjustthe lumbar settings in your seat or to setthe massage function.To access and make adjustments to thelumbar setting:1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle

> Multi-Contour Seat.

2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar

intensity.To access and make adjustments to themassage setting:1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle

>Multi-Contour Seat.2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.3. Press Off, Lo or Hi.

145


Seats

MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Before activating thememory seat, make sure that the areaimmediately surrounding the seat is clearof obstructions and that all occupantsare clear of moving parts.

WARNING: Do not use thememory function when your vehicle ismoving.

This feature automatically recalls theposition of the following:• Driver seat.• Power mirrors.• Optional power adjustable foot pedals.• Optional power steering column.The memory control is on the driver door.

E142554

Saving a PreSet Position1. Switch the ignition on.2. Adjust the memory features to your

desired position.3. Press and hold the desired preset

button until you hear a single tone.You can save up to three preset memorypositions. You can save a memory presetat any time.

Recalling a PreSet PositionPress and release the preset buttonassociated with your desired drivingposition. The memory features move tothe position stored for that preset.Note: You can only recall a preset memoryposition when the ignition is off, or when thetransmission is in park (P) or neutral (N)and the vehicle is not moving if the ignitionis on.You can also recall a preset memoryposition by:• Pressing the unlock button on your

intelligent access key fob if it is linkedto a preset position.

• Unlocking the intelligent driver doorhandle if a linked key fob is present.

Note: Using a linked key fob to recall yourmemory position when the ignition is offmoves the seat to the Easy Entry position.Note: Pressing any active memory featureadjustment control, or any memory buttonduring a memory recall, cancels theoperation.

Linking a PreSet Position to yourRemote Control or IntelligentAccess Key FobYour vehicle can save the preset memorypositions for up to three remote controlsor intelligent access (IA) keys.1. With the ignition on, move the memory

features to the desired positions.2. Press and hold the desired preset

button for about five seconds. A tonesounds after about two seconds.Continue holding until you hear asecond tone.

3. Within three seconds, press the lockbutton on the remote control you arelinking.

146


Seats

To unlink a remote control, follow thesame procedure – except in step 3, pressthe unlock button on the remote control.Note: If more than one linked remotecontrol or intelligent access key is in range,the memory function moves to the settingsof the first key to recall a memory position.

Easy Entry and Exit FeatureIf you enable the easy entry and exitfeature, it automatically moves the driverseat position rearward up to 2 in (5 cm)when you switch the ignition off.The driver seat returns to the previousposition when you switch the ignition on.You can enable or disable this featurethrough the information display. SeeInformation Displays (page 104).

REAR SEATSAdjusting the Rear SeatsSecond Row Seats


WARNING: Reclining the seatbackcan cause an occupant to slide under theseat's seatbelt, resulting in severepersonal injuries in the event of a crash.

Recline Adjustment

E190840

Lift the handle to adjust the seatbackrearward or forward. The seatback canalso fold forward until it is flat.Fold flat seatback

E213288

Lift the handle and fold the seatbackforward until it is flat.Note: For the bench seats, make sure thecenter seatbelt is unbuckled before foldingthe seatback.

147


Seats

Moving the Seats Backward andForward (If Equipped)

E190838

Third Row Seats (Manual Seats)


WARNING: Do not adjust a seator release a seat floor latch when thevehicle is moving. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injuryor death in a sudden stop or crash.

Note: Remove items from the second-rowseat. Make sure that no bulky objects suchas purses or briefcases are on the floor infront of the second-row seats beforetumbling them.Note: For second-row bench seats, makesure the center seatbelt is unbuckled beforefolding the seatback.Note: You may have to move the front-rowseat forward to allow the second-row seatto be fully tumbled.

Note: You may have to lower the centerhead restraint. See Head Restraints (page139).Fold and tumble the second-row seat toaccess the third row:

E193964

1. Fold the outboard head restraint.

E213288

2. Lift the handle on the side of the seatto fold the seatback flat.

148


Seats

E190844

3. Lift the handle all the way up until theseat releases from the floor. Rotate theseat forward to allow access to thethird row.

E190845

4. To return the seatback to the floor fromthe tumbled position, rotate the seatdown until you hear it latching to thefloor.

E190846

5. Lift the seatback toward the rear of thevehicle, and rotate the seatback untilyou hear a click, locking it in the uprightposition. Note: The seatback will notraise if the rear latch hooks are notproperly engaged to the floor striker. Ifthe seatback does not raise, thenrepeat Step 4.

6. Pull the head restraint back up to itsnormal adjusted position.

E190847

Make sure that the rear latch hooks areproperly engaged with the floor striker.Note: Make sure that the seat and seatbackare latched securely in position. Keep floorarea free of objects that would preventproper seat engagement.

Third Row Seat Access (Power Foldand Tumble Seat-If equipped)

WARNING: Do not fold a seat if itis occupied. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injury.

149


Seats

E190848

The control is at the back of the rear dooropening. Press and hold it to fold theseatback down and tumble the seatforward for access to the third row.

Third Row Seat Exit (Manual Seat,Power Fold and Tumble Seat)

WARNING: Do not place cargo orany objects behind the seatback beforereturning it to the original position.

WARNING: Check under the seatcushion to make sure no cargo or objectsare under the seat cushion beforereturning the seat cushion to its originalposition, and that the seat cushion locksinto place. Failure to do so may preventthe seat from operating properly in theevent of a crash, which could increasethe risk of serious injury.

WARNING: Do not adjust a seator release a seat floor latch when thevehicle is moving. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injuryor death in a sudden stop or crash.

WARNING: Do not drive yourvehicle with a seat that is unlatched orin the folded position. Failure to followthis instruction could result in personalinjury or death in the event of a suddenstop or crash.

Note: You may have to lower the centerhead restraint. See Head Restraints (page139).

E193964

1. Fold the outboard head restraint.

E190849

2. Pull on the strap on the back of thesecond row seat. This folds theseatback forward. Pull the strap asecond time to tumble the seatforward, allowing easy exit from thethird row seat.

150


Seats

E190850

3. To return the seatback to the floor fromthe tumbled position, rotate the seatdown until you hear it latching to thefloor.

E190846

4. Lift the seatback toward the rear of thevehicle, and rotate the seatback untilyou hear a click, locking it in the uprightposition. Note: The seatback will notraise if the rear latch hooks are notproperly engaged to the floor striker. Ifthe seatback does not raise, thenrepeat Step 3.

5. Pull the head restraint back up to itsnormal adjusted position.

E190847

Make sure that the rear latch hooks areproperly engaged with the floor striker.Note: Make sure that the seat and seatbackare latched securely in position. Keep floorarea free of objects that would preventproper seat engagement.

Folding the Third Row Manual Seat1. Remove all objects from the seat and

stowage tub.

E193843

2. Fold the outboard head restraint bypulling the head restraint release strap.

151


Seats

E190854

3. From the rear of the vehicle, fold theseatback by pulling and holding the redstrap while pushing the seatbackforward. Release the strap once theseatback starts rotating forward.

E190923

4. Release the cushion latches by pullingthe short black strap while pulling onthe strap at the top of the seatback.This tumbles the seat all the way intothe tub in the floor.

Note: Do not use the seat anchors as cargotie downs.

E190924

Note: Do not use the third row seat back asa load floor when the seatback is folded.Note: Make sure that the area under theseat is free of objects before stowing it.

Unfolding the Third Row Manual Seat


WARNING: Do not sit in seats thatare rearward facing when your vehicle ismoving. This is not a correct seatingposition and the seatbelts do notproperly function this way. Failure tofollow this instruction could result inpersonal injury or death in a sudden stopor crash.

152


Seats

E190927

Note: Make sure that there are no objectssuch as books, purses or briefcases on theload floor before unstowing the seat. Failureto remove all objects from the top of theload floor prior to unstowing it may causedamage to the seat.Note: Make sure the area under the loadfloor is free of objects before unstowing it.

E190925

1. Unlatch and lift the seat out of the tubin the floor by squeezing and pulling upon the handle. Once the seat is in avertical position, push the seat over,letting it fall onto the latches.

E190926

2. To return the seatback to the uprightposition, pull the red strap. Then whileholding the red strap, pull the longstrap on the seatback to raise theseatback.

3. Pull the head restraints up to theirnormal positions.

PowerFold™Third Row Seats (IfEquipped)The third row power seat buttons arebehind the third row seats on the left-handquarter trim panel.

E213286

NORMAL: Press to return theseat to the normal seatingposition.

A

STOW: Press to stow the seatinto the tub floor.

B

153


Seats

FOLD: Press to fold down theseatback.

C

RH / BOTH / LH: Press to selectthe normal, stow and fold modesto activate the right-hand seat,the left-hand seat or both.

D

Note: The third row seat includes obstacledetection that allows the seat to stop andreverse direction if it hits an obstacle so thatthe obstacle can be removed.Note: Pressing a different button while thepower seat feature is already beingperformed may cause the first selected seatmovement to be cancelled. Allow the firstseat movement to be completed beforepressing a button for another function.Note: Make sure that there are no objectssuch as books, purses or briefcases on theload floor before unstowing the seat. Failureto remove all objects from the top of theload floor prior to unstowing it may causedamage to the seat.Note: In order to allow the seat to completethe stowed position, do not place objectsunder the seat before stowing. Remove allobjects from the seat and stowage tub.Note: In the unlikely event that the thirdrow power seat stops prematurely or travelsto an unexpected position, press the FOLDbutton (C) to reset the seat and return it toa normal position.These seats feature a power one-touchoperation that allows you fold and stowthe seats.• The power fold seats work only when

the transmission is in park (P) and theliftgate is open.

• If the ignition is off and the feature isstill running, the battery saver turns itoff after 10 minutes. Press unlock onthe remote entry key transmitter toreactivate the power seats or unlock itwith the keyless entry keypad. SeeRemote Control (page 53).

HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

Front Seats

WARNING: People who are unableto feel pain to their skin because ofadvanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,spinal cord injury, medication, alcoholuse, exhaustion or other physicalconditions, must exercise care whenusing the heated seat. The heated seatmay cause burns even at lowtemperatures, especially if used for longperiods of time. Do not place anythingon the seat that insulates against heat,such as a blanket or cushion. This maycause the heated seat to overheat. Donot puncture the seat with pins, needlesor other pointed objects. This maydamage the heating element which maycause the heated seat to overheat. Anoverheated seat may cause seriouspersonal injury.

Do not do the following:• Place heavy objects on the seat.• Operate the heated seat if water or any

other liquid spills on the seat. Allow theseat to dry thoroughly.

Note: The engine must be running to usethis feature.

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cyclethrough the various heat settings and off.More indicator lights indicate warmersettings.

154


Seats

Note: The heated seats may remain onafter you remote start your vehicle, basedon your remote start settings. The heatedseats may also turn on when you start yourvehicle if they were on when you switchedyour vehicle off.

Second Row Heated Seats (If Equipped)

WARNING: People who are unableto feel pain to their skin because ofadvanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,spinal cord injury, medication, alcoholuse, exhaustion or other physicalconditions, must exercise care whenusing the heated seat. The heated seatmay cause burns even at lowtemperatures, especially if used for longperiods of time. Do not place anythingon the seat that insulates against heat,such as a blanket or cushion. This maycause the heated seat to overheat. Donot puncture the seat with pins, needlesor other pointed objects. This maydamage the heating element which maycause the heated seat to overheat. Anoverheated seat may cause seriouspersonal injury.

Do not do the following:• Place heavy objects on the seat.• Operate the seat heater if water or any



E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cyclethrough the various heat settings and off.More indicator lights indicate warmersettings.Note: The heated seats may remain onafter you remote start your vehicle, basedon your remote start settings. The heatedseats may also turn on when you start yourvehicle if they were on when you switchedyour vehicle off.

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS(IF EQUIPPED)

Heated Seats

WARNING: People who are unableto feel pain to their skin because ofadvanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,spinal cord injury, medication, alcoholuse, exhaustion or other physicalconditions, must use caution when usingthe heated seat. The heated seat maycause burns even at low temperatures,especially if used for long periods of time.Do not place anything on the seat thatmay block the heat, such as a blanket orcushion. This can cause the heated seatto overheat. Do not puncture the seatwith pins, needles or other pointedobjects. This damages the heatingelement and can cause the heated seatto overheat. An overheated seat maycause serious personal injury.

Do not do the following:• Place heavy objects on the seat.• Operate the heated seat if water or any



155


Seats

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cyclethrough the various heat settings and off.More indicator lights indicate warmersettings.Note: The heated seats may remain onafter you remote start your vehicle, basedon your remote start settings. The heatedseats may also turn on when you start yourvehicle if they were on when you switchedyour vehicle off.

Cooled SeatsNote: The engine must be running to usethis feature.

E146309

Press the cooled seat symbol to cyclethrough the various cool settings and off.More indicator lights indicate coolersettings.Note: The cooled seats may remain on afteryou remote start your vehicle, based on yourremote start settings. The cooled seats mayalso turn on when you start your vehicle ifthey were on when you switched yourvehicle off.

Climate Controlled Seat Air FilterReplacementYour vehicle has lifetime air filters that areintegrated with the seats. Regularmaintenance or replacement is notrequired.

156


Seats

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOROPENERHomeLink Wireless ControlSystem

WARNING: Do not use the systemwith any garage door opener that doesnot have the safety stop and reversefeature as required by U.S. FederalSafety Standards (this includes anygarage door opener manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982). A garage dooropener which cannot detect an object,signaling the door to stop and reverse,does not meet current federal safetystandards. Using a garage door openerwithout these features increases the riskof serious injury or death.

Note: Make sure that the garage door andsecurity device are free from obstructionwhen you are programming. Do not programthe system with the vehicle in the garage.Note: Make sure you keep the originalremote control transmitter for use in othervehicles as well as for future systemprogramming.Note: We recommend that upon the saleor lease termination of your vehicle, youerase the programmed function buttons forsecurity reasons. See Erasing the FunctionButton Codes.Note: You can program a maximum ofthree devices. To change or replace any ofthe three devices after it has been initiallyprogrammed, you must first erase thecurrent settings. See Erasing the FunctionButton Codes.

E142657

The universal garage door opener replacesthe common hand-held garage dooropener with a three-button transmitterthat is integrated into the driver’s sun visor.The system includes two primary features,a garage door opener and a platform forremote activation of devices within thehome. As well as being programmed forgarage doors, the system transmitter canbe programmed to operate entry gateoperators, security systems, entry doorlocks and home or office lighting.Additional system information can befound online at www.homelink.com,www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex orby calling the toll-free help line on1-800-355-3515.

In-Vehicle ProgrammingThis process is to program your hand-heldtransmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLinkbutton.Note: The programming steps belowassume you will be programming HomeLinkthat was not previously programmed.Note: Put a new battery in the hand-heldtransmitter. This will ensure quicker trainingand accurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

157


Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)

E142658

1. With your vehicle parked outside of thegarage, turn your ignition to the onposition, but do not start your vehicle.

2. Hold your hand-held garage doortransmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) awayfrom the HomeLink button you wantto program.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously,press and hold the desired HomeLinkbutton and the hand-held transmitterbutton. DO NOT release either one untilthe HomeLink indicator light flashesslowly and then rapidly. When theindicator light flashes rapidly, bothbuttons may be released. The rapidflashing indicates successful training.

Note: You may need to use a differentmethod if you live in Canada or havedifficulties programming your gate operatoror garage door opener. See Gate Operator/ Canadian Programming.4. Press and hold the HomeLink button

you programmed for two seconds, thenrelease. You may need to do this twiceto activate the door. If your garage doordoes not operate, watch the HomeLinkindicator light.

If the indicator light stays on, theprogramming is complete. No furtheraction is needed.If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2seconds and then turns to a constant light,the HomeLink button is not programmedyet. See Programming Your Garage DoorOpener Motor.

To program additional buttons, repeatSteps 1 – 4.For questions or comments, please contactHomeLink at www.homelink.com,www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or1-800-355-3515.

Programming Your Garage DoorOpener MotorNote: You may need a ladder to reach theunit and you may need to remove the coveror lamp lens on your garage door opener.

E142659

1. Press the learn button on the garagedoor opener motor and then you have30 seconds to complete the next twosteps.

2. Return to your vehicle.

E142658

3. Press and hold the function button youwant to program for 2 seconds, thenrelease. Repeat this step. Dependingon your brand of garage door opener,you may need to repeat this sequencea third time.

158



Gate Operator / CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws requiretransmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)after several seconds of transmission –which may not be long enough forHomeLink to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similar to this Canadian law,some U.S. gate operators are designed to“time-out” in the same manner.Note: If programming a garage door openeror gate operator, it is advised to unplug thedevice during the “cycling” process toprevent possible overheating.1. Press and hold the HomeLink button

while you press and release, every twoseconds, your hand-held transmitteruntil the HomeLink indicator lightchanges from a slow to a rapidlyblinking light.

2. Release both the HomeLink andhand-held transmitter buttons.

3. Continue programing HomeLink. SeeIn-Vehicle Programming.

Erasing the Function Button CodesNote: You cannot erase individual buttons.

E142660

1. Press and hold the outer two functionbuttons simultaneously forapproximately 20 seconds until theindicator lights above the buttons flashrapidly.

2. When the indicator lights flash, releasethe buttons. The codes for all buttonsare erased.

Reprogramming a Single ButtonTo program a device to a previously trainedbutton, follow these steps:1. Press and hold the desired button. Do

NOT release the button.2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing thebutton, follow Step 1 in theProgramming section.

For questions or comments, contactHomeLink at www.homelink.com,www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or1-800-355-3515.

Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2Garage Door OpenerNote: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmittermust already be programmed to operatewith the garage door opener.Note: To program HomeLink to thetransmitter you must first put thetransmitter into programming mode.

159



BAE142661

Red indicator lightA.Green indicator lightB.

1. Press and hold one of the buttons onthe hand-held transmitter for 10seconds. The indicator light will changefrom green to red and green.

2. Press the same button twice to confirmthe change to programming mode. Ifdone properly the indicator light willappear red.

3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 in(2–8 cm) of the button on the visor youwant to program.

4. Press and hold both the programmedGenie button on the hand-heldtransmitter and the button you wantto program. The indicator light on thevisor will flash rapidly when theprogramming is successful.

Note: The Genie transmitter will transmitfor up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does notprogram within 30 seconds the Genietransmitter will need to be pressed again. Ifthe Genie transmitter indicator light displaysgreen and red, release the button until theindicator light turns off before pressing thebutton again.Once HomeLink has been programmedsuccessfully, the Genie transmitter mustbe changed out of program mode. To dothis:

1. Press and hold the previouslyprogrammed Genie button on thehand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.The indicator light will change from redto red and green.

2. Press the same button twice to confirmthe change. If done correctly theindicator light will turn green.

Programming HomeLink to the GenieIntellicode Garage Door Opener MotorNote: You may need a ladder to access thegarage door opener motor.

E142662

1. Press and hold the program button onthe garage door opener motor untilboth blue indicator lights turn on.

2. Release the program button. Only thesmaller round indicator light should beon.

3. Press and release the program button.The larger purple indicator light willflash.

Note: The next two steps must becompleted in 30 seconds.4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode

2 hand-held transmitter’s previouslyprogrammed button. Both indicatorlights on the garage door opener motorunit should now flash purple.

160



5. Press and hold the previouslyprogrammed button on the visor for 2seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 timesuntil the garage door moves.

Programming is now complete.

Clearing a HomeLink DeviceTo erase programming from the threeHomeLink buttons press and hold the twoouter HomeLink buttons until the indicatorlight begins to flash. The indicator light willbegin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at whichtime both buttons should be released.Programming has now been erased, andthe indicator light should blink slowly toindicate the device is in train mode whenany of the three HomeLink buttons arepressed.

FCC and RSS-210 Industry CanadaComplianceThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.Changes or modifications to your devicenot expressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance can void theuser’s authority to operate the equipment.

161



12 Volt DC Power Point

WARNING: Do not plug optionalelectrical accessories into the cigarlighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigarlighter can cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty, and can resultin fire or serious injury.

Note: When you switch the ignition on, youcan use the socket to power 12 voltappliances with a maximum current ratingof 15 amps.If the power supply does not work after youswitch the ignition off, switch the ignitionon.Note: Do not hang any accessory from theaccessory plug.Note: Do not use the power point over thevehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts ora fuse may blow.Note: Always keep the power point capsclosed when not in use.Do not insert objects other than anaccessory plug into the power point. Thisdamages the power point and may blowthe fuse.Run the vehicle for full capacity use of thepower point.To prevent the battery from running out ofcharge:• Do not use the power point longer than

necessary when the vehicle is notrunning.

• Do not leave devices plugged inovernight or when you park your vehiclefor extended periods.

Note: Timed power points remain on for 30minutes if the vehicle is in accessory mode.If you switch the vehicle off, the timedpower points remain on for 75 minutes.

LocationsPower points may be in the followinglocations:• On the front of the center console.• Inside the center console.• On the rear of the center console.• In the cargo area.

110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)

WARNING: Do not keep electricaldevices plugged in the power pointwhenever the device is not in use. Do notuse any extension cord with the 110 voltAC power point, since it will defeat thesafety protection design. Doing so maycause the power point to overload dueto powering multiple devices that canreach beyond the 150 watt load limit andcould result in fire or serious injury.

Note: The power point turns off when youswitch the ignition off, or when the batteryvoltage drops below 11 volts.You can use the power point for electricdevices that require up to 150 watts. It ison the rear of the center console.

E247586

162


Auxiliary Power Points

When the indicator light on the power pointis:• On: The power point is working, the

ignition is on and a device is pluggedin.

• Off: The power point is off, the ignitionis off or no device is plugged in.

• Flashing: The power point is in faultmode.

The power outlet temporarily turns offpower when in fault mode if the deviceexceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug yourdevice and switch the ignition off. Switchthe ignition back on, but do not plug yourdevice back in. Let the system cool off andswitch the ignition off to reset the faultmode. Switch the ignition back on andmake sure the indicator light remains on.Do not use the power point for certainelectric devices, including:• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,

electric saws and other electric powertools or compressor-drivenrefrigerators.

• Measuring devices, which processprecise data, such as medicalequipment or measuring equipment.

• Other appliances requiring anextremely stable power supply such asmicrocomputer-controlled electricblankets or touch-sensor lamps.

163


Auxiliary Power Points

CENTER CONSOLEStow items in the cup holder carefully asitems may become loose during hardbraking, acceleration or crashes, includinghot drinks which may spill.Available console features include:

E226487

USB port and SD card.APower point.BCup holder.CTerrain control and hill descentcontrol.

D

AC power point or USB port.ERear climate controls.FAC power point.GUSB smart charger.H

Second Row Center Console (If

Equipped)

E211667

Cup holder.AFlip forward armrest.BUtility compartment.C

Rear Seat Armrest

E190042

164


Storage Compartments

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

E224352

Press near the rear edge of the door toopen it.

165


Storage Compartments

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING: Extended idling at highengine speeds can produce very hightemperatures in the engine and exhaustsystem, creating the risk of fire or otherdamage.

WARNING: Do not park, idle ordrive your vehicle on dry grass or otherdry ground cover. The emission systemheats up the engine compartment andexhaust system, creating the risk of fire.

WARNING: Do not start the enginein a closed garage or in other enclosedareas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic.Always open the garage door before youstart the engine.

WARNING: Exhaust leaks mayresult in entry of harmful and potentiallylethal fumes into the passengercompartment. If you smell exhaustfumes inside your vehicle, have yourvehicle inspected immediately. Do notdrive if you smell exhaust fumes.

If you disconnect the battery, your vehiclemay exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics for approximately 5 mi(8 km) after you reconnect it. This isbecause the engine management systemmust realign itself with the engine. Youcan disregard any unusual drivingcharacteristics during this period.The powertrain control system meets allCanadian interference-causing equipmentstandard requirements regulating theimpulse electrical field or radio noise.

When you start the engine, avoid pressingthe accelerator pedal before and duringoperation. Only use the accelerator pedalwhen you have difficulty starting theengine.

IGNITION SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED)

E72128

0 (off) - The ignition is off.Note: When you switch the ignition off andleave your vehicle, do not leave your key inthe ignition. This could cause your vehiclebattery to lose charge.I (accessory) - Allows the electricalaccessories, such as the radio, to operatewhile the engine is not running.Note: Do not leave the ignition key in thisposition for too long. This could cause yourvehicle battery to lose charge.II (on) - All electrical circuits areoperational and the warning lamps andindicators illuminate.III (start) - cranks the engine.

KEYLESS STARTING (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: The keyless starting system may notfunction if the key is close to metal objectsor electronic devices such as cellularphones.Note: A valid key must be located insideyour vehicle to switch the ignition on andstart the engine.

166


Starting and Stopping the Engine

Ignition Modes

E146431

The keyless starting system has threemodes:Off: Turns the ignition off.• Without applying the brake pedal,

press and release the button oncewhen the ignition is in the on mode, orwhen the engine is running but thevehicle is not moving.

On: All electrical circuits are operationaland the warning lamps and indicatorsilluminate.• Without applying the brake pedal,

press and release the button once.Start: Starts the engine.• Press the brake pedal, and then press

the button for any length of time. Anindicator light on the button illuminateswhen the ignition is on and when theengine starts.

STARTING A GASOLINEENGINEWhen you start the engine, the idle speedincreases. This helps to warm up theengine. If the engine idle speed does notslow down automatically, have yourvehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

Note: You can crank the engine for a totalof 60 seconds without the engine startingbefore the starting system temporarilydisables. The 60 seconds does not have tobe all at once. For example, if you crank theengine three times for 20 seconds eachtime, without the engine starting, youreached the 60-second time limit. Amessage appears in the information displayalerting you that you exceeded the crankingtime. You cannot attempt to start theengine for at least 15 minutes. After 15minutes, you are limited to a 15-secondengine cranking time. You need to wait 60minutes before you can crank the engine for60 seconds again.Before starting your vehicle, check thefollowing:• Make sure all occupants have fastened

their safety belts.• Make sure the headlamps and

electrical accessories are off.• Make sure the parking brake is on.• Make sure the transmission is in park

(P).• Switch the ignition on. For vehicles with

a keyless ignition, see the followinginstructions.

Vehicles with an Ignition KeyNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.1. Fully depress the brake pedal.2. Turn the key to the start position to

start the engine.Note: The engine may continue crankingfor up to 15 seconds or until it starts.Note: If you cannot start the engine on thefirst try, wait for a short period and try again.

Vehicles with Keyless StartNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

167



Note: You must have your intelligent accesskey in your vehicle in order to shift thetransmission out of park (P).1. Fully depress the brake pedal.2. Press the push button ignition switch.The system does not function if:• The passive key frequencies are

jammed.• The key battery has no charge.If you are unable to start your vehicle, dothe following:

1

E198728

2

1. Open the floor console storagecompartment lid.

2. Insert the passive key into the backupslot.

3. With the key in this position, press thebrake pedal then press the push buttonignition switch to switch the ignition onand start your vehicle.

Fast RestartThe fast restart feature allows you torestart your vehicle within 20 seconds ofswitching it off, even if it does not detecta valid passive key.Within 20 seconds of switching the engineoff, press the brake pedal and press thepush button ignition switch. After 20seconds, you can no longer start yourvehicle if it does not detect a valid passivekey.Once your vehicle starts, it remains runninguntil you press the push button ignitionswitch, even if your vehicle does not detecta valid passive key. If you open and closea door while your vehicle is running, thesystem searches for a valid passive key.You cannot start your vehicle if the systemdoes not detect a valid passive key within20 seconds.

Failure to StartIf you cannot start the engine after threeattempts, wait 10 seconds and follow thisprocedure:1. Fully depress the brake pedal.2. Shift into park (P).3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and

hold it there.4. Start the engine.

168



Automatic Engine ShutdownFor vehicles with a keyless ignition, thisfeature automatically shuts down theengine if it has been idling for an extendedperiod. The ignition also turns off in orderto save battery power. Before your vehicleshuts down, a message appears in theinformation display showing a timercounting down from 30 seconds. If you donot intervene within 30 seconds, yourvehicle shuts down. Another messageappears in the information display toinform you that your vehicle has shut downto save fuel. Start your vehicle as younormally do.

Automatic Engine Shutdown OverrideNote: You cannot permanently switch offthe automatic shutdown feature. When youswitch it off temporarily, it turns on at thenext ignition cycle.You can stop the shutdown, or reset thetimer, at any point before the 30-secondcountdown has expired by doing any of thefollowing:• You can reset the timer by interacting

with your vehicle, for example pressingthe brake or accelerator pedal.

• You can temporarily switch off theshutdown feature any time the ignitionis on using the information display. SeeInformation Displays (page 104). Thefeature only remains off for the currentignition cycle.

• During the 30-second countdown, thesystem prompts you to press OK orRESET to temporarily switch thefeature off for the current ignition cycleonly.

Stopping the Engine When YourVehicle is StationaryVehicles with an Ignition Key1. Shift into park (P).

2. Switch the ignition off.3. Apply the parking brake.

Vehicles with Keyless Start1. Shift into park (P).2. Press the push button ignition switch.3. Apply the parking brake.Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits andall warning lamps and indicators will beturned off.Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,the ignition and engine automatically shutdown.

Stopping the Engine When YourVehicle is Moving

WARNING: Switching off theengine when the vehicle is still movingwill result in a loss of brake and steeringassistance. The steering will not lock, buthigher effort will be required. When theignition is switched off, some electricalcircuits, including air bags, warning lampsand indicators may also be off. If theignition was turned off accidentally, youcan shift into neutral (N) and re-start theengine.

Vehicles with an Ignition Key1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to

bring your vehicle to a safe stop.2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift

into park (P) and switch the ignitionoff.

3. Apply the parking brake.

Vehicles with Keyless Start1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to

bring your vehicle to a safe stop.2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift

into park (P).

169



3. Press and hold the push button ignitionswitch, or press it three times withintwo seconds.

4. Apply the parking brake.

Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

WARNING: If you smell exhaustfumes inside your vehicle, have yourvehicle checked by your authorizeddealer immediately. Do not drive yourvehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.Carbon monoxide is present in exhaustfumes. Take precautions to avoid itsdangerous effects.

Important Ventilating InformationIf you stop your vehicle and then leave theengine idling for long periods, werecommend that you do one of thefollowing:• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).• Set your climate control to outside air.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINEVehicles With a Turbocharger

WARNING: Do not switch theengine off when it is running at highspeed. If you do, the turbocharger willcontinue running after the engine oilpressure has dropped to zero. This willlead to premature turbocharger bearingwear.

Release the accelerator pedal. Wait untilthe engine has reached idle speed and thenswitch it off.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Failure to followengine block heater instructions couldresult in property damage or seriouspersonal injury.

WARNING: Do not use your heaterwith ungrounded electrical systems ortwo-pronged adapters. There is a risk ofelectrical shock.

WARNING: Do not fully close thehood, or allow it to drop under its ownweight when using the engine blockheater. This could damage the powercable and may cause an electrical shortresulting in fire, injury and propertydamage.

Note: The heater is most effective whenoutdoor temperatures are below 0°F(-18°C).The heater acts as a starting aid bywarming the engine coolant. This allowsthe climate control system to respondquickly. The equipment includes a heaterelement (installed in the engine block) anda wire harness. You can connect thesystem to a grounded 120-volt ACelectrical source.We recommend that you do the followingfor a safe and correct operation:• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord

that is product certified byUnderwriter’s Laboratory (UL) orCanadian Standards Association(CSA). This extension cord must besuitable for use outdoors, in cold

170



temperatures, and be clearly markedSuitable for Use with OutdoorAppliances. Do not use an indoorextension cord outdoors. This couldresult in an electric shock or become afire hazard.

• Use as short an extension cord aspossible.

• Do not use multiple extension cords.• Make sure that when in operation, the

extension cord plug and heater cordplug connections are free and clear ofwater. This could cause an electricshock or fire.

• Make sure your vehicle is parked in aclean area, clear of combustibles.

• Make sure the heater, heater cord andextension cord are firmly connected.

• Check for heat anywhere in theelectrical hookup once the system hasbeen operating for approximately 30minutes.

• Make sure the system is unplugged andproperly stowed before starting anddriving your vehicle. Make sure theprotective cover seals the prongs of theblock heater cord plug when not in use.

• Make sure the heater system ischecked for proper operation beforewinter.

Using the Engine Block HeaterMake sure the receptacle terminals areclean and dry prior to use. Clean them witha dry cloth if necessary.The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hoursof energy per hour of use. The system doesnot have a thermostat. It achievesmaximum temperature afterapproximately three hours of operation.Using the heater longer than three hoursdoes not improve system performance andunnecessarily uses electricity.

171



SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING: Do not overfill the fueltank. The pressure in an overfilled tankmay cause leakage and lead to fuel sprayand fire.

WARNING: The fuel system maybe under pressure. If you hear a hissingsound near the fuel filler inlet, do notrefuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,fuel may spray out, which could causeserious personal injury.

WARNING: Fuels can causeserious injury or death if misused ormishandled.

WARNING: Fuel may containbenzene, which is a cancer-causingagent.

WARNING: When refueling alwaysshut the engine off and never allowsparks or open flames near the fuel tankfiller valve. Never smoke or use a cellphone while refueling. Fuel vapor isextremely hazardous under certainconditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.

Follow these guidelines when refueling:• Extinguish all smoking materials and

any open flames before refueling yourvehicle.

• Always switch the engine off beforerefueling.

• Automotive fuels can be harmful orfatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxicand if swallowed can cause death orpermanent injury. If fuel is swallowedimmediately call a physician, even if nosymptoms are immediately apparent.The toxic effects of fuel may not beapparent for hours.

• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuelvapor can lead to eye and respiratorytract irritation. In severe cases,excessive or prolonged breathing offuel vapor can cause serious illness andpermanent injury.

• Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If yousplash fuel in your eyes, immediatelyremove contact lenses (if worn), flushwith water for 15 minutes and seekmedical attention. Failure to seekproper medical attention could lead topermanent injury.

• Fuels can be harmful if absorbedthrough the skin. If you splash fuel onyour skin, clothing or both, promptlyremove contaminated clothing andthoroughly wash your skin with soapand water. Repeated or prolonged skincontact causes skin irritation.

• Be particularly careful if you are takingAntabuse or other forms of Disulfiramfor the treatment of alcoholism.Breathing fuel vapors could cause anadverse reaction, serious personalinjury or sickness. Immediately call aphysician if you experience any adversereactions.

FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINEChoosing the Right Fuel

E161513

Your vehicle is designed to operate onregular unleaded gasoline with a minimumpump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.

172


Fuel and Refueling

Some fuel stations, particularly those inhigh altitude areas, offer fuels posted asregular unleaded gasoline with an octanerating below 87. The use of these fuelscould result in engine damage that will notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.For best overall vehicle and engineperformance, premium fuel with an octanerating of 91 or higher is recommended. Theperformance gained by using premium fuelis most noticeable in hot weather as wellas other conditions, for example whentowing a trailer. See Towing (page 247).Do not be concerned if the enginesometimes knocks lightly. However, if theengine knocks heavily while using fuel withthe recommended octane rating, contactan authorized dealer to prevent any enginedamage.We recommend Top Tier detergentgasolines, where available to help minimizeengine deposits and maintain optimalvehicle and engine performance. Foradditional information, refer towww.toptiergas.com.Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehiclewas not designed can impair the emissioncontrol system, cause loss of vehicleperformance, and cause damage to theengine which may not be covered by thevehicle Warranty.Do not use:• Diesel fuel.• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol

or E85 fuel.• Fuels containing methanol.• Fuels containing metallic-based

additives, including manganese-basedcompounds.

• Fuels containing the octane boosteradditive, methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT).

• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel isprohibited by law.

The use of fuels with metallic compoundssuch as methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (commonly knownas MMT), which is a manganese-basedfuel additive, will impair engineperformance and affect the emissioncontrol system.

FUEL QUALITY - E85Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex FuelVehiclesFlex fuel vehicles have one of the followingidentifiers:• Yellow fuel filler cap.• Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet.• Yellow fuel filler housing.• Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler

door.

E161513

Your vehicle is designed to operate onregular unleaded gasoline with a minimumpump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 orregular unleaded gasoline blended with amaximum of 85% ethanol (E85).

173


Fuel and Refueling

Some fuel stations, particularly those inhigh altitude areas, offer fuels posted asregular unleaded gasoline with an octanerating below 87. The use of these fuelscould result in engine damage that will notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.For best overall vehicle and engineperformance, premium fuel with an octanerating of 91 or higher is recommended. Theperformance gained by using premium fuelis most noticeable in hot weather as wellas other conditions, for example whentowing a trailer. See Towing (page 247).Do not be concerned if the enginesometimes knocks lightly. However, if theengine knocks heavily while using fuel withthe recommended octane rating, contactan authorized dealer to prevent any enginedamage.We recommend Top Tier detergentgasolines, where available to help minimizeengine deposits and maintain optimalvehicle and engine performance. Foradditional information, refer towww.toptiergas.com.Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehiclewas not designed can impair the emissioncontrol system, cause loss of vehicleperformance, and cause damage to theengine which may not be covered by thevehicle Warranty.Do not use:• Diesel fuel.• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.• Fuels containing more than 85%

ethanol or E100 fuel.• Fuels containing methanol.• Fuels containing metallic-based

additives, including manganese-basedcompounds.

• Fuels containing the octane boosteradditive, methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT).

• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel isprohibited by law.

The use of fuels with metallic compoundssuch as methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (commonly knownas MMT), which is a manganese-basedfuel additive, will impair engineperformance and affect the emissioncontrol system.

Switching Between E85 andGasolineWe do not recommend repeatedlyalternating between E85 and gasoline. Ifyou switch from using E85 to gasoline, orfrom gasoline to E85, add as much fuel aspossible, at least half a tank. Drive yourvehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi(8 km) to allow it to adapt to the changein ethanol concentration. If you use E85exclusively, we recommend that you fillthe fuel tank with regular unleadedgasoline at each scheduled oil change.

FUEL FILLER FUNNELLOCATIONThe fuel filler funnel is in the spare wheelstorage tray.

RUNNING OUT OF FUELRunning out of fuel can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle Warranty.

174


Fuel and Refueling

If your vehicle runs out of fuel:• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel

to restart the engine.• You may need to switch the ignition

from off to on several times afterrefueling to allow the fuel system topump the fuel from the tank to theengine. When restarting, cranking timetakes a few seconds longer thannormal.

Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,more fuel may be required.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

WARNING: Flow of fuel througha fuel pump nozzle can produce staticelectricity. This can cause a fire if you arefilling an ungrounded fuel container.

Use the following guidelines to avoidelectrostatic charge build-up, which canproduce a spark, when filling anungrounded fuel container:• Only use an approved fuel container to

transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place thecontainer on the ground when filling it.

• Do not fill a fuel container when it isinside your vehicle (including the cargoarea).

• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contactwith the fuel container when filling it.

• Do not use a device that holds the fuelpump nozzle lever in the fill position.

Adding Fuel From a Portable FuelContainer

WARNING: Do not insert thenozzle of a fuel container or anaftermarket funnel into the fuel fillerneck. This may damage the fuel systemfiller neck or its seal and cause fuel torun onto the ground.

WARNING: Do not try to pry openor push open the capless fuel systemwith foreign objects. This could damagethe fuel system and its seal and causeinjury to you or others.

WARNING: Do not dispose of fuelin the household refuse or the publicsewage system. Use an authorized wastedisposal facility.

When refueling the vehicle fuel tank froma fuel container, use the fuel filler funnelincluded with your vehicle. See Fuel FillerFunnel Location (page 174).Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels asthey may not work with the capless fuelsystem and can damage it.When refueling the vehicle fuel tank froma fuel container, do the following:1. Fully open the fuel filler door.2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the

fuel filler inlet.

175


Fuel and Refueling

E157452

3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuelcontainer.

4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.5. Fully close the fuel filler door.6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it

back in your vehicle or correctly disposeof it.

Note: Extra funnels can be purchased froman authorized dealer if you choose todispose of the funnel.

REFUELINGRefueling System Overview

E267248

B

C

A

Fuel filler door.AFuel tank filler valve.BFuel tank filler pipe.C

Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank fillercap.

176


Fuel and Refueling

E206911

A B

C D

Left-hand side. To open the fuelfiller door, press the center rearedge of the fuel filler door andthen release.

A

Right-hand side. To open thefuel filler door, press the centerrear edge of the fuel filler doorand then release.

B

Left-hand side. Pull the rear ofthe fuel filler door to open it.

C

Right-hand side. Pull the rear ofthe fuel filler door to open it.

D

Refueling Your Vehicle

WARNING: When refueling alwaysshut the engine off and never allowsparks or open flames near the fuel tankfiller valve. Never smoke or use a cellphone while refueling. Fuel vapor isextremely hazardous under certainconditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.

WARNING: The fuel system maybe under pressure. If you hear a hissingsound near the fuel filler inlet, do notrefuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,fuel may spray out, which could causeserious personal injury.

WARNING: Do not pry open thefuel tank filler valve. This could damagethe fuel system. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in fire, personalinjury or death.

WARNING: Do not remove the fuelpump nozzle from its fully insertedposition when refueling.

WARNING: Stop refueling whenthe fuel pump nozzle automaticallyshuts off for the first time. Failure tofollow this will fill the expansion spacein the fuel tank and could lead to fueloverflowing.

WARNING: Do not overfill the fueltank. The pressure in an overfilled tankmay cause leakage and lead to fuel sprayand fire.

WARNING: Wait at least fiveseconds before removing the fuel pumpnozzle to allow any residual fuel to draininto the fuel tank.

1. Fully open the fuel filler door.2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for

your vehicle.

177


Fuel and Refueling

E139202

A

3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to thefirst notch on the nozzle A. Keep thefuel pump nozzle resting on the fueltank filler pipe.

E139203

A

B

4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in positionB when refueling. Holding the fuelpump nozzle in position A can affectthe flow of fuel and shut off the fuelpump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.

E206912

A B

5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle withinthe area shown.

E119081

6. When you finish refueling slightly raisethe fuel pump nozzle and slowlyremove it.

7. Fully close the fuel filler door.Do not attempt to start the engine if youhave filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.Incorrect fuel use could cause damage notcovered by the vehicle Warranty. Have yourvehicle immediately checked.

Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)

If the fuel tank filler valve does not fullyclose, a message could appear in theinformation display.

Message

Check Fuel Fill Inlet

If the message appears, do the following:1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe

to do so and switch the engine off.2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).

178


Fuel and Refueling

3. Apply the parking brake.4. Fully open the fuel filler door.5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any

debris that may be restricting itsmovement.

6. Remove any debris from the fuel tankfiller valve.

7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or thefuel filler funnel provided with yourvehicle into the fuel filler pipe. SeeFuel Filler Funnel Location (page174). This action should dislodge anydebris that may be preventing the fueltank filler valve from fully closing.

8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuelfiller funnel from the fuel filler pipe.

9. Fully close the fuel filler door.Note: The message may not immediatelyreset. If the message continues to appearand a warning lamp illuminates, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.

FUEL CONSUMPTIONAdvertised CapacityThe advertised capacity is the maximumamount of fuel that you can add to the fueltank after running out of fuel. Included inthe advertised capacity is an emptyreserve. The empty reserve is anunspecified amount of fuel that remainsin the fuel tank when the fuel gaugeindicates empty.Note: The amount of fuel in the emptyreserve varies and should not be relied uponto increase driving range.

Fuel EconomyYour vehicle calculates fuel economyfigures through the trip computer averagefuel function. See General Information(page 104).

The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving isthe break-in period of the engine. A moreaccurate measurement is obtained after2,000 mi (3,000 km).

Impacting Fuel Economy• Incorrect tire inflation pressures.• Fully loading your vehicle.• Carrying unnecessary weight.• Adding certain accessories to your

vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbarsor light bars, running boards and skiracks.

• Using fuel blended with alcohol. SeeFuel Quality (page 172).

• Fuel economy may decrease with lowertemperatures.

• Fuel economy may decrease whendriving short distances.

• You may get better fuel economy whendriving on flat terrain than when drivingon hilly terrain.

179


Fuel and Refueling

EMISSION LAW

WARNING: Do not remove or alterthe original equipment floor covering orinsulation between it and the metal floorof the vehicle. The floor covering andinsulation protect occupants of thevehicle from the engine and exhaustsystem heat and noise. On vehicles withno original equipment floor coveringinsulation, do not carry passengers in amanner that permits prolonged skincontact with the metal floor. Failure tofollow these instructions may result infire or personal injury.

U.S. federal laws and certain state lawsprohibit removing or rendering inoperativeemission control system components.Similar federal or provincial laws mayapply in Canada. We do not approve of anyvehicle modification without firstdetermining applicable laws.

Tampering with emissionscontrol systems includingrelated sensors or the Diesel

Exhaust Fluid system can result in reducedengine power and the illumination of theservice engine soon light.

Tampering With a Noise ControlSystemFederal laws prohibit the following acts:• Removal or rendering inoperative by

any person other than for purposes ofmaintenance.

• Repair or replacement of any device orelement of the design incorporated intoa new vehicle for the purpose of noisecontrol prior to its sale or delivery tothe ultimate purchaser or while it is inuse.

• The use of the vehicle after any personremoves or renders inoperative anydevice or element of the design.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agencymay presume to constitute tampering asfollows:• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron

absorbers, fender apron barriers,underbody noise shields or acousticallyabsorptive material.

• Tampering or rendering inoperative theengine speed governor, to allow enginespeed to exceed manufacturerspecifications.

If the engine does not start, runs rough,experiences a decrease in engineperformance, experiences excess fuelconsumption or produces excessiveexhaust smoke, check for the following:• A plugged or disconnected air inlet

system hose.• A plugged engine air filter element.• Water in the fuel filter and water

separator.• A clogged fuel filter.• Contaminated fuel.• Air in the fuel system, due to loose

connections.• An open or pinched sensor hose.• Incorrect engine oil level.

180


Engine Emission Control

• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for

climactic conditions.Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuelfilter that is integrated with the fuel tank.Regular maintenance or replacement is notneeded.Note: If these checks do not help youcorrect the concern, have your vehiclechecked as soon as possible.

Noise Emissions Warranty,Prohibited Tampering Acts andMaintenanceOn January 1, 1978, Federal regulationbecame effective governing the noiseemission on trucks over 10,000 lb(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The preceding statementsconcerning prohibited tampering acts andmaintenance, and the noise warrantyfound in the Warranty Guide, areapplicable to complete chassis cabs over10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARNING: Do not park, idle ordrive your vehicle on dry grass or otherdry ground cover. The emission systemheats up the engine compartment andexhaust system, creating the risk of fire.

WARNING: The normal operatingtemperature of the exhaust system isvery high. Never work around or attemptto repair any part of the exhaust systemuntil it has cooled. Use special care whenworking around the catalytic converter.The catalytic converter heats up to a veryhigh temperature after only a shortperiod of engine operation and stays hotafter the engine is switched off.

WARNING: Exhaust leaks mayresult in entry of harmful and potentiallylethal fumes into the passengercompartment. If you smell exhaustfumes inside your vehicle, have yourvehicle inspected immediately. Do notdrive if you smell exhaust fumes.

Your vehicle has various emission controlcomponents and a catalytic converter thatenables it to comply with applicableexhaust emission standards.To make sure that the catalytic converterand other emission control componentscontinue to work properly:• Do not crank the engine for more than

10 seconds at a time.• Do not run the engine with a spark plug

lead disconnected.• Do not push-start or tow-start your

vehicle. Use booster cables. See JumpStarting the Vehicle (page 260).

• Use only the specified fuel listed.• Do not switch the ignition off when your

vehicle is moving.• Avoid running out of fuel.• Have the items listed in scheduled

maintenance information performedaccording to the specified schedule.

Note: Resulting component damage maynot be covered by the vehicle Warranty.The scheduled maintenance items listedin scheduled maintenance information areessential to the life and performance ofyour vehicle and to its emissions system.If you use anything other than Ford,Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts formaintenance replacements or for serviceof components affecting emission control,such non-Ford parts should be equivalentto genuine Ford Motor Company parts inperformance and durability.

181



Illumination of the service engine soonindicator, charging system warning light orthe temperature warning light, fluid leaks,strange odors, smoke or loss of enginepower could indicate that the emissioncontrol system is not working properly.An improperly operating or damagedexhaust system may allow exhaust toenter the vehicle. Have a damaged orimproperly operating exhaust systeminspected and repaired immediately.Do not make any unauthorized changes toyour vehicle or engine. By law, vehicleowners and anyone who manufactures,repairs, services, sells, leases, tradesvehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehiclesare not permitted to intentionally removean emission control device or prevent itfrom working. Information about yourvehicle’s emission system is on the VehicleEmission Control Information Decallocated on or near the engine. This decalalso lists engine displacement.Please consult your warranty informationfor complete details.

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)Your vehicle has a computer known as theon-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) thatmonitors the engine’s emission controlsystem. The system protects theenvironment by making sure that yourvehicle continues to meet governmentemission standards. The OBD-II systemalso assists a service technician in properlyservicing your vehicle.

When the service engine soonindicator illuminates, the OBD-IIsystem has detected a

malfunction. Temporary malfunctions maycause the service engine soon indicator toilluminate. Examples are:

1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—theengine may misfire or run poorly.

2. Poor fuel quality or water in thefuel—the engine may misfire or runpoorly.

3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closedproperly. See Refueling (page 176).

4. Driving through deep water—theelectrical system may be wet.

You can correct these temporarymalfunctions by filling the fuel tank withgood quality fuel, properly closing the fuelfill inlet or letting the electrical system dryout. After three driving cycles without theseor any other temporary malfunctionspresent, the service engine soon indicatorshould stay off the next time you start theengine. A driving cycle consists of a coldengine startup followed by mixed city andhighway driving. No additional vehicleservice is required.If the service engine soon indicator remainson, have your vehicle serviced at the firstavailable opportunity. Although somemalfunctions detected by the OBD-II maynot have symptoms that are apparent,continued driving with the service enginesoon indicator on can result in increasedemissions, lower fuel economy, reducedengine and transmission smoothness andlead to more costly repairs.

Readiness for Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) TestingSome state and provincial and localgovernments may haveInspection/Maintenance (I/M) programsto inspect the emission control equipmenton your vehicle. Failure to pass thisinspection could prevent you from gettinga vehicle registration.

If the service engine soonindicator is on or the bulb doesnot work, your vehicle may need

service. See On-Board Diagnostics.

182



Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test ifthe service engine soon indicator is on ornot working properly (bulb is burned out),or if the OBD-II system has determinedthat some of the emission control systemshave not been properly checked. In thiscase, the vehicle is not ready for I/Mtesting.If the vehicle’s engine or transmission hasjust been serviced, or the battery hasrecently run down or been replaced, theOBD-II system may indicate that thevehicle is not ready for I/M testing. Todetermine if the vehicle is ready for I/Mtesting, turn the ignition key to the onposition for 15 seconds without crankingthe engine. If the service engine soonindicator blinks eight times, it means thatthe vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; ifthe service engine soon indicator stays onsolid, it means that your vehicle is readyfor I/M testing.The OBD-II system checks the emissioncontrol system during normal driving. Acomplete check may take several days.If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,you can perform the following driving cycleconsisting of mixed city and highwaydriving:1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an

expressway or highway followed by 20minutes of stop-and-go driving with atleast four 30-second idle periods.

2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at leasteight hours with the ignition off. Then,start the vehicle and complete theabove driving cycle. The vehicle mustwarm up to its normal operatingtemperature. Once started, do not turnoff the vehicle until the above drivingcycle is complete.

If the vehicle is still not ready for I/Mtesting, you need to repeat the abovedriving cycle.

183



AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING: Always fully apply theparking brake and make sure you shiftinto park (P). Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in personal injuryor death.

WARNING: Do not apply the brakepedal and accelerator pedalsimultaneously. Applying both pedalssimultaneously for more than a fewseconds will limit engine performance,which may result in difficulty maintainingspeed in traffic and could lead to seriousinjury.

Note: You may not be able to shift out ofpark (P) unless the intelligent access key isinside your vehicle.

Understanding the Positions ofYour Automatic TransmissionPutting your vehicle in gear:1. Fully press down on the brake pedal.2. Press and hold the button on the front

of the gearshift lever.3. Move the gearshift lever into the

desired gear.4. Release the button and your

transmission remains in the selectedgear.

P

R

N

D

S

E142628

Park (P)This position locks the transmission andprevents the wheels from turning.

Reverse (R)With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), yourvehicle moves backward. Always come toa complete stop before shifting into andout of reverse (R).

Neutral (N)With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), yourvehicle can be started and is free to roll.Hold the brake pedal down when in thisposition.

Drive (D)Drive (D) is the normal driving position forthe best fuel economy. The overdrivefunction allows automatic upshifts anddownshifts through gears one through six.

184


Transmission

Sport (S)Moving the gearshift lever to sport (S):• Provides additional grade (engine)

braking and extends lower gearoperation to enhance performance foruphill climbs, hilly terrain ormountainous areas. This increasesengine RPM during engine braking.

• Provides additional lower gearoperation through the automatictransmission shift strategy.

• Gears are selected more quickly andat higher engine speeds.

Tow Mode (If Equipped)

E161509

To activate tow mode, press thebutton under the headlampcontrol. The indicator light

illuminates and a message displays in theinstrument cluster when the systembecomes active. Press the button again toturn the system off.

The Tow Mode Feature:• Moves upshifts to higher engine speeds

to reduce the frequency oftransmission shifting.

• Provides engine braking in all forwardgears, which slows your vehicle andassist you in controlling your vehiclewhen descending a grade.

• Depending on driving conditions andload conditions, may downshift thetransmission, slow your vehicle andcontrol your vehicle speed whendescending a hill, without pressing theaccelerator pedal. The amount ofdownshift braking provided variesbased upon the amount the brakepedal is pressed.

The tow mode feature improvestransmission operation when towing atrailer or a heavy load. All transmissiongear ranges are available when using towmode.

SelectShift Automatic™TransmissionYour vehicle is equipped with a SelectShiftAutomatic transmission. The SelectShiftAutomatic transmission gives you theability to change gears up or down(without a clutch) as desired.In order to prevent the engine from runningat too low an RPM, which may cause it tostall, SelectShift still automatically makessome downshifts if it has determined thatyou have not downshifted in time.Although SelectShift makes somedownshifts for you, it still allows you todownshift at any time as long as theSelectShift determines that damage tothe engine from over-revving does notoccur.Note: Engine damage may occur if youmaintain excessive engine revving withoutshifting.Note: Vehicles may have either steeringwheel controls or gearshift lever controls.SelectShift does not automatically upshift,even if the engine is approaching the RPMlimit. It must be shifted manually bypressing the + button. Notice should betaken of the shift indicator lamp, whichalerts you when to shift to make sure youachieve the highest level or efficiency andfuel economy.Pull the + paddle on the steering wheelor push the + button on the gearshiftlever to activate SelectShift.• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.• Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.

185


Transmission

E144821

For vehicles with gearshift lever controls:• Push the toggle switch (+) to upshift.• Push the toggle switch (-) to

downshift.SelectShift in drive (D):• Provides a temporary manual mode

for performing more demandingmaneuvers where extra control of gearselection is required (for example,when towing or overtaking). This modeholds a selected gear for a temporaryperiod of time dependent on driverinputs (for example, steering oraccelerator pedal input).

SelectShift in sport (S):• Provides a permanent manual gear

selection where full control of gearselection is required.

To exit SelectShift mode shift thetransmission into another gear (forexample, drive [D]).The instrument cluster displays yourcurrently selected gear. If a gear isrequested but not available due to vehicleconditions (low speed, too high enginespeed for requested gear selection), thecurrent gear flashes three times.Note: At full accelerator pedal travel, thetransmission automatically downshifts formaximum performance.

Upshifts When Accelerating (Recom-mended for Best Fuel Economy)

Shift from:

15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2

25 mph (40 km/h)2 - 3

40 mph (64 km/h)3 - 4

45 mph (72 km/h)4 - 5

50 mph (80 km/h)5 - 6

Brake-Shift Interlock Override

WARNING: When doing thisprocedure, you need to take thetransmission out of park (P) whichmeans your vehicle can roll freely. Toavoid unwanted vehicle movement,always fully apply the parking brake priorto doing this procedure. Use wheelschocks if appropriate.

WARNING: If the parking brake isfully released, but the brake warninglamp remains illuminated, the brakesmay not be working properly. Have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.

WARNING: Do not drive yourvehicle until you verify that thestoplamps are working.

Use the brake shift interlock lever to movethe gearshift lever from the park positionin the event of an electrical malfunction orif your vehicle has a dead battery.Apply the parking brake and turn theignition off before performing thisprocedure.

186


Transmission

E267076

1. Open the media bin.2. Remove the rubber insert.3. Use a screwdriver to unsnap the access

cover.4. Move the plunger forward, towards the

front of the vehicle and hold.5. With the plunger held in the forward

position, move the gearshift lever outof the park position.

6. Snap the access cover back in position,place the rubber tray back in positionand close the media bin.

7. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicleand release the parking brake.

Note: See your authorized dealer as soonas possible if this procedure is used.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mudor SnowNote: Do not rock the vehicle if the engineis not at normal operating temperature ordamage to the transmission may occur.Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more thana minute or damage to the transmission andtires may occur, or the engine may overheat.If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,it may be rocked out by shifting betweenforward and reverse gears, stoppingbetween shifts in a steady pattern. Presslightly on the accelerator in each gear.

187


Transmission

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThis system is a proactive system. It hasthe ability to anticipate wheel slip andtransfer torque to the rear wheels beforeslip occurs. Even when wheel slip is notpresent, the system is continuously makingadjustments to the torque distribution, inan attempt to improve straight line andcornering behavior, both on and off road.The system automatically turns on everytime you switch the ignition on.If any component requires maintenance,a message appears in the informationdisplay.

USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE

WARNING: Vehicles with a highercenter of gravity such as utility andfour-wheel drive vehicles handledifferently than vehicles with a lowercenter of gravity. Utility and four-wheeldrive vehicles are not designed forcornering at speeds as high as passengercars any more than low-slung sports carsare designed to perform satisfactorilyunder off-road conditions. Avoid sharpturns, excessive speed and abruptmaneuvers in these vehicles. Failure todrive cautiously could result in anincreased risk of loss of vehicle control,vehicle rollover, personal injury anddeath.

The intelligent 4WD system continuouslymonitors vehicle conditions andautomatically adjusts the powerdistribution between the front and rearwheels. It combines transparentall-surface operation with highly capablefour-wheel drive.

The 4WD system is always active andrequires no driver input. It is capable ofhandling all road conditions, includingstreet and highway driving as well asoff-road and winter driving. The driver canoptimize more 4WD control by moving theterrain management switch for the correctterrain. See Using Terrain Control (page199).Note: A warning message will be displayedin the information display when an 4WDsystem fault is present See InformationMessages (page 115). An 4WD system faultwill cause the 4WD system to default tofront-wheel drive only mode. When thiswarning message is displayed, have yourvehicle serviced at an authorized dealerNote: A warning message will be displayedin the information display if the 4WD systemhas overheated See InformationMessages (page 115). This condition mayoccur if the vehicle was operated in extremeconditions with excessive wheel slip, suchas deep sand. To resume normal 4WDfunction as soon as possible, stop thevehicle in a safe location and stop theengine for at least 10 minutes. After theengine has been restarted and the 4WDsystem has adequately cooled, the warningmessage will turn off and normal 4WDfunction will return.Do not use a spare tire of a different sizeother than the tire provided. If themini-spare tire is installed, the 4WD systemmay disable automatically and enterfront-wheel drive only mode to protectdriveline components. This condition willbe indicated by a warning in theinformation display See InformationMessages (page 115). If there is a warningmessage in the information display fromusing the spare tire, this indicator shouldturn off after reinstalling the repaired orreplaced normal road tire and cycling theignition off and on. It is recommended to

188


Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

reinstall the repaired or replaced road tireas soon as possible. Major dissimilar tiresizes between the front and rear axlescould cause the 4WD system to stopfunctioning and default to front-wheeldrive or damage the 4WD system.

How Your Vehicle Differs FromOther VehiclesTruck and utility vehicles can differ fromsome other vehicles. Your vehicle may behigher to allow it to travel over roughterrain without getting hung up ordamaging underbody components.The differences that make your vehicle soversatile also make it handle differentlythan an ordinary passenger car.Maintain steering wheel control at alltimes, especially in rough terrain. Sincesudden changes in terrain can result inabrupt steering wheel motion, make sureyou grip the steering wheel from theoutside. Do not grip the spokes.Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damagefrom concealed objects such as rocks andstumps.You should either know the terrain orexamine maps of the area before driving.Map out your route before driving in thearea. To maintain steering and brakingcontrol of your vehicle, you must have allfour wheels on the ground and they mustbe rolling, not sliding or spinning.

Driving In Special Conditions WithFour-Wheel Drive (4WD)Note: 4WD vehicles are equipped for drivingon sand, snow, mud and rough roads andhave operating characteristics that aresomewhat different from conventionalvehicles, both on and off the highway.

Basic operating principles in specialconditions• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which

can affect the normal steeringcharacteristics of your vehicle.

• Be extremely careful when driving onpavement made slippery by loose sand,water, gravel, snow or ice.

If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of thePavement• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the

pavement, slow down, but avoid severebrake application, ease the vehicleback onto the pavement only afterreducing your speed. Do not turn thesteering wheel too sharply whilereturning to the road surface.

• It may be safer to stay on the apron orshoulder of the road and slow downgradually before returning to thepavement. You may lose control if youdo not slow down or if you turn thesteering wheel too sharply or abruptly.

• It often may be less risky to strike smallobjects, such as highway reflectors,with minor damage to your vehiclerather than attempt a sudden return tothe pavement which could cause thevehicle to slide sideways out of controlor rollover. Remember, your safety andthe safety of others should be yourprimary concern.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

WARNING: Always set the parkingbrake fully and make sure thetransmission is in P (Park). Turn theignition to the lock position or turn thevehicle off using the start/stop buttonand remove the key whenever you leaveyour vehicle.

189



WARNING: If the parking brake isfully released, but the brake warninglamp remains illuminated, the brakesmay not be working properly. See yourauthorized dealer.

WARNING: Do not spin the wheelsat over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires mayfail and injure a passenger or bystander.

Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engineis not at normal operating temperature ordamage to the transmission may occur.Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more thana few minutes or damage to thetransmission and tires may occur or theengine may overheat.If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow itmay be rocked out by shifting betweenforward and reverse gears, stoppingbetween shifts, in a steady pattern. Presslightly on the accelerator in each gear.If your vehicle is equipped withAdvanceTrac® with Roll StabilityControl™, it may be beneficial todisengage the AdvanceTrac® with RollStability Control™ system whileattempting to rock the vehicle.

Emergency Maneuvers• In an unavoidable emergency situation

where a sudden sharp turn must bemade, remember to avoid"over-driving" your vehicle (i.e., turn thesteering wheel only as rapidly and asfar as required to avoid theemergency). Excessive steering willresult in less vehicle control, not more.Additionally, smooth variations of theaccelerator and/or brake pedalpressure should be utilized if changesin vehicle speed are called for. Avoid

abrupt steering, acceleration or brakingwhich could result in an increased riskof loss of vehicle control, vehiclerollover and/or personal injury. Use allavailable road surface to return thevehicle to a safe direction of travel.

• In the event of an emergency stop,avoid skidding the tires and do notattempt any sharp steering wheelmovements.

• If the vehicle goes from one type ofsurface to another (i.e., from concreteto gravel) there will be a change in theway the vehicle responds to amaneuver (steering, acceleration orbraking). Again, avoid these abruptinputs.

SandWhen driving over sand, try to keep all fourwheels on the most solid area of the trail.Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shiftto a lower gear and drive steadily throughthe terrain. Apply the accelerator slowlyand avoid spinning the wheels.Avoid excessive speed because vehiclemomentum can work against you andcause the vehicle to become stuck to thepoint that assistance may be required fromanother vehicle. Remember, you may beable to back out the way you came if youproceed with caution.

Mud and WaterNote: Driving through deep water maydamage your vehicle.If you must drive through high water, driveslowly. Traction or brake capability maybe limited.When driving through water, determine thedepth; avoid water higher than the bottomof the hubs (if possible) and proceedslowly. If the ignition system gets wet, thevehicle may stall.

190



Once through water, always try the brakes.Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle aseffectively as dry brakes. Drying can beimproved by moving your vehicle slowlywhile applying light pressure on the brakepedal.Be cautious of sudden changes in vehiclespeed or direction when you are driving inmud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose tractionin slick mud. As when you are driving oversand, apply the accelerator slowly andavoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicledoes slide, steer in the direction of the slideuntil you regain control of the vehicle.After driving through mud, clean off residuestuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.Excess mud stuck on tires and rotatingdriveshafts causes an imbalance thatcould damage drive components.

E143950

“Tread Lightly” is an educational programdesigned to increase public awareness ofland-use regulations and responsibilitiesin our nations wilderness areas. Ford MotorCompany joins the U.S. Forest Service andthe Bureau of Land Management inencouraging you to help preserve ournational forest and other public and privatelands by “treading lightly.”

Driving on Hilly or Sloping TerrainNote: Avoid driving crosswise or turning onsteep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losingtraction, slipping sideways and possiblyrolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,determine beforehand the route you willuse. Do not drive over the crest of a hillwithout seeing what conditions are on theother side. Do not drive in reverse over a hillwithout the aid of an observer.

Although natural obstacles may make itnecessary to travel diagonally up or downa hill or steep incline, you should alwaystry to drive straight up or straight down.When climbing a steep slope or hill, startin a lower gear rather than downshifting toa lower gear from a higher gear once theascent has started. This reduces strain onthe engine and the possibility of stalling.If you do stall out, do not try to turn aroundbecause you might roll over. It is better toback down to a safe location.Apply just enough power to the wheels toclimb the hill. Too much power will causethe tires to slip, spin or lose traction,resulting in loss of vehicle control.

E143949

Descend a hill in the same gear you woulduse to climb up the hill to avoid excessivebrake application and brake overheating.Do not descend in neutral; instead,disengage overdrive or manually shift to alower gear. When descending a steep hill,avoid sudden hard braking as you couldlose control. The front wheels have to beturning in order to steer the vehicle.Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, thereforeapply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”the brakes.

191



Driving on Snow and Ice

WARNING: If you are driving inslippery conditions that require tirechains or cables, then it is critical thatyou drive cautiously. Keep speeds down,allow for longer stopping distances andavoid aggressive steering to reduce thechances of a loss of vehicle controlwhich can lead to serious injury or death.If the rear end of the vehicle slides whilecornering, steer in the direction of theslide until you regain control of thevehicle.

Note: Excessive tire slippage can causedriveline damage.4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WDvehicles in snow and ice but can skid likeany other vehicle.Should you start to slide while driving onsnowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheelin the direction of the slide until you regaincontrol.Avoid sudden applications of power andquick changes of direction on snow andice. Apply the accelerator slowly andsteadily when starting from a full stop.Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an4WD vehicle may accelerate better thana two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice,it won’t stop any faster, because as in othervehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.Do not become overconfident as to roadconditions.Make sure you allow sufficient distancebetween you and other vehicles forstopping. Drive slower than usual andconsider using one of the lower gears. Inemergency stopping situations, apply thebrake steadily. Since your vehicle isequipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not“pump” the brakes. See Hints on DrivingWith Anti-Lock Brakes (page 193).

Maintenance and ModificationsThe suspension and steering systems onyour vehicle have been designed andtested to provide predictable performancewhether loaded or empty and durable loadcarrying capability. For this reason, FordMotor Company strongly recommends thatyou do not make modifications such asadding or removing parts (such as loweringkits or stabilizer bars) or by usingreplacement parts not equivalent to theoriginal factory equipment.Any modifications to a vehicle that raisethe center of gravity can make it more likelythe vehicle will rollover as a result of a lossof control. Ford Motor Companyrecommends that caution be used withany vehicle equipped with a high load ordevice (such as ladder or luggage racks).Failure to maintain your vehicle properlymay void the warranty, increase your repaircost, reduce vehicle performance andoperational capabilities and adverselyaffect driver and passenger safety.Frequent inspection of vehicle chassiscomponents is recommended if the vehicleis subjected to off-highway usage.

192



GENERAL INFORMATIONNote: Occasional brake noise is normal. Ifa metal-to-metal, continuous grinding orcontinuous squeal sound is present, thebrake linings may be worn-out. Have thesystem checked by an authorized dealer. Ifyour vehicle has continuous vibration orshudder in the steering wheel while braking,have it checked by an authorized dealer.Note: Brake dust may accumulate on thewheels, even under normal drivingconditions. Some dust is inevitable as thebrakes wear and does not contribute tobrake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels(page 311).

E144522

See Warning Lamps andIndicators (page 99).

Wet brakes result in reduced brakingefficiency. Gently press the brake pedal afew times when driving from a car wash orstanding water to dry the brakes.

Brake Over AcceleratorIn the event the accelerator pedalbecomes stuck or entrapped, apply steadyand firm pressure to the brake pedal toslow the vehicle and reduce engine power.If you experience this condition, apply thebrakes and bring your vehicle to a safestop. Move the transmission to park (P),switch the engine off and apply the parkingbrake. Inspect the accelerator pedal forany interference. If none are found and thecondition persists, have your vehicle towedto the nearest authorized dealer.

Brake AssistBrake assist detects when you brakerapidly by measuring the rate at which youpress the brake pedal. It providesmaximum braking efficiency as long as youpress the pedal, and can reduce stoppingdistances in critical situations.

Anti-lock Brake SystemThis system helps you maintain steeringcontrol during emergency stops by keepingthe brakes from locking.

This lamp momentarilyilluminates when you turn theignition on. If the light does not

illuminate during start up, remains on orflashes, the system may be disabled. Havethe system checked by an authorizeddealer. If the anti-lock brake system isdisabled, normal braking is still effective.

E144522

If the brake warning lampremains illuminated after yourelease the parking brake, have

the system checked by an authorizeddealer.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITHANTI-LOCK BRAKESThe anti-lock braking system does noteliminate the risks when:• You drive too closely to the vehicle in

front of you.• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.• You take corners too fast.• The road surface is poor.Note: If the system activates, the brakepedal may pulse and may travel further.Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. Youmay also hear a noise from the system. Thisis normal.

193


Brakes

PARKING BRAKE

WARNING: Always set the parkingbrake fully and make sure thetransmission is locked in park (P). Failureto set the parking brake and engage parkcould result in vehicle roll-away, propertydamage or bodily injury.

To set the parking brake, press the parkingbrake pedal down to its fullest extent. Thebrake warning lamp in the instrumentcluster will illuminate and remainsilluminated until the parking brake isreleased.To release the parking brake, press theparking brake pedal down again.If you are parking your vehicle on a gradeor with a trailer, press and hold the brakepedal down, then set the parking brake.There may be a little vehicle movement asthe parking brake sets to hold the vehicle'sweight. This is normal and should be noreason for concern. If needed, press andhold the service brake pedal down, thentry reapplying the parking brake. Chock thewheels if required. If the parking brakecannot hold the weight of the vehicle, theparking brake may need to be serviced orthe vehicle may be overloaded.

HILL START ASSIST

WARNING: The system does notreplace the parking brake. When youleave your vehicle, always apply theparking brake.

WARNING: You must remain inyour vehicle when the system turns on.At all times, you are responsible forcontrolling your vehicle, supervising thesystem and intervening, if required.Failure to take care may result in the lossof control of your vehicle, seriouspersonal injury or death.

WARNING: The system will turnoff if a malfunction is apparent or if yourev the engine excessively. Failure to takecare may result in the loss of control ofyour vehicle, serious personal injury ordeath.

The system makes it easier to pull awaywhen your vehicle is on a slope without theneed to use the parking brake.When the system is active, your vehicleremains stationary on the slope for two tothree seconds after you release the brakepedal. This allows time to move your footfrom the brake to the accelerator pedal.The system releases the brakesautomatically once the engine hasdeveloped sufficient torque to prevent yourvehicle from rolling down the slope. Thisis an advantage when pulling away on aslope, for example from a car park ramp,traffic lights or when reversing uphill intoa parking space.The system activates on any slope thatcauses your vehicle to roll.Note: There is no warning light to indicatethe system is either on or off.

Using Hill Start Assist1. Press the brake pedal to bring your

vehicle to a complete standstill.Keepthe brake pedal pressed and shift intofirst gear when facing uphill or reverse(R) when facing downhill.

194


Brakes

2. If the sensors detect that your vehicleis on a slope, the system activatesautomatically.

3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, your vehicle remains onthe slope without rolling away forabout two to three seconds. This holdtime automatically extends if you arein the process of driving off.

4. Drive off in the normal manner. Thesystem releases the brakesautomatically.

Note: When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal and press the pedal again whenthe system is active, you will experiencesignificantly reduced brake pedal travel. Thisis normal.

Switching the System On and OffVehicles with Manual TransmissionYou can switch this feature on or off in theinformation display. The systemremembers the last setting when you startyour vehicle.

Vehicles with Automatic TransmissionYou cannot turn the system on or off.When you switch the ignition on, thesystem automatically turns on.

195


Brakes

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe traction control system helps avoiddrive wheel spin and loss of traction.If your vehicle begins to slide, the systemapplies the brakes to individual wheelsand, when needed, reduces engine powerat the same time. If the wheels spin whenaccelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,the system reduces engine power in orderto increase traction.

USING TRACTION CONTROL

WARNING: The stability andtraction control light illuminates steadilyif the system detects a failure. Make sureyou did not manually disable the tractioncontrol system using the informationdisplay controls or the switch. If thestability control and traction control lightis still illuminating steadily, have thesystem serviced by an authorized dealerimmediately. Operating your vehicle withthe traction control disabled could leadto an increased risk of loss of vehiclecontrol, vehicle rollover, personal injuryand death.

The system automatically turns on eachtime you switch the ignition on.If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,switching traction control off may bebeneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.Note: When you switch traction control off,stability control remains fully active.

Switching the System OffWhen you switch the system off or on, amessage appears in the informationdisplay showing system status.

You can switch the system off by eitherusing the information display controls orthe switch.

Using the Information DisplayControlsYou can switch this feature off or on in theinformation display. See GeneralInformation (page 104).

Using a Switch (If Equipped)

Use the traction control switch on theinstrument panel to switch the system offor on.

System Indicator Lights andMessages

E138639

The stability and traction controllight:

• Temporarily illuminates on enginestart-up.

• Flashes when a driving conditionactivates either of the systems.

• Illuminates if a problem occurs in eitherof the systems.

E130458

The stability and traction controloff light temporarily illuminateson engine start-up and stays on

when you switch the traction controlsystem off.

196


Traction Control


WARNING: Vehicle modificationsinvolving braking system, aftermarketroof racks, suspension, steering system,tire construction and wheel and tire sizemay change the handling characteristicsof your vehicle and may adversely affectthe performance of the electronicstability control system. In addition,installing any stereo loudspeakers mayinterfere with and adversely affect theelectronic stability control system. Installany aftermarket stereo loudspeaker asfar as possible from the front centerconsole, the tunnel, and the front seatsin order to minimize the risk of interferingwith the electronic stability controlsensors. Reducing the effectiveness ofthe electronic stability control systemcould lead to an increased risk of loss ofvehicle control, vehicle rollover, personalinjury and death.

WARNING: Remember that evenadvanced technology cannot defy thelaws of physics. It’s always possible tolose control of a vehicle due toinappropriate driver input for theconditions. Aggressive driving on anyroad condition can cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle increasing the riskof personal injury or property damage.Activation of the electronic stabilitycontrol system is an indication that atleast some of the tires have exceededtheir ability to grip the road; this couldreduce the operator’s ability to controlthe vehicle potentially resulting in a lossof vehicle control, vehicle rollover,personal injury and death. If yourelectronic stability control systemactivates, SLOW DOWN.

The system automatically turns on eachtime you switch the ignition on.

If a driving condition activates either thestability control or the traction controlsystem you may experience the followingconditions:• The stability and traction control light

flashes.• Your vehicle slows down.• Reduced engine power.• A vibration in the brake pedal.• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.• If the driving condition is severe and

your foot is not on the brake, the brakepedal may move as the systemsapplies higher brake forces.

The stability control system has severalfeatures built into it to help you maintaincontrol of your vehicle:

Electronic Stability ControlThe system enhances your vehicle’s abilityto prevent skids or lateral slides byapplying brakes to one or more of thewheels individually and, if necessary,reducing engine power.

Roll Stability ControlThe system enhances your vehicle’s abilityto prevent rollovers by detecting yourvehicle’s roll motion and the rate at whichit changes by applying the brakes to oneor more wheels individually.

Curve ControlThe system enhances your vehicle’s abilityto follow the road when cornering severelyor avoiding objects in the roadway. CurveControl operates by reducing engine powerand, if necessary, applying brakes to oneor more of the wheels individually.

197


Stability Control

Traction ControlThe system enhances your vehicle’s abilityto maintain traction of the wheels bydetecting and controlling wheel spin. SeeUsing Traction Control (page 196).

E72903

A A

AB

B

B

B

Vehicle without stability controlskidding off its intended route.

A

Vehicle with stability controlmaintaining control on a slipperysurface.

B

USING STABILITY CONTROLThe system automatically turns on eachtime you switch the ignition on.You cannot switch the stability control androll stability control systems off, but whenyou shift into reverse (R), the systemsdeactivate.You can switch the traction control systemoff or on. See Using Traction Control(page 196).

198


Stability Control

USING TERRAIN CONTROLThe terrain management system optimizesdrivability and comfort as well asmaximizing traction while operating ondifferent types of terrain.Turn the control located on the centerconsole to choose between the followingmodes:

E193313

3

2

1

4

Grass/Gravel/Snow modeshould be selected where a firmsurface is covered with loose orslippery material such as packedsnow, ice, water, grass, or a thinlayer of gravel or sand. For deep

1

gravel or sand, select Sandmode. If the vehicle cannot gaintraction in deep snow, switchingoff the traction control systemmay help (switch tractioncontrol back on when you regaintraction). See Using TractionControl (page 196).Sand mode should be selectedin soft dry sand or deep gravel. Ifcrossing wet sand that may besufficiently deep enough for thewheels to sink into the surface,select Mud/Ruts mode.

2

Mud/Ruts mode should beselected for muddy, rutted, softor uneven terrain.

3

Normal mode is for on-roadconditions and should beselected before driving onsurfaces which are similar to ahard road surface or once theneed for a special mode haspassed. Select Normal modewhen towing a trailer.

4

Note: The Sand and Mud/Ruts modes arefor off-road use only.Note: The curve control portion of theAdvanceTrac® system is unavailable whenyou select Sand or Mud/Ruts.If the system becomes inoperable,selecting some modes may not be possibleand a message displays. If it becomesinoperable due to a system malfunction,all of the mode indicators on the controlturn off and one of the following messagesappears in the information display:TERRAIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEMFAULT: Turning the engine on and off mayclear the fault. If that does not work, havethe system serviced by an authorizeddealer.MODE CHANGE NOT ACCEPTED,RETRY: A mode change cannot be madeat the time of driver request. Try the modechange again.

199


Terrain Control (If Equipped)

USING HILL DESCENTCONTROLPrinciple of operation

WARNING: Hill descent controlcannot control descent in all surfaceconditions and circumstances, such asice or extremely steep grades. Hilldescent control is a driver assist systemand cannot substitute for good judgmentby the driver. Failure to do so may resultin loss of vehicle control, crash or seriousinjury.

WARNING: Hill descent controldoes not provide hill hold at zero milesper hour (0 kilometers per hour). Whenstopped, the parking brake must beapplied or the vehicle must be placed inP (Park) or it may roll away.

Hill descent control allows the driver to setand maintain vehicle speed whiledescending steep grades in various surfaceconditions.Hill descent control can maintain vehiclespeeds on downhill grades between 3 mph(5 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h). Above20 mph (32 km/h), the system remainsarmed, but descent speed cannot be setor maintained.Hill descent control requires a coolingdown interval after a period of sustaineduse. The amount of time that the featurecan remain active before cooling varieswith conditions. The system provides awarning in the message center and a chimesounds when the system is about todisengage for cooling. At this time,manually apply the brakes as needed tomaintain descent speed.

Using hill descent controlPress and release the hilldescent button located in thecenter of the terrain

management control. A light in the controlilluminates and a chime sounds when thisfeature activates.To increase descent speed, press theaccelerator pedal until you reach thedesired speed. To decrease descent speed,press the brake pedal until you reach thedesired speed.

Whether accelerating or decelerating, onceyou reach the desired descent speed,remove your feet from the pedals and hilldescent control maintains the chosenvehicle speed.Note: You may observe noise from the ABSpump motor during hill descent controloperation. This is a normal characteristic ofthe ABS and should be no reason forconcern.

Hill descent modes• At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):

When you press the Hill DescentControl and Hill Descent Controlactivates, HILL DESCENT CONTROLACTIVE appears in the messagecenter for several seconds.

• At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):When you press the Hill DescentControl switch and conditions are notcorrect for hill descent activation, theHill Descent Control system enables,the light on the button is solid and HILLDESCENT CONTROL READYdisplays in the message center forseveral seconds.

200



• At speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h):When you press the Hill DescentControl switch, the Hill Descent Controlsystem enables, the light on the buttonilluminates and FOR HILL CNTRL, 20MPH OR LESS displays in themessage center for several seconds.

• For Hill Descent Control to enable, thevehicle must be in a drive gear or (R)Reverse. If the vehicle is in P (Park) orN (Neutral) and you press the button,FOR HILL CNTRL, SELECT GEARdisplays in the message center forseveral seconds.

Refer to the Information Displays foradditional Hill Descent Control messages.See Information Messages (page 115).

201




WARNING: To help avoid personalinjury, always use caution when inreverse (R) and when using the sensingsystem.

WARNING: The system may notdetect objects with surfaces that absorbreflection. Always drive with due careand attention. Failure to take care mayresult in a crash.

WARNING: Traffic controlsystems, inclement weather, air brakes,external motors and fans may affect thecorrect operation of the sensingsystem.This may cause reducedperformance or false alerts.

WARNING: The system may notdetect small or moving objects,particularly those close to the ground.

Note: If your vehicle is equipped withMyKey™, the sensing system cannot beturned off when a MyKey™ is present. SeePrinciple of Operation (page 60).Note: Keep the sensors, located on thebumper or fascia, free from snow, ice andlarge accumulations of dirt. If the sensorsare covered, the system’s accuracy can beaffected. Do not clean the sensors withsharp objects.Note: If your vehicle sustains damage tothe bumper or fascia, leaving it misalignedor bent, the sensing zone may be alteredcausing inaccurate measurement ofobstacles or false alerts.

Note: Certain add-on devices installedaround the bumper or fascia may createfalse alerts. For example, large trailerhitches, bike or surfboard racks, license platebrackets, bumper covers or any other devicethat may block the normal detection zoneof the system. Remove the add-on deviceto prevent false alerts.Note: When a trailer is connected to yourvehicle, the rear parking aid may detect thetrailer and therefore provide an alert. Disablethe rear parking aid when a trailer isconnected to prevent the alert.The sensing system warns the driver ofobstacles within a certain range of yourvehicle. The system turns on automaticallywhenever you switch the ignition on.The system can be switched off throughthe information display menu or from thepop-up message that appears once youshift the transmission into reverse (R). SeeGeneral Information (page 104).If a fault is present in the system, a warningmessage appears in the informationdisplay. See Information Messages(page 115).

REAR PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)

The rear sensors are only active when thetransmission is in reverse (R). As yourvehicle moves closer to the obstacle, therate of the audible warning increases.When the obstacle is less than 12 in(30 cm) away, the warning soundscontinuously. If the system detects astationary or receding object farther than12 in (30 cm) from the corners of thebumper, the tone sounds for only threeseconds. Once the system detects anobject approaching, the warning soundsagain.

202


Parking Aids

E130178

Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) fromthe rear bumper. There may be decreasedcoverage area at the outer corners of thebumper.The system detects certain objects whilethe transmission is in reverse (R) :• Your vehicle is moving toward a

stationary object at a speed of 3 mph(5 km/h) or less.

• Your vehicle is not moving, but amoving object is approaching the rearof your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph(5 km/h) or less.

• Your vehicle is moving at a speed ofless than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a movingobject is approaching the rear of yourvehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph(5 km/h).

The system provides audio warnings onlywhen your vehicle is moving or when yourvehicle is stationary and the detectedobstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) awayfrom the bumper.

Obstacle Distance Indicator (If

Equipped)

The system provides obstacle distanceindication through the information display.The distance indicator displays when thetransmission is in reverse (R).The indicator displays:• As the distance to the obstacle

decreases the indicator blocksilluminate and move towards thevehicle icon.

• If there is no obstacle detected, thedistance indicator blocks are grayedout.

FRONT PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)

The front sensors are active when thetransmission is in any position other thanpark (P) and your vehicle is traveling at lowspeed.

E187330

Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) fromthe front bumper. The coverage areadecreases at the outer corners.When your vehicle approaches an object,a warning tone sounds. When your vehiclemoves closer to an object, the warningtone repeat rate increases. The warningtone sounds continuously when an objectis 12 in (30 cm) or less from the frontbumper.

203


Parking Aids

You can switch the system off through theinformation display menu or from thepop-up message that appears once youshift the transmission into reverse (R). SeeGeneral Information (page 104). If yourvehicle has a parking aid button, you canswitch the system off by pressing thebutton.


Equipped)

The system provides obstacle distanceindication through the information display.The indicator displays:• As the distance to the obstacle

decreases the indicator blocksilluminate and move towards thevehicle icon.

• If there is no obstacle detected, thedistance indicator blocks are grayedout.

If the transmission is in reverse (R), thefront sensing system provides audiowarnings when your vehicle is moving andthe detected obstacle is moving towardsyour vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary,the audio warning will be stopped after 2seconds. Visual indication is alwayspresent in reverse (R).If the transmission is in drive (D) or anyother forward gear (for example, low (L),sport (S) or any forward gear in a manualtransmission), the front sensing systemprovides audio and visual warnings whenyour vehicle is moving below a speed of5 mph (8 km/h) and an obstacle is locatedinside the detection area. Once the vehicleis stationary, the audio warning will bestopped after 2 seconds and the visualindication stops after 4 seconds. If theobstacles detected are within 12 in(30 cm), the visual indication remains on.

If the transmission is in neutral (N), thesystem provides visual indication onlywhen your vehicle is moving at 5 mph(8 km/h) or below and an obstacle islocated inside the detection area. Onceyour vehicle is stationary, the visualindication will stop after 4 seconds.

SIDE SENSING SYSTEM (IF

EQUIPPED)

The side sensing system uses the front andrear side sensors to detect and mapobstacles within the vehicle's driving path,located near the sides of your vehicle. Theside sensors are active when thetransmission is in any position other thanpark (P).Note: Obstacles that enter the sidedetection area without being detected andmapped by the front or rear side sensors willnot be detected.

E187810

Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) fromthe sides of your vehicle.When the system detects an object closeto the side of your vehicle, an audiblewarning sounds. As your vehicle movescloser to obstacles within the driving pathof your vehicle, the rate of the audiblewarning increases.

204


Parking Aids


Equipped)

E190459

The system provides obstacle distanceindication through the information display.As the distance to the obstacle decreases,the indicator blocks illuminate and movetoward the vehicle icon. If there is noobstacle detected, the distance indicatorblocks show greyed out.When you shift to reverse (R), the sidesensing system provides audible warningswhen your vehicle is moving and obstaclesare detected within 24 in (60 cm) and areinside the driving path of your vehicle.When you stop your vehicle the audiblewarning stops after two seconds.Note: Visual distance indication remainson when the transmission is in reverse (R).When you shift to drive (D) or any otherforward gear, for example, low (L), sport(S) or any forward gear in manualtransmission, the side sensing systemprovides audible and visual distancewarnings when your vehicle is movingbelow a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and

obstacles are detected within 24 in(60 cm) and are inside the driving path ofyour vehicle. Once your vehicle reaches astandstill condition, the audible warningstops after two seconds and visualindication stops after four seconds.If the transmission is in neutral (N), the sidesensing system provides visual distanceindication only when your vehicle is movingbelow a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) andthere is a front or rear parking aid obstacledetected, and the side obstacle is within24 in (60 cm) from the side of your vehicle.When you stop your vehicle the visualdistance indication stops after fourseconds.If the side sensing system is not available,the side distance indicator blocks do notappear.The side sensing system is not availableunder the following condition:• If you switch the traction control

system off.The side sensing system may not beavailable until you have drivenapproximately the length of your vehiclein order for the system to reinitialize if:• You switch the ignition on, off and back

on.• Your vehicle remains stationary for over

two minutes.• The anti-lock brake system is

activated.• The traction control system is

activated.• When the steering wheel angle

information is not available, the sidesensing system is not available. Thevehicle must be driven at least 492 ft(150 m) above 19 mph (30 km/h) torecover the steering wheel angleinformation.

205


Parking Aids

ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING: You must remain inyour vehicle when the system turns on.At all times, you are responsible forcontrolling your vehicle, supervising thesystem and intervening, if required.Failure to take care may result in the lossof control of your vehicle, seriouspersonal injury or death.

WARNING: The sensors may notdetect objects in heavy rain or otherconditions that cause interference.

WARNING: Active park assist doesnot apply the brakes under anycircumstances.

WARNING: You are responsiblefor controlling your vehicle at all times.The system is designed to be an aid anddoes not relieve you of your responsibilityto drive with due care and attention.Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in the loss of control of yourvehicle, personal injury or death.

Active park assist is a multi-step processand may require you to shift thetransmission multiple times. Follow theonscreen instructions until the parkingmaneuver is complete.If you are uncomfortable with the proximityto any vehicle or object, you may chooseto override the system by grabbing thesteering wheel, or by taking full control ofyour vehicle after pressing the active parkassist button.Keep your hands, hair, clothing and anyloose items clear of the steering wheelwhen using active park assist.

The sensors are on the front and rearbumpers.Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, iceand large accumulations of dirt.Note: Do not cover up the sensors.Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharpobjects.Note: The sensors may not detect objectswith surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.The sensors may falsely detect objects dueto ultrasonic interference caused bymotorcycle exhausts, truck air brakes orhorns, for example.Note: If you change any tires, the systemmust recalibrate and may not correctlyoperate for a short time.The system may not correctly operate inany of the following conditions:• You use a spare tire or a tire that is

significantly worn more than the othertires.

• One or more tires are incorrectlyinflated.

• You try to park on a tight curve.• Something passes between the front

bumper and the parking space. Forexample, a pedestrian or cyclist.

• The edge of the neighboring parkedvehicle is high off the ground. Forexample, a bus, tow truck or flatbedtruck.

• The weather conditions are poor. Forexample, during heavy rain, snow, fog,high humidity and high temperatures.

Do not use the system if:• You have attached an add-on

accessory close to the sensors on thefront or rear of your vehicle. Forexample, a bike rack or trailer.

• You have attached an overhangingobject to the roof. For example, asurfboard.

206


Parking Aids

• The front bumper, rear bumper or theside sensors are damaged.

• The correct tire size is not in use on yourvehicle. For example, a mini-spare tire.

Using Active Park AssistSelecting an Active Park Assist Mode

E146186

Press the button once toactivate parallel parking. Pressthe button a second time to

activate perpendicular parking. If you pressthe button again the system switches off.

If your vehicle is parked and after youswitch the ignition on, you can use theinformation display to toggle through themodes. Press the button to switch thesystem on and open the system menu inthe information display.Note: If your vehicle is parked, the defaultmode is parallel park out assist. However,if you did not use active park assist toparallel park your vehicle, use theinformation display to select park out assist.Note: You can repeatedly press the activepark assist button to toggle through themodes only after moving your vehicleapproximately 33 ft (10 m).To toggle through the modes, use thebuttons on the information display toselect the following:• Parallel parking.• Perpendicular parking.• Parallel park out assist.• Switch the system off.Note: There is no time limit for togglingthrough the modes.

Parallel ParkingThe system detects available parallelparking spaces and steers your vehicle intothe space. You control the accelerator,gearshift and brakes. The system visuallyand audibly guides you into a parallelparking space.

E146186

Press the button once to searchfor a parking space.

Note: You can also switch the system onafter you have already driven partially orcompletely past a parking space. Press theactive park assist button and the systeminforms you if you have recently passed asuitable parking space.When the vehicle speed is less than22 mph (35 km/h), the system scans bothsides of your vehicle for an availableparking space. A message and a graphicappear in the information display toindicate the system is searching for aparking space. Use the direction indicatorlever to search for a parking space on thedriver or passenger side of your vehicle.Note: The system scans both sides of yourvehicle and offers parking spaces one sideat a time if you do not use the directionindicator.Note: The system defaults to the passengerside if you do not use the direction indicator.

E130107

Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)and parallel to the other parked vehicleswhen searching for a parking space.Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft(0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) awayfrom other parked vehicles, the system maynot be able to detect an available parkingspace.

207


Parking Aids

When the system detects a suitable space,a message displays and a tone sounds.Stop your vehicle and follow the onscreeninstructions. If your vehicle is moving veryslowly, you may have to move forward ashort distance before the system is readyto park.Note: You must observe that the space thesystem selects remains clear of obstructionsat all times during the maneuver.Note: The system always offers the lastparking space it detects. For example, if yourvehicle detects multiple spaces when youare driving, it offers the last one.Note: If the vehicle speed is greater thanapproximately 22 mph (35 km/h), thesystem shows a message to instruct you toreduce the vehicle speed.

Automatically Steering into a ParallelParking SpaceWhen you shift into reverse (R), with yourhands off the steering wheel and nothingobstructing its movement, your vehiclesteers itself into the space. The systemdisplays instructions to move your vehiclebackward and forward in the space.Note: If the vehicle speed exceedsapproximately 6 mph (9 km/h), youinterrupt the maneuver, or the systemswitches off, you must take full control ofyour vehicle.Note: If the system detects an object is veryclose to your vehicle and it may be unsafeto continue the maneuver, it may instructyou to stop your vehicle. The system maynot provide any further instruction. Steeringassistance continues to operate but youmust decide if it is safe to continue themaneuver.

E130108

When you believe your vehicle is correctlyparked, or a solid tone sounds and aninformation message appears, bring yourvehicle to a complete stop.When the Active Park Assist maneuver iscomplete, a tone sounds and aninformation message appears.Note: You are responsible for checking howyour vehicle is parked and making anynecessary corrections before leaving yourvehicle.

Deactivating Active Park AssistYou can manually deactivate the systemby:• Pressing the Active Park Assist button

during an active maneuver.• Grabbing the steering wheel during an

active maneuver.• Driving above 22 mph (35 km/h) for 30

seconds when searching for a parkingspace.

• Driving above 31 mph (50 km/h).• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during

an active maneuver.• Switching the traction control system

off.Certain vehicle conditions may alsodeactivate the system, for example:• The traction control system activates

or fails.• The anti-lock brake system activates

or fails.If the system malfunctions, a messageappears and a tone sounds. Have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.

208


Parking Aids

Perpendicular ParkingThe system detects availableperpendicular parking spaces and steersyour vehicle into the space. You control theaccelerator, gearshift and brakes. Thesystem visually and audibly guides you intoa perpendicular parking space.

E146186

Press the button twice to searchfor a parking space.

When the vehicle speed is less than 19 mph(30 km/h), the system scans both sides ofyour vehicle for an available parking space.A message and a graphic appear in theinformation display to indicate the systemis searching for a parking space. Use thedirection indicator lever to search for aparking space on the driver or passengerside of your vehicle.Note: The system scans both sides of yourvehicle and offers parking spaces one sideat a time if you do not use the directionindicator.Note: The system defaults to the passengerside if you do not use the direction indicator.

E186193

Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)and perpendicular to the other parkedvehicles when searching for a parkingspace.Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft(0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) awayfrom other parked vehicles, the system maynot be able to detect an available parkingspace.

When the system detects a suitable space,a message displays and a tone sounds.Stop your vehicle and follow the onscreeninstructions. If your vehicle is moving veryslowly, you may have to move forward ashort distance before the system is readyto park.Note: You must observe that the space thesystem selects remains clear of obstructionsat all times during the maneuver.Note: The system always offers the lastdetected parking space. For example, if yourvehicle detects multiple spaces when youare driving, it offers the last one.Note: If the vehicle speed is greater thanapproximately 19 mph (30 km/h), thesystem shows a message to instruct you toreduce the vehicle speed.

Automatically Steering into aPerpendicular Parking SpaceWhen you shift into reverse (R), with yourhands off the steering wheel and nothingobstructing its movement, your vehiclesteers itself into the space. The systemdisplays instructions to move your vehiclebackward and forward in the space.Note: If the vehicle speed exceedsapproximately 6 mph (9 km/h), youinterrupt the maneuver, or the systemswitches off, you must take full control ofyour vehicle.Note: If the system detects an object is veryclose to your vehicle and it may be unsafeto continue the maneuver, it may instructyou to stop your vehicle. The system maynot provide any further instruction. Steeringassistance continues to operate but youmust decide if it is safe to continue themaneuver.

209


Parking Aids

E186191

When you believe your vehicle is correctlyparked, or a solid tone sounds and aninformation message appears, bring yourvehicle to a complete stop.When the active park assist maneuver iscomplete, a tone sounds and a messageappears.Note: You are responsible for checking howyour vehicle is parked and making anynecessary corrections before leaving yourvehicle.

Deactivating Active Park AssistYou can manually deactivate the systemby:• Pressing the Active Park Assist button

during an active maneuver.• Grabbing the steering wheel during an

active maneuver.• Driving above 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30

seconds when searching for a parkingspace.

• Driving above 31 mph (50 km/h).• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during

an active maneuver.• Switching the traction control system

off.

Certain vehicle conditions may alsodeactivate the system, for example:• The traction control system activates

or fails.• The anti-lock brake system activates

or fails.If the system malfunctions, a messageappears and a tone sounds. Have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.

Parallel Park Out AssistThe system steers your vehicle out of aparallel parking space. You control theaccelerator, gearshift and brakes. Thesystem visually and audibly guides you outof a parallel parking space.Note: This system is not intended to assistwhen exiting a perpendicular parking space.

E146186

Press the button once when yourvehicle is stationary in a parallelparking space.

Note: If you did not use active park assistto parallel park your vehicle, pressing thebutton once selects parallel park. You mustuse the information display to select parkout assist.The system displays a message instructingyou to switch a direction indicator on. Usethe direction indicator to select which sideof your vehicle you want to exit the parkingspace. The system displays instructions tomove your vehicle backward and forwardin the space.Note: If the system detects an object is veryclose to your vehicle and it may be unsafeto continue the maneuver, it may instructyou to stop your vehicle. The system maynot provide any further instruction. Steeringassistance continues to operate but youmust decide if it is safe to continue themaneuver.

210


Parking Aids

E188012

After the system directs your vehicle to aposition where you can exit the parkingspace in a forward movement, a messageappears instructing you to take full controlof your vehicle. Generally, hand-over iswhen your vehicle is still inside the parkingspace.

Note: Parallel Park Out Assist may not beavailable when the clearance to the frontor the rear of your vehicle is too small.Note: If the vehicle speed exceedsapproximately 6 mph (9 km/h), youinterrupt the maneuver, or the systemswitches off, you must take full control ofyour vehicle.Note: You are responsible for controllingyour vehicle and making sure the path isclear prior to pulling into traffic.

Troubleshooting

Possible CauseSymptom

You may have switched the traction control off.The system does not search fora parking space.

The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle mustbe moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.

The sensors may be blocked. For example, snow, iceor dirt buildup. Blocked sensors can affect how thesystem functions.

The system does not offer aparking space.

There is not enough room in the parking space for yourvehicle to safely park.

There is not enough space for the parking maneuver onthe opposite side of the parking space.

The parking space is more than 5 ft (1.5 m) or less than2 ft (0.5 m) away.

The vehicle speed is greater than 22 mph (35 km/h)for parallel parking or greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)for perpendicular parking.

You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. Afteryou reconnect the battery you must drive your vehicleon a straight road for a short period of time.

Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of thecurrent transmission position. For example, rollingforward when in reverse (R).

The system does not correctlyposition your vehicle in aparking space.

An irregular curb along the parking space prevents thesystem from correctly aligning your vehicle.

211


Parking Aids

Possible CauseSymptom

Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not becorrectly parked.

Your vehicle stopped too far past the parking space.

The tires may not be correctly installed or maintained.For example, not inflated correctly, improper size, or ofdifferent sizes.

A repair or alteration changes the detection capabilities.

A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example,a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed.

The parking space length or position of parked objectschanges after your vehicle passes the space.

The temperature around your vehicle quickly changes.For example, driving from a heated garage into the cold,or after leaving a car wash.

REAR VIEW CAMERA

WARNING: The rear view camerasystem is a reverse aid supplementdevice that still requires the driver to useit in conjunction with the interior andexterior mirrors for maximum coverage.

WARNING: Objects that are closeto either corner of the bumper or underthe bumper, might not be seen on thescreen due to the limited coverage of thecamera system.

WARNING: Reverse your vehicleslowly. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in the loss of control of yourvehicle, personal injury or death.

WARNING: Use caution when therear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargodoor is ajar, the camera will be out ofposition and the video image may beincorrect. All guidelines disappear whenthe rear cargo door is ajar. Failure tofollow this instruction could result inpersonal injury.

WARNING: Use caution whenturning camera features on or off whenthe transmission is not in park (P). Makesure your vehicle is not moving.

Note: Some vehicles may not comeequipped with guidelines.The rear view camera system provides avideo image of the area behind yourvehicle.During operation, lines appear in thedisplay which represent your vehicle’s pathand proximity to objects behind yourvehicle.

212


Parking Aids

E253742

The camera is located on the luggagecompartment door.

Using the Rear View CameraSystemThe rear view camera system displayswhat is behind your vehicle when you placethe transmission in reverse (R).Note: The reverse sensing system is noteffective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)and may not detect certain angular ormoving objects.The system uses three types of guides tohelp you see what is behind your vehicle:• Active guidelines (if equipped): Show

the intended path of your vehicle whenreversing.

• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual pathyour vehicle is moving in while reversingin a straight line. This can be helpfulwhen backing into a parking space oraligning your vehicle with anotherobject behind you.

• Centerline: Helps align the center ofyour vehicle with an object (forexample, a trailer).

Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)and the luggage compartment door orliftgate is open, no rear view camerafeatures will display.

Note: When towing, the camera only seeswhat you are towing. This might not provideadequate coverage as it usually provides innormal operation and some objects mightnot be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelinesmay disappear when you connect the trailertow connector.The camera may not operate correctlyunder the following conditions:• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both

reverse lamps are not operating.• Mud, water or debris obstructs the

camera's view. Clean the lens with asoft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasivecleaner. You can also use the rearwasher to clean the camera. See RearWindow Wiper and Washers (page83).

• The rear of your vehicle is hit ordamaged, causing the camera tobecome misaligned.

Camera System SettingsThe rear view camera system settings canbe accessed through the display screen.See General Information (page 104).

Camera GuidelinesNote: Active guidelines are only availablewhen the transmission is in reverse (R).

213


Parking Aids

A B C D

F

E

E142436

Active guidelines (If equipped)ACenterlineBFixed guideline: Green zoneCFixed guideline: Yellow zoneDFixed guideline: Red zoneERear bumperF

Active guidelines are only shown with fixedguidelines. To use active guidelines, turnthe steering wheel to point the guidelinestoward an intended path. If you changethe steering wheel position while reversing,your vehicle might deviate from the originalintended path.

The fixed and active guidelines fade in andout depending on the steering wheelposition. The active guidelines do notdisplay when the steering wheel positionis straight.Always use caution while reversing.Objects in the red zone are closest to yourvehicle and objects in the green zone arefarther away. Objects are getting closer toyour vehicle as they move from the greenzone to the yellow or red zones. Use theside view mirrors and rear view mirror toget better coverage on both sides and rearof the vehicle.


Equipped)

E190459

The system will provide an image of yourvehicle and the sensor zones. The zoneswill highlight green, yellow and red whenthe parking aid sensors detect an object inthe coverage area.

214


Parking Aids

Manual Zoom

WARNING: When manual zoomis on, the full area behind your vehiclemay not show. Be aware of yoursurroundings when using the manualzoom feature.

Note: Manual zoom is only available whenthe transmission is in reverse (R).Note: When you enable manual zoom, onlythe centerline is shown.Selectable settings for this feature areZoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press thesymbol in the camera screen to change theview. The default setting is Zoom OFF.This allows you to get a closer view of anobject behind your vehicle. The zoomedimage keeps the bumper in the image toprovide a reference. The zoom is onlyactive while the transmission is in reverse(R).

Rear Camera DelaySelectable settings for this feature are ONand OFF.The default setting for the rear cameradelay is OFF.When shifting the transmission out ofreverse (R) and into any gear other thanpark (P), the camera image remains in thedisplay until:• Your vehicle speed reaches

approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).• You shift your vehicle into park (P).

180 DEGREE CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: The front camerasystem still requires the driver to use itin conjunction with looking out of yourvehicle.

WARNING: Objects that are closeto either corner of the bumper or underthe bumper, might not be seen on thescreen due to the limited coverage of thecamera system.

WARNING: Use caution whenturning camera features on or off whenthe transmission is not in park (P). Makesure your vehicle is not moving.

E253795

The front view camera is located in thegrille. The camera provides a video imageof the area in front of your vehicle.Note: The area displayed on the screen mayvary according to your vehicle's orientationor road condition.Note: The front view camera switches offif your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph(10 km/h). You have to switch the systemback on by using the camera system buttononce below the speed threshold.

215


Parking Aids

Using the SystemThe 180 degree camera system consistsof front and rear cameras. The system:• Allows you to see what is directly in

front or behind your vehicle.• Provides cross traffic view in front and

behind your vehicle.• Provides visibility during parking

maneuvers.

E188847

The camera system button islocated on the center stack andallows you to toggle through

different camera views.Note: The camera system may not operatecorrectly if mud, water or debris obstructsthe camera's view. You can clean the lenswith a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasivecleaner or by using your front or rear washer.See Wipers and Washers (page 82).

Camera ViewsPress the camera button to togglebetween different views.• Normal Rear View: Provides an image

of what is directly behind your vehiclewhen your vehicle is in reverse (R).

• Expanded Rear View: Provides anexpanded 180 degree image of whatis directly behind your vehicle whenyour vehicle is in reverse (R).

• Normal Front View: Provides animage of what is directly in front yourvehicle when your vehicle is in neutral(N) or drive (D).

• Expanded Front View: Provides anexpanded 180 degree image of whatis directly in front your vehicle whenyour vehicle is in neutral (N) or drive(D).

216


Parking Aids

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONCruise control lets you maintain a setspeed without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. You can use cruisecontrol when your vehicle speed is greaterthan 20 mph (30 km/h).

USING CRUISE CONTROL (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Do not use cruisecontrol on winding roads, in heavy trafficor when the road surface is slippery. Thiscould result in loss of vehicle control,serious injury or death.

WARNING: When you are goingdownhill, your vehicle speed couldincrease above the set speed. Thesystem does not apply the brakes.

Note: The system cancels if your vehiclespeed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) underthe set speed when driving uphill.

E266656

The cruise controls are on the steeringwheel. See Cruise Control (page 80).

Switching Cruise Control OnPress ON.

E71340

The indicator appears in theinformation display.

Setting the Cruise SpeedDrive to the speed you prefer.

Press to set the current speed.

Press to set the current speed.

Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.Note: The indicator changes color.

Changing the Set SpeedPress and release to increase theset speed in small increments.

Press and release to decreasethe set speed in smallincrements.

Press and hold either button to accelerateor decelerate, respectively. Release thebutton when you reach the speed youprefer.Press the accelerator or brake pedal untilyou reach the speed you prefer. Presseither button.Note: If you accelerate by pressing only theaccelerator pedal, the set speed does notchange. When you release the acceleratorpedal, your vehicle returns to the speed thatyou previously set.

Canceling the Set SpeedPress the button, or tap thebrake pedal to cancel the setspeed.

Note: The system remembers the setspeed.

217


Cruise Control

Resuming the Set SpeedPress to resume the set speed.

Switching Cruise Control Off

E265297

Press and release the buttonwhen the system is in standbymode or switch the ignition off.

Note: You erase the set speed when youswitch the system off.

USING ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Always pay closeattention to changing road conditionswhen using adaptive cruise control. Thesystem does not replace attentivedriving. Failing to pay attention to theroad may result in a crash, serious injuryor death.

WARNING: Do not use theadaptive cruise control when entering orleaving a highway, on roads withintersections or roundabouts ornon-vehicular traffic or roads that arewinding, slippery, unpaved, or steepslopes.

WARNING: Do not use the systemin poor visibility, for example fog, heavyrain, spray or snow.

WARNING: Do not use the systemwhen towing a trailer that hasaftermarket electronic trailer brakecontrols. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in the loss of control of yourvehicle, personal injury or death.

WARNING: Do not use tire sizesother than those recommended becausethis can affect the normal operation ofthe system. Failure to do so may resultin a loss of vehicle control, which couldresult in serious injury.

WARNING: Adaptive cruise controlmay not detect stationary or slowmoving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).

WARNING: Adaptive cruise controldoes not detect pedestrians or objectsin the road.

WARNING: Adaptive cruise controldoes not detect oncoming vehicles in thesame lane.

WARNING: Adaptive cruise controlis not a crash warning or avoidancesystem.

WARNING: Do not use adaptivecruise control with a snow plow bladeinstalled.

The system adjusts your vehicle speed tomaintain the set gap between you and thevehicle in front of you in the same lane.You can select four gap settings.The system uses a radar sensor thatprojects a beam directly in front of yourvehicle.

218


Cruise Control

E266656

The adaptive cruise controls are on thesteering wheel.

Switching Adaptive Cruise ControlOn

E265296


E144529

The indicator, current gap settingand set speed appear in theinformation display.

E164805

Setting the Adaptive Cruise SpeedDrive to the speed you prefer.

Press and release either button.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

The indicator, current gap setting and setspeed appear in the information display.

E164805

A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is avehicle detected in front of you.Note: When adaptive cruise control isactive, the speedometer may vary slightlyfrom the set speed displayed in theinformation display.

Following a Vehicle

WARNING: When following avehicle, your vehicle does not decelerateautomatically to a stop, nor does yourvehicle always decelerate quicklyenough to avoid a crash without driverintervention. Always apply the brakeswhen necessary. Failing to do so mayresult in a crash, serious injury or death.

WARNING: Adaptive cruise controlonly warns of vehicles detected by theradar sensor. In some cases there maybe no warning or a delayed warning. Youshould always apply the brakes whennecessary. Failure to do so may result ina crash, serious injury or death.

Note: When you are following a vehicle andyou switch on a direction indicator, adaptivecruise control may provide a smalltemporary acceleration to help you pass.Note: The brakes may emit noise whenapplied by the system.

219


Cruise Control

When a vehicle ahead of you enters thesame lane or a slower vehicle is ahead inthe same lane, the vehicle speed adjuststo maintain a preset gap distance. Avehicle graphic illuminates in theinstrument cluster.Your vehicle maintains a consistent gapfrom the vehicle ahead until:• The vehicle in front of you accelerates

to a speed above the set speed.• The vehicle in front of you moves out

of the lane you are in.• Your vehicle speed falls below 12 mph

(20 km/h).• You set a new gap distance.The system applies the brakes to slow yourvehicle to maintain a safe gap distancefrom the vehicle in front. The system onlyapplies limited braking. You can overridethe system by applying the brakes.If the system determines that its maximumbraking level is not sufficient, an audiblewarning sounds, a message appears in theinformation display and an indicatorflashes when the system continues tobrake. Take immediate action.

Setting the Gap DistanceYou can decrease or increase the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle infront by pressing the gap control.

E263697

Press and release to decreasethe gap distance.

E263696

Press and release to increase thegap distance.

E164805

The selected gap appears in theinformation display as shown by the barsin the image.Note: The gap setting is time dependentand therefore the distance adjusts with yourvehicle speed.Note: It is your responsibility to select a gapappropriate to the driving conditions.

Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings

Dynamicbehavior

Distance GapGraphicdisplay,

bars indic-ated

betweenvehicles

Sport.Closest.1

Normal.Close.2

Normal.Medium.3

Comfort.Far.4

Each time you switch the system on, itselects the last chosen gap setting.

Overriding the Set Speed

WARNING: If you override thesystem by pressing the acceleratorpedal, it does not automatically applythe brakes to maintain a gap from anyvehicle ahead.

220


Cruise Control

When you press the accelerator pedal, youoverride the set speed and gap distance.

E144529

Use the accelerator pedalnormally to intentionally exceedthe set speed limit.

When you override the system, the greenindicator light illuminates and the vehicleimage does not appear in the informationdisplay.The system resumes operation when yourelease the accelerator pedal. The vehiclespeed decreases to the set speed, or alower speed if following a slower vehicle.

Changing the Set SpeedPress and release to increase theset speed in small increments.

Press and release to decreasethe set speed in smallincrements.

Press and hold either button to change theset speed in large increments. Release thebutton when you reach the speed youprefer.Press the accelerator or brake pedal untilyou reach the speed you prefer. Presseither button.The system may apply the brakes to slowthe vehicle to the new set speed. The setspeed displays continuously in theinformation display when the system isactive.

Canceling the Set SpeedPress and release the button ortap the brake pedal.

The set speed does not erase.

Resuming the Set SpeedPress and release the button.

Your vehicle speed returns to thepreviously set speed and gap setting. Theset speed displays continuously in theinformation display when the system isactive.Note: Only use resume if you are aware ofthe set speed and intend to return to it.

Automatic CancellationThe system is not functional at vehiclespeeds below 12 mph (20 km/h). Theinformation display indicates low enginespeed, an audible alarm sounds and theautomatic braking releases if the vehicledrops below this speed.Automatic cancellation can also occurwhen:• The tires lose traction.• You apply the parking brake.Note: If the engine speed drops too low, anaudible warning sounds and a messageappears in the information display.Automatic braking releases.

Hilly Condition UsageNote: An audible alarm sounds and thesystem shuts down if it applies brakes foran extended period of time. This allows thebrakes to cool. The system functionsnormally again when the brakes havecooled.Select a lower gear during prolongeddownhill driving on steep slopes, such asmountainous areas, when the system isactive. In such situations, the system needsadditional engine braking to reduce theload on the vehicle’s regular brake systemto prevent the brakes from overheating.

221


Cruise Control

Switching Adaptive Cruise ControlOff

E265297

Press and release the buttonwhen the system is in standbymode, or switch the ignition off.

Note: You erase the set speed and gapsetting when you switch the system off.

Detection Issues

WARNING: On rare occasions,detection issues can occur due to theroad infrastructures, for example bridges,tunnels and safety barriers. In thesecases, the system may brake late orunexpectedly. At all times, you areresponsible for controlling your vehicle,supervising the system and intervening,if required.

WARNING: If the systemmalfunctions, have your vehicle checkedas soon as possible.

The radar sensor has a limited field of view.It may not detect vehicles at all or detecta vehicle later than expected in somesituations. The lead vehicle graphic doesnot illuminate if the system does notdetect a vehicle in front of you.

E71621

Detection issues can occur:

When driving on a different linethan the vehicle in front.

A

With vehicles that edge into yourlane. The system can only detectthese vehicles once they movefully into your lane.

B

There may be issues with thedetection of vehicles in frontwhen driving into and coming outof a bend or curve in the road.

C

In these cases, the system may brake lateor unexpectedly. You should stay alert andtake action when necessary.If something hits the front end of yourvehicle or damage occurs, theradar-sensing zone may change. This couldcause missed or false vehicle detection.

222


Cruise Control

Optimal system performance requires aclear view of the road by thewindshield-mounted camera.Optimal performance may not occur if:• The camera is blocked.• There is poor visibility or lighting

conditions.• There are bad weather conditions.

System Not AvailableConditions that can cause the system todeactivate or prevent the system fromactivating when requested include:• A blocked sensor.• High brake temperature.• A failure in the system or a related

system.

Blocked Sensor

E145632

A message displays if something obstructsthe radar signals from the sensor. Thesensor is in the lower grille. The systemcannot detect a vehicle ahead and doesnot function when something blocks thesensor.Note: You cannot see the sensor. It isbehind a fascia panel.Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt,metal badges or objects. Vehicle frontprotectors and aftermarket lights may alsoblock the sensor.

Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:

ActionCause

Clean the grille surface in front of the radaror remove the object causing the obstruc-tion.

The surface of the radar is dirty orobstructed.

Wait a short time. It may take severalminutes for the radar to detect that it is freefrom obstruction.

The surface of the radar is clean but themessage remains in the display.

Do not use the system in these conditionsbecause it may not detect any vehiclesahead.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with theradar signals.

223


Cruise Control

ActionCause

Do not use the system in these conditionsbecause it may not detect any vehiclesahead.

Water, snow or ice on the surface of theroad may interfere with the radar signals.

Wait a short time or switch to normal cruisecontrol.

You are in a desert or remote area with noother vehicles and no roadside objects.

Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with noactual block. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart yourvehicle.

Switching to Normal CruiseControl

WARNING: Normal cruise controlwill not brake when your vehicle isapproaching slower vehicles. Always beaware of which mode you have selectedand apply the brakes when necessary.

E71340

The cruise control indicator lightreplaces the adaptive cruisecontrol indicator light if you

select normal cruise control. The gapsetting does not display, and the systemdoes not respond to lead vehicles.Automatic braking remains active tomaintain set speed.

You can change from adaptive cruisecontrol to normal cruise control throughthe information display.

224


Cruise Control

DRIVER ALERT (IF EQUIPPED)


WARNING: The system isdesigned to aid the driver. It is notintended to replace your attention andjudgment. You are still responsible todrive with due care and attention.

WARNING: At all times, you areresponsible for controlling your vehicle,supervising the system and intervening,if required. Failure to take care may resultin the loss of control of your vehicle,serious personal injury or death.

WARNING: The system may notfunction if the sensor is blocked.

WARNING: Take regular restbreaks if you feel tired. Do not wait forthe system to warn you.

WARNING: Certain driving stylesmay result in the system warning youeven if you are not feeling tired.

WARNING: In cold and severeweather conditions the system may notfunction. Rain, snow and spray can alllimit sensor performance.

WARNING: The system will notoperate if the sensor cannot track theroad lane markings.

WARNING: If damage occurs inthe immediate area surrounding thesensor, have your vehicle checked assoon as possible.

WARNING: The system may notcorrectly operate if your vehicle is fittedwith a suspension kit not approved byus.

Note: Keep the windshield free fromobstructions. For example, bird droppings,insects and snow or ice.Note: If the camera is blocked or if thewindshield is damaged, the system may notfunction.Note: The system will store the on or offsetting in the information display menuthrough ignition cycles.Note: If enabled in the menu, the systemactivates at speeds above 40 mph(64 km/h). When below the activationspeed, the information display informs thedriver that the system is unavailable.

E249505

The system automatically monitors yourdriving behavior using various inputsincluding the front camera sensor.If the system detects that your drivingalertness is reduced below a certainthreshold, the system will alert you usinga chime and a message in the clusterdisplay.

225


Driving Aids

USING DRIVER ALERTSwitching the System On and OffSwitch the system on or off using theinformation display. See GeneralInformation (page 104).When activated, the system will monitoryour alertness level based upon yourdriving behavior in relation to the lanemarkings, and other factors.

System WarningsNote: The system will not issue warningsbelow approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).The warning system has two stages. Atfirst, the system issues a temporarywarning that you need to take a rest. Thismessage will only appear for a short time.If the system detects further reduction indriving alertness, it may issue anotherwarning that will remain in the informationdisplay for a longer time. You can press OKon the steering wheel control to clear thewarning.

Resetting the SystemYou can reset the system by either:• Switching the ignition off and on.• Stopping the vehicle and then opening

and closing the driver’s door.

LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (IF

EQUIPPED)


WARNING: Always drive with duecare and attention when using andoperating the controls and features onyour vehicle.

WARNING: In cold and severeweather conditions the system may notfunction. Rain, snow and spray can alllimit sensor performance.

WARNING: Large contrasts inoutside lighting can limit sensorperformance.

WARNING: The system will notoperate if the sensor cannot track theroad lane markings.

WARNING: The sensor mayincorrectly track lane markings as otherstructures or objects. This can result ina false or missed warning.

WARNING: The system may notoperate properly if the sensor is blocked.Keep the windshield free fromobstruction.

226


Driving Aids

WARNING: If damage occurs inthe immediate area surrounding thesensor, have your vehicle checked assoon as possible.

Note: The system works above 40 mph(64 km/h).Note: The system works as long as thecamera can detect one lane marking.Note: When you select aid or alert and aidmode and the system detects no steeringactivity for a short period, the system alertsyou to put your hands on the steering wheel.The system may detect a light grip ortouch on the steering wheel as hands offdriving.Note: The system may not function if thecamera is blocked, or if the windshield isdamaged or dirty.

E249505

When you switch the system on and itdetects an unintentional drift out of yourlane is likely to occur, the system notifiesor assists you to stay in your lane throughthe steering system and informationdisplay. In Alert mode, the system providesa warning by vibrating the steering wheel.In Aid mode, the system provides steeringassistance by gently counter steering yourvehicle back into the lane.

When the system is functioning in thecombined Alert and Aid mode, the systemfirst provides steering assistance by gentlycounter steering your vehicle back into thelane, followed by a warning that vibratesthe steering wheel if the vehicle is still outof the lane markings.

Switching the System On and OffNote: The system on or off setting is storeduntil it is manually changed, unless a MyKeyis detected. If the system detects a MyKey,it defaults to on and the mode sets to alert.

E132099

Press the button on the direction indicatorstalk to switch the system on or off.

System SettingsThe system has optional setting menusavailable. The system stores the lastknown selection for each of these settings.You do not need to readjust your settingseach time you switch the system on.Mode: This setting allows you to selectwhich of the system features you canenable.

227


Driving Aids

E165515

Alert only – Provides a steering wheelvibration when the system detects anunintended lane departure.

E165516

Aid only – Provides steering assistancetoward the lane center when the systemdetects an unintended lane departure.

E165517

AlertAAidB

Alert + Aid – Provides steering assistancetoward the lane center.If your vehicle continues drifting out of thelane after the lane keeping aid corrects thevehicle, the system provides a steeringwheel vibration.Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrategeneral zone coverage. They do not provideexact zone parameters.Intensity: This setting affects the intensityof the steering wheel vibration used for thealert and alert + aid modes. This settingdoes not affect the aid mode.• Low.• Normal.• High.

228


Driving Aids

System Display

E267131

If you switch the system on in alert mode,a graphic of a vehicle with lane markingsappears in the information display.If you switch the system on in aid or alertand aid mode, a separate white icon alsoappears, or in some vehicles, arrowsdisplay with the lane markings.When you switch the system off, the lanemarking graphics do not display.While the system is on, the color of thelane markings change to indicate thesystem status.Gray: Indicates that the system istemporarily unable to provide a warningor intervention on the indicated side. Thismay be because:• Your vehicle is under the activation

speed.• The direction indicator is active.

• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.• The road has no or poor lane markings

in the camera field-of-view.• The camera is obscured or unable to

detect the lane markings due toenvironmental, traffic or vehicleconditions. For example, significant sunangles, shadows, snow, heavy rain orfog, following a large vehicle that isblocking or shadowing the lane or poorheadlamp illumination.

See Troubleshooting for additionalinformation.Green: Indicates that the system isavailable or ready to provide a warning orintervention on the indicated side.Yellow: Indicates that the system isproviding or has just provided a lanekeeping aid intervention.Red: Indicates that the system is providingor has just provided a lane keeping alertwarning.The system can be temporarily suppressedat any time by the following:• Quick braking.• Fast acceleration.• Using the turn signal indicator.• Evasive steering maneuver.• Driving too close to the lane markings.

Troubleshooting

Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markingson the road?

Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.

The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.

A quick intentional lane change has occurred.

229


Driving Aids

Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markingson the road?

Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.

Driving at high speeds in curves.

The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.

Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.

Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.

Sudden offset in lane markings.

ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.

There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.

You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.

Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.

There is standing water on the road.

Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.

Lane width is too narrow or too wide.

The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.

Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.

Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in theAid or Aid + Alert mode?

High cross winds are present.

There is a large road crown.

Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.

Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.

The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.

230


Driving Aids

BLIND SPOT INFORMATIONSYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Do not use the blindspot information system as areplacement for using the interior andexterior mirrors or looking over yourshoulder before changing lanes. Theblind spot information system is not areplacement for careful driving.

WARNING: The system may notoperate properly during severe weatherconditions, for example snow, ice, heavyrain and spray. Always drive with duecare and attention. Failure to take caremay result in a crash.

E255695

The system is designed to detect vehiclesthat may have entered the blind spot zone.The detection area is on both sides of yourvehicle, extending rearward from theexterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft(4 m) beyond the rear bumper. Thedetection area extends to approximately59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper whenthe vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph(48 km/h) to alert you of fasterapproaching vehicles.

Note: The system does not prevent contactwith other vehicles. It is not designed todetect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animalsor other infrastructures.

Using the Blind Spot InformationSystemVehicles with Automatic TransmissionThe system turns on when all of thefollowing occur:• You start your vehicle.• You shift into drive (D).• The vehicle speed is greater than

6 mph (10 km/h).Note: The system does not operate in park(P) or reverse (R).

Vehicles with Manual TransmissionThe system turns on when all of thefollowing occur:• You start your vehicle.• The vehicle speed is greater than

6 mph (10 km/h).Note: The system does not operate inreverse (R).

System Lights and Messages

E142442

231


Driving Aids

When the system detects a vehicle, analert indicator illuminates in the exteriormirror on the side the approaching vehicleis coming from. If you turn the directionindicator on for that side of your vehicle,the alert indicator flashes.Note: The system may not alert you if avehicle quickly passes through the detectionzone.

Blocked Sensors

E205199

The sensors are behind the rear bumperon both sides of your vehicle.Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, iceand large accumulations of dirt.Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumperstickers, repair compound or other objects.Note: Blocked sensors could affect systemperformance.If the sensors become blocked, a messagemay appear in the information display. SeeInformation Messages (page 115). Thealert indicators remain illuminated but thesystem does not alert you.

System ErrorsIf the system detects a fault, a warninglamp illuminates and a message displays.See Information Messages (page 115).

Switching the System On and OffYou can switch the system off using theinformation display. See GeneralInformation (page 104). When you switchthe system off, a warning lamp illuminatesand a message displays. When you switchthe system on or off, the alert indicatorsflash twice.Note: The system remembers the lastsetting when you start your vehicle.Note: The system may not correctly operatewhen towing a trailer. For vehicles with atrailer tow module and tow bar approvedby us, the system turns off when you attacha trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarkettrailer tow module or tow bar, werecommend that you switch the system offwhen you attach a trailer.To permanently switch the system off,contact an authorized dealer.

CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Do not use the crosstraffic alert system as a replacement forusing the interior and exterior mirrors orlooking over your shoulder beforereversing out of a parking space. Thecross traffic alert system is not areplacement for careful driving.

WARNING: The system may notoperate properly during severe weatherconditions, for example snow, ice, heavyrain and spray. Always drive with duecare and attention. Failure to take caremay result in a crash.

The system is designed to alert you ofvehicles approaching from the sides whenyou shift into reverse (R).

232


Driving Aids

Using the Cross Traffic AlertSystemThe system is designed to detect vehiclesthat approach with a speed up to 37 mph(60 km/h). Coverage decreases when thesensors are partially, mostly or fully

obstructed. Slowly reversing helps increasethe coverage area and effectiveness.The system turns on when you start theengine and you shift into reverse (R). Thesystem turns off when you shift out ofreverse (R).

E142440

The sensor on the left-hand side is onlypartially obstructed and zone coverage onthe right-hand side is maximized.

233


Driving Aids

E142441

Zone coverage also decreases whenparking at narrow angles. The sensor onthe left-hand side is mostly obstructed andzone coverage on that side is severelyreduced.

System Lights, Messages andAudible Alerts

E142442

When the system detects a vehicle, anindicator illuminates in the exterior mirroron the side the approaching vehicle iscoming from. A tone sounds and amessage appears in the informationdisplay.

Note: In exceptional conditions, the systemcould alert you even when there is nothingin the detection zone, for example a vehiclepassing in the distance.

Blocked Sensors

E205199

The sensors are behind the rear bumperon both sides of your vehicle.Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, iceand large accumulations of dirt.Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumperstickers, repair compound or other objects.Note: Blocked sensors could affect systemperformance.

234


Driving Aids

If the sensors are blocked, a message mayappear in the information display whenyou shift into reverse (R). SeeInformation Messages (page 115).

System LimitationsThe system may not correctly operatewhen any of the following occur:• The sensors are blocked.• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects

are obstructing the sensors.• Vehicles approach at speeds greater

than 37 mph (60 km/h).• The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph

(12 km/h).• You reverse out of an angled parking

space.

System ErrorsIf the system detects a fault a messagedisplays. See Information Messages(page 115).

Switching the System Off and OnYou can temporarily switch the system offusing the information display. SeeInformation Messages (page 115). Whenyou switch system off, a message displays.See Information Messages (page 115).Note: The system turns on each time youswitch the ignition on and you shift intoreverse (R). If you temporarily switch thesystem off, it turns on the next time youswitch the ignition on.Note: The system may not correctly operatewhen towing a trailer. For vehicles with atrailer tow module and tow bar approvedby us, the system turns off when you attacha trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarkettrailer tow module or tow bar, werecommend that you switch the system offwhen you attach a trailer.

To permanently switch the system off,contact an authorized dealer.

STEERINGElectric Power Steering

WARNING: The electric powersteering system has diagnostic checksthat continuously monitor the system. Ifa fault is detected, a message displaysin the information display. Stop yourvehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.Switch the ignition off. After at least 10seconds, switch the ignition on andwatch the information display for asteering system warning message. If asteering system warning messagereturns, have the system checked by anauthorized dealer.

WARNING: If the system detectsan error, you may not feel a difference inthe steering, however a serious conditionmay exist. Obtain immediate servicefrom an authorized dealer, failure to doso may result in loss of steering control.

Your vehicle has an electric power steeringsystem. There is no fluid reservoir. Nomaintenance is required.If your vehicle loses electrical power whileyou are driving, electric power steeringassistance is lost. The steering system stilloperates and you can steer your vehiclemanually. Manually steering your vehiclerequires more effort.

235


Driving Aids

Extreme continuous steering may increasethe effort required for you to steer yourvehicle. This increased effort preventsoverheating and permanent damage tothe steering system. You do not lose theability to steer your vehicle manually.Typical steering and driving maneuversallow the system to cool and return tonormal operation.

Steering TipsIf the steering wanders or pulls, check for:• Correct tire pressures.• Uneven tire wear.• Loose or worn suspension

components.• Loose or worn steering components.• Improper vehicle alignment.Note: A high crown in the road or highcrosswinds may also make the steeringseem to wander or pull.

Adaptive LearningThe electronic power steering systemadaptive learning helps correct roadirregularities and improves overall handlingand steering feel. It communicates withthe brake system to help operateadvanced stability control and accidentavoidance systems. Additionally, wheneverthe battery is disconnected or a newbattery installed, you must drive yourvehicle a short distance before the systemrelearns the strategy and reactivates allsystems.

PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (IF

EQUIPPED)


WARNING: The system does notdetect vehicles that are driving in adifferent direction, pedestrians at night,cyclists or animals. Failure to take caremay result in the loss of control of yourvehicle, serious personal injury or death.

WARNING: The system does notoperate during hard acceleration orsteering. Failure to take care may leadto a crash or personal injury.

WARNING: The system may failor operate with reduced function duringcold and severe weather conditions.Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog canadversely affect the system. Keep thefront camera and radar free of snow andice. Failure to take care may result in theloss of control of your vehicle, seriouspersonal injury or death.

WARNING: In situations where thevehicle camera has limited detectioncapability, this may reduce systemperformance. These situations includebut are not limited to direct or lowsunlight, vehicles at night without taillights, unconventional vehicle types,pedestrians with complex backgrounds,

236


Driving Aids

running pedestrians, partly obscuredpedestrians, or pedestrians that thesystem cannot distinguish from a group.Failure to take care may result in the lossof control of your vehicle, seriouspersonal injury or death.

WARNING: The pre-collision assistsystem's brake support reduces collisionspeed only if you brake your vehiclebefore any collision. You must press yourbrake pedal as you would in any typicalbraking situation.

WARNING: The system cannothelp prevent all crashes. Do not rely onthis system to replace driver judgmentand the need to maintain a safe distanceand speed.

Note: The system does not detect, warn orrespond to potential collisions with vehiclesto the rear or sides of your vehicle.

Using the Pre-Collision AssistSystemThe system is active at speeds aboveapproximately 5 mph (8 km/h).

E156130

The system alerts you of certain collisionrisks. The system's sensor detects yourvehicle's rapid approach to other vehiclestraveling in the same direction as yourvehicle.

E156131

When your vehicle rapidly approachesanother vehicle, a flashing visual warningappears and an audible warning tonesounds.The brake support system assists you inreducing any collision speed bypre-charging the brakes. If the risk ofcollision continues to increase after theaudio-visual warning, the brake supportprepares the brake system for rapidbraking. Brake support does notautomatically apply the brakes. If you pressthe brake pedal, the system could applyadditional braking up to maximum brakingforce, even if you lightly press the brakepedal.You can adjust the warning system'ssensitivity through your informationdisplay. See General Information (page104).Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assistalerts as being too frequent or disturbing,then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,though the manufacturer recommendsusing the highest sensitivity setting wherepossible. Setting lower sensitivity wouldlead to fewer and later system warnings.

237


Driving Aids

Blocked Sensors

E145632

If a blocked sensor message appears in theinformation display, dirt, water or an objectis blocking the sensor. The sensor islocated behind a cover near the driver sideof the lower grille. If anything blocks thesensor, your vehicle cannot see throughthe sensor, and the system does not work.Possible causes for the blocked sensormessage and corrective actions are listedbelow.

ActionCause

Clean the radar sensor cover or remove theobstruction.

The radar sensor cover in the grille is dirtyor obstructed.

Wait a short time. The radar may takeseveral minutes to reset after you remove

the obstruction.

The surface of the radar sensor cover isclean but the message remains in the

display.

The system is temporarily disabled. Shortlyafter weather conditions improve, the

system automatically reactivates.

Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the airinterferes with the radar signals.

The system is temporarily disabled. Shortlyafter weather conditions improve, the

system automatically reactivates.

Swirling water, snow or ice on the roadsurface interferes with the radar signals.

System LimitationsDue to the nature of radar technology,there may be certain instances wherevehicles do not provide a collision warning.These include:• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving

below 6 mph (10 km/h).• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.• Severe weather conditions (see

blocked sensor section).• Debris build-up on the grille near the

headlamps (see blocked sensorsection).

• Small distance to vehicle ahead.• Large steering wheel and pedal

movements (very active driving style).Damage to the front end of your vehiclemay alter the radar sensor's coverage area.This may result in missed or false collisionwarnings. Have an authorized dealer checkyour radar sensor for proper coverage andoperation.

238


Driving Aids

REAR UNDER FLOORSTORAGE (IF EQUIPPED)

Cargo Management System (If

Equipped)

E142445

The system is located in the floor of thecargo area. Lift the handle to open.

Adjustable Load Floor (If Equipped)

E142446

Vehicles with the standard size spare tirecan adjust the load floor to two positions.The front of the load floor can be placedeither on (for high position) or below (forlow position) the ledges behind the rearseats. The rear of the load floor always sitson the two small shelves located on theliftgate trim.

CARGO NETS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: This net is notdesigned to restrain objects during acollision or heavy braking.

The cargo net secures lightweight objectsin the cargo area. Attach the net to theanchors provided. Repeat the attachmenton both sides of the vehicle.

E204323

239


Load Carrying

LUGGAGE COVERS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Make sure that theposts are properly latched in mountingfeatures. The cover may cause injury ina sudden stop or accident if it is notsecurely installed.

WARNING: Do not place anyobjects on the cargo area shade. Theymay obstruct your vision or strikeoccupants of your vehicle in a suddenstop or crash.

Use the cargo shade to cover items in thecargo area of your vehicle.

E142447

Insert the ends of the cargo shade into themounting features located behind the rearseat on the rear trim panels to install thecargo shade.To operate the cargo shade:1. Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade

rearward.2. Secure both ends of the support rod

into the retention slots located on therear quarter trim panels.

ROOF RACKS AND LOADCARRIERS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: When loading the roofracks, we recommend you evenlydistribute the load, as well as maintaina low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles,with higher centers of gravity, mayhandle differently than unloadedvehicles. Take extra precautions, suchas slower speeds and increased stoppingdistance, when driving a heavily loadedvehicle.

The maximum recommended load, evenlydistributed on the crossbars, is:• 100 lb (45 kg) for vehicles without a

moonroof.• 45 lb (20 kg) for vehicles with a

moonroof.For correct roof rack system function, youmust place loads directly on crossbarsaffixed to the roof rack side rails. Whenusing the roof rack system, we recommendyou use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbarsdesigned specifically for your vehicle.Make sure that you securely fasten theload. Check the tightness of the loadbefore driving and at each fuel stop.

240


Load Carrying

Thumbwheel Kit

E203659

A thumbwheel kit is included in yourvehicle for tying light loads to your roof.The kit is located in the glovebox.Make sure to check that the thumbwheelsare tight each time you add or remove loadfrom the roof rack, and periodically whiletraveling. Make sure that the load is securebefore traveling.Note: There may be snap caps in the siderail, which must be removed beforeinstalling the thumbwheels. These caps canbe removed by using a T25 torx tool or asimilar tool.

Adjusting the Crossbar (If Equipped)

Note: For less wind noise and betteraerodynamics, only install the crossbarswhen you need them for carrying cargo.Follow the steps to reposition or remove therear crossbar. You can remove the frontcrossbar fasteners by unscrewing theassembly.

E203063

1. Remove the crossbar bolts at bothsides of the front crossbar by using aT25 torx tool or a similar tool.

2. Remove the crossbar by sliding theends off of the side rails.

3. Move the crossbar to the new side railposition and slide onto rail.

4. Replace and tighten the bolts at bothsides of the crossbar by using a T25torx tool or a similar tool.

Note: There may be snap caps in the newside rail position, which must be removedbefore installing the crossbar. You canremove these caps by using a T25 torx toolor a similar tool.

LOAD LIMIT

Vehicle Loading - with andwithout a TrailerThis section guides you in theproper loading of your vehicle,trailer, or both. Keep your loadedvehicle weight within its designrating capability, with or withouta trailer. Properly loading yourvehicle provides maximum returnof vehicle design performance.Before you load your vehicle,become familiar with the

241


Load Carrying

following terms for determiningyour vehicle’s weight rating, withor without a trailer, from thevehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label or SafetyCompliance Certification label.Tire and Loading Label InformationExample:

E198719

PayloadPayload is the combined weightof cargo and passengers that yourvehicle is carrying. The maximumpayload for your vehicle appearson the Tire and Loading label. Thelabel is either on the B-pillar or theedge of the driver door. Vehiclesexported outside the US and

Canada may not have a tire andloading label. Look for “Thecombined weight of occupantsand cargo should never exceedXXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximumpayload. The payload listed on theTire and Loading Information labelis the maximum payload for yourvehicle as built by the assemblyplant. If you install any additionalequipment on your vehicle, youmust determine the new payload.Subtract the weight of theequipment from the payload listedon the Tire and Loading label.When towing, trailer tongueweight or king pin weight is alsopart of payload.

WARNING: Theappropriate loading capacity ofyour vehicle can be limited eitherby volume capacity (how muchspace is available) or by payloadcapacity (how much weight thevehicle should carry). Once youhave reached the maximumpayload of your vehicle, do notadd more cargo, even if there isspace available. Overloading orimproperly loading your vehiclecan contribute to loss of vehiclecontrol and vehicle rollover.

242


Load Carrying

GAWR (Gross Axle WeightRating)GAWR is the maximum allowableweight that a single axle (front orrear) can carry. These numbersare on the Safety ComplianceCertification label. The label islocated on the door hinge pillar,door-latch post, or the door edgethat meets the door-latch post,next to the driver seating position.The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its Gross AxleWeight Rating.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating)GVWR is the maximum allowableweight of the fully loaded vehicle.This includes all options,equipment, passengers and cargo.It appears on the SafetyCompliance Certification label.The label is located on the doorhinge pillar, door-latch post, or thedoor edge that meets thedoor-latch post, next to the driverseating position.The gross vehicle weight mustnever exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating.

Safety Compliance Certification LabelExample:

E198828

WARNING: Exceeding theSafety Compliance Certificationlabel vehicle weight limits canadversely affect theperformance and handling ofyour vehicle, cause vehicledamage and can result in theloss of control of your vehicle,serious personal injury or death.

Maximum Loaded TrailerWeightMaximum loaded trailer weight isthe highest possible weight of afully loaded trailer the vehicle cantow. Consult an authorized dealer(or the RV and Trailer TowingGuide available at an authorizeddealer) for more detailedinformation.

GCWR (Gross CombinedWeight Rating)GCWR is the maximum allowableweight of the vehicle and theloaded trailer, including all cargoand passengers, that the vehiclecan handle without riskingdamage. (Important: The towing

243


Load Carrying

vehicle’s braking system is ratedfor operation at Gross VehicleWeight Rating, not at GrossCombined Weight Rating.)Separate functional brakes shouldbe used for safe control of towedvehicles and for trailers where theGross Combined Weight of thetowing vehicle plus the trailerexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating of the towing vehicle.The gross combined weight mustnever exceed the Gross CombinedWeight Rating.Note: For trailer towinginformation refer to the RV andTrailer Towing Guide available atan authorized dealer.

WARNING: Do not exceedthe GVWR or the GAWRspecified on the certificationlabel.

WARNING: Do not usereplacement tires with lowerload carrying capacities than theoriginal tires because they maylower your vehicle's GVWR andGAWR limitations. Replacementtires with a higher limit than theoriginal tires do not increase theGVWR and GAWR limitations.

WARNING: Exceeding anyvehicle weight rating canadversely affect theperformance and handling ofyour vehicle, cause vehicledamage and can result in theloss of control of your vehicle,serious personal injury or death.

Steps for determining thecorrect load limit:1. Locate the statement "The

combined weight of occupantsand cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lb." on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lb.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the “XXX” amountequals 1,400 lb. and there willbe five 150 lb. passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lb.(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)

244


Load Carrying

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargo andluggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual todetermine how this reduces theavailable cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.

Helpful examples for calculatingthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacitySuppose your vehicle has a1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargoand luggage capacity. You decideto go golfing. Is there enough loadcapacity to carry you, four of yourfriends and all the golf bags? Youand four friends average 220pounds (99 kilograms) each andthe golf bags weigh approximately30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.The calculation would be: 1400 -(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you haveenough load capacity in yourvehicle to transport four friendsand your golf bags. In metric units,the calculation would be: 635kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.

Suppose your vehicle has a1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargoand luggage capacity. You andone of your friends decide to pickup cement from the local homeimprovement store to finish thatpatio you have been planning forthe past two years. Measuring theinside of the vehicle with the rearseat folded down, you have roomfor twelve 100-pound(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Doyou have enough load capacity totransport the cement to yourhome? If you and your friend eachweigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),the calculation would be: 1400 -(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you donot have enough cargo capacityto carry that much weight. Inmetric units, the calculation wouldbe: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.You will need to reduce the loadweight by at least 240 pounds(104 kilograms). If you removethree 100-pound (45-kilogram)cement bags, then the loadcalculation would be:1400 - (2 x220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -900 = 60 pounds. Now you havethe load capacity to transport thecement and your friend home. Inmetric units, the calculation wouldbe: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.

245


Load Carrying

The above calculations alsoassume that the loads arepositioned in your vehicle in amanner that does not overloadthe front or the rear gross axleweight rating specified for yourvehicle on the Safety ComplianceCertification label.

Special Loading Instructionsfor Owners of Pick-up Trucksand Utility-type Vehicles

WARNING: When loadingthe roof racks, we recommendyou evenly distribute the load,as well as maintain a low centerof gravity. Loaded vehicles, withhigher centers of gravity, mayhandle differently than unloadedvehicles. Take extra precautions,such as slower speeds andincreased stopping distance,when driving a heavily loadedvehicle.

246


Load Carrying

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNING: Towing trailersbeyond the maximumrecommended gross trailerweight exceeds the limit of yourvehicle and could result in enginedamage, transmission damage,structural damage, loss ofvehicle control, vehicle rolloverand personal injury.

WARNING: Do not exceedthe GVWR or the GAWRspecified on the certificationlabel.

Note: See RecommendedTowing Weights (page 248).Your vehicle may have electricalitems, such as fuses or relays,related to towing. See Fuses(page 271).Your vehicle's load capacitydesignation is by weight, not byvolume, so you cannot necessarilyuse all available space whenloading a vehicle or trailer.Towing a trailer places an extraload on your vehicle's engine,transmission, axle, brakes, tiresand suspension. Inspect thesecomponents periodically during,and after, any towing operation.

Load PlacementTo help minimize how trailermovement affects your vehiclewhen driving:• Load the heaviest items closest

to the trailer floor.• Load the heaviest items

centered between the left andright side trailer tires.

• Load the heaviest items abovethe trailer axles or just slightlyforward toward the trailertongue. Do not allow the finaltrailer tongue weight to goabove or below 10-15% of theloaded trailer weight.

• Select a ball mount with thecorrect rise or drop and loadcapacity. When both theloaded vehicle and trailer areconnected, the trailer frameshould be level, or slightlyangled down toward yourvehicle, when viewed from theside.

When driving with a trailer orpayload, a slight takeoff vibrationor shudder may be present due tothe increased payload weight.Additional information regardingproper trailer loading and settingyour vehicle up for towing islocated in another chapter of thismanual. See Load Limit (page241).You can also find information inthe RV & Trailer Towing Guideavailable at your authorizeddealer, or online.

247


Towing

RV & Trailer Towing Guide Onlinehttp://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Turning off trailer swaycontrol increases the risk of loss ofvehicle control, serious injury or death.Ford does not recommend disabling thisfeature except in situations where speedreduction may be detrimental (such ashill climbing), the driver has significanttrailer towing experience, and can controltrailer sway and maintain safe operation.

Note: This feature does not prevent trailersway, but reduces it when it begins.Note: This feature cannot stop all trailersfrom swaying.Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speedis too high, the system may turn on multipletimes, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.The system applies the brakes to theindividual wheels and reduces enginetorque to aid vehicle stability. If the trailerbegins to sway, the stability controlwarning lamp flashes and a messageappears in the information display. SeeInformation Messages (page 115). Slowyour vehicle down, pull safely to the sideof the road and check for correct loaddistribution. See Load Carrying (page239).You can switch this feature off in theinformation display. When you switch theignition on, the system automatically turnson.

RECOMMENDED TOWINGWEIGHTS

Note: Do not exceed the trailerweight for your vehicleconfiguration listed in the chartbelow.Note: Be sure to take intoconsideration trailer frontal area.Do not exceed 20 ft² (1.86 m²) ifyour vehicle can tow a class I traileror 40 ft² (3.72 m²) if your vehiclecan tow a class III trailer.Note: For high altitude operation,reduce the gross combined weightby 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m)starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m)elevation point.Note: Certain states requireelectric trailer brakes for trailersover a specified weight. Be sure tocheck state regulations for thisspecified weight. The maximumtrailer weights listed may be limitedto this specified weight, as thevehicle’s electrical system may notinclude the wiring connectorneeded to activate electric trailerbrakes.

248


Towing

Your vehicle may tow a trailerprovided the maximum trailerweight is less than or equal to the

maximum trailer weight listed foryour vehicle configuration on thefollowing chart.

Maximum trailerweightMaximum GCWREngine

2,000 lb (907 kg)6,900 lb (3,130 kg)2.3L GTDI 2WD 1

2,000 lb (907 kg)6,900 lb (3,130 kg)3.5L TiVCT 2WD 1

3,000 lb (1,361 kg)7,950 lb (3,606 kg)2.3L GTDI 2WD 2

5,000 lb (2,268 kg) 39,950 lb (4,513 kg)3.5L TiVCT 2WD 2

2,000 lb (907 kg)7,100 lb (3,221 kg)2.3L GTDI 4WD 1

2,000 lb (907 kg)7,100 lb (3,221 kg)3.5L TiVCT 4WD 1

3,000 lb (1,361 kg)8,150 lb (3,697 kg)2.3L GTDI 4WD 2

5,000 lb (2,268 kg) 310,150 lb (4,604 kg)3.5L TiVCT 4WD 2

5,000 lb (2,268 kg) 310,400 lb (4,717 kg)3.5L GTDI 4WD 2

1 Without Trailer Towing Package.2 With Trailer Towing Package.3 For towing trailers up to 3500 lb (1588 kg), use a weight-carrying hitchand ball, which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through yourvehicle’s underbody structure. For towing trailers over 3500 lb (1588kg), up to the maximum trailer weight, we recommend you use aweight-distributing hitch to increase front axle load when towing.

249


Towing

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKSFollow these guidelines for safe towing:• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your

vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).• Consult your local motor vehicle laws

for towing a trailer.• See the instructions included with

towing accessories for the properinstallation and adjustmentspecifications.

• Service your vehicle more frequently ifyou tow a trailer. See your scheduledmaintenance information.

• If you use a rental trailer, follow theinstructions the rental agency givesyou.

You can find information on loadspecification terms found on the tire labeland Safety Compliance label as well asinstructions on calculating your vehicle'sload in the Load Carrying chapter. SeeLoad Limit (page 241).Remember to account for the trailertongue weight as part of your vehicle loadwhen calculating the total vehicle weight.

HitchesDo not use a hitch that either clamps ontothe bumper or attaches to the axle.Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of thetotal trailer weight is on the tongue.

Weight-distributing Hitches

WARNING: Do not adjust thespring bars so that your vehicle's rearbumper is higher than before attachingthe trailer. Doing so will defeat thefunction of the weight-distributing hitch,which may cause unpredictablehandling, and could result in seriouspersonal injury.

When hooking-up a trailer using aweight-distributing hitch, always use thefollowing procedure:1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the

trailer, on a level surface.2. Measure the height to the top of your

vehicle's front wheel opening on thefender. This is H1.

3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehiclewithout the weight-distributing barsconnected.

4. Measure the height to the top of yourvehicle's front wheel opening on thefender a second time. This is H2.

5. Install and adjust the tension in theweight-distributing bars so that theheight of your vehicle's front wheelopening on the fender is approximatelyhalf the way down from H2, toward H1.

6. Check that the trailer is level or slightlynose down toward your vehicle. If not,adjust the ball height accordingly andrepeat Steps 2-6.

When the trailer is level or slightly nosedown toward the vehicle:• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.• Check that the trailer tongue securely

attaches and locks onto the hitch.• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer

brake controls as required by law or thetrailer manufacturer.

Safety ChainsNote: Never attach safety chains to thebumper.Always connect the safety chains to thehook retainers of your vehicle hitch.To connect the trailer’s safety chains, crossthem under the trailer tongue and allowenough slack for turning tight corners. Donot allow the chains to drag on the ground.

250


Towing

Trailer Brakes

WARNING: Do not connect atrailer's hydraulic brake system directlyto your vehicle's brake system. Yourvehicle may not have enough brakingpower and your chances of having acollision greatly increase.

Electric brakes and manual, automatic orsurge-type trailer brakes are safe if youinstall them properly and adjust them tothe manufacturer's specifications. Thetrailer brakes must meet local and federalregulations.The rating for the tow vehicle's brakingsystem operation is at the gross vehicleweight rating, not the gross combinedweight rating.Separate functioning brake systems arerequired for safe control of towed vehiclesand trailers weighing more than 1,500 lb(680 kg) when loaded.

Trailer Lamps

WARNING: Never connect anytrailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's taillamp wiring; this may damage theelectrical system resulting in fire. Contactyour authorized dealer as soon aspossible for assistance in proper trailertow wiring installation. Additionalelectrical equipment may be required.

Trailer lamps are required on most towedvehicles. Make sure all running lights, brakelights, turn signals and hazard lights areworking.

Before Towing a TrailerPractice turning, stopping and backing upto get the feel of your vehicle-trailercombination before starting on a trip.When turning, make wider turns so thetrailer wheels clear curbs and otherobstacles.

When Towing a Trailer• Do not drive faster than 70 mph

(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi(800 km).

• Do not make full-throttle starts.• Check your hitch, electrical connections

and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughlyafter you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).

• When stopped in congested or heavytraffic during hot weather, place thegearshift in park (P) to aid engine andtransmission cooling and to help A/Cperformance.

• Turn off the speed control with heavyloads or in hilly terrain. The speedcontrol may turn off automaticallywhen you are towing on long, steepgrades.

• Shift to a lower gear when driving downa long or steep hill. Do not apply thebrakes continuously, as they mayoverheat and become less effective.

• If your transmission is equipped with aGrade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, usethis feature when towing. This providesengine braking and helps eliminateexcessive transmission shifting foroptimum fuel economy andtransmission cooling.

• Allow more distance for stopping witha trailer attached. Anticipate stops andbrake gradually.

• Avoid parking on a grade. However, ifyou must park on a grade:

1. Turn the steering wheel to point yourvehicle tires away from traffic flow.

251


Towing

2. Set your vehicle parking brake.3. Place the automatic transmission in

park (P).4. Place wheel chocks in front and back

of the trailer wheels. (Chocks notincluded with vehicle.)

Launching or Retrieving a Boat orPersonal Watercraft (PWC)Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailerbefore backing the trailer into the water.Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailerafter removing the trailer from the water.When backing down a ramp during boatlaunching or retrieval:• Do not allow the static water level to

rise above the bottom edge of the rearbumper.

• Do not allow waves to break higherthan 6 in (15 cm) above the bottomedge of the rear bumper.

Exceeding these limits may allow water toenter vehicle components:• Causing internal damage to the

components.• Affecting driveability, emissions, and

reliability.Replace the rear axle lubricant anytimethe rear axle has been submerged in water.Water may have contaminated the rearaxle lubricant, which is not normallychecked or changed unless a leak issuspected or other axle repair is required.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ONFOUR WHEELS - 2.3LECOBOOST™Emergency Towing

WARNING: If your vehicle has asteering wheel lock make sure theignition is in the accessory or on positionwhen being towed.

If your vehicle becomes inoperable(without access to wheel dollies,car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transportvehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheelson the ground, regardless of the powertrainand transmission configuration) under thefollowing conditions:• Your vehicle is facing forward for

towing in a forward direction.• Place the transmission in neutral (N).

If you cannot shift the transmission intoneutral (N), you may need to overridethe gear shifter. See AutomaticTransmission (page 184).

• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).

TOWING THE VEHICLE ONFOUR WHEELS - 3.5LDURATEC/3.5L ECOBOOST™

WARNING: If your vehicle has asteering wheel lock make sure theignition is in the accessory or on positionwhen being towed.

252


Towing

Emergency TowingIf your vehicle becomes inoperable(without access to wheel dollies or vehicletransport trailer), it can be flat-towed (allwheels on the ground, regardless of thepowertrain and transmissionconfiguration) under the followingconditions:• Your vehicle is facing forward for

towing in a forward direction.• Shift into neutral (N). If you cannot

shift into neutral (N), you may need tooverride it. See Transmission (page184).

• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).

Recreational TowingNote: Put your climate control system inrecirculated air mode to prevent exhaustfumes from entering the vehicle. SeeClimate Control (page 129).Follow these guidelines if you have a needfor recreational (RV) towing. An exampleof recreational towing would be towingyour vehicle behind a motorhome. Wedesigned these guidelines to preventdamage to your transmission.You can tow your vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.If you tow your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground:• Tow only in the forward direction.• Release the parking brake.

Vehicles with Keyless Start1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake

pedal, and then pressing the keylessstart button until the vehicle starts.

2. Press the brake pedal and shift thegearshift into neutral (N).

3. Switch the vehicle off by pressing thekeyless start button once.

4. Disconnect the negative (black) cablefrom the battery. You need the doorkey to lock and unlock doors when thebattery cable is disconnected. SeeChanging the 12V Battery (page 296).

Note: The anti-theft system does not workuntil you reconnect the battery cable.Start the engine within 15 minutes ofreconnecting the battery cable.

Vehicles with an Ignition Key1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake

pedal, and then turning the ignition keyuntil the vehicle starts.

2. Press the brake pedal and shift thetransmission into neutral (N).

3. Switch off your vehicle by turning theignition key past the accessory position.The key position is between theaccessory and off positions. SeeIgnition Switch (page 166).

4. Disconnect the negative (black) cablefrom the battery. See Changing the12V Battery (page 296).

Note: The anti-theft system does not workuntil you reconnect the battery cable.Start the engine within 15 minutes ofreconnecting the battery cable.

253


Towing

All Vehicles• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).• Start the engine and allow it to run for

a few minutes at the beginning of eachday and every six hours thereafter. Withthe engine running and your foot on thebrake, shift into drive (D) and then intoreverse (R) before shifting back intoneutral (N).

Front-wheel Drive VehiclesAlternatively, you can tow your front-wheeldrive vehicle with the front wheels off theground by using a tow dolly, or with all fourwheels off the ground using a vehicletransport trailer. If you are using a towdolly, follow the instructions specified bythe equipment provider.

Four-wheel Drive VehiclesAlternatively, you can tow your four-wheeldrive vehicle with all four wheels off theground using a vehicle transport trailer. Donot tow your four-wheel drive vehicle withthe front wheels off the ground (by usinga tow dolly) and the rear wheels on theground. This causes damage to yourfour-wheel drive system. If you are using avehicle transport trailer, follow theinstruction specified by the equipmentprovider.

254


Towing

BREAKING-INYou need to break in new tires forapproximately 300 mi (480 km). Duringthis time, your vehicle may exhibit someunusual driving characteristics.Avoid driving too fast during the first1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speedfrequently and change up through thegears early. Do not labor the engine.Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi(1,600 km).

ECONOMICAL DRIVINGYour fuel economy is affected by severalthings, such as how you drive, theconditions you drive under, and how youmaintain your vehicle.You may improve your fuel economy bykeeping these things in mind:• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,

moderate fashion.• Drive at steady speeds without

stopping.• Anticipate stops; slowing down may

eliminate the need to stop.• Combine errands and minimize

stop-and-go driving.• Close the windows for high-speed

driving.• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling

at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% lessfuel than traveling at 65 mph [105km/h]).

• Keep the tires properly inflated and useonly the recommended size.

• Use the recommended engine oil.• Perform all regularly scheduled

maintenance.

Avoid these actions; they reduce your fueleconomy:• Sudden accelerations or hard

accelerations.• Revving the engine before turning it off.• Idle for periods longer than one minute.• Warm up your vehicle on cold

mornings.• Use the air conditioner or front

defroster.• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving.• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a

trailer.• Carry unnecessary weight

(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] islost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] ofweight carried).

• Driving with the wheels out ofalignment.

Conditions• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a

trailer may reduce fuel economy at anyspeed.

• Adding certain accessories to yourvehicle (for example bug deflectors,rollbars, light bars, running boards, skiracks or luggage racks) may reducefuel economy.

• To maximize the fuel economy, drivewith the tonneau cover installed (ifequipped).

• Using fuel blended with alcohol maylower fuel economy.

• Fuel economy may decrease with lowertemperatures during the first 5–10 mi(12–16 km) of driving.

• Driving on flat terrain offers improvedfuel economy as compared to drivingon hilly terrain.

255


Driving Hints

• Transmissions give their best fueleconomy when operated in the topcruise gear and with steady pressureon the gas pedal.

• Four-wheel-drive operation (ifequipped) is less fuel efficient thantwo-wheel-drive operation.

• Close the windows for high-speeddriving.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

WARNING: Do not drive throughflowing or deep water as you may losecontrol of your vehicle.

Note: Driving through standing water cancause vehicle damage.Note: Engine damage can occur if waterenters the air filter.Before driving through standing water,check the depth. Never drive through waterthat is higher than the bottom of the frontrocker area of your vehicle.

E259345

When driving through standing water, drivevery slowly and do not stop your vehicle.Your brake performance and traction maybe limited. After driving through water andas soon as it is safe to do so:

• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry thebrakes and to check that they work.

• Check that the horn works.• Check that the exterior lights work.• Turn the steering wheel to check that

the steering power assist works.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING: Use a floor matdesigned to fit the footwell of yourvehicle that does not obstruct the pedalarea. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in the loss of control of yourvehicle, personal injury or death.

WARNING: Pedals that cannotmove freely can cause loss of vehiclecontrol and increase the risk of seriouspersonal injury.

WARNING: Secure the floor matto both retention devices so that itcannot slip out of position and interferewith the pedals. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in the loss ofcontrol of your vehicle, personal injury ordeath.

WARNING: Do not placeadditional floor mats or any othercovering on top of the original floor mats.This could result in the floor matinterfering with the operation of thepedals. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in the loss of control of yourvehicle, personal injury or death.

256


Driving Hints

WARNING: Always make sure thatobjects cannot fall into the driver footwell while your vehicle is moving. Objectsthat are loose can become trappedunder the pedals causing a loss ofvehicle control.

E142666

To install the floor mats, position the floormat eyelet over the retention post andpress down to lock in position.To remove the floor mat, reverse theinstallation procedure.Note: Regularly check the floor mats tomake sure they are secure.

257


Driving Hints

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCEVehicles Sold in the United States:Getting Roadside AssistanceTo fully assist you should you have avehicle concern, Ford Motor Companyoffers a complimentary roadsideassistance program. This program isseparate from the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.The service is available:• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.• For the coverage period listed on the

Roadside Assistance Card included inyour Owner's Manual portfolio.

Roadside Assistance covers:• A flat tire change with a good spare

(except vehicles supplied with a tireinflation kit).

• Battery jump start.• Lock-out assistance (key replacement

cost is the customer's responsibility).• Fuel delivery — independent service

contractors, if not prohibited by state,local or municipal law, shall deliver upto 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.Roadside Assistance limits fuel deliveryservice to two no-charge occurrenceswithin a 12-month period.

• Winch out — available within 100 ft(30 m) of a paved or countymaintained road, no recoveries.

• Towing — independent servicecontractors, if not prohibited by state,local or municipal law, shall tow Fordeligible vehicles to an authorized dealerwithin 35 mi (56 km) of thedisablement location or to the nearestauthorized dealer. If a memberrequests a tow to an authorized dealerthat is more than 35 mi (56 km) fromthe disablement location, the membershall be responsible for any mileagecosts in excess of 35 mi (56 km).

• Roadside Assistance includes up to$200 for a towed trailer if the disabledeligible vehicle requires service at thenearest authorized dealer. If the towingvehicle is operational but the trailer isnot, then the trailer does not qualify forany roadside services.

Vehicles Sold in the United States:Using Roadside AssistanceComplete the roadside assistanceidentification card and place it in yourwallet for quick reference. This card is inthe owner's information portfolio in theglove compartment.United States vehicle customers whorequire Roadside Assistance, call1-800-241-3673.If you need to arrange roadside assistancefor yourself, Ford Motor Companyreimburses a reasonable amount fortowing to the nearest dealership within35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursementinformation, United States vehiclecustomers call 1-800-241-3673.Customers need to submit their originalreceipts.

258


Roadside Emergencies

Vehicles Sold in Canada: GettingRoadside AssistanceTo fully assist you should you have avehicle concern, Ford Motor Company ofCanada, Limited offers a complimentaryroadside assistance program. This programis eligible within Canada or the continentalUnited States.The service is available 24 hours a day,seven days a week.This program is separate from the NewVehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverageis concurrent with the powertrain coverageperiod of your vehicle. Canadian roadsidecoverage and benefits may differ from theU.S. coverage.If you require more information, please callus in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visitour website at www.ford.ca.

HAZARD FLASHERSNote: The hazard flashers operate whenthe ignition is in any position, or if the key isnot in the ignition. If used when the vehicleis not running, the battery loses charge. Asa result, there may be insufficient power torestart your vehicle.

The flasher control is on theinstrument panel. Use yourhazard flashers when your

vehicle is creating a safety hazard for othermotorists.

• Press the flasher control and all frontand rear direction indicators flash.

• Press the button again to switch themoff.

FUEL SHUTOFF

WARNING: If your vehicle hasbeen involved in a crash, have the fuelsystem checked. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in fire, personalinjury or death.

Note: When you try to restart your vehicleafter a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes surethat various systems are safe to restart.Once the vehicle determines the systemsare safe, then the vehicle allows you torestart.Note: In the event that your vehicle doesnot restart after your third attempt, contacta qualified technician.The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow offuel to the engine in the event of amoderate to severe crash. Not everyimpact causes a shutoff.Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,you may restart your vehicle.If your vehicle has a key system:1. Switch off the ignition.2. Switch to start position.3. Switch off the ignition.4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the

fuel pump.5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat

steps 1 through 4.If your vehicle has a push button startsystem:1. Press START/STOP to switch off your

vehicle.2. Press the brake pedal and

START/STOP to switch on yourvehicle.

3. Remove your foot from the brake pedaland press START/STOP to switch offyour vehicle.

259



4. You can attempt to start the vehicleby pressing the brake pedal andSTART/STOP, or press START/STOPwithout pressing the brake pedal.

5. If the vehicle does not start, repeatsteps 1 through 4.

JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNING: Batteries normallyproduce explosive gases which cancause personal injury. Therefore, do notallow flames, sparks or lightedsubstances to come near the battery.When working near the battery, alwaysshield your face and protect your eyes.Always provide correct ventilation.

WARNING: Keep batteries out ofreach of children. Batteries containsulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes whenworking near the battery to protectagainst possible splashing of acidsolution. In case of acid contact with skinor eyes, flush immediately with water fora minimum of 15 minutes and get promptmedical attention. If acid is swallowed,call a physician immediately.

WARNING: Use only adequatelysized cables with insulated clamps.

Preparing Your VehicleDo not attempt to push-start yourautomatic transmission vehicle.Note: Attempting to push-start a vehiclewith an automatic transmission may causetransmission damage.Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start yourvehicle.

Note: Do not disconnect the battery of thedisabled vehicle as this could damage thevehicle electrical system.Park the booster vehicle close to the hoodof the disabled vehicle, making sure thetwo vehicles do not touch.

Connecting the Jumper Cables

WARNING: Do not attach thecables to fuel lines, engine rocker covers,the intake manifold or electricalcomponents as grounding points. Stayclear of moving parts. To avoid reversepolarity connections, make sure that youcorrectly identify the positive (+) andnegative (-) terminals on both thedisabled and booster vehicles beforeconnecting the cables.

WARNING: Do not attach the endof the positive cable to the studs orL-shaped eyelet located above thepositive (+) terminal of your vehicle’sbattery. High current may flow throughand cause damage to the fuses.

WARNING: Do not connect theend of the second cable to the negative(-) terminal of the battery to be jumped.A spark may cause an explosion of thegases that surround the battery.

Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehiclerepresents the booster vehicle.

260



4

2

1

3

E142664

1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cableto the positive (+) terminal of thedischarged battery.

2. Connect the other end of the positive(+) cable to the positive (+) terminalof the booster vehicle battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) cable to thenegative (-) terminal of the boostervehicle battery.

4. Make the final connection of thenegative (-) cable to an exposed metalpart of the stalled vehicle's engine,away from the battery and the fuelinjection system, or connect thenegative (-) cable to a groundconnection point if available.

Jump Starting1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and rev the engine moderately, or pressthe accelerator gently to keep yourengine speed between 2000 and 3000RPM, as shown in your tachometer.

2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.3. Once the disabled vehicle has been

started, run both vehicle engines for anadditional three minutes beforedisconnecting the jumper cables.

Removing the Jumper CablesRemove the jumper cables in the reverseorder that they were connected.

4

1

3

2

E142665

1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cablefrom the disabled vehicle.

261



2. Remove the jumper cable on thenegative (-) terminal of the boostervehicle battery.

3. Remove the jumper cable from thepositive (+) terminal of the boostervehicle battery.

4. Remove the jumper cable from thepositive (+) terminal of the disabledvehicle battery.

5. Allow the engine to idle for at least oneminute.

POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEMThe system flashes the direction indicatorsand sounds the horn (intermittently) in theevent of a serious impact that deploys anairbag (front, side, side curtain or SafetyCanopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.The horn and indicators turn off when:• You press the hazard control button.• You press the panic button on the

remote entry transmitter (if equipped).• Your vehicle runs out of power.• Sounding of the horn is only enabled

in specific markets.

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

E143886

If you need to have your vehicle towed,contact a professional towing service or,if you are a member of a roadsideassistance program, your roadsideassistance service provider.We recommend the use of a wheel lift anddollies or flatbed equipment to tow yourvehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. FordMotor Company has not approved aslingbelt towing procedure. Vehicledamage may occur if towed incorrectly, orby any other means.Ford Motor Company produces a towingmanual for all authorized tow truckoperators. Have your tow truck operatorrefer to this manual for proper hook-upand towing procedures for your vehicle.

262



It is acceptable to have your front-wheeldrive vehicle towed from the front if usingproper wheel lift equipment to raise thefront wheels off the ground. When towingin this manner, the rear wheels can remainon the ground.Front-wheel drive vehicles must have thefront wheels placed on a tow dolly whentowing your vehicle from the rear usingwheel lift equipment. This preventsdamage to the transmission.Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drivevehicle requires that all wheels be off theground, such as using a wheel lift anddollies or flatbed equipment. This preventsdamage to the transmission, all-wheel orfour-wheel drive system and vehicle.

TOWING POINTS (IF EQUIPPED)

Due to local market requirements in somecountries, some vehicles may be equippedwith a recovery hook.

Recovery Hook LocationIf your vehicle is equipped with a screw-inrecovery hook, it is with the spare tire kit orthe rear under floor storage.

Installing the Recovery HookThere is an installation point for therecovery hook located behind the fascia.Note: The screw-in recovery hook has aleft-hand thread. Turn it counterclockwiseto install it. Make sure that the recovery hookis fully tightened.

E146284

E188420

Remove the recovery hook cover by pryingit off at the notch with a screwdriver orsimilar object.Note: Use a soft cloth to cover the pryingtool. This helps prevent scratch marks tothe vehicle's paint.

263



GETTING THE SERVICES YOUNEEDWarranty repairs to your vehicle must beperformed by an authorized dealer. Whileany authorized dealer handling your vehicleline will provide warranty service, werecommend you return to your sellingauthorized dealer who wants to ensureyour continued satisfaction.Please note that certain warranty repairsrequire special training and equipment, sonot all authorized dealers are authorizedto perform all warranty repairs. This meansthat, depending on the warranty repairneeded, you may have to take your vehicleto another authorized dealer.A reasonable time must be allowed toperform a repair after taking your vehicleto the authorized dealer. Repairs will bemade using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, orremanufactured or other parts that areauthorized by Ford.

Away From HomeIf you are away from home when yourvehicle needs service, contact the FordCustomer Relationship Center or use theonline resources listed below to find thenearest authorized dealer.In the United States:Mailing addressFord Motor CompanyCustomer Relationship CenterP.O. Box 6248Dearborn, MI 48126Telephone1-800-392-3673 (FORD)(TDD for the hearing impaired:1-800-232-5952)Additional information and resources areavailable online:

Website

www.owner.ford.com

These are some of the items that can befound online:• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,

City/State or Zip Code.• Owner Manuals.• Maintenance Schedules.• Recalls.• Ford Extended Service Plans.• Ford Genuine Accessories.• Service specials and promotions.In Canada:Mailing addressCustomer Relationship CentreFord Motor Company of Canada, LimitedP.O. Box 2000Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8Telephone1-800-565-3673 (FORD)

Website

www.ford.ca

Twitter@FordServiceCA (English Canada)@FordServiceQC (Quebec)

Additional AssistanceIf you have questions or concerns, or areunsatisfied with the service you arereceiving, follow these steps:1. Contact your Sales Representative or

Service Advisor at your selling orservicing authorized dealer.

264


Customer Assistance

2. If your inquiry or concern remainsunresolved, contact the Sales Manager,Service Manager or Customer RelationsManager.

3. If you require assistance or clarificationon Ford Motor Company policies,please contact the Ford CustomerRelationship Center.

In order to help us serve you better, pleasehave the following information availablewhen contacting a Customer RelationshipCenter:• Vehicle Identification Number.• Your telephone number (home and

business).• The name of the authorized dealer and

city where located.• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.In some states within the United States,you must directly notify Ford in writingbefore pursuing remedies under yourstate's warranty laws, and Ford is alsoallowed a final repair attempt.Additionally, in some states within theUnited States, a consumer has the optionof submitting a warranty dispute to theBBB Auto Line before taking action underthe Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or tothe extent allowed by state law, beforepursuing replacement or repurchaseremedies provided by certain state laws.This dispute handling procedure is notrequired prior to enforcing state createdrights or other rights which are independentof the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act orstate replacement or repurchase laws.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)requires that, if a manufacturer or itsrepresentative is unable to repair a motorvehicle to conform to the vehicle’sapplicable express warranty after areasonable number of attempts, themanufacturer shall be required to eitherreplace the vehicle with one substantiallyidentical or repurchase the vehicle andreimburse the buyer in an amount equal tothe actual price paid or payable by theconsumer (less a reasonable allowancefor consumer use). The consumer has theright to choose whether to receive a refundor replacement vehicle.California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)presumes that the manufacturer has hada reasonable number of attempts toconform the vehicle to its applicableexpress warranties if, within the first 18months of ownership of a new vehicle orthe first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whicheveroccurs first:1. Two or more repair attempts are made

on the same non-conformity likely tocause death or serious bodily injury OR

2. Four or more repair attempts are madeon the same nonconformity (a defector condition that substantially impairsthe use, value or safety of the vehicle)OR

3. The vehicle is out of service for repairof nonconformities for a total of morethan 30 calendar days (not necessarilyall at one time).

In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumermust also notify the manufacturer of theneed for the repair of the nonconformityat the following address:Ford Motor Company16800 Executive Plaza DriveMail Drop 3NE-BDearborn, MI 48126

265


Customer Assistance

You are required to submit your warrantydispute to BBB AUTO LINE before assertingin court any rights or remedies conferredby California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).You are also required to use BBB AUTOLINE before exercising rights or seekingremedies created by the FederalMagnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seekredress by pursuing rights and remediesnot created by California Civil Code Section1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-MossWarranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE isnot required by those statutes.

THE BETTER BUSINESSBUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINEPROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)Your satisfaction is important to FordMotor Company and to your dealer. If awarranty concern has not been resolvedusing the three-step procedure outlinedearlier in this chapter in the Getting theServices you need section, you may beeligible to participate in the BBB AUTOLINE program.The BBB AUTO LINE program consists oftwo parts – mediation and arbitration.During mediation, a representative of theBBB will contact both you and Ford MotorCompany to explore options for settlementof the claim. If an agreement is not reachedduring mediation or you do not want toparticipate in mediation, and if your claimis eligible, you may participate in thearbitration process. An arbitration hearingwill be scheduled so that you can presentyour case in an informal setting before animpartial person. The arbitrator willconsider the testimony provided and makea decision after the hearing.

Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINEprogram are usually decided within fortydays after you file your claim with the BBB.You are not bound by the decision, andmay reject the decision and proceed tocourt where all findings of the BBB AutoLine dispute, and decision, are admissiblein the court action. Should you choose toaccept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Fordis then bound by the decision, and mustcomply with the decision within 30 daysof receipt of your acceptance letter.BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using theinformation provided below, please call orwrite to request a program application.You will be asked for your name andaddress, general information about yournew vehicle, information about yourwarranty concerns, and any steps you havealready taken to try to resolve them. ACustomer Claim Form will be mailed thatwill need to be completed, signed andreturned to the BBB along with proof ofownership. Upon receipt, the BBB willreview the claim for eligibility under theProgram Summary Guidelines.You can get more information bycalling BBB AUTO LINE at1-800-955-5100, or writing to:BBB AUTO LINE3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600Arlington, Virginia 22201BBB AUTO LINE applications can also berequested by calling the Ford MotorCompany Customer Relationship Centerat 1-800-392-3673.Note: Ford Motor Company reserves theright to change eligibility limitations, modifyprocedures, or to discontinue this processat any time without notice and withoutobligation.

266


Customer Assistance

UTILIZING THEMEDIATION/ARBITRATIONPROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)For vehicles delivered to authorizedCanadian dealers. In those cases whereyou continue to feel that the efforts by Fordof Canada and the authorized dealer toresolve a factory-related vehicle serviceconcern have been unsatisfactory, Ford ofCanada participates in an impartial thirdparty mediation/arbitration programadministered by the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).The CAMVAP program is a straight forwardand relatively speedy alternative to resolvea disagreement when all other efforts toproduce a settlement have failed. Thisprocedure is without cost to you and isdesigned to eliminate the need for lengthyand expensive legal proceedings.In the CAMVAP program, impartialthird-party arbitrators conduct hearings atmutually convenient times and places inan informal environment. These impartialarbitrators review the positions of theparties, make decisions and, whenappropriate, render awards to resolvedisputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,and final as the arbitrator’s award isbinding on both you and Ford of Canada.CAMVAP services are available in allCanadian territories and provinces. Formore information, without charge orobligation, call your CAMVAP ProvincialAdministrator directly at 1-800-207-0685or visit www.camvap.ca.

GETTING ASSISTANCEOUTSIDE THE U.S. ANDCANADABefore exporting your vehicle to a foreigncountry, contact the appropriate foreignembassy or consulate. These officials caninform you of local vehicle registrationregulations and where to find unleadedfuel or petrol/gas engines or the propersulfur fuel for diesel engines.If you cannot find the proper fuelrecommended for your vehicle, contactour Customer Relationship Center.The use of improper fuels in your vehiclewithout proper conversion may damagethe effectiveness of your emission controlsystem and may cause engine knocking orserious engine damage. Ford MotorCompany or Ford of Canada is notresponsible for any damage caused by useof improper fuel. Using improper fuels mayalso result in difficulty importing yourvehicle back into the United States.If your vehicle must be serviced while youare traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islandsand/or Puerto Rico, Central America, theCaribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,contact the nearest authorized dealer. Ifthe authorized dealer cannot help you,contact the corresponding Ford CustomerAssistance Center:FORD MOTOR COMPANYCustomer Relationship Centers in:

267


Customer Assistance

E-mailFaxPhoneCustomer Relation-ship Center

[email protected]/AN/AAsia Pacific

[email protected]+1 313 594 4857Caribbean andCentral America

[email protected] 4 3327 266

Ford

Middle East

80004443673

Lincoln80004441067

UAE80004441066

Saudi Arabia8008443673

Mobily and Zain cellphone users in Saudi

800850078

Kuwait22280384

[email protected]/AN/ANorth Africa

[email protected]/A+1-800-841-3673Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands

[email protected]/AN/ASub-Saharan Africa

[email protected] [email protected]/A+82-02-1600-6003South Korea

If you buy your vehicle in North Americaand then relocate to any of the abovelocations, register your vehicleidentification number (VIN) and newaddress with Ford Global Trade Servicesby emailing, [email protected].

If you are in another foreign country,contact the nearest authorized dealer. Inthe event your inquiry is unresolved,communicate your concern with thedealership’s Sales Manager, ServiceManager or Customer Relations Manager.If you require additional assistance orclarification, please contact the respectiveCustomer Relationship Center aspreviously listed.Customers in the U.S. should call1-800-392-3673.

268


Customer Assistance

ORDERING ADDITIONALOWNER'S LITERATURETo order the publications in this portfolio,contact Helm, Incorporated at:HELM, INCORPORATED47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, Michigan 48170Attention: Customer ServiceOr to order a free publication catalog, calltoll free: 1-800-782-4356Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. ESTHelm, Incorporated can also be reachedby their website:www.helminc.com(Items in this catalog may be purchasedby credit card, check or money order.)

Obtaining a French Owner’sManualFrench Owner’s Manual can be obtainedfrom your authorized dealer or bycontacting Helm, Incorporated using thecontact information listed previously in thissection.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS(U.S. ONLY)

E142557

If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingFord Motor Company.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or Ford MotorCompany.To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or writeto:Administrator1200 New Jersey Avenue,SoutheastWashington, D.C. 20590You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS(CANADA ONLY)If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform Transport Canada and Ford ofCanada.

269


Customer Assistance

Transport Canada Contact Information

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-vehicles.html (English)

Website

http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-automobiles.html (French)

Website

1–800–333–0510Phone

Ford of Canada Contact Information

www.ford.caWebsite

1–800–565-3673Phone

270


Customer Assistance

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHARTPower Distribution Box

WARNING: Always disconnect thebattery before servicing high currentfuses.

WARNING: To reduce risk ofelectrical shock, always replace thecover to the power distribution boxbefore reconnecting the battery orrefilling fluid reservoirs.

The power distribution box is located inthe engine compartment. It hashigh-current fuses that protect yourvehicle's main electrical systems fromoverloads.If the battery has been disconnected andreconnected, some features will need tobe reset. See Changing the 12V Battery(page 296).

E193713

271


Fuses

Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or RelayNumber

Powertrain control module power.20A11

Engine emissions (MIL).20A12

A/C clutch control relay coil.20A13Variable Air Conditioning Compressor.Active grille shutters.

Ignition coils.20A14

Not used.—5

Not used.—6

Not used.—7

Not used.—8

Not used.—9

Heated mirrors.15A110

Not used.—11

Heated rear window.40A212

Not used.—13

Powertrain control module relay.—14

Horn relay power.20A115

A/C clutch relay power.10A116

Rear heated window and heated mirrorsrelay.

—17

Rear blower motor relay.—18

Not used.—19

Left hand side cooling fan relay.—20

Cooling fans series/parallel relay.—21

Electronic fan relay 2.25A222

272


Fuses


Not used.—23

Right hand side electronic cooling fan 3relay.

—24

Not used.—25

Anti-lock brake system valves.30A226

Trailer tow battery charge relay power.30A227

Not used.—28

Starter relay.—29

Not used.—30

Electric power-assisted steering.10A131

Anti-lock brake system module.10A132

Powertrain control module (Ignition SwitchPosition - Run).10A133

Blind spot information system.10A134Adaptive cruise control.Front view camera.Rear camera.

Not used.—35

Blower motor relay.—36

Trailer tow battery charge relay.—37

A/C compressor clutch relay.—38

Horn relay.—39

Not used.—40

Rear blower motor.40A241

Not used.—42

Front blower motor.40A243

273


Fuses


Voltage quality module bus.50A344


Trailer tow brake controller.30A346

Not used.—47

Body control module RP1 bus.50A348

Not used.—49

Body control module RP2 bus.50A350


Anti-lock brake system pump.60A352

Not used.—53

Not used.—54

Not used.—55

Power inverter.40A256

Not used.—57

Not used.—58

Not used.—59

Power point (front console bin).20A260

Not used.—61

Power point (instrument panel).20A262

Fuel pump.30A263

Not used.—64

Power point (2nd row) (without USBcharger).20A265

Not used.—66

274


Fuses


Power point (cargo area).20A267

Not used.—68

Power liftgate.30A269

Trailer tow left-hand and right-hand stopand direction indicator lamps.15A270

Not used.—71

Heated/cooled seats.30A272

Driver seat module.30A273Driver seat power.

Passenger seat power.30A274

Front wiper motor.30A275

Not used.—76

Not used.—77

3rd row power folding seat module relay.30A278

Starter relay.30A279

Not used.—80

Trailer tow back-up lamp relay.10A181

Steering column lock (if equipped).20A282

Brake on/off switch.10A183

Not used.—84

2nd row USB charger (if equipped).5A185

Not used.—86

Not used.—87

Not used.—88

275


Fuses


Not used.—89

Not used.—90

Not used.—91

Multi-contour seat module relay.15A192

Alternator sense.10A193

Rear washer relay.15A194

Rear wiper relay.15A195

Powertrain control module relay coilpower.10A196

Rain sensor.5A197

2nd row seat motors.20A198

Trailer tow parking lamp relay.20A199

1 Micro 2 fuse.2 M-case fuse.3 J-case fuse.

Passenger Compartment FusePanelThe fuse panel is located under theinstrument panel to the left of the steeringcolumn.

Note: It may be easier to access the fusepanel if you remove the finish trim piece.

276


Fuses

E145984

Protected ComponentsFuse RatingFuse or RelayNumber

Not used.—1

Memory seat switch (lumbar power).7.5A12

Driver unlock relay.20A13

Aftermarket electronic brake controller.5A14

Rear heated seat module.20A15

Not used.—6

Not used.—7

Not used.—8

Not used.—9

Embedded modem.5A210Hands free liftgate.

Rear climate control module.5A211Securicode™ keyless entry keypad.Power liftgate module.

277


Fuses


Front climate control module.7.5A212

Instrument cluster.7.5A213Smart data link.Steering column control module.

Extended power module.10A214

Smart datalink connector power.10A215Heads up display.

Not used.—16

Electronic finish panel.5A217

Push button start switch.5A218Ignition switch.Key inhibit.

Transmission control switch.7.5A219

Not used.—20

Terrain management switch.5A221Heads up display.Humidity sensor.

Occupant classification sensor.5A222

Delayed accessory power.10A123Power windows.Moonroof.Folding mirror relay.DC inverter.Window/moonroof switch illumination.

Central lock relay.20A124

Left-hand front smart window motor.30A125Door zone module.

Right-hand front smart window motor.30A126Door zone module.

Moonroof.30A127

278


Fuses


Sony amplifier - 10 channel.20A128

Sony amplifier - 14 channel.30A129

Not used.—30

Not used.—31

SYNC module.10A132GPS module.Display.Radio frequency receiver.

Radio.20A133

Starter relay.30A134

Restraints control module.5A135Extended power module.

Lane departure warning module.15A136Auto high beam.EC mirrors.Rear heated seats.

Heated steering wheel.20A137

Left-hand front window motor.30A338Rear power window motors.

1 Micro 2 fuse.2 Micro 3 fuse.3 Circuit breaker.

279


Fuses

CHANGING A FUSEFuses

WARNING: Always replace a fusewith one that has the specifiedamperage rating. Using a fuse with ahigher amperage rating can cause severewire damage and could start a fire.

E217331

If electrical components in the vehicle arenot working, a fuse may have blown. Blownfuses are identified by a broken wire withinthe fuse. Check the appropriate fusesbefore replacing any electricalcomponents.

Fuse Types

E207206

Fuse TypeCallout

Micro 2A

Micro 3B

MaxiC

MiniD

280


Fuses

Fuse TypeCallout

M CaseE

J CaseF

J Case Low ProfileG

281


Fuses

GENERAL INFORMATIONHave your vehicle serviced regularly to helpmaintain its roadworthiness and resalevalue. There is a large network ofauthorized dealers that are there to helpyou with their professional servicingexpertise. We believe that their speciallytrained technicians are best qualified toservice your vehicle properly and expertly.They are supported by a wide range ofhighly specialized tools developedspecifically for servicing your vehicle.If your vehicle requires professional service,an authorized dealer can provide thenecessary parts and service. Check yourwarranty information to find out whichparts and services are covered.Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,fluids and service parts conforming tospecifications. Motorcraft® parts aredesigned and built to provide the bestperformance in your vehicle.

Precautions• Do not work on a hot engine.• Make sure that nothing gets caught in

moving parts.• Do not work on a vehicle with the

engine running in an enclosed space,unless you are sure you have enoughventilation.

• Keep all open flames and other burningmaterial (such as cigarettes) awayfrom the battery and all fuel relatedparts.

Working with the Engine Off1. Set the parking brake and shift the

transmission to park (P).2. Switch off the engine.3. Block the wheels.

Working with the Engine On

WARNING: To reduce the risk ofvehicle damage and personal burninjuries, do not start your engine with theair cleaner removed and do not removeit while the engine is running.

1. Set the parking brake and shift thetransmission to park (P).

2. Block the wheels.

OPENING AND CLOSING THEHOODOpening the Hood

E203008

1

282


Maintenance

1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood releasehandle located under the left-handside of the instrument panel.

2. Slightly lift the hood.

2

E203009

3

3. Move the catch to the left.

4

E203320

4. Open the hood. Support the hood withthe strut.

Closing the Hood1. Remove the hood strut from the catch

and secure it correctly after use.2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop

under its own weight for the last8–12 in (20–30 cm).

Note: Make sure that the hood is correctlyclosed.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.3L ECOBOOST™

283


Maintenance

E270722

Engine coolant reservoir. SeeEngine Coolant Check (page289).

A

Engine oil dipstick. See EngineOil Dipstick (page 286).

B

Engine oil filler cap. See EngineOil Check (page 287).

C

Brake fluid reservoir. See BrakeFluid Check (page 295).

D

Battery. See Changing the 12VBattery (page 296).

E

Engine compartment fusebox.See Changing a Fuse (page280).

F

Air filter assembly. SeeChanging the Engine Air Filter(page 304).

G

Windshield washer fluidreservoir. See Washer FluidCheck (page 296).

H

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L DURATEC

284


Maintenance

I EFGH

A B C D

E223186


A


B


C

Engine compartment fusebox.See Fuse Specification Chart(page 271).

D


E

Automatic transmission fluiddipstick. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid Check(page 293).

F


G


H

Windshield washer fluidreservoir. See Washer FluidCheck (page 296).

I

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™

285


Maintenance

E270723


A.


B.


C.


D.


E.

Engine compartment fuse box.See Fuses (page 271).

F.


G.

Automatic transmission dipstick.See Automatic TransmissionFluid Check (page 293).

H.

Washer fluid reservoir. SeeWasher Fluid Check (page 296).

I.

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.3LECOBOOST™

E161560

A B

Minimum.AMaximum.B

286


Maintenance

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.5LDURATEC/3.5L ECOBOOST™

E146429

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL CHECKTo check the engine oil level consistentlyand accurately, do the following:1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make

sure the transmission is in park (P) orneutral (N).

2. Run the engine until it reaches normaloperating temperature.

3. Make sure that your vehicle is on levelground.

4. Switch the engine off and wait 15minutes for the oil to drain into the oilpan. Checking the engine oil level toosoon after you switch the engine offmay result in an inaccurate reading.

5. Open the hood. See Opening andClosing the Hood (page 282).

6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it witha clean, lint-free cloth. See UnderHood Overview (page 283).

7. Replace the dipstick and remove itagain to check the oil level. See UnderHood Overview (page 283).

8. Make sure that the oil level is betweenthe maximum and minimum marks. Ifthe oil level is at the minimum mark,add oil immediately. See Capacitiesand Specifications (page 351).

9. If the oil level is correct, replace thedipstick and make sure it is fully seated.

Note: Do not remove the dipstick when theengine is running.Note: If the oil level is between themaximum and minimum marks, the oil levelis acceptable. Do not add oil.Note: The oil consumption of new enginesreaches its normal level after approximately3,000 mi (5,000 km).

Adding Engine Oil

WARNING: Do not remove thefiller cap when the engine is running.

Do not use supplemental engine oiladditives because they are unnecessaryand could lead to engine damage that maynot be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

E142732

287


Maintenance

Only use oils certified for gasoline enginesby the American Petroleum Institute (API).An oil with this trademark symbolconforms to the current engine andemission system protection standards andfuel economy requirements of theInternational Lubricants SpecificationAdvisory Committee (ILSAC).To top up the engine oil level do thefollowing:1. Clean the area surrounding the engine

oil filler cap before you remove it.2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See

Under Hood Overview (page 283).Turn it counterclockwise and removeit.

3. Add engine oil that meets ourspecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 351). You mayhave to use a funnel to pour the engineoil into the opening.

4. Recheck the oil level.5. If the oil level is correct, replace the

dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn

it clockwise until you feel a strongresistance.

Note: Do not add oil further than themaximum mark. Oil levels above themaximum mark may cause engine damage.Note: Make sure you install the oil filler capcorrectly.Note: Soak up any spillage with anabsorbent cloth immediately.

OIL CHANGE INDICATORRESETUse the information display controls onthe steering wheel to reset the oil changeindicator.

From the main menu scroll to:

Action and descriptionMessage

Press the right arrow button,then from this menu scrollto the following message.

Settings


Vehicle


Oil Life

Press and hold the OKbutton until the instrumentcluster displays thefollowing message.

Hold OK toReset

Reset Successful

When the oil change indic-ator resets the instrumentcluster displays 100%.

Remaining Life

{00}%

If the instrument clusterdisplays one of the followingmessages, repeat theprocess.

Not Reset

Reset Cancelled

288


Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK

WARNING: Do not remove thecoolant reservoir cap when the engine ison or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10minutes for the cooling system to cooldown. Cover the coolant reservoir capwith a thick cloth to prevent thepossibility of scalding and slowly removethe cap. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in personal injury.

WARNING: Do not put coolant inthe windshield washer reservoir. Ifsprayed on the windshield, coolant couldmake it difficult to see through thewindshield.

WARNING: To reduce the risk ofpersonal injury, make sure the engine iscool before unscrewing the coolantpressure relief cap. The cooling systemis under pressure. Steam and hot liquidcan come out forcefully when you loosenthe cap slightly.

WARNING: Do not add coolantfurther than the MAX mark.

When the engine is cold, check theconcentration and level of the coolant atthe intervals listed in the scheduledmaintenance information. See ScheduledMaintenance (page 495).Note: Make sure that the coolant level isbetween the MIN and MAX marks on thecoolant reservoir.Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. Thelevel may extend beyond the MAX mark.

Maintain coolant concentration within48% to 50%, which equates to a freezepoint between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F(-37°C). Coolant concentration should bechecked using a refractometer. We do notrecommend the use of hydrometers orcoolant test strips for measuring coolantconcentration.

Adding Coolant

WARNING: Do not add enginecoolant when the engine is hot. Failureto follow this instruction could result inpersonal injury.


WARNING: Do not put coolant inthe windshield washer reservoir. Ifsprayed on the windshield, coolant couldmake it difficult to see through thewindshield.

Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, coolingsystem sealants, or non-specified additivesas they can cause damage to the enginecooling or heating systems. Resultingcomponent damage may not be covered bythe vehicle Warranty.Note: Automotive fluids are notinterchangeable.

289


Maintenance

It is very important to use predilutedcoolant approved to the correctspecification in order to avoid plugging thesmall passageways in the engine coolingsystem. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 340). Do not mixdifferent colors or types of coolant in yourvehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or usingan incorrect coolant may harm the engineor cooling system components and maynot be covered by the vehicle Warranty.Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,use the approved concentrated coolantdiluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. SeeCapacities and Specifications (page 340).Using water that has not been deionisedmay contribute to deposit formation,corrosion and plugging of the small coolingsystem passageways.Note: Coolants marketed for all makes andmodels may not be approved to ourspecifications and may cause damage tothe cooling system. Resulting componentdamage may not be covered by the vehicleWarranty.If the coolant level is at or below theminimum mark, add prediluted coolantimmediately.To top up the coolant level do thefollowing:1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure

escapes as you unscrew the cap.2. Add prediluted coolant approved to

the correct specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications (page340).

3. Add enough prediluted coolant toreach the correct level.

4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turnit clockwise until you feel a strongresistance.

5. Check the coolant level in the coolantreservoir the next few times you driveyour vehicle. If necessary, add enoughprediluted engine coolant to bring thecoolant level to the correct level.

If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) ofengine coolant per month, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.Operating an engine with a low level ofcoolant can result in engine overheatingand possible engine damage.Note: During normal vehicle operation, thecoolant may change color from orange topink or light red. As long as the coolant isclear and uncontaminated, this color changedoes not indicate the coolant has degradednor does it require the coolant to be drained,the system to be flushed, or the coolant tobe replaced.In case of emergency, you can add a largeamount of water without engine coolantin order to reach a vehicle service location.In this instance, qualified personnel:1. Must drain the cooling system.2. Chemically clean the coolant system.3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as

possible.Water alone, without engine coolant, cancause engine damage from corrosion,overheating or freezing.Do not use the following as a coolantsubstitute:• Alcohol.• Methanol.• Brine.• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or

methanol antifreeze.Alcohol and other liquids can cause enginedamage from overheating or freezing.

290


Maintenance

Do not add extra inhibitors or additives tothe coolant. These can be harmful andcompromise the corrosion protection ofthe coolant.

Recycled CoolantWe do not recommend the use of recycledcoolant as an approved recycling processis not yet available.Note: Dispose of used coolant in theappropriate manner.Follow your community's regulations andstandards for recycling and disposing ofautomotive fluids.

Severe ClimatesIf you drive in extremely cold climates:• It may be necessary to increase the

coolant concentration above 50%.• A coolant concentration of 60%

provides improved freeze pointprotection. Coolant concentrationsabove 60% decrease the overheatprotection characteristics of thecoolant and may cause enginedamage.

If you drive in extremely hot climates:• You can decrease the coolant

concentration to 40%.• Coolant concentrations below 40%

decrease the freeze and corrosionprotection characteristics of thecoolant and may cause enginedamage.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extremeclimates should use prediluted coolant foroptimum cooling system and engineprotection.

Coolant ChangeAt specific mileage intervals, as listed inthe scheduled maintenance information,the coolant should be changed. Addprediluted coolant approved to the correctspecification. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 340).

Fail-Safe CoolingFail-safe cooling allows you to temporarilydrive your vehicle before any incrementalcomponent damage occurs. The fail-safedistance depends on ambienttemperature, vehicle load and terrain.

How Fail-Safe Cooling WorksIf the engine begins to overheat,the coolant temperature gaugemoves toward the red zone:

A warning lamp illuminates anda message may appear in theinformation display.

If the engine reaches a presetover-temperature condition, the engineautomatically switches to alternatingcylinder operation. Each disabled cylinderacts as an air pump and cools the engine.When this occurs, your vehicle stilloperates, however:• Engine power is limited.• The air conditioning system turns off.Continued operation increases the enginetemperature, causing the engine tocompletely shut down. Your steering andbraking effort increases in this situation.When the engine temperature cools, youcan re-start the engine. Have your vehiclechecked as soon as possible to minimizeengine damage.

291


Maintenance

When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated

WARNING: Fail-safe mode is foruse during emergencies only. Operateyour vehicle in fail-safe mode only aslong as necessary to bring your vehicleto rest in a safe location and seekimmediate repairs. When in fail-safemode, your vehicle will have limitedpower, will not be able to maintainhigh-speed operation, and maycompletely shut down without warning,potentially losing engine power, powersteering assist, and power brake assist,which may increase the possibility of acrash resulting in serious injury.


Your vehicle has limited engine powerwhen in the fail-safe mode, drive yourvehicle with caution. Your vehicle does notmaintain high-speed operation and theengine may operate poorly.Remember that the engine is capable ofautomatically shutting down to preventengine damage. In this situation:1. Pull off the road as soon as safely

possible and switch the engine off.2. If you are a member of a roadside

assistance program, we recommendthat you contact your roadsideassistance service provider.

3. If this is not possible, wait for a shortperiod of time for the engine to cool.

4. Check the coolant level. If the coolantlevel is at or below the minimum mark,add prediluted coolant immediately.

5. When the engine temperature cools,you can re-start the engine. Have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible tominimize engine damage.

Note: Driving your vehicle without repairincreases the chance of engine damage.

Engine Coolant TemperatureManagement (If Equipped)

WARNING: To reduce the risk ofcrash and injury, be prepared that thevehicle speed may reduce and thevehicle may not be able to acceleratewith full power until the coolanttemperature reduces.

If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, theengine may temporarily reach a highertemperature during severe operatingconditions, for example ascending a longor steep grade in high ambienttemperatures.At this time, you may notice the coolanttemperature gauge moves toward the redzone and a message may appear in theinformation display.You may notice a reduction in vehiclespeed caused by reduced engine power inorder to manage the engine coolanttemperature. Your vehicle may enter thismode if certain high-temperature andhigh-load conditions take place. Theamount of speed reduction depends onvehicle loading, grade and ambienttemperature. If this occurs, there is noneed to stop your vehicle. You cancontinue to drive.

292


Maintenance

The air conditioning may automaticallyturn on and off during severe operatingconditions to protect the engine fromoverheating. When the coolanttemperature decreases to the normaloperating temperature, the air conditioningturns on.If the coolant temperature gauge movesfully into the red zone, or if the coolanttemperature warning or service enginesoon messages appear in your informationdisplay, do the following:1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe

to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,shift into park (P) or neutral (N).

2. Leave the engine running until thecoolant temperature gauge needlereturns to the normal position. If thetemperature does not drop afterseveral minutes, follow the remainingsteps.

3. Switch the engine off and wait for it tocool. Check the coolant level.

4. If the coolant level is at or below theminimum mark, add prediluted coolantimmediately.

5. If the coolant level is normal, restartthe engine and continue.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONFLUID CHECK - 2.3LECOBOOST™ (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: Transmission fluid should be checkedby an authorized dealer. If required, fluidshould be added by an authorized dealer.

Have an authorized dealer check andchange the transmission fluid at thecorrect service interval. See Maintenance(page 282). Your transmission does notconsume fluid. However, the fluid levelshould be checked if the transmission isnot working properly, (i.e., if thetransmission slips or shifts slowly) or if younotice some sign of fluid leakage.Do not use supplemental transmissionfluid additives, treatments or cleaningagents. The use of these materials mayaffect transmission operation and resultin damage to internal transmissioncomponents.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONFLUID CHECK - 3.5L DURATEC/3.5L ECOBOOST™ (IF EQUIPPED)

Do not use supplemental transmissionfluid additives because they areunnecessary and could lead totransmission damage that may not becovered by the vehicle Warranty.The transmission does not consume fluid.However, if the transmission slips or shiftsslowly you should check the fluid level. Ifyou notice a sign of leaking fluid, contactan authorized dealer.

Checking the Transmission FluidLevel

WARNING: The dipstick andsurrounding components are hot. Usegloves when moving components andchecking the transmission fluid level.Failure to follow this warning could resultin serious personal injury.

293


Maintenance

Only check the transmission fluid levelwhen the engine is at normal operatingtemperature 179°F (82°C)-199°F (93°C).Normal operating temperature is reachedafter driving approximately 20 mi (30 km).

E190273

A B

Minimum.AMaximum.B

Note: Check the fluid level with the enginerunning and the transmission in park (P).1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level

ground.2. Rotate the automatic transmission

fluid cap in a counterclockwisedirection. See Under Hood Overview(page 284).

3. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipeit with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replacethe cap and dipstick and remove itagain to check the fluid level.

4. Make sure that the fluid level isbetween the MIN and the MAX marks.If the fluid level is at the MIN mark, addfluid immediately. See AddingTransmission Fluid.

5. Replace the automatic transmissionfluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwiseuntil you feel a strong resistance.

Low Fluid LevelIf the fluid level is within the minimumrange (below point A) add the correctspecification fluid to be within the hashmark area. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 351).

Note: If the fluid level is below theminimum range do not drive your vehicle. Alow fluid level can damage the transmission.

Correct Fluid LevelIf the fluid level is within the hash markarea (between points A and B) do not addany fluid.

High Fluid LevelIf the fluid level is above the maximumrange (above point B) fluid may need tobe removed. High fluid levels may becaused by a overheating condition. If youhave operated your vehicle at high speeds,towing a trailer or in city traffic during hotweather, allow your vehicle to cool for aminimum of 30 minutes before recheckingthe level.Note: An overfill condition can damage thetransmission.

Adding Transmission Fluid*

1. Rotate the automatic transmissionfluid cap in a counterclockwisedirection.

2. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipeit with a clean, lint-free cloth.

3. Add fluid that meets the Fordspecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 351). Pour thefluid directly into the automatictransmission fluid cap and dipstickhole.

4. Replace the cap and dipstick andremove it again to check the fluid level.

5. Make sure that the fluid level isbetween the MIN and the MAX marks.

6. Replace the automatic transmissionfluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwiseuntil you feel a strong resistance.

294


Maintenance

*Vehicles With Turbocharged Engines

WARNING: Do not start the enginewith the air filter removed. This cancause damage not covered by thevehicle Warranty and can result inserious injury.

1. Loosen the clamp holding the air filterassembly to the rubber hose.

2. Remove the air filter assembly securingbolts.

3. Lift the air filter assembly to disengagethe locating pins.

4. Rotate the air filter assembly slightlyin a counterclockwise direction.

5. Check the transmission fluid level.6. Install the air filter assembly in reverse

order. Tighten the air filter assemblysecuring bolts until you feel a strongresistance.

BRAKE FLUID CHECK

WARNING: Do not use any fluidother than the recommended brake fluidas this will reduce brake efficiency. Useof incorrect fluid could result in the lossof vehicle control, serious personal injuryor death.

WARNING: Only use brake fluidfrom a sealed container. Contaminationwith dirt, water, petroleum products orother materials may result in brakesystem damage or failure. Failure toadhere to this warning could result in theloss of vehicle control, serious personalinjury or death.

WARNING: Do not allow the fluidto touch your skin or eyes. If thishappens, rinse the affected areasimmediately with plenty of water andcontact your physician.

WARNING: A fluid level betweenthe MAX and MIN lines is within thenormal operating range and there is noneed to add fluid. A fluid level not in thenormal operating range couldcompromise the performance of thesystem. Have your vehicle checkedimmediately.

E170684

To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoircap must remain in place and fully tight,unless you are adding fluid.Only use fluid that meets Fordspecifications.

295


Maintenance

POWER STEERING FLUIDCHECKYour vehicle is equipped with an electricpower steering (EPS) system. There is nofluid reservoir to check or fill.

WASHER FLUID CHECK

WARNING: If you operate yourvehicle in temperatures below 41.0°F(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreezeprotection. Failure to use washer fluidwith antifreeze protection in coldweather could result in impairedwindshield vision and increase the riskof injury or accident.

Note: The front and rear washer systemsare supplied from the same reservoir.Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level islow. Only use a washer fluid that meetsour specifications.State or local regulations on volatileorganic compounds may restrict the useof methanol, a common windshield washerantifreeze additive. Washer fluidscontaining non-methanol antifreezeagents should be used only if they providecold weather protection without damagingthe vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades orwasher system.

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

WARNING: Batteries normallyproduce explosive gases which cancause personal injury. Therefore, do notallow flames, sparks or lightedsubstances to come near the battery.When working near the battery, alwaysshield your face and protect your eyes.Always provide correct ventilation.

WARNING: When lifting aplastic-cased battery, excessive pressureon the end walls could cause acid to flowthrough the vent caps, resulting inpersonal injury and damage to thevehicle or battery. Lift the battery with abattery carrier or with your hands onopposite corners.

WARNING: Keep batteries out ofreach of children. Batteries containsulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes whenworking near the battery to protectagainst possible splashing of acidsolution. In case of acid contact with skinor eyes, flush immediately with water fora minimum of 15 minutes and get promptmedical attention. If acid is swallowed,call a physician immediately.

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer andreproductive harm. Wash your handsafter handling.

Your vehicle has a Motorcraft®maintenance-free battery which normallydoes not require additional water duringits life of service.

296


Maintenance

Note: If your vehicle's battery has a coveror shield, make sure it is reinstalled after thebattery has been cleaned or replaced.Note: See an authorized dealer for lowvoltage battery access, testing, orreplacement.When a low voltage battery replacementis necessary, see an authorized dealer toreplace the low voltage battery with a Fordrecommended replacement low voltagebattery that matches the electricalrequirements of the vehicle.To ensure proper operation of the batterymanagement system (BMS), do not allowa technician to connect any electricaldevice ground connection directly to thelow voltage battery negative post. Aconnection at the low voltage batterynegative post can cause inaccuratemeasurements of the battery conditionand potential incorrect system operation.Note: If a person adds electrical orelectronic accessories or components to thevehicle, the accessories or components mayadversely affect the low voltage batteryperformance and durability and may alsoaffect the performance of other electricalsystems in the vehicle.For longer, trouble-free operation, keep thetop of the battery clean and dry. Also,make certain the battery cables are alwaystightly fastened to the battery terminals.If you see any corrosion on the battery orterminals, remove the cables from theterminals and clean with a wire brush. Youcan neutralize the acid with a solution ofbaking soda and water.When a battery replacement is required,the battery should only be replaced witha Ford recommended replacement batterythat matches the electrical requirementsof the vehicle.

Because your vehicle’s engine iselectronically-controlled by a computer,some engine control settings aremaintained by power from the low voltagebattery. Some engine computer settings,like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy,optimize the driveability and performanceof the engine. Some other computersettings, like the clock and radio stationpresets, are also maintained in memory bypower from the low voltage battery. Whena technician disconnects and connects thelow voltage battery, these settings areerased. Complete the following procedurein order to restore the settings:1. With the vehicle at a complete stop,

set the parking brake.2. Shift the transmission into park (P).3. Switch off all accessories.4. Fully press the brake pedal and start

the vehicle.5. Run the engine until it reaches normal

operating temperature. While theengine is warming up, complete thefollowing: Reset the clock. See AudioSystem (page 362). Reset the powerwindows bounce-back feature. SeeWindows and Mirrors (page 90).Reset the radio station presets. SeeAudio System (page 362).

6. Allow the engine to idle for at least oneminute. If the engine turns off, pressthe accelerator pedal to start theengine.

7. While the engine is running, press thebrake pedal and shift into neutral (N).

8. Allow the engine to run for at least oneminute by pressing on the acceleratorpedal.

9. Drive the vehicle at least 12 mi (20 km)to completely relearn the idle and fueltrim strategy.

297


Maintenance

Note: If you do not allow the engine torelearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, theidle quality of your vehicle may be adverselyaffected until the engine computereventually relearns the idle trim and fueltrim strategy.Make sure that you dispose of old batteriesin an environmentally friendly way. Seekadvice from your local authority aboutrecycling old batteries.

CHECKING THE WIPERBLADES

E142463

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge ofthe blade to check for roughness.Clean the wiper blades with washer fluidor water applied with a soft sponge orcloth.

CHANGING THE WIPERBLADESYou can improve poor wiper quality bycleaning the wiper blades and thewindshield.Replace the wiper blades at least annuallyfor optimum performance.

Front Wiper Blades

E129990

1

1

21. Lift the wiper arm and then press the

wiper blade locking buttons together.Note: Do not hold the wiper blade whenlifting the wiper arm.Note: Make sure that the wiper arm doesnot spring back against the glass when thewiper blade is not attached.2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade.3. Remove the wiper blade.4. Install in the reverse order.Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place.

298


Maintenance

Rear Window Wiper Blade

E183236

1. Lift the wiper arm.Note: Do not hold the wiper blade whenlifting the wiper arm.Note: Make sure that the wiper arm doesnot spring back against the glass when thewiper blade is not attached.2. Remove the wiper blade.Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPSVertical Aim AdjustmentIf your vehicle has been involved in a crash,have the aim of the headlamp beamchecked by an authorized dealer.

E142592

8 ft (2.4 m)AGround to the center of theheadlamp high beam bulb

B

25 ft (7.6 m)CHorizontal reference lineD

Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure1. Park your vehicle on level ground

approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) from a wallor screen.

2. Measure the distance from the groundto the center of the headlamp highbeam bulb and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m)long horizontal reference line on thewall or screen at this height.

Note: There may be an identifying mark onthe lens to help you locate the center lineof the headlamp high beam bulb. Refer tothe graphic below step 4.Note: To see a clearer light pattern foradjusting, you may want to block the lightfrom one headlamp while adjusting theother.3. Switch on the low beam headlamps

and open the hood.

299


Maintenance

E142465

4. On the wall or screen you will observea flat zone of high intensity lightlocated at the top of the beam pattern.If the top edge of the flat zone of highintensity light is not on the horizontalreference line, adjust the aim of theheadlamp beam.

E203691

5

5. Use a suitable tool, for example ascrewdriver or socket wrench, to turnthe adjuster clockwise orcounterclockwise to adjust the verticalaim of the headlamp. The horizontaledge of the brighter light should touchthe horizontal reference line.

6. Close the hood and switch off thelamps.

CHANGING A BULB

WARNING: Switch the lamps andthe ignition off. Failure to do so couldresult in serious personal injury.

300


Maintenance

WARNING: Bulbs can become hot.Let the bulb cool down before removingit. Failure to do so could result inpersonal injury.

Use the correct specification bulb. SeeBulb Specification Chart (page 360).Install in the reverse order unless otherwisestated.

Headlamp (If Equipped)

E203696

A B

Headlamp high beam or Daytimerunning lamp.

A

Front direction indicator.B

Front Direction Indicator

E203698

4

2 3

1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignitionoff.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and remove it.4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

301


Maintenance

Headlamp High BeamHalogen Bulb

E203697

2

3

44


2. Carefully remove the cover.3. Disconnect the electrical connector.4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and remove it.Note: You cannot separate the bulb fromthe bulb holder.Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.

LED Bulb (If Equipped)LED lamps are not serviceable items. Seean authorized dealer if they fail.

Front Fog Lamp (If Equipped)

E203699

1. Use a screwdriver, to carefully removethe housing cover.

Note: To remove push pins, use aflat-bladed screwdriver to pull up the centerrelease pin.2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

E174588

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwiseand remove it.

Note: You cannot separate the bulb fromthe bulb holder.Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.

302


Maintenance

Rear Direction Indicator andReversing Lamp

2 3

4E203701


2. Use a suitable tool, for example ascrewdriver, to carefully remove thescrew covers.

3. Remove the retaining bolts from thelamp assembly.

4. Gently pull the lamp assembly awayfrom the vehicle.

5. Release the wire from the securing clip.6. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and remove it.7. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

B

E203702

5

6

A

Reverse lamp.ARear direction indicator.B

LED Lamps (If Equipped)

LED lamps are not serviceable items. Seean authorized dealer if they fail.The following lamps are LED:• Front fog lamps.• Rear fog lamps.• Front side marker lamps.• Front signature lamps.• Daytime running lamps.• Headlamp high beam.• Headlamp low beam.• Side direction indicator.• Rear side marker lamp.

303


Maintenance

• Brake and rear lamp.• Central high mounted brake lamp.

License Plate Lamp (If Equipped)

E203703

1

32

1. Use a suitable tool, for example ascrewdriver, to carefully remove thelamp.

2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwiseand remove it.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straightout.

CHANGING THE ENGINE AIRFILTER

WARNING: To reduce the risk ofvehicle damage and personal burninjuries, do not start your engine with theair cleaner removed and do not removeit while the engine is running.

When changing the engine air filter, do notallow debris or foreign material to enterthe air induction system. Enginecomponents are susceptible to damagenot covered by the vehicle Warranty.Change the air filter element at the correctinterval. See Scheduled Maintenance(page 495).Incorrect component use can causedamage not covered by the vehicleWarranty. See Motorcraft Parts (page342).To replace the air filter element do thefollowing:

E200522

1. Remove the clips that secure the airfilter housing cover.

2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.3. Remove the air filter element from the

air filter housing.

304


Maintenance

4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filterhousing and cover to make sure no dirtgets in the engine and that you have agood seal.

5. Install a new air filter element. Becareful not to crimp the filter elementedges between the air filter housingand cover. This could cause filterdamage and allow unfiltered air toenter the engine if it is not properlyseated.

6. Install the air filter housing cover.7. Engage the clips to secure the air filter

housing cover to the air filter housing.

305


Maintenance

GENERAL INFORMATIONYour dealer has many quality productsavailable to clean your vehicle and protectits finishes.

CLEANING PRODUCTSMaterialsFor best results, use the following productsor products of equivalent quality:

SpecificationName

Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)

Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &Canada)

Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)

WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate withBitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)

WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-A/B/D/F (Canada)

Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)

Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)

ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)

Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)

CLEANING THE EXTERIORWash your vehicle regularly with cool orlukewarm water and a neutral pHshampoo, we recommend MotorcraftDetail Wash.

• Never use strong household detergentsor soap, for example dish washing orlaundry liquid. These products candiscolor and spot painted surfaces.

• Never wash your vehicle when it is hotto the touch, or during strong or directsunlight.

306


Vehicle Care

• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or softterry cloth towel to eliminate waterspotting.

• Immediately remove fuel spillages, birddroppings, insect deposits and road tar.These may cause damage to yourvehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.We recommend Motorcraft Bug andTar Remover.

• Remove any exterior accessories, forexample antennas, before entering acar wash.

• When filling with AdBlue®, remove anyresidue on painted surfacesimmediately.

Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellentscan damage painted surfaces. If thesesubstances come in contact with yourvehicle, wash the affected area as soon aspossible.

Cleaning the HeadlampsNote: Do not scrape the headlamp lensesor use abrasives, alcoholic solvents orchemical solvents to clean them.Note: Do not wipe the headlamps whenthey are dry.

Exterior Chrome Parts• Apply a high quality-cleaning product

to bumpers and other chrome parts.Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.We recommend Motorcraft CustomBright Metal Cleaner.

• Do not apply the cleaning product tohot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaningproduct on chrome surfaces longerthan the time recommended.

• Using non-recommended cleaners canresult in severe and permanentcosmetic damage.

Note: Never use abrasive materials, forexample steel wool or plastic pads as theycan scratch the chrome surface.

Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metalcleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.

Exterior Plastic PartsFor routine cleaning we recommendMotorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or greasespots are present, we recommendMotorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.

Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)

Hand washing your vehicle is preferredhowever, pressure washing may be usedunder the following conditions:• Do not use water pressure higher than

2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).• Do not use water hotter than 179°F

(82°C).• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray

angle pattern.• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)

distance and 90° angle to yourvehicle's surface.

Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzleat an angle to the vehicle's surface maydamage graphics and cause the edges topeel away from the vehicle's surface.

UnderbodyRegularly clean the underside of yourvehicle using water. Keep body and doordrain holes free of debris or foreignmaterial.

Under HoodFor removing black rubber marks fromunder the hood we recommend MotorcraftWheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bugand Tar Remover.

307


Vehicle Care

WAXINGRegular waxing is necessary to protect yourcar's paint from the elements. Werecommend that you wash and wax thepainted surface once or twice a year.When washing and waxing, park yourvehicle in a shaded area out of directsunlight. Always wash your vehicle beforeapplying wax.• Use a quality wax that does not contain

abrasives.• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions

to apply and remove the wax.• Apply a small amount of wax in a

back-and-forth motion, not in circles.• Do not allow wax to come in contact

with any non-body (low-gloss black)colored trim. The wax will discolor orstain the parts over time.• Roof racks.• Bumpers.• Grained door handles.• Side moldings.• Mirror housings.• Windshield cowl area.

• Do not apply wax to glass areas.• After waxing, your car's paint should

feel smooth, and be free of streaks andsmudges.

CLEANING THE ENGINEEngines are more efficient when they areclean because grease and dirt buildup keepthe engine warmer than normal.

When washing:• Take care when using a power washer

to clean the engine. The high-pressurefluid could penetrate the sealed partsand cause damage.

• Do not spray a hot engine with coldwater to avoid cracking the engineblock or other engine components.

• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo andDegreaser on all parts that requirecleaning and pressure rinse clean. InCanada, use Motorcraft EngineShampoo.

• Never wash or rinse the engine while itis hot or running; water in the runningengine may cause internal damage.

• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,spark plug wire or spark plug well, orthe area in and around these locations.

• Cover the battery, power distributionbox, and air filter assembly to preventwater damage when cleaning theengine.

CLEANING THE WINDOWS ANDWIPER BLADESCar wash chemicals and environmentalfallout can result in windshield and wiperblade contamination. Dirty windshield andwipers will result in poor windshield wiperoperation. Keep the windshield and wiperblades clean to maintain windshield wiperperformance.

308


Vehicle Care

To clean the windshield and wiper blades:• Clean the windshield with a

non-abrasive glass cleaner. Whencleaning the interior of the windshield,avoid getting any glass cleaner on theinstrument panel or door panels. Wipeany glass cleaner off these surfacesimmediately.

• For windshields contaminated withtree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, cleanthe entire windshield using steel wool(no greater than 0000 grade) in acircular motion and rinse with water.

• Clean the wiper blades with isopropylrubbing alcohol or windshield washerconcentrate.

Note: Do not use razor blades or othersharp objects to clean or remove decalsfrom the inside of the heated rear window.The vehicle warranty does not coverdamage caused to the heated rear windowgrid lines.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

WARNING: Do not use cleaningsolvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle'sseatbelts, as these actions may weakenthe belt webbing.

WARNING: On vehicles equippedwith seat-mounted airbags, do not usechemical solvents or strong detergents.Such products could contaminate theside airbag system and affectperformance of the side airbag in a crash.

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seatsequipped with side airbags:• Remove dust and loose dirt with a

vacuum cleaner.• Remove light stains and soil with

Motorcraft Professional StrengthCarpet & Upholstery Cleaner.

• If grease or tar is present on thematerial, spot-clean the area first withMotorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. InCanada, use Motorcraft Multi-PurposeCleaner.

• If a ring forms on the fabric after spotcleaning, clean the entire areaimmediately (but do not oversaturate)or the ring will set.

• Do not use household cleaningproducts or glass cleaners, which canstain and discolor the fabric and affectthe flame retardant abilities of the seatmaterials.

MirrorsDo not clean the housing or glass of anymirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum or ammonia-based cleaningproducts.

CLEANING THE INSTRUMENTPANEL AND INSTRUMENTCLUSTER LENS

WARNING: Do not use chemicalsolvents or strong detergents whencleaning the steering wheel orinstrument panel to avoid contaminationof the airbag system.

Note: Follow the same procedure ascleaning leather seats for cleaning leatherinstrument panels and leather interior trimsurfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats(page 310).

309


Vehicle Care

Clean the instrument panel and clusterlens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to drythese areas.• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase

the gloss of the upper portion of theinstrument panel. The dull finish in thisarea helps protect you fromundesirable windshield reflection.

• Do not use any household cleaningproducts or glass cleaners as thesemay damage the finish of theinstrument panel, interior trim andcluster lens.

• Wash or wipe your hands clean if youhave been in contact with certainproducts such as insect repellent andsuntan lotion to avoid possible damageto the interior painted surfaces.

• Do not allow air fresheners and handsanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.Your warranty may not cover thesedamages.

If a staining liquid like coffee or juice hasbeen spilled on the instrument panel or oninterior trim surfaces:1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,

soft cloth as quickly as possible.2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and

Vinyl Cleaner or a commerciallyavailable leather cleaning product forautomotive interiors. Test any cleaneror stain remover on an inconspicuousarea.

3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with aclean, soft cloth and a mild soap andwater solution. Dry the area with aclean, soft cloth.

4. If necessary, apply more soap andwater solution or cleaning product toa clean, soft cloth and press it onto thesoiled area. Allow this to set at roomtemperature for 30 minutes.

5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with aclean, damp cloth, use a rubbingmotion for 60 seconds on the soiledarea.

6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF

EQUIPPED)

Note: Follow the same procedure ascleaning leather seats for cleaning leatherinstrument panels and leather interior trimsurfaces.For routine cleaning, wipe the surface witha soft, damp cloth and a mild soap andwater solution. Dry the area with a clean,soft cloth.For cleaning and removing stains such asdye transfer, use Motorcraft PremiumLeather and Vinyl Cleaner or acommercially available leather cleaningproduct for automotive interiors.Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover onan inconspicuous area.You should:• Remove dust and loose dirt with a

vacuum cleaner.• Clean and treat spills and stains as

soon as possible.Do not use the following products as thesemay damage the leather:• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based

leather conditioners.• Household cleaners.• Alcohol solutions.• Solvents or cleaners intended

specifically for rubber, vinyl andplastics.

310


Vehicle Care

REPAIRING MINOR PAINTDAMAGEAuthorized dealers have touch-up paint tomatch your vehicle’s color. Your vehiclecolor code is printed on a sticker on thefront, left-hand side door jamb. Take yourcolor code to your authorized dealer tomake sure you get the correct color.Before repairing minor paint damage, usea cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and TarRemover to remove particles such as birddroppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tarspots, road salt and industrial fallout.Always read the instructions before usingcleaning products.

CLEANING THE WHEELS1. Regularly clean them with a wheel

cleaner. We recommend that you useFord approved wheel cleaner ifavailable.

2. Remove dirt and brake dust with asponge.

3. Remove tar and grease with a bug andtar remover. We recommend that youuse Ford approved bug and tar removerif available.

4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with waterafter cleaning.

If you intend on parking your vehicle for anextended period after cleaning the wheelswith a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle fora few minutes before doing so. Thisreduces the risk of corrosion of the brakediscs, brake pads and linings.Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.Note: Some car washes could damagewheel rims and covers.

Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,harsh cleaning products, chrome wheelcleaners or abrasive materials coulddamage wheel rims and covers.

VEHICLE STORAGEIf you plan on storing your vehicle for 30days or more, read the followingmaintenance recommendations to makesure your vehicle stays in good operatingcondition.We engineer and test all motor vehiclesand their components for reliable, regulardriving. Under various conditions,long-term storage may lead to degradedengine performance or failure unless youuse specific precautions to preserve enginecomponents.

General• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated

place.• Protect from sunlight, if possible.• If vehicles are stored outside, they

require regular maintenance to protectagainst rust and damage.

Body• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to

remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud fromexterior surfaces, rear-wheel housingand the underside of front fenders.

• Periodically wash your vehicle if it isstored in exposed locations.

• Touch-up exposed or primed metal toprevent rust.

• Cover chrome and stainless steel partswith a thick coat of auto wax to preventdiscoloration. Re-wax as necessarywhen you wash your vehicle.

• Lubricate all hood, door and luggagecompartment hinges and latches witha light grade oil.

311


Vehicle Care

• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and

solvents.

Engine• Change the engine oil and filter prior to

storage because used engine oilcontains contaminates which maycause engine damage.

• Start the engine every 15 days for aminimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idlewith the climate controls set to defrostuntil the engine reaches normaloperating temperature.

• With your foot on the brake, shiftthrough all the gears while the engineis running.

• We recommend that you change theengine oil before you use your vehicleagain.

Fuel system• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel

until the first automatic shutoff of thefuel pump nozzle.

Cooling system• Protect against freezing temperatures.• When removing your vehicle from

storage, check coolant fluid level.Confirm that there are no coolingsystem leaks and that fluid is at therecommended level.

Battery• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep

connections clean.• If storing your vehicle for more than 30

days without recharging the battery,we recommend that you disconnectthe battery cables to maintain batterycharge for quick starting.

Note: It is necessary to reset memoryfeatures if battery cables are disconnected.

Brakes• Make sure the brakes and parking brake

release fully.

Tires• Maintain recommended air pressure.

Miscellaneous• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers

and pins under your vehicle are coveredwith grease to prevent rust.

• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)every 15 days to lubricate working partsand prevent corrosion.

Removing Vehicle From StorageWhen your vehicle is ready to come out ofstorage, do the following:• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt

or grease film build-up on windowsurfaces.

• Check windshield wipers for anydeterioration.

• Check under the hood for any foreignmaterial that may have collectedduring storage such as mice or squirrelnests.

• Check the exhaust for any foreignmaterial that may have collectedduring storage.

• Check tire pressures and set tireinflation per the Tire Label.

• Check brake pedal operation. Driveyour vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back andforth to remove rust build-up.

312


Vehicle Care

• Check fluid levels (including coolant,oil and gas) to make sure there are noleaks, and fluids are at recommendedlevels.

• If you remove the battery, clean thebattery cable ends and check fordamage.

Contact an authorized dealer if you haveany concerns or issues.

313


Vehicle Care

GENERAL INFORMATIONUse only approved wheel and tire sizes,using other sizes could damage yourvehicle. If you change the diameter of thetires from that fitted at the factory, thespeedometer may not display the correctspeed. If you intend to change the size ofthe wheels from that fitted by themanufacturer, you can check the suitabilitywith an authorized dealer.Additional information related to thefunctionality and maintenance of your tirescan be found later in this chapter. See TireCare (page 316).You can find the recommended tireinflation pressures can on the Tire Label,which is on the B-pillar or the edge of thedriver door. You can also find thisinformation on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label, affixed to either thedoor hinge pillar, door-latch post, or thedoor edge that meets the door latch post;next to the driver seating position.We strongly recommend maintaining thesetire pressures at all times. Failure to followthe tire pressure recommendations cancause uneven treadwear patterns, reducedfuel economy, and adversely affect theway your vehicle handles.Note: Check and set the tire pressure at theambient temperature in which you areintending to drive your vehicle and when thetires are cold.Note: Check your tire pressures at leastonce per month.If your vehicle has a spare tire, set thepressure to the highest value given for yourvehicle and tire size combination.

Notice to utility vehicle and truckowners

WARNING: Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate thanother types of vehicles.

WARNING: Vehicles with a highercenter of gravity (utility and four-wheeldrive vehicles) handle differently thanvehicles with a lower center of gravity(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,excessive speed and abrupt steering inthese vehicles. Failure to drive cautiouslyincreases the risk of losing control of yourvehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injuryand death.

WARNING: In a rollover crash, anunbelted person is significantly morelikely to die than a person wearing aseatbelt.

WARNING: Do not becomeoverconfident in the ability of four-wheeldrive vehicles. Although a four-wheeldrive vehicle may accelerate better thana two-wheel drive vehicle in low tractionsituations, it won't stop any faster thantwo-wheel drive vehicles. Always driveat a safe speed.

Utility vehicles and trucks handledifferently than passenger cars in thevarious driving conditions that areencountered on streets, highways andoff-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are notdesigned for cornering at speeds as highas passenger cars any more than low-slungsports cars are designed to performsatisfactorily under off-road conditions.

314


Wheels and Tires

Study your owner's manual and anysupplements for specific information aboutequipment features, instructions for safedriving and additional precautions toreduce the risk of an accident or seriousinjury.

Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)

WARNING: Do not becomeoverconfident in the ability of four-wheeldrive vehicles. Although a four-wheeldrive vehicle may accelerate better thana two-wheel drive vehicle in low tractionsituations, it won't stop any faster thantwo-wheel drive vehicles. Always driveat a safe speed.

A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive,when selected, has the ability to use allfour wheels to power itself. This increasestraction which may enable you to safelydrive over terrain and road conditions thata conventional two-wheel drive vehiclecannot.Power is supplied to all four wheelsthrough a transfer case or power transferunit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow youto select different modes as necessary. Forinformation on transfer case operation andshifting procedures, See Four-WheelDrive (page 188). For information ontransfer case maintenance, SeeMaintenance (page 282). You shouldbecome thoroughly familiar with thisinformation before you operate yourvehicle.On some four-wheel drive vehicles, theinitial shift from two-wheel to four-wheeldrive when the vehicle is moving can causea momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.These sounds are normal and are notcause for concern.

In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of thespare tire relative to the remaining tires canhave an effect on the 4x4 system. If thereis a significant difference between the sizeof a spare and the remaining tires,four-wheel drive functionality may belimited. See Principle of Operation (page188).

How your vehicle differs fromother vehiclesSport utility vehicles and trucks can differfrom some other vehicles in a fewnoticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:• Higher - to allow higher load carrying

capacity and to allow it to travel overrough terrain without getting hung upor damaging underbody components.

• Shorter - to give it the capability toapproach inclines and drive over thecrest of a hill without getting hung upor damaging underbody components.All other things held equal, a shorterwheelbase may make your vehiclequicker to respond to steering inputsthan a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.

• Narrower - to provide greatermaneuverability in tight spaces,particularly in off-road use.

As a result of the above dimensionaldifferences, Sport utility vehicles andtrucks often have a higher center of gravityand a greater difference in center of gravitybetween the loaded and unloadedcondition. These differences that makeyour vehicle so versatile also make ithandle differently than an ordinarypassenger car.

315


Wheels and Tires

TIRE CARE

Information About UniformTire Quality Grading

E142542

Tire Quality Grades apply to newpneumatic passenger car tires.The Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample: Treadwear 200Traction AA Temperature A.These Tire Quality Grades aredetermined by standards that theUnited States Department ofTransportation has set.Tire Quality Grades apply to newpneumatic passenger car tires.They do not apply to deep tread,winter-type snow tires,space-saver or temporary usespare tires, light truck or LT typetires, tires with nominal rimdiameters of 10 to 12 inches orlimited production tires as definedin Title 49 Code of FederalRegulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).

U.S. Department ofTransportation Tire qualitygrades: The U.S. Department ofTransportation requires FordMotor Company to give you thefollowing information about tiregrades exactly as the governmenthas written it.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150would wear 1½ times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of theiruse, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction AA A B C

WARNING: The tractiongrade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning or peak tractioncharacteristics.

316


Wheels and Tires

The traction grades, from highestto lowest are AA, A, B, and C. Thegrades represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlledconditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Temperature A B C

WARNING: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B and C,representing the tire’s resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level ofperformance which all passengercar tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 139. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

Glossary of Tire Terminology*Tire label: A label showing theoriginal equipment tire sizes,recommended inflation pressureand the maximum weight thevehicle can carry.*Tire Identification Number(TIN): A number on the sidewallof each tire providing informationabout the tire brand andmanufacturing plant, tire size anddate of manufacture. Also referredto as DOT code.*Inflation pressure: A measureof the amount of air in a tire.*Standard load: A class ofP-metric or Metric tires designedto carry a maximum load at setpressure. For example: ForP-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) andfor Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).Increasing the inflation pressurebeyond this pressure will notincrease the tire’s load carryingcapability.*Extra load: A class of P-metricor Metric tires designed to carry aheavier maximum load at 42 psi(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflationpressure beyond this pressure willnot increase the tire’s loadcarrying capability.

317


Wheels and Tires

*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit ofair pressure.*PSI: Pounds per square inch, astandard unit of air pressure.*Cold tire pressure: The tirepressure when the vehicle hasbeen stationary and out of directsunlight for an hour or more andprior to the vehicle being driven for1 mi (1.6 km).*Recommended inflationpressure: The cold inflationpressure found on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label(affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label located onthe B-Pillar or the edge of thedriver door.* B-pillar: The structural memberat the side of the vehicle behindthe front door.*Bead area of the tire: Area ofthe tire next to the rim.* Sidewall of the tire: Areabetween the bead area and thetread.*Tread area of the tire: Area ofthe perimeter of the tire thatcontacts the road when mountedon the vehicle.*Rim: The metal support (wheel)for a tire or a tire and tubeassembly upon which the tirebeads are seated.

Information Contained on theTire SidewallBoth United States and CanadaFederal regulations require tiremanufacturers to placestandardized information on thesidewall of all tires. Thisinformation identifies anddescribes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and alsoprovides a U.S. DOT TireIdentification Number for safetystandard certification and in caseof a recall.

Information on P Type Tires

H

I

J

KL

M

A

BC D E

FG

E142543

P215/65R15 95H is an example ofa tire size, load index and speedrating. The definitions of theseitems are listed below. (Note thatthe tire size, load index and speedrating for your vehicle may bedifferent from this example.)

318


Wheels and Tires

A. P: Indicates a tire, designatedby the Tire and Rim Association,that may be used for service oncars, sport utility vehicles,minivans and light trucks. Note: Ifyour tire size does not begin witha letter this may mean it isdesignated by either the EuropeanTire and Rim TechnicalOrganization or the Japan TireManufacturing Association.B. 215: Indicates the nominalwidth of the tire in millimetersfrom sidewall edge to sidewalledge. In general, the larger thenumber, the wider the tire.C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratiowhich gives the tire's ratio ofheight to width.D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rimdiameter in inches. If you changeyour wheel size, you will have topurchase new tires to match thenew wheel diameter.F. 95: Indicates the tire's loadindex. It is an index that relates tohow much weight a tire can carry.You may find this information inyour owner’s manual. If not,contact a local tire dealer.Note: You may not find thisinformation on all tires because itis not required by federal law.

G. H: Indicates the tire's speedrating. The speed rating denotesthe speed at which a tire isdesigned to be driven for extendedperiods of time under a standardcondition of load and inflationpressure. The tires on your vehiclemay operate at differentconditions for load and inflationpressure. These speed ratings mayneed to be adjusted for thedifference in conditions. Theratings range from 81 mph(130 km/h) to 186 mph(299 km/h). These ratings arelisted in the following chart.Note: You may not find thisinformation on all tires because itis not required by federal law.

Speed ratingLetterrating

81 mph (130 km/h)M87 mph (140 km/h)N99 mph (159 km/h)Q106 mph (171 km/h)R112 mph (180 km/h)S118 mph (190 km/h)T124 mph (200 km/h)U130 mph (210 km/h)H149 mph (240 km/h)V

319


Wheels and Tires

Speed ratingLetterrating

168 mph (270 km/h)W186 mph (299 km/h)Y

Note: For tires with a maximumspeed capability over 149 mph(240 km/h), tire manufacturerssometimes use the letters ZR. Forthose with a maximum speedcapability over 186 mph (299km/h), tire manufacturers alwaysuse the letters ZR.

H. U.S. DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN): This begins withthe letters DOT and indicates thatthe tire meets all federalstandards. The next two numbersor letters are the plant codedesignating where it wasmanufactured, the next two arethe tire size code and the last fournumbers represent the week andyear the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 317 meanthe 31st week of 1997. After 2000,the numbers go to four digits. Forexample, 2501 means the 25thweek of 2001. The numbers inbetween are identification codesused for traceability. Thisinformation is used to contactcustomers if a tire defect requiresa recall.I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, orAT: All Terrain, orAS: All Season.

J. Tire Ply Composition andMaterial Used: Indicates thenumber of plies or the number oflayers of rubber-coated fabric inthe tire tread and sidewall. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe ply materials in the tire and thesidewall, which include steel,nylon, polyester, and others.K. Maximum Load: Indicates themaximum load in kilograms andpounds that can be carried by thetire. See the Safety ComplianceCertification Label (affixed toeither the door hinge pillar,door-latch post, or the door edgethat meets the door-latch post,next to the driver's seatingposition), for the correct tirepressure for your vehicle.L. Treadwear, Traction andTemperature Grades:*Treadwear The treadwear gradeis a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire whentested under controlled conditionson a specified government testcourse. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.

320


Wheels and Tires

*Traction: The traction grades,from highest to lowest are AA, A,B, and C. The grades represent thetire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.*Temperature: The temperaturegrades are A (the highest), B andC, representing the tire'sresistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel.M. Maximum InflationPressure: Indicates the tiremanufacturers' maximumpermissible pressure or thepressure at which the maximumload can be carried by the tire. Thispressure is normally higher thanthe vehicle manufacturer'srecommended cold inflationpressure which can be found onthe Safety ComplianceCertification Label (affixed toeither the door hinge pillar,door-latch post, or the door edgethat meets the door-latch post,next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label which islocated on the B-Pillar or the edgeof the driver’s door. The coldinflation pressure should never beset lower than the recommendedpressure on the vehicle label.

The tire suppliers may haveadditional markings, notes orwarnings such as standard loador radial tubeless.

Additional InformationContained on the Tire Sidewallfor LT Type TiresNote: Tire Quality Grades do notapply to this type of tire.

A

BC

BDE142544

LT type tires have some additionalinformation beyond those of Ptype tires; these differences aredescribed below.A. LT: Indicates a tire, designatedby the Tire and Rim Association,that is intended for service on lighttrucks.B. Load Range and LoadInflation Limits: Indicates thetire's load-carrying capabilitiesand its inflation limits.

321


Wheels and Tires

C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates themaximum load and tire pressurewhen the tire is used as a dual,defined as four tires on the rearaxle (a total of six or more tires onthe vehicle).D. Maximum Load Single lb(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicatesthe maximum load and tirepressure when the tire is used asa single, defined as two tires(total) on the rear axle.

Information on T Type TiresT145/80D16 is an example of atire size.Note: The temporary tire size foryour vehicle may be different fromthis example. Tire Quality Gradesdo not apply to this type of tire.

AB C D

E

E142545

T type tires have some additionalinformation beyond those of Ptype tires; these differences aredescribed below:A. T: Indicates a type of tire,designated by the Tire and RimAssociation, that is intended fortemporary service on cars, sportutility vehicles, minivans and lighttrucks.B. 145: Indicates the nominalwidth of the tire in millimetersfrom sidewall edge to sidewalledge. In general, the larger thenumber, the wider the tire.

322


Wheels and Tires

C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratiowhich gives the tire's ratio ofheight to width. Numbers of 70 orlower indicate a short sidewall.D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.R: Indicates a radial type tire.E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rimdiameter in inches. If you changeyour wheel size, you will have topurchase new tires to match thenew wheel diameter.

Recommended Tire Pressuresand Inflating Your TiresSafe operation of your vehiclerequires that your tires areproperly inflated. Remember thata tire can lose up to half of its airpressure without appearing flat.Every day before you drive, checkyour tires. If one looks lower thanthe others, use a tire gauge tocheck the pressure of all tires andadjust if required.At least once a month and beforelong trips, inspect each tire andcheck the tire pressure with a tiregauge (including spare, ifequipped). Inflate all tires to theinflation pressure recommendedby Ford Motor Company.

WARNING: Under-inflationis the most common cause oftire failures and may result insevere tire cracking, treadseparation or blowout, withunexpected loss of vehicle

control and increased risk ofinjury. Under-inflation increasessidewall flexing and rollingresistance, resulting in heatbuildup and internal damage tothe tire. It also may result inunnecessary tire stress, irregularwear, loss of vehicle control andaccidents. A tire can lose up tohalf of its air pressure and notappear to be flat!

You are strongly urged to buy areliable tire pressure gauge, asautomatic service station gaugesmay be inaccurate. Fordrecommends the use of a digitalor dial-type tire pressure gaugerather than a stick-type tirepressure gauge. Use therecommended cold inflationpressure for optimum tireperformance and wear.Under-inflation or over-inflationmay cause uneven treadwearpatterns.Always inflate your tires to theFord recommended inflationpressure even if it is less than themaximum inflation pressureinformation found on the tire. Youwill find a Tire Label containingthe Ford recommended tireinflation pressure by the tire sizeand other important informationlocated on the B-Pillar or the edgeof the driver’s door.

323


Wheels and Tires

The Ford recommended tireinflation pressure is also found onthe Safety ComplianceCertification Label (affixed toeither the door hinge pillar,door-latch post, or the door edgethat meets the door-latch on theB-pillar, or on the edge of thedriver’s door.Failure to follow the tire pressurerecommendations can causeuneven treadwear patterns andadversely affect the way yourvehicle handles.

Inspecting Your Tires andWheel Valve StemsPeriodically inspect the tire treadsfor uneven or excessive wear andremove objects such as stones,nails or glass that may be wedgedin the tread grooves. Check the tireand valve stems for holes, cracks,or cuts that may permit airleakage and repair or replace thetire and replace the valve stem.Inspect the tire sidewalls forcracking, cuts, bruises and othersigns of damage or excessivewear. If internal damage to the tireis suspected, have the tiredemounted and inspected in caseit needs to be repaired or replaced.For your safety, tires that aredamaged or show signs ofexcessive wear should not be usedbecause they are more likely toblow out or fail.

Improper or inadequate vehiclemaintenance can cause tires towear abnormally. Inspect all yourtires, including the spare,frequently, and replace them ifone or more of the followingconditions exist:

Tire Wear

E142546

When the tread is worn down toone sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),tires must be replaced to helpprevent your vehicle from skiddingand hydroplaning. Built-intreadwear indicators, or wear bars,which look like narrow strips ofsmooth rubber across the treadwill appear on the tire when thetread is worn down to onesixteenth of an inch (2 mm).When the tire tread wears downto the same height as these wearbars, the tire is worn out and mustbe replaced.

324


Wheels and Tires

DamagePeriodically inspect the tire treadsand sidewalls for damage (suchas bulges in the tread or sidewalls,cracks in the tread groove andseparation in the tread orsidewall). If damage is observedor suspected, have the tireinspected by a tire professional.Tires can be damaged duringoff-road use, so inspection afteroff-road use is alsorecommended.

Age

WARNING: Tires degradeover time depending on manyfactors such as weather, storageconditions, and conditions of use(load, speed, inflation pressure)the tires experience throughouttheir lives.In general, tires should bereplaced after six yearsregardless of tread wear.However, heat caused by hotclimates or frequent high loadingconditions can accelerate theaging process and may requiretires to be replaced morefrequently.You should replace your sparetire when you replace the roadtires or after six years due toaging even if it has not beenused.

U.S. DOT Tire IdentificationNumberBoth United States and CanadaFederal regulations require tiremanufacturers to placestandardized information on thesidewall of all tires. Thisinformation identifies anddescribes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and alsoprovides a U.S. DOT TireIdentification Number for safetystandard certification and in caseof a recall.This begins with the letters DOTand indicates that the tire meetsall federal standards. The nexttwo numbers or letters are theplant code designating where itwas manufactured, the next twoare the tire size code and the lastfour numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 317 meanthe 31st week of 1997. After 2000,the numbers go to four digits. Forexample, 2501 means the 25thweek of 2001. The numbers inbetween are identification codesused for traceability. Thisinformation is used to contactcustomers if a tire defect requiresa recall.

Tire ReplacementRequirementsYour vehicle is equipped with tiresdesigned to provide a safe rideand handling capability.

325


Wheels and Tires

WARNING: Only usereplacement tires and wheelsthat are the same size, loadindex, speed rating and type(such as P-metric versusLT-metric or all-season versusall-terrain) as those originallyprovided by Ford. Therecommended tire and wheelsize may be found on either theSafety Compliance CertificationLabel (affixed to either the doorhinge pillar, door-latch post, orthe door edge that meets thedoor-latch post, next to thedriver's seating position), or theTire Label which is located onthe B-Pillar or edge of thedriver's door. If this informationis not found on these labels, thenyou should contact yourauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. Use of any tire or wheelnot recommended by Ford canaffect the safety andperformance of your vehicle,which could result in anincreased risk of loss of vehiclecontrol, vehicle rollover, personalinjury and death.

WARNING: To reduce therisk of serious injury, whenmounting replacement tires andwheels, you should not exceedthe maximum pressure indicatedon the sidewall of the tire to setthe beads without additionalprecautions listed below. If thebeads do not seat at themaximum pressure indicated,re-lubricate and try again.

WARNING: For a mountingpressure more than 20 psi(1.38 bar) greater than themaximum pressure, a Forddealer or other tire serviceprofessional should do themounting.

WARNING: Always inflatesteel carcass tires with a remoteair fill with the person inflatingstanding at a minimum of 12 ft(3.66 m) away from the wheeland tire assembly.

WARNING: When inflatingthe tire for mounting pressuresup to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greaterthan the maximum pressure onthe tire sidewall, the followingprecautions must be taken toprotect the person mounting thetire:

• Make sure that you have thecorrect tire and wheel size.

• Lubricate the tire bead andwheel bead seat area again.

326


Wheels and Tires

• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft(3.66 m) away from the wheeland tire assembly.

• Use both eye and earprotection.

Important: Remember to replacethe wheel valve stems when theroad tires are replaced on yourvehicle.It is recommended that the twofront tires or two rear tiresgenerally be replaced as a pair.The tire pressure sensors mountedin the wheels (originally installedon your vehicle) are not designedto be used in aftermarket wheels.The use of wheels or tires notrecommended by Ford MotorCompany may affect theoperation of your tire pressuremonitoring system.If the tire pressure monitoringsystem indicator is flashing, yoursystem is malfunctioning. Yourreplacement tire might beincompatible with your tirepressure monitoring system, orsome component of the systemmay be damaged.

Safety Practices

WARNING: If your vehicleis stuck in snow, mud or sand, donot rapidly spin the tires;spinning the tires can tear thetire and cause an explosion. Atire can explode in as little asthree to five seconds.

WARNING: Do not spin thewheels at over 34 mph(55 km/h). The tires may fail andinjure a passenger or bystander.

Driving habits have a great dealto do with your tire mileage andsafety.*Observe posted speed limits*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns*Avoid potholes and objects onthe road*Do not run over curbs or hit thetire against a curb when parking

Highway HazardsNo matter how carefully you drive,there is always the possibility thatyou may eventually have a flat tireon the highway. Drive slowly to theclosest safe area out of traffic.This may further damage the flattire, but your safety is moreimportant.

327


Wheels and Tires

If you feel a sudden vibration orride disturbance while driving, oryou suspect your tire or vehiclehas been damaged, immediatelyreduce your speed. Drive withcaution until you can safely pulloff the road. Stop and inspect thetires for damage. If a tire isunder-inflated or damaged,deflate it, remove wheel andreplace it with your spare tire andwheel. If you cannot detect acause, have the vehicle towed tothe nearest repair facility or tiredealer to have the vehicleinspected.

Tire and Wheel AlignmentA bad jolt from hitting a curb orpothole can cause the front endof your vehicle to becomemisaligned or cause damage toyour tires. If your vehicle seems topull to one side when you aredriving, the wheels may be out ofalignment. Have an authorizeddealer check the wheel alignmentperiodically.Wheel misalignment in the frontor the rear can cause uneven andrapid treadwear of your tires andshould be corrected by anauthorized dealer. Front-wheeldrive vehicles and those with anindependent rear suspension (ifequipped) may require alignmentof all four wheels.The tires should also be balancedperiodically. An unbalanced tireand wheel assembly may result inirregular tire wear.

Tire RotationNote: If your tires show unevenwear, ask an authorized dealer tocheck for and correct any wheelmisalignment, tire imbalance ormechanical problem involvedbefore tire rotation.Note: Your vehicle may beequipped with a dissimilar sparewheel and tire assembly. Adissimilar spare wheel and tireassembly is defined as a sparewheel and tire assembly that isdifferent in brand, size orappearance from the road tires andwheels. If you have a dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly, it isintended for temporary use onlyand should not be used in a tirerotation.Note: After having your tiresrotated, inflation pressure must bechecked and adjusted to thevehicle requirements.Rotating your tires at therecommended interval will helpyour tires wear more evenly,providing better tire performanceand longer tire life. Sometimesirregular tire wear can becorrected by rotating the tires. SeeScheduled Maintenance (page495).

328


Wheels and Tires

E142547

USING SUMMER TIRESSummer tires provide superiorperformance on wet and dry roads.Summer tires do not have the Mud andSnow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating onthe tire side wall. Since summer tires donot have the same traction performanceas All-season or Snow tires, we do notrecommend using summer tires whentemperatures drop to approximately 45°F(7°C) or below (depending on tire wearand environmental conditions) or in snowand ice conditions. Like any tire, summertire performance is affected by tire wearand environmental conditions. If you mustdrive in those conditions, we recommendusing Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S),All-season or Snow tires.Always store your summer tires indoors attemperatures above 19°F (-7°C). Therubber compounds used in these tires loseflexibility and may develop surface cracksin the tread area at temperatures below19°F (-7°C). If the tires have beensubjected to 19°F (-7°C) or less, warmthem in a heated space to at least 41°F(5°C) for at least 24 hours before installingthem on a vehicle, or moving the vehiclewith the tires installed, or checking tire

inflation. Do not place tires near heatersor heating devices used to warm the roomwhere the tires are stored. Do not applyheat or blow heated air directly on the tires.Always inspect the tires after storageperiods and before use.

USING SNOW CHAINS

WARNING: Snow tires must bethe same size, load index, and speedrating as those originally provided byFord. Use of any tire or wheel notrecommended by Ford can affect thesafety and performance of your vehicle,which could result in an increased risk ofloss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,personal injury, and death. Additionally,the use of non-recommended tires andwheels could cause steering, suspension,axle, transfer case, or power transfer unitfailure. It is also strongly advised tofollow the Ford recommended tireinflation pressure found on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label (affixedto either the door hinge pillar, door-latchpost, or the door edge that meets thedoor-latch post, next to the driver’sseating position), or Tire Label which islocated on the B-Pillar or the edge of thedriver door. Failure to follow the tirepressure recommendations can causeuneven treadwear patterns andadversely affect the way your vehiclehandles.

The tires on your vehicle (excluding the265/45ZR20 Sport Tire) may haveall-weather treads to provide traction inrain and snow. However, in some climatesyou may need to use snow chains.

329


Wheels and Tires

Your vehicle may not be compatible withsnow chain or cable usage with thefactory-fitted wheels and tires. Onlycertain chains or snow cables have beenapproved by Ford as safe for use on yourvehicle with the following wheel and tirecombination(s): 18”x8”x44mm Wheel andP245/60 R18 Tire. You should only installchains or cables that have been rated as10 mm or less in dimension as measuredon the sidewall of your tire. Not all S-classsnow chains meet these restrictions.Chains of this size restriction will include atensioning device. The chains should bemounted in pairs on the front tires only. Ifyou need to use chains, it is recommendedthat steel wheels (of the same size andspecification) be used, as chains may chipaluminum wheels.Follow these guidelines when using snowtires and traction devices• If possible, avoid fully loading your

vehicle• Purchase chains or cables from a

manufacturer that clearly labels bodyto tire dimension restrictions.

• When driving with tire cables do notexceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or themaximum speed recommended by thechain manufacturer, whichever is less.

• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cablesrub or bang against the vehicle, stopand retighten them. If this does notwork, remove the cables to preventvehicle damage.

• Remove the cables when they are nolonger needed. Do not use cables ondry roads.

• If a temporary spare wheel is mountedon your vehicle, do not use snow chainson the axle with the temporary sparetire.

If you have any questions regarding snowchains or cables, please contact yourauthorized dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM

WARNING: The tire pressuremonitoring system is not a substitute formanually checking tire pressures. Youshould periodically check tire pressuresusing a pressure gauge. Failure tocorrectly maintain tire pressures couldincrease the risk of tire failure, loss ofcontrol, vehicle rollover and personalinjury.

Note: You should only use tire sealants inroadside emergencies as they may causedamage to the tire pressure monitoringsystem sensor.Note: If the tire pressure monitoring systemsensor becomes damaged, it may notfunction.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated

to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires).

As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) thatilluminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflate

330


Wheels and Tires

them to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance, andit is the driver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped witha TPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequencewill continue upon subsequent vehiclestart-ups as long as the malfunction exists.When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be ableto detect or signal low tire pressure asintended. TPMS malfunctions may occurfor a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternatetires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with License exempt RSSStandards of Industry Canada. Operationis subject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Note: Changes or modifications notexpressively approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.The term "IC:" before the radio certificationnumber only signifies that Industry Canadatechnical specifications were met.

Changing Tires With a TirePressure Monitoring System

E142549

Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tirepressure sensor located inside the wheeland tire assembly cavity. The pressuresensor is attached to the valve stem. Thepressure sensor is covered by the tire and isnot visible unless the tire is removed. Takecare when changing the tire to avoiddamaging the sensor.You should always have your tires servicedby an authorized dealer.Check the tire pressure periodically (atleast monthly) using an accurate tiregauge. See When Inflating Your Tires inthis chapter.

331


Wheels and Tires

Understanding Your Tire PressureMonitoring System

E250820

The tire pressure monitoring systemmeasures pressure in your road tires andsends the tire pressure readings to yourvehicle. You can view the tire pressurereadings through the information display.See General Information (page 104). Thelow tire pressure warning light will turn onif the tire pressure is significantly low. Oncethe light is illuminated, your tires areunder-inflated and need to be inflated tothe manufacturer’s recommended tirepressure. Even if the light turns on and ashort time later turns off, your tire pressurestill needs to be checked.

When Your Temporary Spare Tire isInstalledWhen one of your road tires needs to bereplaced with the temporary spare, thesystem will continue to identify an issue toremind you that the damaged road wheeland tire assembly needs to be repaired andput back on your vehicle.To restore the full function of the tirepressure monitoring system, have thedamaged road wheel and tire assemblyrepaired and remounted on your vehicle.

When You Believe Your System is NotOperating ProperlyThe main function of the tire pressuremonitoring system is to warn you whenyour tires need air. It can also warn you inthe event the system is no longer capableof functioning as intended. See thefollowing chart for information concerningyour tire pressure monitoring system:

332


Wheels and Tires

Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressurewarning light

Make sure tires are at the proper pres-sure. See Inflating your tires in thischapter. After inflating your tires to themanufacturer’s recommended pressureas shown on the Tire Label (located onthe edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),the vehicle must be driven for at leasttwo minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)before the light turns off.

Tire(s) under-inflated

Solid warning light Repair the damaged road wheel and tireassembly and reinstall it on the vehicleto restore system function. For adescription on how the system functions,see When Your Temporary Spare Tireis Installed in this section.

Spare tire in use

If the tires are properly inflated and thespare tire is not in use but the lightremains on, contact your authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

TPMS malfunction

Repair the damaged road wheel and tireassembly and reinstall it on the vehicleto restore system function. For adescription on how the system functions,see When Your Temporary Spare Tireis Installed in this section.

Spare tire in use

Flashing warninglight

If the tires are properly inflated and thespare tire is not in use but the lightremains on, contact your authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

TPMS malfunction

When Inflating Your Tires

WARNING: Do not use the tirepressure displayed in the informationdisplay as a tire pressure gauge. Failureto follow this instruction could result inpersonal injury or death.

When putting air into your tires (such as ata gas station or in your garage), the tirepressure monitoring system may notrespond immediately to the air added toyour tires.It may take up to two minutes of drivingover 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turnoff after you have filled your tires to therecommended inflation pressure.

333


Wheels and Tires

How Temperature Affects Your TirePressureThe tire pressure monitoring systemmonitors tire pressure in each pneumatictire. While driving in a normal manner, atypical passenger tire inflation pressuremay increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa)from a cold start situation. If the vehicle isstationary overnight with the outsidetemperature significantly lower than thedaytime temperature, the tire pressure maydecrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. Thislower pressure value may be detected bythe tire pressure monitoring system asbeing significantly lower than therecommended inflation pressure andactivate the system warning light for lowtire pressure. If the low tire pressurewarning light is on, visually check each tireto verify that no tire is flat. If one or moretires are flat, repair as necessary. Checkthe air pressure in the road tires. If any tireis under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicleto the nearest location where air can beadded to the tires. Inflate all the tires tothe recommended inflation pressure.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL

WARNING: If the tire pressuremonitor sensor becomes damaged itmay not function.

Note: You should only use tire sealants inroadside emergencies as they may causedamage to the tire pressure monitoringsystem sensor.Note: The tire pressure monitoring systemindicator light illuminates when the sparetire is in use. To restore the full function ofthe monitoring system, all road wheelsequipped with tire pressure monitoringsensors must be mounted on the vehicle.

If you get a flat tire when driving, do notheavily apply the brake. Instead, graduallydecrease your speed. Hold the steeringwheel firmly and slowly move to a safeplace on the side of the road.Have a flat serviced by an authorizeddealer in order to prevent damage to thetire pressure monitoring system sensors.See Tire Pressure Monitoring System(page 330). Replace the spare tire with aroad tire as soon as possible. Duringrepairing or replacing of the flat tire, havethe authorized dealer inspect the tirepressure monitoring system sensor fordamage.

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and TireAssembly Information

WARNING: Failure to follow theseguidelines could result in an increasedrisk of loss of vehicle control, injury ordeath.

If you have a dissimilar spare wheel andtire, then it is intended for temporary useonly. This means that if you need to use it,you should replace it as soon as possiblewith a road wheel and tire assembly thatis the same size and type as the road tiresand wheels that were originally providedby Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheelis damaged, it should be replaced ratherthan repaired.A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assemblyis defined as a spare wheel and tireassembly that is different in brand, size orappearance from the road tires and wheelsand can be one of three types:1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tirebegins with the letter T for tire size andmay have Temporary Use Only molded inthe sidewall.

334


Wheels and Tires

2. Full-size dissimilar spare with labelon wheel: This spare tire has a label onthe wheel that states: THIS WHEEL ANDTIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USEONLY.When driving with one of the dissimilarspare tires listed above, do not:• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).• Load the vehicle beyond maximum

vehicle load rating listed on the SafetyCompliance Label.

• Tow a trailer.• Use snow chains on the end of the

vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire

at a time.• Use commercial car washing

equipment.• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.Use of one of the dissimilar spare tireslisted above at any one wheel location canlead to impairment of the following:• Handling, stability and braking

performance.• Comfort and noise.• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.• Winter weather driving capability.• Wet weather driving capability.• All-wheel driving capability.3. Full-size dissimilar spare withoutlabel on wheelWhen driving with the full-size dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly, do not:• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).• Use more than one dissimilar spare

wheel and tire assembly at a time.• Use commercial car washing

equipment.• Use snow chains on the end of the

vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheeland tire assembly.

The usage of a full-size dissimilar sparewheel and tire assembly can lead toimpairment of the following:• Handling, stability and braking

performance.• Comfort and noise.• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.• Winter weather driving capability.• Wet weather driving capability.• All-wheel driving capability.When driving with the full-size dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly additionalcaution should be given to:• Towing a trailer.• Driving vehicles equipped with a

camper body.• Driving vehicles with a load on the

cargo rack.Drive cautiously when using a full-sizedissimilar spare wheel and tire assemblyand seek service as soon as possible.

Tire Change Procedure

WARNING: When one of the frontwheels is off the ground, thetransmission alone will not prevent thevehicle from moving or slipping off thejack, even if the transmission is in park(P).

WARNING: To help prevent yourvehicle from moving when changing awheel, shift the transmission into park(P), set the parking brake and use anappropriate block or wheel chock tosecure the wheel diagonally opposite tothe wheel being changed. For example,when changing the front left wheel,place an appropriate block or wheelchock on the right rear wheel.

335


Wheels and Tires

WARNING: Do not work on yourvehicle when the jack is the only support.If the vehicle slips off the jack, you orsomeone else could be seriously injured.

WARNING: Do not attempt tochange a tire on the side of the vehicleclose to moving traffic. Pull far enoughoff the road to avoid the danger of beinghit when operating the jack or changingthe wheel.

WARNING: Always use the jackprovided as original equipment with yourvehicle. If using a jack other than the oneprovided, make sure the jack capacity isadequate for the vehicle weight,including any vehicle cargo ormodifications. If you are unsure if the jackcapacity is adequate, contact theauthorized dealer.

Note: Passengers should not remain in yourvehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.Note: Jack at the specified locations toavoid damage to the vehicle.1. Park on a level surface, set the parking

brake and activate the hazard flashers.2. Place the transmission in park (P) and

turn the engine off.

E142551

3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.

E194295

4. Turn the two knobs on the floor fillercounterclockwise, then remove thefloor filler and carpeted floor panellocated in the rear of the vehicle.

E226763

5. Remove the wing nut securing thespare tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

6. Remove the spare tire from the sparetire well.

7. Remove the wing nut bolt that securesthe jack kit by turning itcounterclockwise.

8. Remove the jack kit, which includes thejack, lug wrench, L-shaped bolt andtow recovery hook.

336


Wheels and Tires

9. Turn the lead screw, where the lugwrench attaches, of the jack by handto release the lug wrench from the jack.Press the button on the wrench toextend the handle. Fold down thewrench socket.

10. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-halfturn counterclockwise, but do notremove them until the wheel is offthe ground.

E145908

11. The vehicle jacking points are shownhere, and are depicted on the warninglabel on the jack.

12. Small arrow-shaped marks on thesills show the location of the jackingpoints.

E201156

13. Raise the wheel by turning the jackhandle clockwise.

14. Remove the lug nuts with the lugwrench.

15. Replace the flat tire with the sparetire, marking sure the valve stem isfacing outward. Reinstall the lug nutsuntil the wheel is snug against thehub. Do not fully tighten the lug nutsuntil the wheel has been lowered.

16. Lower the wheel by turning the jackhandle counterclockwise.

1

2

3 4

5

E75442

17. Remove the jack and fully tighten thelug nuts in the order shown. SeeTechnical Specifications (page338).

Stowing the flat tire1. Stand the flat tire vertically in the

mini-spare tub with the tire's valvestem facing rearward toward theluggage compartment.

337


Wheels and Tires

E194296

2. Fasten the flat tire to the luggagecompartment back panel by insertingthe L-shaped bolt through one of thelug bolt holes in the wheel.

3. Turn the L-shaped bolt clockwise intothe threaded hole in the luggagecompartment back panel until the tireis secured.

4. Unblock the diagonally opposite wheel.

Stowing the jack

E194297

With the road wheel in the vertical positionin the spare tire tub, the jack assemblydoes not fit in its standard position. Securethe jack in the alternate position byinserting the wing bolt through the jack asshown.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications

WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreignmaterials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheelhub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fastenersthat attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces ofthe wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheelmounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off whileyour vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.

Ib-ft (Nm)*Bolt size

100 (135)1/2-20 x 1.5*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Fordrecommended replacement fasteners.Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after anywheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).

338


Wheels and Tires

E145950

Wheel pilot boreAInspect the wheel pilot bore andmounting surface prior to installation.Remove any visible corrosion or looseparticles.

339


Wheels and Tires

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™

2.3L EcoBoostEngine

138Cubic inches

Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel

1-3-4-2Firing order

Coil on plugIgnition system

0.027 - 0.031 in (0.70 - 0.80 mm)Spark plug gap

10:1Compression ratio

Drivebelt Routing2.3L EcoBoost Engine

E161383

A

B

Long drivebelt is on first pulleygroove closest to engine.

A.

Short drivebelt is on secondpulley groove farthest fromengine.

B.

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC

340



3.5L V6Engine

214Cubic inches


1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order


0.049 - 0.053 in (1.25 mm - 1.35 mm)Spark plug gap

10.8:1Compression ratio

Drivebelt Routing3.5L Engine

E191904

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™

3.5L EcoBoostEngine

214Cubic inches


1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order


0.033 - 0.037 in (0.75 mm - 0.85 mm)Spark plug gap

10.0:1Compression ratio

341



Drivebelt Routing 3.5L EcoBoost Engine

E191904

MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™

Part NumberComponent

FA-1884Air filter element

FL-910-SOil filter

BXT-59BatteryBXT-65-650*

SP-537Spark plugs

FP-68Cabin air filter

WW-2600 (driver side)Windshield wiper bladeWW-2206 (passenger side)

WW-1106Rear window wiper blade*This Motorcraft part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access.We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or atfordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford MotorCompany’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts mayimpact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for anydamage related to use of other parts.If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performancespecification SAE/USCAR-36.For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at theappropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 495).

342



MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L DURATEC



FL-500-SOil filter


SP-520Spark plugs




343



MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™



FL-500-SOil filter


SP-534Spark plugs




344



VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBERThe vehicle identification number islocated on the left-hand side of theinstrument panel.

E142476

Please note that in the graphic, XXXX isrepresentative of your vehicle identificationnumber.The Vehicle Identification Number containsthe following information:

E142477

World manufacturer identifierABrake system, Gross VehicleWeight Rating, Restraint Devicesand their locations

B

Make, vehicle line, series, bodytype

C

Engine typeDCheck digitEModel yearFAssembly plantGProduction sequence numberH

345



VEHICLE CERTIFICATIONLABEL

E167469

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration Regulations require that aSafety Compliance Certification Label beaffixed to a vehicle and prescribe wherethe Safety Compliance Certification Labelmay be located. The Safety ComplianceCertification Label shall be affixed to eitherthe door hinge pillar, the door latch post,or the edge of the door near the door latch,next to the driver's seating position.

TRANSMISSION CODEDESIGNATION

E167814

The transmission code is on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label. Thefollowing table shows the transmissioncode along with the transmissiondescription.

CodeDescription

6Six-speed automatic transmission 6F35

CSix-speed automatic transmission 6F55

JSix-speed automatic transmission 6F50

346



CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™

Capacities

WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant underhigh pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerantsystem. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.

CapacityItem

5.7 qt (5.4 L)Engine oil (with oil filter)

12.0 qt (11.31 L)Engine coolant (without oil cooler)

12.2 qt (11.52 L)Engine coolant (with oil cooler)

Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid

2.11 pt (1.0 L)Rear axle fluid (four-wheel drive)

9.0 qt (8.5 L) 1Automatic transmission fluid

23.7 fl oz (700 ml)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive)

Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid

18.6 gal (70.4 L)Fuel tank

2.80 lb (1.27 kg)A/C refrigerant

7.3 fl oz (215 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

347



SpecificationsMaterials

SpecificationName

WSS-M2C946-B1Motor oil (U.S.):XO-5W30-QSPMotorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend MotorOil

WSS-M2C946-B1Motor oil (Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor OilCXO-5W30-LSP12

WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S.):Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/CoolantVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/CoolantCVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High PerformanceMotor Vehicle Brake FluidPM-20

WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S.):Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle LubricantXY-80W90-QL

WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle LubricantCXY-80W90-1L

WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S.):MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid

XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid

CXT-10-LV12

WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive) (U.S.):Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle LubricantXY-75W140-QL

WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive)(Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant

348



SpecificationName

CXY-75W140-1L

WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S.):Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentratewith BitterantZC-32-B2

WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer FluidCXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):Motorcraft® R-134a RefrigerantYN-19

WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):R-134a RefrigerantCYN-19-R

WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor OilYN-12-D

ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brakepedal shift grease:Premium Long-Life GreaseXG-1-E1

ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease SprayXL-5-A

-Lock cylinders (U.S.):Penetrating and Lock LubricantXL-1

-Lock cylinders (Canada):Penetrating FluidCXC-51-A

If you use oil and fluids that do not meetthe defined specification and viscositygrade, this may lead to:• Component damage not covered by

the vehicle warranty.• Longer engine cranking periods.• Increased emission levels.

• Reduced engine performance.• Reduced fuel economy.• Degraded brake performance.

349



We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil foryour vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is notavailable, use motor oils of therecommended viscosity grade that meetAPI SN requirements and display the APICertification Mark for gasoline engines.

E142732

An oil that displays this symbol conformsto current engine, emission system andfuel economy performance standards ofILSAC.Do not use supplemental engine oiladditives because they are unnecessaryand could lead to engine damage notcovered by your vehicle warranty.

Note: We recommend using DOT 4 LowViscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluidor equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Useof any fluid other than the recommendedfluid may cause degraded brakeperformance and not meet our performancestandards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.Contamination with dirt, water, petroleumproducts or other materials may result inbrake system damage and possible failure.Note: Automatic transmissions that requireMERCON® LV transmission fluid shouldonly use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.The use of any other fluid may causetransmission damage.

Alternative Engine Oil forExtremely Cold ClimatesTo improve engine cold start performance,we recommend that you use the followingalternative engine oil in extremely coldclimates, where the ambient temperaturereaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.

SpecificationName

WSS-M2C953-A1Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 PremiumSynthetic Blend Motor Oil:Engine oil - SAE 0W-30XO-0W30-QSP

350



E240523

CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC

Capacities


CapacityItem






10.9 qt (10.3 L) 1Automatic transmission fluid (6F50)

11.6 qt (11 L) 1Automatic transmission fluid (6F55)

17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive)


351



CapacityItem


2.56 lb (1.16 kg)A/C refrigerant (front wheel drive)

2.38 lb (1.08 kg)A/C refrigerant (four-wheel drive)

6.6 fl oz (195 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil (front wheeldrive)

7.3 fl oz (216 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil (four-wheeldrive)

1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.


SpecificationName

WSS-M2C945-B1Motor oil (U.S.):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend MotorOilXO-5W20-QSP


WSS-M2C945-B1Motor oil (Mexico):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor OilMXO-5W20-QSP

WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/CoolantVC-3DIL-B



WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle LubricantXY-80W90-QL

352



SpecificationName


WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid

XT-10-QLVC


CXT-10-LV12

WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive) (U.S.and Mexico):Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle LubricantXY-75W140-QL

WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive)(Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle LubricantCXY-75W140-1L

WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentratewith BitterantZC-32-B2




WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):Motorcraft® R-134a RefrigerantMYN-19


ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brakepedal shift grease:

353



SpecificationName

Premium Long-Life GreaseXG-1-E1




-Lock cylinders (Mexico):Penetrating and Lock LubricantMXL-1


the vehicle warranty.• Longer engine cranking periods.• Increased emission levels.• Reduced engine performance.• Reduced fuel economy.• Degraded brake performance.We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil foryour vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is notavailable, use motor oils of therecommended viscosity grade that meetAPI SN requirements and display the APICertification Mark for gasoline engines.

E142732

An oil that displays this symbol conformsto current engine, emission system andfuel economy performance standards ofILSAC.Do not use supplemental engine oiladditives because they are unnecessaryand could lead to engine damage notcovered by your vehicle warranty.

354



Note: We recommend using DOT 4 LowViscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluidor equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Useof any fluid other than the recommendedfluid may cause degraded brakeperformance and not meet our performancestandards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.Contamination with dirt, water, petroleumproducts or other materials may result inbrake system damage and possible failure.

Note: Automatic transmissions that requireMERCON® LV transmission fluid shouldonly use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.The use of any other fluid may causetransmission damage.


SpecificationName

WSS-M2C947-B1Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 PremiumSynthetic Blend Motor Oil:Engine oil - SAE 0W-20XO-0W20-QSP

E240522

CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™

355



Capacities


CapacityItem






10.9 qt (10.3 L) 1Automatic transmission fluid (6F50)

11.6 qt (11 L) 1Automatic transmission fluid (6F55)

17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive)



2.1 lb (0.96 kg)A/C refrigerant (front only)

2.8 lb (1.27 kg)A/C refrigerant (front and rear)

5.6 fl oz (165 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil (front only)

7.3 fl oz (216 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil (front andrear)

1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

356




SpecificationName

WSS-M2C946-B1Motor oil (U.S.):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend MotorOilXO-5W30-QSP


WSS-M2C946-B1Motor oil (Mexico):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor OilMXO-5W30-QSP

WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/CoolantVC-3DIL-B



WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle LubricantXY-80W90-QL


WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid

XT-10-QLVC


CXT-10-LV12

WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive) (U.S.and Mexico):Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant

357



SpecificationName

XY-75W140-QL

WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive)(Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle LubricantCXY-75W140-1L

WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentratewith BitterantZC-32-B2




WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):Motorcraft® R-134a RefrigerantMYN-19


ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brakepedal shift grease:Premium Long-Life GreaseXG-1-E1


358



SpecificationName



-Lock cylinders (Mexico):Penetrating and Lock LubricantMXL-1


the vehicle warranty.• Longer engine cranking periods.• Increased emission levels.• Reduced engine performance.• Reduced fuel economy.• Degraded brake performance.We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil foryour vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is notavailable, use motor oils of therecommended viscosity grade that meetAPI SN requirements and display the APICertification Mark for gasoline engines.

E142732

An oil that displays this symbol conformsto current engine, emission system andfuel economy performance standards ofILSAC.Do not use supplemental engine oiladditives because they are unnecessaryand could lead to engine damage notcovered by your vehicle warranty.Note: We recommend using DOT 4 LowViscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluidor equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Useof any fluid other than the recommendedfluid may cause degraded brakeperformance and not meet our performancestandards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.Contamination with dirt, water, petroleumproducts or other materials may result inbrake system damage and possible failure.Note: Automatic transmissions that requireMERCON® LV transmission fluid shouldonly use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.The use of any other fluid may causetransmission damage.


359



SpecificationName

WSS-M2C953-A1Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 PremiumSynthetic Blend Motor Oil:Engine oil - SAE 0W-30XO-0W30-QSP

E240523

BULB SPECIFICATION CHARTReplacement bulbs are specified in thechart below. Headlamp bulbs must bemarked with an authorized D.O.T. markingfor North America to make sure they havethe proper lamp performance, lightbrightness, light pattern and safe visibility.The correct bulbs will not damage thelamp assembly or void the lamp assemblywarranty and will provide quality bulbillumination time.

Exterior Lamps

Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp

LEDLEDFront side marker lamps.

LEDLEDFront signature lamps.

273757NAKFront direction indicator.

360




LEDLEDDaytime running lamps.

LEDLEDHeadlamp low beam.

559005LLHeadlamp high beam (halogen).

LEDLEDHeadlamp high beam (LED).

LEDLEDFront fog lamps.

LEDLEDSide direction indicator.

LEDLEDRear side marker lamp.

LEDLEDBrake and rear lamp.

LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp.

21WY21WRear direction indicator.

21W21WReversing lamps.

5W5WLicense plate lamp.Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.

Interior Lamps


4194Glove compartment lamp.

5W5WInterior lamp.

-A6224PFVanity mirror lamp.

5W5WOverhead console lamp.

LEDLEDRear dome lamp.

LEDLEDLuggage compartment lamp.Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.

361



GENERAL INFORMATION


Radio Frequencies and ReceptionFactorsAM and FM frequencies are established bythe Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and the Canadian Radio andTelecommunications Commission (CRTC).Those frequencies are:• AM: 530-1710 kHz• FM: 87.9-107.9 MHzNote: Listening to loud audio for longperiods of time could damage your hearing.

Radio Reception Factors

The further you travel from an AM or FM station, theweaker the signal and the weaker the reception.

Distance and strength

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freewayoverpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage andthunderstorms can interfere with the reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeatingtower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one andresult in the audio system muting.

Station overload

CD and CD Player InformationNote: CD units play commercially pressed4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Dueto technical incompatibility, certainrecordable and re-recordable compact discsmay not function correctly when used in thevehicle’s CD player.

Note: Do not insert CDs with homemadepaper (adhesive) labels into the CD playeras the label may peel and cause the CD tobecome jammed. You should use apermanent felt tip marker rather thanadhesive labels on your homemade CDs.Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask anauthorized dealer for more information.Note: Do not use any irregularly shapeddiscs or discs with a scratch protection filmattached.

362


Audio System

Always handle discs by their edges only.Clean the disc with an approved CDcleaner only. Wipe it from the center ofthe disc toward the edge. Do not clean ina circular motion.Do not expose discs to direct sunlight orheat sources for extended periods.

MP3 and WMA Track and FolderStructureAudio systems capable of recognizing andplaying MP3 and WMA individual tracksand folder structures work as follows:• There are two different modes for MP3

and WMA disc playback: MP3 andWMA track mode (system default) andMP3 and WMA folder mode.

• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores anyfolder structure on the MP3 and WMAdisc. The player numbers each MP3and WMA track on the disc (noted bythe MP3 or WMA file extension) fromT001 to a maximum of T255. Themaximum number of playable MP3 andWMA files may be less depending onthe structure of the CD and exactmodel of radio present.

• MP3 and WMA folder mode representsa folder structure consisting of onelevel of folders. The CD player numbersall MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc(noted by the MP3 or WMA fileextension) and all folders containingMP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)T001 (track) to F253 T255.

• Creating discs with only one level offolders helps with navigation throughthe disc files.

If you are burning your own MP3 and WMAdiscs, it is important to understand howthe system reads the structures you create.While various files may be present (fileswith extensions other than MP3 andWMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA

extension are played; other files areignored by the system. This enables you touse the same MP3 and WMA disc for avariety of tasks on your work computer,home computer and your in-vehiclesystem.In track mode, the system displays andplays the structure as if it were only onelevel deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,regardless of being in a specific folder). Infolder mode, the system only plays theMP3 and WMA files in the current folder.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:SONY AM/FM/CD


Note: Some features, such as satelliteradio, may not be available in your location.Check with an authorized dealer.Note: The touchscreen system controlsmost of the audio features. See your SYNCinformation.

Accessing the Sound Settings

E265271

Press and release to accesssettings for Treble, Midrange,Bass, Fade and Balance.

363


Audio System

Adjusting the Volume

E265373

Turn to adjust the volume.

Changing Radio Stations

E265272

In radio mode, press and release + or - tosearch through the radio frequency band.In satellite radio mode, press and release+ or - to find the previous or next availablesatellite radio station.

Ejecting the CD

E265032

Press and release to eject a CD.

Inserting a CDInsert a CD into the CD slot.

Switching the Audio Unit On andOff


Using Seek, Fast Forward andReverse

In radio mode, select a frequency band andpress and release either button. Thesystem stops at the first station it finds inthat direction.In CD mode, press and release to selectthe next or previous track. Press and holdto move quickly forward or backwardthrough the current track.In satellite radio mode, press and releaseto select the next or previous satellite radiostation. If you select a specific category(such as jazz, rock or news), press to findthe next or previous station in the categoryyou select.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:PREMIUM AM/FM/CD


364


Audio System

Note: The touchscreen system controlsmost of the audio features. See your SYNCinformation.Note: Some features, such as satelliteradio, may not be available in your location.Check with an authorized dealer.


E265373



E265696

In radio mode, turn to search through theradio frequency band.

In satellite radio mode, turn to find theprevious or next available satellite radiostation.

Ejecting the CD

E265032

Press and release the button toeject a CD.


Selecting the Audio Modes

E265035

Press and release the button toaccess different audio modes,for example AM, FM and CD.




E265044

E265045

In radio mode, select a frequency band andpress and release either button. Thesystem stops at the first station it finds inthat direction.In CD mode, press and release to selectthe next or previous track. Press and holdto move quickly forward or backwardthrough the current track.In satellite radio mode, press and releaseto select the next or previous satellite radiostation. If you select a specific category(such as jazz, rock or news), press to findthe next or previous station in the categoryyou select.

365


Audio System

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:AM/FM/CD/SYNC


Accessing the Clock Settings

E265036

Press and release the button toaccess the clock setting.Use the center arrow controls to

change the hours and minutes.

Accessing the Media Source Menu

E265035

Press and release the button toopen the media source menu.

You can press this multiple times tochange to a SYNC-Media device or scrollthrough the media sources using the arrowbuttons. Press OK to select a source.

Accessing the Menu

E265038

Press and release the button toaccess different audio systemfeatures.

Accessing the Phone Features

E265037

Press and release the button toaccess the phone features of theSYNC system. See your SYNC

information.

Accessing the Sound Settings

E142611

Press and release the button toaccess settings for Treble,Midrange, Bass, Fade and

Balance.

Use the up and down arrow buttons toselect the various settings. Press OK toconfirm a selection, press the left and rightarrow buttons to change the settings.Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Youcan set sound settings for each audiosource independently.


E265373


366


Audio System


E265696

In radio mode, turn to search through theradio frequency band.In satellite radio mode, turn to find theprevious or next available satellite radiostation.

Ejecting the CD

E265032

Press and release the button toeject a CD.


Listening to a CD

E265039

Press and release the button tolisten to a CD.

Listening to the Radio

E265033

Press and release the button tolisten to the radio or changeradio stations.

Listening to Satellite Radio

E265034

Press and release the button tolisten to satellite radio.

Muting the Audio

E265043

Press and release the button tomute the playing audio.

Playing or Pausing MediaPress and release the button toeither play or pause the audio.



Using a Cell PhonePress and release to eitheranswer an incoming phone callor to make a phone call.

E265040

Press and hold to end a phonecall.

Using the Display ControlUse the up and down arrow buttons toselect the various settings. When you makeyour selection, press the left and rightarrow buttons to change the settings.

E265041

Press and release to confirm aselection.

Press and release the function buttonsbelow the display to select differentfunctions of the audio system dependingon which mode you are in (such as Radiomode or CD mode).

367


Audio System

Using the Number BlockIn radio mode, store and recall your favoriteradio stations. To store a favorite stationpress and hold until the sound returns. Inphone mode, enter a phone number.


In radio mode, select a frequency band andpress and release either button. Thesystem stops at the first station it finds inthat direction.

In CD mode, press and release to selectthe next or previous track. Press and holdto move quickly forward or backwardthrough the current track.In satellite radio mode, press and releaseto select the next or previous satellite radiostation. If you select a specific category(such as jazz, rock or news), press to findthe next or previous station in the categoryyou select.

Menu StructurePress MENU.Press the up and down arrow buttons toscroll through the options.Press the right arrow to enter a menu.Press the left arrow to exit a menu.Press OK to confirm a selection.Note: Depending on your system, someoptions may appear slightly different.

Radio

Use the left and right arrows to go up or down thefrequency band.

Manual Tune

Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan

Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM-AST and FM-AST frequency bands.

AST

Select to have the system search by certain musiccategories (such as Rock, Pop or Country).

Set Category for Seek/Scan

Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. Thisfeature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set acategory.

RDS Text Display

368


Audio System

Satellite Radio

Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan

Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number(ESN). You need this number when communicating withyour satellite radio provider to activate, modify or trackyour account.

Electronic Serial Number(ESN)

Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OKto open a list of the following options for this channel.Once you skip or lock a channel, you can only access it bypressing Direct Tune and entering the channel number.Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN.

Check Channel Guide

Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock orNews). If you select a category, seek and scan functionsonly stop on channels in that category.

Set Category for Seek/Scan

Select to switch alerts on or off for songs, artists or teams.The system alerts you when the selection is playing onanother channel. Save up to 20 alerts.

Alerts

Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations.Unlock All Stations

Use to restore any channels you previously skipped.Skip No Stations

Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlockchannels. Your initial PIN is 1234.

Parental Lockout

Audio Settings

Adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and windnoise. You can set the system between 0 and +7.

Speed CompensatedVolume

Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fadeor Balance.

Sound

Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seatingposition.

Occupancy Mode

Choose between the stereo modes.DSP

369


Audio System

CD Settings

Select to scan all disc selections.Scan All

Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.Scan Folder

Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a moreconsistent listening level.

CD Compression

Clock Settings

Select to set the time and calendar date.Set Date and Time

Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hourmode.

24 Hour

Display Settings

Select to change display brightness.Brightness

Select to display the language in English, French orSpanish.

Language

Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheitor Celsius.

Temp. Setting

DIGITAL RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: HD Radio broadcasts are notavailable in all markets.HD Radio technology is the digitalevolution of analog AM/FM radio. Yoursystem has a special receiver that allowsit to receive digital broadcasts (whereavailable) in addition to the analogbroadcasts, it already receives. Digitalbroadcasts provide a better sound qualitythan analog broadcasts with free,crystal-clear audio and no static ordistortion. For more information, and aguide to available stations andprogramming, please visitwww.hdradio.com.

When HD Radio is on and you tune to astation broadcasting HD Radio technology,you may notice the HD Radio logo on yourscreen. When this logo is available, youmay also see Title and Artist fieldson-screen.The multicast indicator appears in FMmode (only) if the current station isbroadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.The highlighted numbers signify availabledigital channels where new or differentcontent is available. HD1 signifies the mainprogramming status and is available inanalog and digital broadcasts. Othermulticast stations (HD2 through HD7) areonly available digitally.

370


Audio System

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, youcan access the following functions:• Scan allows you to hear a brief

sampling of all available stations. Thisfeature still works when HD Radioreception is on, although it does notscan for HD2-HD7 channels. You maysee the HD logo appear if the stationhas a digital broadcast.

• Memory presets allow you to save anactive channel as a memory preset.Touch and hold a memory preset slotuntil the sound returns. There is a briefmute while the radio saves the station.Sound returns when finished. Whenswitching to an HD2 or HD3 memorypreset, the sound mutes before thedigital audio plays, because the systemhas to reacquire the digital signal.

Note: As with any saved radio station, youcannot access a station you save if yourvehicle is outside the station’s receptionarea.

HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting

Potential Reception Issues

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are onthe fringe of the reception area, the station may mute dueto weak signal strength.

Reception area

If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back tothe analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is availableagain. However, if you are listening to any of the possibleHD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and staysmuted unless it is able to connect to the digital signalagain.

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in theanalog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is anHD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Dependingon the station quality, you may hear a slight sound changewhen the station changes from analog to digital. Blendingis the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back toanalog sound.

Station blending

In order to provide the best possibleexperience, use the contact form to reportany station issues found while listening toa station broadcasting with HD Radiotechnology. Independent entities own andoperate each station. These stations areresponsible for ensuring all audio streamsand data fields are accurate.

371


Audio System

Potential Station Issues

ActionCauseIssues

No action required. This is abroadcast issue.

This is poor time alignmentby the radio broadcaster.

Echo, stutter, skip or repeatin audio.Increase or decrease inaudio volume.

No action required. Thereception issue may clear upas you continue to drive.

The radio is shifting betweenanalog and digital audio.

Sound fading or blending inand out.

No action required. This isnormal behavior. Wait untilthe audio is available.

The digital multicast is notavailable until the HD Radiobroadcast is decoded. Oncedecoded, the audio is avail-able.

There is an audio mutedelay when selecting HD2 orHD3, multicast preset orDirect Tune.

No action required. Thestation is not available inyour current location.

The previously storedmulticast preset or directtune is not available in yourcurrent reception area.

Cannot access HD2 or HD3multicast channel whenrecalling a preset or from adirect tune.

Fill out the station issueform at website listedbelow.*

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

Text information does notmatch currently playingaudio.

Fill out the station issueform at website listedbelow.*

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

There is no text informationshown for currently selectedfrequency.

No action required. This isnormal behavior.

Pressing Scan disablesHD2-HD7 channel search.

HD2-HD7 stations not foundwhen Scan is pressed.

*http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback

HD Radio Technology manufactured underlicense from iBiquity Digital Corporationand foreign patents. HD Radio and the HDand HD Radio logos are proprietarytrademarks of DTS Ford Motor Companyand DTS are not responsible for thecontent sent using HD Radio technology.Content may be changed, added or deletedat any time at the station owner'sdiscretion.

SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts avariety of music, news, sports, weather,traffic and entertainment satellite radiochannels. For more information and acomplete list of SiriusXM satellite radiochannels, visit www.siriusxm.com in theUnited States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

372


Audio System

Note: This receiver includes the eCosreal-time operating system. eCos ispublished under the eCos License.

Satellite Radio Reception Factors

Potential satellite radio reception issues

For optimal reception performance, keep the antennaclear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and othermaterial as far away from the antenna as possible.

Antenna obstructions

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freewayoverpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage andthunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeatingtower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one andthe audio system may mute.

Station overload

Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate theinterference and the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signal interfer-ence

SiriusXM Satellite Radio ServiceNote: SiriusXM reserves the unrestrictedright to change, rearrange, add or deleteprogramming including canceling, movingor adding particular channels, and its prices,at any time, with or without notice to you.Ford Motor Company shall not beresponsible for any such programmingchanges.

E208625

SiriusXM satellite radio is asubscription-based satellite radio servicethat broadcasts a variety of music, sports,news, weather, traffic and entertainmentprogramming. Your factory-installedSiriusXM satellite radio system includeshardware and a limited subscription term,which begins on the date of sale or leaseof your vehicle. See an authorized dealerfor availability.For more information on extendedsubscription terms (a service fee isrequired), the online media player and acomplete list of SiriusXM satellite radiochannels, and other features, please visitwww.siriusxm.com in the United States,www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or callSiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio Electronic SerialNumber (ESN)You need your ESN to activate, modify ortrack your satellite radio account. When insatellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.

373


Audio System

Troubleshooting

ActionConditionMessage

No action required. Thismessage should disappearshortly.

Radio requires more thantwo seconds to produceaudio for the selectedchannel.

Acquiring…

If this message does notclear shortly, or with an igni-tion key cycle, your receivermay have a fault. See anauthorized dealer for service.

There is an internal moduleor system failure present.

Satellite antenna fault

SIRIUS system failure

Tune to another channel orchoose another preset.

The channel is no longeravailable.

Invalid Channel

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe tothe channel, or tune toanother channel.

Your subscription does notinclude this channel.

Unsubscribed Channel

The signal is blocked. Whenyou move into an open area,the signal should return.

The signal is lost from theSiriusXM satellite or Siri-usXM tower to your vehicleantenna.

No Signal

No action required. Theprocess may take up tothree minutes.

Update of channelprogramming in progress.

Updating…

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to resolvesubscription issues.

Your satellite service is nolonger available.

Questions? Call

1-888-539-7474

Use the channel guide toturn off the Lock or Skipfunction on that station.

All the channels in theselected category are eitherskipped or locked.

None found

Check Channel Guide

No action required.SiriusXM has updated thechannels available for yourvehicle.

Subscription Updated

374


Audio System

USB PORT


E201595

The USB port allows you to plug in mediaplaying devices, memory sticks and chargedevices, if supported.

MEDIA HUB

WARNING: Driving whiledistracted can result in loss of vehiclecontrol, crash and injury. We stronglyrecommend that you use extremecaution when using any device that maytake your focus off the road. Your

primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. Werecommend against the use of anyhand-held device while driving andencourage the use of voice-operatedsystems when possible. Make sure youare aware of all applicable local lawsthat may affect the use of electronicdevices while driving.

The media hub may be on the instrumentpanel or center console.The media hub may contain one or moreof the following inputs:See USB Port (page 375).

375


Audio System

GENERAL INFORMATION

E198355

SYNC is an in-vehicle communicationssystem that works with yourBluetooth-enabled cellular phone andportable media player.This allows you to:• Make and receive calls.• Access and play music from your

portable music player.• Use 911 Assist and applications, via

SYNC Applink .*

• Access phonebook contacts and musicusing voice commands.

• Stream music from your connectedphone.

• Text message.

• Use the advanced voice recognitionsystem.

• Charge your USB device (if your devicesupports this).

*These features are not available in allmarkets and may require activation.Available AppLink enabled apps vary bymarket.Make sure that you review your device'smanual before using it with SYNC.

SupportThe SYNC support team is available tohelp you with any questions you cannotanswer on your own.Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.

376


SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.Times are subject to change due toholidays.

SYNC Owner AccountWhy do I need a SYNC owner account?• Essential for keeping up with the latest

software downloads available forSYNC.

• Access to customer support for anyquestions you may have.

Driving RestrictionsFor your safety, certain features arespeed-dependent and restricted when yourvehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).

Safety Information


When using SYNC:• Do not operate playing devices if the

power cords or cables are broken, splitor damaged. Place cords and cablesout of the way, so they do not interferewith the operation of pedals, seats,compartments or safe driving abilities.

• Do not leave playing devices in yourvehicle during extreme conditions as itcould cause them damage. See yourdevice's manual for further information.

• Do not attempt to service or repair thesystem. See an authorized dealer.

Privacy InformationWhen a cellular phone is connected toSYNC, the system creates a profile withinyour vehicle that is linked to that cellularphone. This profile is created in order tooffer you more cellular features and tooperate more efficiently. Among otherthings, this profile may contain data aboutyour cellular phone book, text messages(read and unread), and call history,including history of calls when your cellularphone was not connected to the system.In addition, if you connect a media device,the system creates and retains an index ofsupported media content. The system alsorecords a short development log ofapproximately 10 minutes of all recentsystem activity. The log profile and othersystem data may be used to improve thesystem and help diagnose any problemsthat may occur.The cellular profile, media device index,and development log will remain in thevehicle unless you delete them and aregenerally accessible only in the vehiclewhen the cellular phone or media playeris connected. If you no longer plan to usethe system or the vehicle, we recommendyou perform a Master Reset to erase allstored information.

377



System data cannot be accessed withoutspecial equipment and access to thevehicle's SYNC module. Ford MotorCompany and Ford of Canada will notaccess the system data for any purposeother than as described absent consent, acourt order, or where required by lawenforcement, other governmentauthorities, or other third parties actingwith lawful authority. Other parties mayseek to access the informationindependently of Ford Motor Company andFord of Canada. For further privacyinformation, see the section on 911 Assist.See SYNC™ Applications and Services(page 392).

USING VOICE RECOGNITIONThis system helps you control manyfeatures using voice commands. Thisallows you to keep your hands on thewheel and focus on what is around you.

Initiating a Voice Session

E142599

Press the voice button. A list ofavailable voice commandsappears in the display.

Global Voice CommandsThese voice commands are alwaysavailable. You can say them at any time.

Global voice commands

This command ends the voice session. Youcan also cancel a session by holding thevoice button for two or more seconds.

(cancel | exit)

This command provides you with hints,examples and instructions.

help

This command restarts the voice sessionfrom the initial starting point.

(main menu | start again)

You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets thatare separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.

Helpful Hints• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is

as quiet as possible. Wind noise fromopen windows and road vibrations mayprevent the system from correctlyrecognizing spoken commands.

• Before giving a voice command, waitfor the system announcement to finish,followed by a single tone. Anycommand spoken before this does notregister with the system.

• Speak naturally, without long pausesbetween words.

• You can interrupt the system at anytime while it is speaking by pressing thevoice button. You can cancel a voicesession by pressing and holding thevoice button.

378



System Interaction and FeedbackThe system provides feedback throughaudible tones, prompts, questions andspoken confirmations depending on thesituation and the chosen level ofinteraction. You can customize the voicerecognition system to provide more or lessinstruction and feedback.

The default setting is to a higher level ofinteraction in order to help you learn to usethe system. You can change these settingsat any time.

Adjusting the Interaction Level

E142599

Press the voice button. Whenprompted, say:

Action and DescriptionVoice Command

voice settings

Then either of the following:

Provides more detailed interaction andguidance. (Recommended for first timeusers.)

interaction mode novice

Provides less audible interaction and guid-ance.

interaction mode advanced

Confirmation PromptsConfirmation prompts are short questionsthe system asks when it is not sure of yourrequest or when there is more than onepossible response to your request.

To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:


voice settings

Then either of the following:

Make a best guess from the command; youmay still occasionally be asked to confirmsettings.

confirmation prompts off

Clarify your voice command with a shortquestion.

confirmation prompts on

Phone ConfirmationUsing phone confirmations the systemasks you to verify before placing any calls.

379



To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:


voice settings

Then any of the following:

When enabled, this feature will prompt youto confirm any voice initiated call commandprior to the call being placed.

phone confirmation on

The system will make a best guess; youmay still occasionally be asked to confirmsettings.

phone confirmation off

Changing the Voice SettingsIn addition to using voice commands tochange the voice settings, you can also usethe menu in the audio display.

To change the voice settings press theMenu button then select:

Menu Item

SYNC-Settings

Voice settings

Note: Depending on the current climatecontrol settings, the fan speed mayautomatically go down while issuing voicecommands or while making and receivingphone calls via SYNC to reduce the amountof background noise in the vehicle. The fanspeed will automatically return to normaloperation once the voice session ends. Fanspeed can also be adjusted normally duringa voice session, simply press fan buttons (orturn fan knob) to increase or decrease fanspeed to desired setting.

To disable this automatic fan speedreduction feature during voice sessions,press and hold the climate control AC andRecirculated air buttons simultaneously,release and then increase fan speed within2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeatthe above sequence.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOURPHONEHands-free calling is one of the mainfeatures of SYNC. While the systemsupports a variety of features, many aredependent on your cellular phone'sfunctionality. At a minimum, most cellularphones with Bluetooth wireless technologysupport the following functions:• Answering an incoming call.• Ending a call.• Using privacy mode.• Dialing a number.• Redialing.• Call waiting notification.• Caller ID.

380



Other features, such as text messagingusing Bluetooth and automatic phonebookdownload, are phone-dependent features.To check your phone's compatibility, seeyour phone's manual and visitwww.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca.

Pairing a Phone for the First TimeWirelessly pairing your phone with SYNCallows you to make and receive hands-freecalls.Note: SYNC can support downloading upto approximately 4000 entries perBluetooth-enabled cellular phone.Note: Make sure to switch on the ignitionand the radio. Shift the transmission intopark (P) for automatic transmission or firstgear for manual transmission.

Using the Audio SystemNote: To scroll through the menus, pressthe up and down arrows on your audiosystem.1. Make sure to switch on your phone's

Bluetooth feature before starting thesearch. See your device's manual ifnecessary.

2. Press the PHONE button. When theaudio display indicates there is nopaired phone, select the option to add.

3. When a message to begin pairingappears in the audio display, search forSYNC on your phone to start the pairingprocess.

4. When prompted on your cell phone’sdisplay, confirm that the PIN providedby SYNC matches the PIN displayedon your cell phone. Your phone is nowpaired and the display indicates thatthe pairing was successful. If you areprompted to enter a PIN on your device,enter the PIN displayed on the screen.The display indicates when the pairingis successful.

Depending on your phone's capability andyour market, the system may prompt youwith questions, such as setting the currentphone as the primary phone (the phoneSYNC automatically tries to connect withfirst upon vehicle start-up) anddownloading your phonebook.

Using Voice Commands

E142599

Make sure to switch on yourphone's Bluetooth featurebefore starting the search. See

your device's manual if necessary.

Press the voice and when promptedsay:

Action and Descrip-tion

Voice Command

Follow the instruc-tions on the audiodisplay.

(pair ([Bluetooth]device | phone |Bluetooth audio) |add phone)

You can say any of the voice commandsthat appear within open and close bracketsthat are separated by |. For example,where; (what's | what is) appears you say;what's or what is.The commands that have [ ] around theword means that the word is optional.

381



Depending on your phone's capability andyour market, the system may prompt youwith questions, such as setting the currentphone as the primary phone (the phoneSYNC automatically tries to connect withfirst upon vehicle start-up) anddownloading your phonebook.

Pairing Subsequent PhonesNote: Make sure to switch on the ignitionand the radio. Shift the transmission intopark (P) for automatic transmission or firstgear for manual transmission.Note: To scroll through the menus, pressthe up and down arrows on your audiosystem.1. Make sure to switch on your phone's

Bluetooth feature before starting thesearch. See your device's manual ifnecessary.

2. Press the PHONE button.3. Select the option for Bluetooth

Devices.4. Press the OK button.5. Select the option to add. This starts

the pairing process.6. When a message to begin pairing

appears in the audio display, search forSYNC on your device.

7. When prompted on your cell phone’sdisplay, confirm that the PIN providedby SYNC matches the PIN displayedon your cell phone. Your phone is nowpaired and the display indicates thatthe pairing was successful. If you areprompted to enter a PIN on your device,enter the PIN displayed on the screen.The display indicates when the pairingis successful.

SYNC may prompt you with more cellphone options. Your cell phone may alsoprompt you to give SYNC permission toaccess information. For more informationon your cell phone’s capability, see yourcell phone’s manual and visit the website.

Phone Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button. Whenprompted, say any of thefollowing:

Voice Command

(phone | Blackberry | iPhone)

Then say any of the following:

call (___)

call ___ at home

call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work)

call ___ on (cell | mobile)

call ___ on other1dial [[a] number]

2([go to] privacy | transfer to phone| privacy on)

2(hold call [on] | place call on hold)

2join (calls | call)

2mute call [on]

2(mute call off | un-mute call)

(turn ringer on | silent mode off)

(turn ringer off | silent mode [on])

382



Voice Command

3[text] (messages | message)

help

___ is a dynamic listing that should be thename of a contact in your phonebook. Forexample you could say "Call Home".1 See Dial table below.2 These commands are only valid while ina phone call.3 See the text message table below.

Dial CommandsPress the voice button and when promptedsay any of the following commands:

Voice Commands

411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one)

700 (seven hundred)

800 (eight hundred)

900 (nine hundred)

Clear (deletes all entered digits)

Delete (deletes last set of digits entered)

Number <0-9>

Plus

Pound (#)

Star (*)

Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold thephone button or press any button on theaudio system.

To access text messages say:

Voice Command

[text] (messages | message)

Then say any of the following:

(listen to | read) ([text] message)

forward (text | [text] message)

reply to (text | [text] message)

call [sender]

Phonebook HintsTo hear how the SYNC system speaks aname browse phonebook, select a contactand press:

Menu Item

Hear it

Changing Devices Using VoiceCommandsUsing SYNC, you can easily access multiplephones, ipods, or USB devices. to switchdevices say:

383



Voice Command

You can state the name ofthe desired device, such as“My iPhone”,“My Galaxy”or“My iPod”. SYNC may

ask you to confirm the typeof device (Phone, USB, or

Bluetooth Audio).

(connect |device) ___

Making Calls

E142599

Press the voice button. Whenprompted, say:

Voice Command

call [[a] name]

SYNC prompts you to saythe numbers that you wishto dial. After you say thenumbers, the systemconfirms it. You can thensay:

dial [[a]number]

When the system has stated thenumber, you say any of the following:

Voice Command

This initiates the call.(dial | send)

This erases the spokendigits.

(delete |correct)

To end the call, press the end call button

on the steering wheel or select the end calloption in the audio display.

Receiving CallsAccepting callsWhen receiving a call, you can answer thecall by pressing the accept call button onthe steering wheel or use the screen.

To use the screen to accept a callselect:

Menu Item

Accept

Rejecting CallsWhen receiving a call, you can reject thecall by pressing the reject call button onthe steering wheel or use the screen.

To use the screen to reject a call select:

Menu Item

Reject

Ignore the call by doing nothing.

Phone Options during an ActiveCallDuring an active call, you have more menufeatures that become available, such asputting a call on hold or joining calls.To access this menu, choose one of theoptions available at the bottom of theaudio display or select More to choosefrom the following options:

384



Description and actionMenu Item

Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch themicrophone on, select the option again.

Mic. off

Switch a call from an active hands-free environment toyour cellular phone for a more private conversation. Whenselected, the audio display indicates the call is private.

Privacy

Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio displayindicates the call is on hold.

Hold

Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad(for example, numbers for passwords).

Dial a number

Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximumof three callers on a multiparty or conference call.

Join calls

1. Select the More option.2. Access the desired contact through the system or usevoice commands to place the second call. Once activelyin the second call, select the More option.3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.

Access your phonebook contacts.Phonebook1. Select the More option.2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OKbutton.3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.4. Press the OK button again when the desired contactappears in the audio display.5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Access your call history log.Call History1. Select the More option.2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OKbutton.3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,outgoing or missed).4. Press the OK button again when the desired selectionappears in the audio display.5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Accessing Features through thePhone MenuYou can access your call history,phonebook, sent text messages, as wellas access phone and system settings.

1. Press the PHONE button to enter thephone menu.

2. Select one of the options available.

385



Description and actionDisplay

Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.Dial a number

Access your downloaded phonebook.Phonebook1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can usethe options at the bottom of the screen to access analphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letterson the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.3. Press the OK button again when the desired selectionappears in the audio display.4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.Call History1. Press the OK button to select.2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Pressthe OK button to make your selection.3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of thenumbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.

Speed Dial

Send, download and delete text messages.Text messaging

Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).

BT Devices

View various settings and features on your phone.Phone settings

Text MessagingNote: This is a phone-dependent feature.SYNC allows you to receive, send,download and delete text messages. Thesystem can also read incoming textmessages to you so that you do not haveto take your eyes off the road.

Receiving a Text MessageNote: This is a phone-dependent feature.Your phone must support downloading textmessages using Bluetooth to receiveincoming text messages.

Note: This is a speed-dependent featureand is only available when your vehicle istraveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.When a new message arrives, an audibletone sounds and the audio displayindicates you have a new message.

To hear the message you can say:

Description andaction

Voice command

Select this optionto have the systemread the messageto you.

(listen to | read)([text] message)

386



Using the screen you also have the following options:

Description and actionMenuItem

Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text messageinbox.

Ignore

Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you havethe ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. Foradditional options select:

View

If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through thefollowing options:

More...

Press the OK button to access, and then scrollthrough a list of pre-defined messages to send.

Reply tosender

Press the OK button to call the sender of themessage.

Call sender

Press the OK button to forward the message toanyone in your phonebook or call history. You canalso choose to enter a number.

Forwardmsg.

Sending, Downloading and DeletingYour Text Messages1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Select the text messaging option, andthen press the OK button.

Choose from the following options:

Description and actionMenuItem

Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15messages.

New

Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option tohave the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, selectthe More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender orforward the message.

View

Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellularphone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all yourtext messages.

Delete

Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of allunread messages from your cellular phone.

More...

387



Sending a Text MessageNote: You can only send a text message toone recipient at a time.1. Select the send option when the

desired selection highlights in the audiodisplay.

2. Select the confirmation option whenthe contact appears.

3. Press the OK button again to confirmwhen the system asks if you want tosend the message. A pre-definedsignature appears on each textmessage.

Note: You can send text messages eitherby choosing a contact from the phonebookand selecting the text option from the audiodisplay or by replying to a received messagein the inbox.

Accessing Your Phone SettingsThese are phone-dependent features. Yourphone settings allow you to access andadjust features such as your ring tone andtext message notification, modify yourphonebook, and set up automaticdownload.1. Press the PHONE button.2. Scroll until the phone settings option

appears, and then press the OK button.

Scroll to select from the following options:


If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phoneas the master when there is more than one cellular phonepaired to the system. This option can be changed for allcellular phones (not only the active phone) using theBluetooth Devices menu.

Set as master

See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellularphone number, and signal level. When done, press the leftarrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.

Phone status

Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (oneof the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If yourphone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtonesounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtoneoption.

Set ringtone

1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear eachringtone.2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.

Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify youwhen a text message arrives. Press the OK button toswitch the audible tone off or on.

Text msg notify

Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,delete or download). Press the OK button to select andscroll between the choices in the phonebook preferencestable below.

Phonebook pref.

388



Phonebook preferencesMenu Item

Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See yourdevice's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OKbutton to add more contacts from your phonebook.

Add contacts

When a message asking you to delete appears, select theoption to confirm. Press the OK button to delete thecurrent phonebook and call history. The system takes youback to the menu for phone settings.

Delete

Press the OK button to select and download your phone-book to the system.

Download now

When automatic download is on, the system deletes anychanges (additions or deletions) saved in the system sinceyour last download.

Auto-download

When automatic download is off, the system does notdownload your phonebook when your cellular phoneconnects to SYNC.

You can only access your phonebook, call history and textmessages when your paired cellular phone connects tothe system. Check or uncheck this option to downloadyour phonebook automatically each time your phoneconnects to the system. Download times are phone-dependent and quantity-dependent.

Enabling this feature allows you to select how yourcontacts are displayed. You can select:

Sorting Pref.

Last/First nameFirst/Last name

Bluetooth DevicesThe Bluetooth Devices menu allows youto add, connect and delete devices as wellas set a phone as primary.

1. Press the PHONE button.2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears,

and then press the OK button.

Select from the following options:


Pair additional phones to the system.Add1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.

389




2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audiodisplay, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone'smanual if necessary.3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirmthat the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayedon your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are promptedto enter a PIN on your device, it does not support SecureSimple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on thescreen. The display indicates when the pairing issuccessful.4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears,select either yes or no.5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options.Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNCpermission to access information. For more informationon your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’smanual and visit the website.

Select the delete option and confirm when the systemasks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phonefrom the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pairit again.

Delete

The system attempts to connect with the primary cellularphone each time you switch on the ignition. When youselect a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in thelist, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phoneas master by selecting the master option and confirmingit as the primary.

Master

Connect a previously connected phone. You can only haveone phone connected at a time to use the phone's func-tionality. When you connect another phone, the previousphone disconnects from the telephone services. Thesystem allows you to use different Bluetooth devices forthe cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audiomusic playback feature at the same time.

Conn.

Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this optionand confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone,you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairingprocess.

Discon.

System Settings1. Press the MENU button.

2. Select the SYNC settings option, andthen press the OK button.

390



Scroll to select from the following options:

Description and actionDisplay

Check or uncheck this option to switch the system'sBluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and thenpress the OK button to change the option's status.

Bluetooth on

Return to the factory default settings without erasing yourindexed information (such as phonebook, call history, textmessages and paired devices). Select this option andconfirm when prompted in the audio display.

Set defaults

Completely erase all information stored in the system(such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paireddevices) and return to factory default settings.

Master reset

Install downloaded applications or software updates.Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audiodisplay. There must be a valid SYNC application or updateavailable on the USB drive in order to finish an installationsuccessfully.

Install on SYNC

Display the system's version numbers as well as its serialnumber. Press the OK button to select.

System info

The voice settings submenu contains various options. SeeUsing Voice Recognition (page 378).

Voice settings

Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USBdevice. Press the OK button and use the up and downarrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Usethe left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder.You can select media content for playback from this menu.

Browse USB

391



SYNC™ APPLICATIONS ANDSERVICES (IF EQUIPPED)

In order for the following features to work,your cellular phone must be compatiblewith SYNC. To check your phone'scompatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca.• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of

an emergency.• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect

to and use certain applications (if yourphone is compatible).

These features may require activation.Available AppLink enabled apps vary bymarket.

911 Assist

WARNING: Unless the 911 Assistsetting is set on before a crash, thesystem will not dial for help which coulddelay response time, potentiallyincreasing the risk of serious injury ordeath after a crash.

WARNING: Do not wait for 911Assist to make an emergency call if youcan do it yourself. Dial emergencyservices immediately to avoid delayedresponse time which could increase therisk of serious injury or death after acrash. If you do not hear 911 Assist withinfive seconds of the crash, the system orphone may be damaged ornon-functional.

WARNING: Always place yourphone in a secure location in your vehicleso it does not become a projectile or getdamaged in a crash. Failure to do so maycause serious injury to someone ordamage the phone which could prevent911 Assist from working properly.

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must beset on before the incident.Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature onlyoperates in the U.S., Canada or in a territoryin which 911 is the emergency number.Note: Before setting this feature on, makesure that you read the 911 Assist PrivacyNotice later in this section for importantinformation.Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to onor off, that setting applies for all pairedphones. If you switch on 911 Assist, either avoice message plays or a display messageor an icon comes on when you start yourvehicle and after a previously paired phoneconnects.Note: Every phone operates differently.While SYNC 911 Assist works with mostcellular phones, some may have troubleusing this feature.If a crash deploys an airbag (excludingknee airbags and rear inflatable safetybelts [if equipped]) or activates the fuelpump shut-off, your SYNC-equippedvehicle may be able to contact emergencyservices by dialing 911 through a paired andconnected Bluetooth enabled phone. Youcan learn more about the 911 Assistfeature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca.See Supplementary Restraints System(page 44). Important information aboutairbag deployment is in this chapter.

392



See Roadside Emergencies (page 258).Important information about the fuel pumpshut-off is in this chapter.

Setting 911 Assist On or Off

Press Menu then select

Action and DescriptionMenuItem

SYNC-Applications

Select the desired option, onor off.

911 Assist

If you choose not to activate thisfeature you will have the followingoptions:


Provides a display and voicereminder at phone connectionat vehicle start.

VoiceReminderON

Provides a display reminderonly without a voice reminderat phone connection.

VoiceReminderOFF

To make sure that 911 Assist worksproperly:• SYNC must be powered and working

properly at the time of the incident andthroughout feature activation and use.

• The 911 Assist feature must be set onbefore the incident.

• You must pair and connect a Bluetoothenabled and compatible cell phone toSYNC.

• A connected Bluetooth enabled phonemust have the ability to make andmaintain an outgoing call at the timeof the incident.

• A connected Bluetooth enabled phonemust have adequate network coverage,battery power and signal strength.

• The vehicle must have battery powerand be located in the U.S., Canada orin a territory in which 911 is theemergency number.

In the Event of a CrashNot all crashes deploy an airbag or activatethe fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911Assist). If a connected cell phone sustainsdamage or loses its connection to SYNCduring a crash, SYNC searches for and triesto connect to a previously paired cellphone; SYNC then attempts to call theemergency services.Before making the call:• SYNC provides a short window of time

(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.If you fail to cancel the call, SYNCattempts to dial 911.

• SYNC says the following, or a similarmessage: "SYNC will attempt to call911, to cancel the call, press Cancel onyour screen or press and hold thephone button on your steering wheel".

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNCmakes a successful call, a pre-recordedmessage plays for the 911 operator, andthen the occupant(s) in your vehicle is ableto talk with the operator. Be prepared toprovide your name, phone number andlocation immediately, because not all 911systems are capable of receiving thisinformation electronically.

911 Assist May Not Work If• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist

hardware sustains damage in a crash.• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC

system has no power.• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle

are the ones paired and connected tothe system.

393



911 Assist Privacy NoticeWhen you switch on 911 Assist, it maydisclose to emergency services that yourvehicle has been in a crash involving thedeployment of an airbag or activation ofthe fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions orupdates to 911 Assist may also be capableof electronically or verbally disclosing to911 operators your vehicle location or otherdetails about your vehicle or crash to assist911 operators to provide the mostappropriate emergency services. If you donot want to disclose this information, donot switch the feature on.

SYNC Mobile AppsThe system enables voice and steeringwheel control of SYNC AppLink enabledsmartphone apps. When an app is runningthrough AppLink, you can control mainfeatures of the app through voicecommands and steering wheel controls.Note: You must pair and connect yoursmartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.Note: iPhone users need to connect thephone to the USB port.Note: Android users need to connect thephone to SYNC using Bluetooth.Note: For information on available apps,supported smartphone devices andtroubleshooting tips please visit the localwebsite.Note: Availability of SYNC AppLink enabledApps will vary by region.

Note: Make sure you have an activeaccount for the app that you havedownloaded. Some apps workautomatically with no setup. Other appswant you to configure your personal settingsand personalize your experience by creatingstations or favorites. We recommend youdo this at home or outside of your vehicle.Note: AppLink is not available if yourvehicle is equipped with the MyFord Touchsystem.

To Access Using the SYNC Menu

Press the MENU button to access themenu on-screen. Then select:


SYNC-Apps

Scroll through the list ofavailable applications andselect a particular app orselect:

MobileApps

Find New Apps

Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNCAppLink app, make sure the required app isrunning on the mobile device.

Accessing an App's MenuWhen an app is running through SYNC,press the right arrow button on the steeringwheel control to access the app menu.You can access various app features fromhere, for example thumbs up and thumbsdown.Press the left arrow button on the steeringwheel control to exit the app menu.

394



To Access Using Voice Commands

Press the voice button then when prompted say:

Action and DescriptionMenu Item

Say the name of the application after the tone.The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, youcan press the voice button and speak commands specific to the

app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".

mobile (apps |applications)

Use this command to discover the available voice commands.help

SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands

The following voice commands are always available:


SYNC prompts you to say the name of anapp to start it on SYNC.

mobile (apps | applications)

SYNC lists all of the currently availablemobile apps.

list [mobile] (apps | applications)

Searches your connected mobile device forSYNC-compatible mobile apps.

find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications)

help

You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC.

App PermissionsThe system organizes app permissions bygroups. You can grant these grouppermissions individually. You can changea permission group status any time whennot driving, by using the settings menu.

When you launch an app using SYNC, thesystem may ask you to grant certainpermissions, for example:• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle

information to the app such as, but notlimited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuelconsumption, engine speed, rainsensor, odometer, VIN, externaltemperature, gear position, tirepressure, and head lamp status.

• To allow your vehicle to provide drivingcharacteristic information such as, butnot limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,engine revolutions per minute, gearposition, braking events, steering wheelangle, and accelerator pedal position.

395



• To allow your vehicle to providelocation information, including: GPSand speed.

• To allow the app to send pushnotifications using the vehicle displayand voice capabilities while running ina background state. Push notificationsmay be particularly useful for news or

location based apps.Note: You only need to grant permissionsthe first time you use an app with SYNC.Note: We are not responsible or liable forany damages or loss of privacy relating tousage of an app, or dissemination of anyvehicle data that you approve us to provideto an app.

Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu

Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select:


SYNC-Apps

Mobile Apps

You can also select a specific app.If the app supports push notifications, thissetting is listed. Select to enable or disablethe feature as required.

All Apps

Enabling SYNC Mobile AppsIn order to enable mobile apps, SYNCrequires user consent to send and receiveapp authorization information and updatesusing the data plan associated with theconnected device.Data is sent to us in the United Statesthrough the connected device. Theinformation is encrypted and includes yourVIN, SYNC module number, anonymoususage statistics and debugginginformation. Updates may take place.

Note: You must enable mobile apps foreach connected device the first time youselect a mobile app using the system.Note: Standard data rates apply. We arenot responsible for any additional chargesyou may receive from your service provider,when your vehicle sends or receives datathrough the connected device. This includesany additional charges incurred due todriving in areas when roaming out of a homenetwork.

App StatusYou can view the current status of an appin the settings menu.

396



There are three possible statuses:


The system has detected a new apprequiring authorization or a general

permissions update.

Update Needed

No update is required.Up-To-Date

The system is trying to receive an update.Updating...

Update settings


Select this option from the settings menuto manually preform a needed update.

Request Update

Select this option from the settings menuto disable automatic updates.

Disable Updates

Doing so also disables the use of MobileApps on SYNC.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOURMEDIA PLAYERYou can access and play music from yourdigital music player over your vehicle'sspeaker system using the system's mediamenu or voice commands. You can alsosort and play your music by specificcategories, such as artist and album.Note: The system is capable of indexing upto 15,000 songs.SYNC is capable of hosting nearly anydigital media player including: iPod, Zune,plays from device players, and most USBdrives. SYNC also supports audio formats,such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.

Confirm that the USB device has beenformatted correctly and has the followingspecifications:• USB 2.0.• File format must be FAT16/32.The format of the audio files on the USBdevice must be:• MP3.• Non DRM protected WMA.• WAV.• AAC.

Connecting Your Digital MediaPlayer to the USB PortNote: If your digital media player has apower switch, make sure you switch it onbefore plugging it in.

397



To Connect Using Voice CommandsPlug the device into one of the vehicle'sUSB ports.

Press the voice button and whenprompted, say:


Voice Command

You can now playmusic by saying anyof the appropriatevoice commands.See the mediavoice commands.

(USB [stick] | iPod| MP3 [player])

Words in brackets [ ] are optional and donot have to be spoken for the system tounderstand the command. For example,for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3[player]) appears, you can say USB or USBstick.

To Connect Using the System Menu1. Plug the device into one of the vehicle's

USB ports.2. Press the MEDIA button and select

either USB 1 or USB 2 from the mediasource list in the audio display.

To view USB content select:

Description and ActionMessage

Depending on how many media files are on your connecteddevice, an indexing message may appear in the display. Whenindexing is complete, the selected source starts to playbackaudio automatically.

Browse USB

You can browse the files on the USBdevice in categories. Select BROWSEfrom the buttons at the bottom of theaudio display and choose from thefollowing:

Message

Play all

Playlists

Songs

Artists

Message

Albums

Genres

Browse USB

Reset USB

Media Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button and whenprompted say:

398



Description and ActionVoice Command

You can now play music by saying any of the appropriatevoice commands.

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3[player])

You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets thatare separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's orwhat is.You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or"what is playing".

Description and ActionCommand

Pauses device playback.pause

Resumes device playback.play

play [album] ___

Play all media on the device from the firsttrack to the last.

play all

play [artist] ___

play [genre] ___

play [playlist] ___

Plays the next track on the current media.next [track | title | song | file | podcast |chapter | episode]

Plays the previous track on current media.previous [track | title | song | file |podcast | chapter | episode]

Creates a playlist with a similar genre to theone currently playing.

[play] (similar music | more like this)

play [song | track | title | file] ___

repeat off

Repeats the current track.repeat (one | track) [on]

399



Description and ActionCommand

Plays the current playlist in a random order.(Not all devices support this command.)

shuffle [all] [on]

shuffle off

At any time during playback, you can pressthe voice button and ask the system what isplaying. The system reads the metadata tags(if populated) of the current track.

((who's | who is) this | who plays this |(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what

| which) (song | track | artist) is this |(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what

is) this)

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that itcould be the name of anything, such as agroup, artist or song. For example youcould say "Play artist The Beatles".

Examples of USB CommandsSYNC provides the user with many intuitiveways to find and play a song using voice.For example, if we have a song called"Penny Lane" from the album "MagicalMystery Tour" we can say the following toplay this song:• Play song "Penny Lane".• Play "Penny Lane".If we wanted to play the entire album, wecan say:

• Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".• Play "Magical Mystery Tour".

Bluetooth AudioThe system is also capable of playingmusic from your cellular phone throughBluetooth.To switch the Bluetooth Audio on, pressthe MEDIA button and select:

Menu Item

BT audio


Voice Command

pause

play

next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]

previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]

Media Menu FeaturesThe media menu allows you to select howto play your music (such as by artist, genre,shuffle or repeat), find similar music orreset the index of your USB devices.

Press the MEDIA button and select eitherUSB 1 or USB 2 from the media source listin the audio display to start USB playback.

400




This will enter the media menu.Options



Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make yourchoice, it remains on until you switch it off.

Shuffle

Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make yourchoice, it remains on until you switch it off.

Repeat track

You can play similar types of music to the current playlistfrom the USB port. The system uses the metadata informa-tion of each track to compile a playlist. The system thencreates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.Each track must have the metadata tags populated for thisfeature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags

Similar music

are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voicerecognition, the play menu or this option. However, if youplace these tracks onto your playing device in mass storagedevice mode they are available in voice recognition, the playmenu or this option. The system places unknowns into anyunpopulated metadata tag.

Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is completeyou can choose what to play from the USB song library.

Reset USB

Accessing Your USB Song Library1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB

port.

2. Press the MEDIA button (next to theaudio display) to select USB playback.


This menu allows you to select and play your media files byartist, album, genre, playlist or track.

Browse USB

If there are no media files to access, thedisplay indicates there is no media.

401



If there are media files, you have the following options:

Description and ActionDisplay

Play all indexed media files from your device one at a timein numerical order.*

Play all

Press the OK button to select. The first track title appearsin the display.

Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,or MTP).*

Playlists

1. Press the OK button to select.2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press theOK button.

Search for and play a specific indexed track.*Songs1. Press the OK button to select.2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OKbutton.

Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then listsand plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.*

Artists

1. Press the OK button to select.2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OKbutton.

Sort all indexed media files by album.*Albums1. Press the OK button to select.2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press theOK button.

Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.*Genres1. Press the OK button to select.2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press theOK button.

Browse all supported media files on your media playerconnected to the USB port. You can only view media filesthat are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are notvisible.)

Browse USB

1. Press the OK button to select.

402



Description and ActionDisplay

2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, andthen press the OK button.

Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,you can choose what to play from the USB song library.

Reset USB

*You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certainalphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numerickeypad to jump in the list.

Using Voice CommandsYou can access and view your USB songsusing voice commands.Plug the device into your vehicle's USBport.

Press the voice button and whenprompted, say any of the followingcommands:

Accessing and Viewing USB Media

(browse | search | show) all (album |albums)

(browse | search | show) all (artist |artists)

(browse | search | show) all (genre |genres)

(browse | search | show) all (playlist |playlists)

(browse | search | show) all (song | songs| title | titles | file | files | track | tracks)

(browse | search | show) album ___

(browse | search | show) artist ___

(browse | search | show) genre ___

(browse | search | show) playlist ___

USB 2 (If Equipped)

Your vehicle may come equipped with anadditional USB port. If so, USB 1 is locatedat the front of the vehicle at the bottom ofthe instrument panel. USB 2 is locatedinside the storage compartment of thevehicle's center console.You can plug in an additional USB deviceinto the second USB port.You can access both USB devices by usingvoice commands.

To access a USB device press the voicebutton and when prompted say:

Voice command

USB 1

USB 2

Note: SYNC only supports one connectediOS (Apple) devices at a time (whicheverone you plug in first). When you connect asecond iOS device, the systems charges it,but does not support playback from it.

Bluetooth Devices and SystemSettingsYou can access these menus using theaudio display. See Using SYNC™ WithYour Phone (page 380).

403



Voice Commands for AudioSourcesYour voice system allows you to changeaudio sources with a simple voicecommand.

E142599

Press the voice button and whenprompted say:

Voice Command

(music | audio | entertainment) [system]

Below are a few examples of voicecommands you can use.

[tune [to]] AM

[tune [to]] AM1

[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |autoset)

[tune [to]] AM 2

Bluetooth (audio | stereo)

(disc | CD [player]) play

[tune [to]] FM

[tune [to]] FM1

[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |autoset)

[tune [to]] FM 2

Radio*tune [to] SAT

*Sirius

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])

Voice Command

((who's | who is) this | who plays this |(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what| which) (song | track | artist) is this |(who's | who is) playing | (what's | whatis) this)

help* If equipped.

Radio Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to the radio,press the voice button, and thensay any of the commands in the

following table.

If you are not listening to the radio,press the voice button and, after thetone, say:

Voice Command

Radio

You can then say any of the followingcommands.

[tune [to]] AM

[tune [to]] AM1

[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |autoset)

[tune [to]] AM 2

[tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])

[tune [to]] AM preset ___

[tune [to]] AM1 preset ___

[tune [to]] FM

[tune [to]] FM1

[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |autoset) preset ___

404



Voice Command

[tune [to]] FM 2

[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM])

[tune [to]] FM preset ___*FM ___ HD ___

[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___*HD ___

[tune [to]] preset ___

Tune

help* If equipped.

Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands(If equipped)

E142599

To listen to Sirius satellite radio,press the voice button and, afterthe tone, say:

Voice Commands

Sirius

When you are listening to Siriussatellite radio, you can press the voicebutton, and say any of the commandsin the following table.

Voice Commands

tune [to] SAT

[tune [to]] SAT 1

[tune [to]] SAT 2

[tune [to]] SAT 3

[tune [to]] preset ___

[tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___

Voice Commands



tune [to] [Sirius]

Help

You can say thechannel number (0-233) to listen to that

Sirius station.

[tune [to]] Sirius[channel] ___

CD Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to a CD, pressthe voice button, and then sayany of the commands in the

following table.

If you are not listening to a CD, pressthe voice button and, after the tone,say:

Voice Command

(disc | CD [player]) play

You can then say any of the followingcommands.

pause

play

[play] next track

[play] previous track

[play | change to] track [number] ___

repeat (track | song) [on]

repeat folder [on]

repeat off

(shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks |songs) [on]]

405



Voice Command

(shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] |disc) [on]

(shuffle | random | mix) folder [on]

shuffle off

SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTINGYour SYNC system is easy to use. However,should questions arise, see the tablesbelow.

Use the website at any time to check yourphone's compatibility, register youraccount and set preferences as well asaccess a customer representative via anonline chat (during certain hours). Visitwww.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca for moreinformation.

Phone issues

Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue

Review your phone's manualabout audio adjustments.

The audio control settingson your phone may be

affecting SYNC perform-ance.

There is excessive back-ground noise during a phone

call.

Try turning off the device,resetting the device,

removing the device'sbattery, then trying again.

This may be a possiblephone malfunction.

During a call, I can hear theother person but they

cannot hear me.

Go to the website to reviewyour phone's compatibility.

This is a phone-dependentfeature.

SYNC is not able to down-load my phonebook.

Try turning off the device,resetting the device orremoving the device's

battery, then trying again.

Try pushing your phonebookcontacts to SYNC by usingthe Add Contacts feature.This may be a possible

phone malfunction. Use the SYNCmyphonefeature available on the

website.

Try pushing your phonebookcontacts to SYNC by usingthe Add Contacts feature.

This may be a limitation onyour phone's capability.

The system says PhonebookDownloaded but the

phonebook in SYNC isempty or missing contacts.

406



Phone issues


If the missing contacts arestored on your SIM card, trymoving them to the device

memory.

Remove any pictures orspecial ring tones associ-

ated with the missingcontact.

Depending upon your phone,you may have to grant SYNCpermission to access your

phonebook contacts. Makesure to confirm when

prompted by your phoneduring the phonebook

download.



I am having troubleconnecting my phone to

SYNC.

Try turning off the device,resetting the device orremoving the device's


Try deleting your devicefrom SYNC, deleting SYNCfrom your device and trying

again.

Check the security and autoaccept and prompt alwayssettings relative to the SYNC

Bluetooth connection onyour phone.


Update your device's firm-ware.

407



Phone issues


Turn off the Auto phone-book download setting.



Text messaging is notworking on SYNC. Try turning off the device,

resetting the device orremoving the device's



USB and media issues


Try turning off the device,resetting the device,

removing the device'sbattery, then trying again.

This may be a possibledevice malfunction.

I am having troubleconnecting my device.

Make sure you are using themanufacturer's cable.

Make sure you insert theUSB cable correctly into the

device and the USB port.

Make sure that the devicedoes not have an auto-

install program or activesecurity settings.

Make sure you are notleaving the device in yourvehicle during very hot or

cold temperatures.This is a device limitation.

SYNC does not recognizemy device when I turn on the

car.

Review the device compatib-ility chart on the SYNC

website to confirm yourphone supports the

Bluetooth audio streamingfunction.


Bluetooth audio does notstream.

408



USB and media issues


Make sure you correctlyconnect the device to SYNC,and that you have pressed

play on your device.The device is not connected.

Make sure that all songdetails are populated.

Your music files may notcontain the correct artist,song title, album or genre

information.SYNC does not recognize

music that is on my device. The file may be corrupted.

Some devices require you tochange the USB settings

from mass storage to MTPclass.

The song may have copy-right protection, which does

not allow it to play.

Voice command issues


Review the phone voicecommands and the media

voice commands at thebeginning of their respective

sections.

You may be using the wrongvoice commands.

SYNC does not understandwhat I am saying. After pressing the voice icon,

wait until after the tonesounds and Listening

appears before saying acommand. Any command

spoken before this does notregister with the system.

You may be speaking toosoon or at the wrong time.

Review the media voicecommands at the beginning

of the media section.You may be using the wrong

voice commands.SYNC does not understandthe name of a song or artist.

409





Say the song or artistexactly as listed. If you say

"Play Artist Prince", thesystem does not play musicby Prince and the Revolution

or Prince and the NewPower Generation.

You may be saying thename differently than the

way you saved it.Make sure you are saying the

complete title, such as"California remix featuring

Jennifer Nettles".

If the song titles are in allCAPS, you have to spell

them. LOLA requires you tosay "L-O-L-A".The system may not be

reading the name the sameway you are saying it. Do not use special charac-

ters in the title. The systemdoes not recognize them.

Review the Phone voicecommands at the beginning

of the phone section.

You may be using the wrongvoice commands.

SYNC does not understandor is calling the wrong

contact when I want tomake a call.

Make sure you are saying thecontacts exactly as they are

listed. For example, if yousave a contact as JoeWilson, say "Call Joe

Wilson".

Using the SYNC phonemenu, open the phonebook

and scroll to the nameSYNC is having trouble

understanding. SYNC willread the name to you, giving

you some idea of thepronunciation SYNC is

expecting.

You may be saying thename differently than the

way you saved it.

410





The system works better ifyou list full names, such as

"Joe Wilson" rather than"Joe".

The system may not bereading the name the same

way you are saying it.

Do not use special charac-ters, such as 123 or ICE, as

the system does not recog-nize them.

Contacts in your phonebookmay be very short and

similar, or they may containspecial characters.

If a contact is in CAPS, youhave to spell it. JAKE

requires you to say "Call J-A-K-E".

Your phonebook contactsmay be in CAPS.

AppLink issues


Ensure you have a compat-ible smartphone; an Androidwith OS 2.3 or higher or aniPhone 3GS or newer with

iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-ally, ensure your phone isAn AppLink capable phone

is not connected to SYNC.

AppLink Mobile Applica-tions: When I select "Find

New Apps," SYNC does notfind any applications.

paired and connected toSYNC in order to find

AppLink-capable apps onyour device. iPhone users

must also connect toSYNC's USB port with an

Apple USB cable.

Ensure you have down-loaded and installed thelatest version of the app

from your phone's app store.Ensure the app is running on

your phone. Some apps

AppLink-enabled apps arenot installed and running on

your mobile device.My phone is connected, butI still cannot find any apps.

require you to register or

411



AppLink issues


login on the app on thephone before using themwith AppLink. Also, somemay have a "Ford SYNC"

setting, so check the app'ssettings menu on the phone.

Closing and restarting appsmay help SYNC find theapplication if you cannot

discover it inside the vehicle.On an Android device, if

apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'

Sometime apps do notproperly close and re-opentheir connection to SYNC,

over ignition cycles, forexample.

My phone is connected, myapp(s) are running, but I still

cannot find any apps.

option, select that thenrestart the app. If the appdoes not have that option,

you can also manually"Force Close" the app by

going to the phone's settingsmenu, selecting 'Apps.' then

finding the particular appand choosing 'Force stop.'Don't forget to restart the

app afterwards, then select"Find New Apps" on SYNC.

On an iPhone with iOS7+, toforce close an app, doubletab the home button then

swipe up on the app to closeit. Tab the home button

again, then select the appagain to restart it. After a

few seconds, the app shouldthen appear in SYNC's

Mobile App's Menu.

Reset the Bluetooth on yourphone by turning it off and

then turning Bluetooth backon. If you are in your vehicle,

SYNC should be able toautomatically re-connect toyour phone if you press the

"Phone" button.

There is a Bluetooth bug onsome older versions of theAndroid operating systemthat may cause apps that

were found on your previousvehicle drive to not be foundagain if you have not turned

off Bluetooth.

My Android phone isconnected, my app(s) arerunning, I restarted them,but I still cannot find any

apps.

412



AppLink issues


Unplug the USB cable fromthe phone, wait a moment,

and plug the USB cableback in to the phone. After afew seconds, the app should

appear in SYNC's MobileApps Menu. If not, "Force

Close" the application andrestart it.

The USB connection toSYNC may need to be reset.

My iPhone phone isconnected, my app is

running, I restarted the appbut I still cannot find it on

SYNC.

Try increasing the Bluetoothvolume of the device by

using the device's volumecontrol buttons which aremost often found on the

side of the device.

The bluetooth volume onthe phone may be low.

I have an Android phone. Ifound and started my mediaapp on SYNC, but there is nosound or the sound is very

low.

Force close or uninstall theapps you do not want SYNCto find. If the app has a "FordSYNC" setting, disable thatsetting in the app's settings

menu on the phone.

Some Android devices havea limited number of

bluetooth ports apps canuse to connect. If you havemore AppLink apps on yourphone than the number ofavailable Bluetooth ports,you will not see all of your

apps listed in SYNC's mobileapps menu.

I can only see some of theAppLink apps running on my

phone listed in SYNC'sMobile Apps Menu.

SYNC System Reset

The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed ifthe function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality andwill not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Powerbutton. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for thereset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC

system.

413



GENERAL INFORMATION


Getting to Know Your SystemThe SYNC 3 system allows you to interactwith a variety of features using thetouchscreen and voice commands. Byintegrating with your Bluetooth enabledphone, the touchscreen provides easyinteraction with audio, multimedia, climatecontrol, navigation, and your phone's SYNC3 compatible apps.

Using the TouchscreenTo operate the touchscreen, you cansimply touch the item or option that youwant to select. The button changes colorwhen you select it.The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quicklyselect the feature you wish to use.

E269856

414


SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem

This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to currentsystem activities including climate settings, voicecommands and phone functions such as text messages.

Status BarA

This button is available on the main screens. Pressing ittakes you to the home screen view.

HomeB

This shows the current time. You can set the clock manuallyor have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. SeeSettings (page 463).

ClockC

This displays the current outside temperature.OutsideTemperature

D

You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select afeature.

Feature BarE

The touchscreen allows you quick accessto all of your comfort, navigation,communication and entertainmentoptions. Using the status and feature baryou can quickly select the feature you wantto use.Note: Your system is equipped with afeature that allows you to access andcontrol audio features for 10 minutes afteryou switch the ignition off (and no doorsopen).

The Status BarAdditional icons also display in the statusbar depending on market, vehicle optionsand current operation. If a feature is notactive, the icon does not display. Certainicons may move to the left or rightdepending on what options are active.

415



E270077

i

DescriptionItemCallout

This shows the temperature the driver selects throughthe climate control system.

Driver Temper-ature

A

When you activate the heated steering wheel optionon the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displayswhen there is not a physical button for the heatedsteering wheel.

Heated steeringwheel

B

(If equipped)

When the passenger's temperature has beenadjusted and is no longer linked to the driver'stemperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off andthe temperatures are linked, the passenger'stemperature does not display.

PassengerTemperature

C

This icon displays when your phone's microphone ismuted. A caller cannot hear you.

Microphone MuteD

This icon displays when the audio system is muted.MuteE

416



DescriptionItemCallout

This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a softwareupdate. Pressing the icon shows more details aboutthe new software.

DownloadF

This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.Wi-FiG

An available Wi-Fi network is within range.Wi-Fi in RangeH

This icon displays the phone signal strength and theroaming signal strength.

Signal StrengthI

This icon displays when you receive a text messageon your phone.

Text MessageJ

This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off andyour phone is connected to SYNC.

911 Assist OffK

This icon displays when a phone call is active.In-CallL

Messages may also appear in the statusbar to provide you with notifications. Youcan select the message to view theassociated feature.

Feature Bar

FunctionsFeature Bar Item

Allows you to control the media playing inyour vehicle. You can control all audiofeatures including AM, FM and satelliteradio, CDs, and media streaming over aBluetooth device or through a USBconnection.

Audio

Allows you to adjust the temperature, fanspeed and airflow within the vehicle.

Climate

Allows you to make calls, receive calls, andaccess the phonebook of your connecteddevice.

Phone

Allows you to see your vehicle's location ona virtual road map, get driving directions toyour destination and find points of interestalong your route.

Navigation

(If equipped)

417



FunctionsFeature Bar Item

Connect and control SYNC 3 compatibleapps running on your iphone or androiddevice. Also, access built-in additionalfeatures such as SiriusXM Traffic and TravelLink (if equipped).

Apps

If your vehicle is a hybrid, plug-in hybrid, orelectric this is also where your settings andpower information is located.

You can customize your system withvarious settings for the touchscreen display,feature preferences, and how you want tointeract with your vehicle.

Settings

Cleaning the TouchscreenYou can remove fingerprints with a dry,clean, soft cloth.If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,apply a small amount of alcohol to thecloth and try to clean it again.Note: Do not use detergent or any type ofsolvent to clean the touchscreen.Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto thetouchscreen.

Using Voice RecognitionUsing voice commands allows you to keepyour hands on the wheel and focus onwhat is in front of you. The system providesfeedback through audible tones, prompts,questions and spoken confirmationsdepending on the situation and the chosenlevel of interaction (voice settings).

The system also asks short questions(confirmation prompts) when it is not sureof your request or when there are multiplepossible responses to your request.When using voice commands, words andicons may appear in the status barindicating the status of the voice commandsession. See Using Voice Recognition(page 427).

Accessing and Adjusting ModesThrough Your Vehicle InformationDisplay (If Equipped)

Depending on your vehicle and selectedoptions you may be able to control someof the SYNC 3 features on your informationdisplay.You can make the following adjustmentsusing the information display SYNC 3screen:

InformationOption

Information for current audio playing.Entertain-ment

Select source.

View current road and speed limit (if information is available).Naviga-tion

418



InformationOption

View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on clusterlevel), distance to destination (depending on cluster level), and ability tocancel route.

If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass isshown.

If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting:1Phone

Missed callsOutgoing callsIncoming callsAll calls

If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display.

If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-handsteering wheel controls.

1 Depending on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display.

Use the OK and arrow buttons on the rightside of your steering wheel to scrollthrough the available modes.The selection menu expands and differentoptions appear.• Press the up and down arrows to scroll

through the modes.• Press the right arrow to enter the mode,

use the left arrow to exit the mode.• Press the up and down arrows to make

adjustments within the chosen mode.• Press OK to confirm your selection.Note: If your vehicle is not equipped withnavigation, compass appears in the displayinstead of navigation. If you press the rightarrow to go into the compass menu, you cansee the compass graphic. The compassdisplays the direction in which the vehicleis traveling, not true direction (for example,if the vehicle is traveling west, the middleof the compass graphic displays west; northdisplays to the left of west though its truedirection is to the right of west).

Using the Controls on the SteeringWheelDepending on your vehicle and optionpackage, you can use different controls onyour steering wheel to interact with thetouchscreen system in different ways.VOL: Control the volume of audio output.Mute: Mute the audio output.Voice: Press to start a voice session. Pressagain to stop the voice prompt andimmediately begin speaking. Press andhold to end a voice session.SEEK NEXT:• While in radio mode, press to seek

between memory presets.• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD

mode, press to seek between songs orpress and hold to fast seek.

SEEK PREVIOUS:• While in radio mode, press to seek

between memory presets.• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD

mode, press to seek between songs orpress and hold to fast seek.

419



PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a callor switch between calls.PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call orreject an incoming call.Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT maybe combined with PHONE REJECT andSEEK PREVIOUS may be combined withPHONE ACCEPT.M: Touch the control repeatedly to switchbetween media sources (modes).See Steering Wheel (page 77).

Using the Controls on the BezelDepending on your vehicle and optionpackage, you may also have these controlson your instrument panel:• Power: Switch the audio system on

and off.• VOL: Control the volume of playing

audio.• Seek and Tune: Use as you normally

would in audio modes.• Eject: Eject a CD from the audio

system.• SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly

to advance through available mediamodes.

• SOUND: Press to access the Soundmenu where you can adjust sound andother audio settings.

• 1-6: Press and hold to store or press toselect an AM, FM or SIRIUS memorypreset. See Audio System (page 362).

• DISP: Switch the display on or off. Youcan also touch the screen to switch thedisplay back on.

• Temperature, fan and climatecontrol buttons: Control thetemperature, fan speed or settings ofthe climate control system. SeeClimate Control (page 129).

911 Assist (If Equipped)

WARNING: Unless the 911 Assistsetting is set on before a crash, thesystem will not dial for help which coulddelay response time, potentiallyincreasing the risk of serious injury ordeath after a crash.

WARNING: Do not wait for 911Assist to make an emergency call if youcan do it yourself. Dial emergencyservices immediately to avoid delayedresponse time which could increase therisk of serious injury or death after acrash. If you do not hear 911 Assist withinfive seconds of the crash, the system orphone may be damaged ornon-functional.

WARNING: Always place yourphone in a secure location in your vehicleso it does not become a projectile or getdamaged in a crash. Failure to do so maycause serious injury to someone ordamage the phone which could prevent911 Assist from working properly.

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must beset on before the incident.Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature onlyoperates in the U.S., Canada or in a territoryin which 911 is the emergency number.Note: Before setting this feature on, makesure that you read the 911 Assist PrivacyNotice later in this section for importantinformation.Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,that setting applies for all paired phones. If911 Assist is switched off and the phone isconnected to SYNC, an icon displays on thestatus bar.

420



Note: Every phone operates differently.While SYNC 911 Assist works with mostcellular phones, some may have troubleusing this feature.If a crash deploys an airbag (excludingknee airbags and rear inflatable safetybelts [if equipped]) or activates the fuelpump shut-off, your SYNC-equippedvehicle may be able to contact emergencyservices by dialing 911 through a paired andconnected Bluetooth enabled phone. Youcan learn more about the 911 Assistfeature, by visiting:

Website

www.owner.ford.comwww.syncmyride.cawww.syncmaroute.ca

For important information about airbagdeployment and the fuel pump shut-offplease see the Supplementary Restrainsand Roadside Emergencies sections ofyour owner manual.To switch 911 Assist on and off please viewthe settings information. See Settings(page 463).To make sure that 911 Assist workscorrectly:• SYNC must be powered and working

properly at the time of the incident andthroughout feature activation and use.

• The 911 Assist feature must be set onbefore the incident.

• You must pair and connect a Bluetoothenabled and compatible cell phone toSYNC.

• A connected Bluetooth enabled phonemust have the ability to make andmaintain an outgoing call at the timeof the incident.

• A connected Bluetooth enabled phonemust have adequate network coverage,battery power and signal strength.

• The vehicle must have battery powerand be located in the U.S., Canada orin a territory in which 911 is theemergency number.

In the Event of a CrashNot all crashes will deploy an airbag oractivate the fuel pump shut-off (thetriggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cellphone sustains damage or loses itsconnection to SYNC during a crash, SYNCwill search for and try to connect to apreviously paired cell phone; SYNC willthen attempt to call the emergencyservices.Before making the call:• SYNC provides a short window of time

(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.If you fail to cancel the call, SYNCattempts to dial 911.

• SYNC says the following, or a similarmessage: "SYNC will attempt to call911, to cancel the call, press Cancel onyour screen or press and hold thephone button on your steering wheel."

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNCmakes a successful call, a pre-recordedmessage plays for the 911 operator, andthen the occupant(s) in your vehicle is ableto talk with the operator. Be prepared toprovide your name, phone number andlocation immediately, because not all 911systems are capable of receiving thisinformation electronically.

421



911 Assist May Not Work If• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist

hardware sustains damage in a crash.• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC

system has no power.• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle

are the ones paired and connected tothe system.

911 Assist Privacy NoticeWhen you switch on 911 Assist, it maydisclose to emergency services that yourvehicle has been in a crash involving thedeployment of an airbag or activation ofthe fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions orupdates to 911 Assist may also be capableof electronically or verbally disclosing to911 operators your vehicle location or otherdetails about your vehicle or crash to assist911 operators to provide the mostappropriate emergency services. If you donot want to disclose this information, donot switch the feature on.

Safety Information


• Do not attempt to service or repair thesystem. Have an authorized dealercheck your vehicle.

• Do not operate playing devices if thepower cords or cables are broken, splitor damaged. Place cords and cablesout of the way, so they do not interferewith the operation of pedals, seats,compartments or safe driving abilities.

• Do not leave playing devices in yourvehicle during extreme conditions as itcould cause them damage. See yourdevice's user guide for furtherinformation.

• For your safety, some SYNC 3 functionsare speed-dependent. Their use islimited to when your vehicle is travelingat speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Makesure that you review your device'smanual before using it with SYNC 3.

Speed-restricted FeaturesSome features of this system may be toodifficult to use while your vehicle is movingso they are restricted from use unless yourvehicle is stationary.• Screens crowded with information,

such as Point of Interest reviews andratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Linksports scores, movie times or skiconditions.

• Any action that requires you to use akeyboard is restricted, such as enteringa navigation destination or editinginformation.

• All lists are limited so the user can viewfewer entries (such as phone contactsor recent phone call entries).

See the following table for more specificexamples.

422



Restricted features

Pairing a Bluetooth phone.Cellular Phone

Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts andrecent phone calls.

Editing the keypad code.System Functionality

Enabling Valet Mode.

Editing settings while the rear view camera or active parkassist are active.

Editing Wi-Fi settings.Wi-Fi

Editing the list of wireless networks.

Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.

Viewing received text messages.Text Messages

Using the keyboard to enter a destination.Navigation

Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or AvoidAreas.

Creating a SYNC Owner AccountWhy do I need a SYNC owner account?• Essential for keeping up with the latest

software and connected features.• Access to customer support for any

questions you may have.• Maintain account permissions.Visit the website to sign up and register.

Website

www.owner.ford.comwww.syncmyride.ca

Website

www.syncmaroute.ca

FordPass™ Connect (If Equipped)

With a FordPass-equipped vehicle, you canuse FordPass to track your vehicle’slocation and remotely access vehiclefeatures such as start, lock and unlock andvehicle status including fuel level andapproximate mileage. You can alsoschedule specific times to remotely startyour vehicle so it’s ready to hit the road assoon as you are. FordPass is availablethrough a free download via the Apple AppStore® or Google Play™. Message anddata rates may apply. Services may belimited by mobile phone network coveragearea.

423



Updating Your SystemYou can choose to download the updateonto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliverautomatic updates.

USB UpdatesTo use the USB update you need to loginto your owner account and visit the SYNCsoftware update page.

Website

www.owner.ford.comwww.syncmyride.cawww.syncmaroute.ca

The website notifies you if an update isavailable. You can then select to downloadthe update.You will need an empty USB drive. Pleasecheck the website for minimumrequirements. Once you have inserted theUSB drive into your computer, choose tostart the download. Follow the instructionsprovided to download the files to the USBdrive.The installation of most files occurs in thebackground, and does not interrupt youruse of the system. Navigation updatescannot be installed in the background,because the files are too large.To install the update in your vehicle,remove anything that is plugged in the USBports on the media hub and plug in theUSB drive containing the update. Whenthe USB drive is plugged in, the installationshould begin immediately. After asuccessful installation, the update isavailable the next time the vehicle isstarted.Please reference the website for anyfurther actions.

Updating Over Wi-FiTo update your System over Wi-Fi yourvehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fiaccess point. Data rates may apply.

To connect your system to Wi-Fi,select:

Menu Item

Settings

Wi-Fi

You can then select yourWi-Fi network. You mayhave to enter the securitycode if the network issecured. The systemconfirms when it hasconnected to the network.

AvailableWi-FiNetworks

You must also give the system permissionto update automatically. Upon vehicledelivery, the System asks you if you wouldlike to use the automatic update feature.If you agree to automatic updates, you canpress OK to confirm. If this selection doesnot appear upon vehicle delivery you canaccess it through the General Settings. SeeSettings (page 463). You can also performa master reset. See SYNC™ 3Troubleshooting (page 477).

424



If you would like to switch this featureon later, select:

Menu Item

Settings

General

From this menu, you canenable automatic updates.If you have not done soalready, the systemprompts you to set up aWi-Fi connection when youenable this feature.

AutomaticSystemUpdates

When the system is connected via Wi-Fiand automatic updates are enabled, yoursystem checks for software updatesperiodically. If a new version is available, itdownloads at that time. Softwaredownloads can take place for up to 30minutes after you have switched yourvehicle off. The updates do not interruptthe normal use of your SYNC 3 system. Ifa download does not complete for anyreason, the download continues where itleft off at the next Wi-Fi connectedopportunity. Upon activation of an update,a banner displays on the touchscreenindicating the system update. Select theicon to see more detail. This icon displaysfor two ignition cycles.

To switch this feature off:

Menu Item

Settings

General

In this menu selection, youcan change the selectionfor automatic updates toOFF.

AutomaticSystemUpdates

Customer AssistanceThe SYNC support team is available tohelp you with any questions you are notable to answer on your own.Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.United States: 1-800-392-3673.Canada: 1-800-565-3673.Mexico: 01-800-719-8466.Times are subject to change due toholidays.

Privacy InformationWhen you connect a cellular phone toSYNC 3, the system creates a profile withinyour vehicle that links to that cellularphone. This profile helps in offering youmore cellular features and operating moreefficiently. Among other things, this profilemay contain data about your cellularphone book, text messages (read andunread), and call history, including historyof calls when your cell phone was notconnected to the system. In addition, if youconnect a media device, the systemcreates and retains an index of supportedmedia content. The system also records ashort diagnostic log of approximately 10minutes of all recent system activity. Thelog profile and other system data may beused to improve the system and helpdiagnose any problems that may occur.The cellular profile, media device index,and diagnostic log remain in your vehicleunless you delete them and are generallyaccessible only in your vehicle when thecellular phone or media player isconnected.If you no longer plan to use the system oryour vehicle, we recommend you performa Master Reset to erase all storedinformation. You can find more informationabout the Master Reset in GeneralSettings. See Settings (page 463). System

425



data cannot be accessed without specialequipment and access to your vehicle'sSYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company,Ford of Canada and The Lincoln MotorCompany do not access the system datafor any purpose other than as describedabsent consent, a court order, or where

required by law enforcement, othergovernment authorities, or other thirdparties acting with lawful authority. Otherparties may seek to access the informationindependently of Ford Motor Company,Ford of Canada and The Lincoln MotorCompany.

HOME SCREEN

E224962

Home screen displayTileItem

Shows the active media source.AudioA

426



Home screen displayTileItem

If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space containsthe compass.

The name of the connected phone appears on the screen.The status of the phone features also appear. This includessignal strength, battery charge, text messaging androaming.

PhoneB

This map displays your current location or current route inreal time.

Navigation *C

When you have navigation active, you also see the nextturn and the length of time and distance to your destina-tion.If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space containsthe audio information.

* If equipped.

You can touch any of the feature displaysto access that feature.Anytime you select the home button, thesystem returns you to this screen.

USING VOICE RECOGNITIONThe SYNC 3 system allows you to use voicecommands, to control features like audioand climate controls. By using voicecommands, you can keep your hands onthe wheel and your eyes on the road.

You can access each feature controlled bySYNC 3 through a variety of commands.

E142599

To activate the SYNC 3 voicecommands push the voicebutton on the steering wheel and

wait for the prompt.

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it canbe the name of anything, such as artist, thename of contact or number. The contextand the description of the command tellyou what to say for this dynamic option.There are some commands that work forevery feature, these commands are:


Brings you to the main menu.Main Menu

Returns you to the previous screen.Go back

Ends the voice session.Cancel

Gives you a list of possible voice commands.List of Commands

You can name any feature and the system gives a list ofcommands available for the feature. For example, you couldsay:

___ List of Commands

427




Phone List of Commands

Navigation List of Commands

You can use this command to view the next page of options onany screen where multiple pages of choices are given.

Next Page

You can use this command to view the previous page of optionson any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.

Previous Page

Gives you available commands you can use on the currentscreen.

Help

Included here are some of the mostpopular commands for each SYNC 3feature.

Audio Voice Commands___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that foraudio voice commands it can be the nameof a Sirius channel or a channel number, aradio frequency number, or the name of anartist, album, song or a genre.

To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:

DescriptionVoice command

You can say the Sirius channel name or numbersuch as "Sirius channel 16".

1Sirius Channel ___

You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".

Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AMfrequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580".

AM ___

FM ___

Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequencysuch as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.

1FM ___ HD ___

Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetoothconnected device.

Bluetooth Audio

Allows you to listen to music on your USBconnected device.

USB

For USB audio only, you can say the name of anartist, album, song or a genre to listen to thatselection. Your system must finish indexingbefore this option is available. For example, youcould say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,Penny Lane".

Play Genre ___

Play Playlist ___

Play Artist ___

Play Album ___

428




Play Podcast ___

Play Song ___

Play Audiobook ___

For USB audio only, you can say the name of anartist, album, or a genre to browse by that selec-tion. Your system must finish indexing before thisoption is available. For example you can say"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".

Browse ___

1 This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.

Climate Voice CommandsYou can control the temperature of thevehicle using voice commands.

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that forclimate voice commands it can be thedesired degrees for the temperaturesetting.

To adjust the temperature, say:


Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F(15.5–29.5°C).

Set Temperature ___

Phone Voice CommandsPairing a PhoneYou can use voice commands to connectyour Bluetooth enabled phone to thesystem.

To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:


Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairingprocess. See Settings (page 463).

Pair Phone

Making Calls___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that forphone voice commands it can be the nameof the contact you wish to call or the digitsyou want to dial.

429



Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:


Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebooksuch as "Call Jenny".

Call ___

Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebookat a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".

Call ___ at ___

Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.Dial ___

Please make sure that you are saying thecontact name exactly as it appears in yourcontact list.

Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the followingcommands:

DescriptionVoice Command

If you did not enter the full number with the first command, youcan continue saying the number.

<0-9>

Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.Dial

Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits you state.Delete

Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.Clear

Text Message Voice Commands

To access text message options, press the voice button and say:


Listen to Message

You can say the number of the message youwould like to hear.

Listen to text message ___

Reply to Message

430



Navigation Voice Commands (If

Equipped)

Setting a DestinationYou can use any of the followingcommands to set a destination or find a

point of interest.___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that fornavigation voice commands it can be a POIcategory or a major brand name, wheremajor brand name is a chain with morethan 20 locations

You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interestby category:


Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You canalso search for an address in a specific state or province.

Find an Address

State the name of the POI category or major brand name youwould like to search for such as "Find restaurants".

Find a ___

Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.Find a POI

Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.Find an Intersection

State the name of a POI category or major brand name you wouldlike to search for.

Find the Nearest<POI Category>

Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.Show PreviousDestinations

Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.Show Favorites

Allows you to route to your home address.Drive Home

Allows you to route to your work address.Drive to Work

In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:


Cancels the current route.Cancel Route

Allows you to select an alternate route.Detour

Repeats the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction

Displays the active route.Show Route

Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.Route Summary

431




Provides current location.Where Am I

Allows you to zoom in on the map.Zoom in

Allows you to zoom out from the map.Zoom out

Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)

The following voice commands are always available:


SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it onSYNC 3.

Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.List Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running onyour mobile device.

Find Mobile Apps

There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected toSYNC 3:


At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start themobile app on SYNC 3.

Say the name of anapp

SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specifiedapp if the app is running on SYNC 3.

Say the name of anapp, followed byhelp

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel LinkVoice Commands (If Equipped)

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may notbe available in all markets. Activation anda subscription are required.

432



You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:


Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show Traffic

Displays the current weather map.Show Weather Map

Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel Prices

Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5 Day Fore-cast

Help

Voice Settings CommandsYou can say the following commands to access the voice settings:


Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.Voice Settings

Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.Interaction ModeStandard

Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.Interaction ModeAdvanced

Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.Call Confirmation On

The system does not confirm before placing a call.Call Confirmation Off

The system displays a short list of available commands.Voice Command Lists On

The system does not display the list of commands.Voice Command Lists Off

You can use the volume control to adjustthe volume of the system voice prompts.While prompt is active, adjust the volumecontrol up or down to your desired setting.

Note: Depending on the current climatecontrol settings, the fan speed mayautomatically go down while issuing voicecommands or while making and receivingphone calls via SYNC to reduce the amountof background noise in the vehicle. The fanspeed will automatically return to normaloperation once the voice session ends. Youcan adjust the fan speed during a voicesession, simply press the fan buttons (orturn the fan knob) to increase or decreasethe fan speed to the setting you prefer.

433



To disable this automatic fan speedreduction feature during voice sessions,press and hold the climate control AC andRecirculated air buttons simultaneously,release and then increase fan speed within2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeatthe above sequence.

ENTERTAINMENT

E242502

Message and DescriptionMessage

SourcesA

Direct TuneB

PresetsC

434



Note: Your vehicle may allow you to savepresets from different audio sources on thesame page.You can access these options using thetouchscreen or voice commands.

SourcesPress this button to select the source ofmedia you want to listen to.

Menu Item

AM

FM1SIRIUS

1CD

The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB

Bluetooth Stereo

If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, theydisplay here as individual source selections.

Apps

1 This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.

AM/FM RadioTuning a StationYou can use the tune or seek controls onthe radio bezel to select a station.

To tune a station using thetouchscreen, select:

Menu Item

Direct Tune

A pop up appears, allowing you to type inthe frequency of a station. You can onlyenter a valid station for the source you arecurrently listening to.You can press the backspace button todelete the previously entered number.

Once you have entered the station'scall numbers, you can select:


Menu Item

Press to beginplaying the stationyou have entered.

Enter

Press to exitwithout changingthe station.

Cancel

PresetsTo set a new preset, tune to the stationand then press and hold one of thememory preset buttons. The audio mutesbriefly while the system saves the stationand then returns.

435



There are two preset banks available forAM and three banks for FM. To accessadditional presets, tap the preset button.The indicator on the preset button showswhich bank of presets you are currentlyviewing.

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (IfActivated)Note: This feature may not be available inall markets and requires an activesubscription.

E234451

SiriusXM satellite radio is asubscription-based satellite radio servicethat broadcasts a variety of music, sports,news, weather, traffic and entertainmentprogramming. Your factory-installedSiriusXM satellite radio system includeshardware and a limited subscription termthat begins on the date of sale or lease ofyour vehicle. See an authorized dealer foravailability.For more information on extendedsubscription terms (a service fee isrequired), the online media player and alist of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,and other features, please visitwww.siriusxm.com in the United States,www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or callSiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestrictedright to change, rearrange, add or deleteprogramming. This includes canceling,moving or adding particular channels, andits prices, at any time, with or without noticeto you. We are not responsible for any suchprogramming changes.Note: This receiver includes the eCosreal-time operating system. eCos ispublished under the eCos License.

The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:


Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse

A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers ofa station.

Direct Tune

Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:

The system tunes to the station you select.Enter

You exit the pop-up and the current stationcontinues to play.

Cancel

You can press the backspace button to delete the previousnumber.

436




Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned tothe current station. Changing stations erases the previousaudio.

Replay

When you are in replay mode, you are notable to select a different preset until youreturn to live audio. Pressing this buttonreturns you to the live broadcast.

Live

Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The systemalerts you when it plays again on any channel.

ALERT

Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. SeeSettings (page 463).

Memory PresetsTo set a preset, tune to the station thenpress and hold one of the memory presetbuttons. The audio mutes briefly while thesystem saves the station and returns oncethe station is stored.

There are three preset banks available forSiriusXM. To access additional presets, tapthe preset button. The indicator on thepreset button shows which bank of presetsyou are currently viewing.

Satellite Radio Electronic SerialNumber (ESN)You need your ESN to activate, modify ortrack your satellite radio account. SeeSettings (page 463).

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting


For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clearof snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and othermaterials as far away from the antenna as possible.

Antenna obstructions

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freewayoverpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-storms can interfere with your reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audiosystem may mute.

Station overload

Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-ence and the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signalinterference

437



Troubleshooting Tips

ActionCauseMessage

No action required. Thismessage should disappearshortly.

Radio requires more than twoseconds to produce audio forthe selected channel.

Acquiring Signal

If this message does not clearshortly, or with an ignition keycycle, your receiver may havea fault. See an authorizeddealer for service.

There is an internal module orsystem failure present.

Satellite antenna fault

SIRIUS system failure

Tune to another channel orchoose another preset.

The channel is no longer avail-able.

Invalid Channel

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe to thechannel, or tune to anotherchannel.

Your subscription does notinclude this channel.

Unsubscribed Channel

The signal is blocked. Whenyou move into an open area,the signal should return.

The signal is lost from the Siri-usXM satellite or SiriusXMtower to your vehicle antenna.

Satellite acquiringsignal…

No action required. Theprocess may take up to threeminutes.

Update of channel program-ming in progress.

Updating…

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve subscrip-tion issues.

Your satellite service is nolonger available.

Questions? Call 1-888-539-7474

Use the channel guide to turnoff the Lock or Skip function onthat station.

All the channels in the selectedcategory are either skipped orlocked.

None found. Checkchannel guide.

No action required.SiriusXM has updated thechannels available for yourvehicle.

SIRIUS Subscriptionupdated

HD Radio™ Information (IfAvailable)Note: This feature may not be available inall markets.

To activate HD radio, please see the RadioSettings in the Settings Chapter. SeeSettings (page 463).Note: HD Radio broadcasts are notavailable in all markets.

438



HD Radio technology is the digitalevolution of analog AM/FM radio. Yoursystem has a special receiver that allowsit to receive digital broadcasts (whereavailable) in addition to the analogbroadcasts, it already receives. Digitalbroadcasts provide a better sound qualitythan analog broadcasts with free,crystal-clear audio and no static ordistortion. For more information, and aguide to available stations andprogramming, please visit:

Website

www.hdradio.com

When HD Radio is on and you tune to astation broadcasting HD Radio technology,you may notice the following indicators onyour screen:

E142616

The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digitalstation, and then changes to orange whendigital audio is playing. When this logo isavailable, you may also see Title and Artistfields on-screen.The multicast indicator appears in FMmode (only) if the current station isbroadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.The highlighted numbers signify availabledigital channels where new or differentcontent is available. HD1 signifies the mainprogramming status and is available inanalog and digital broadcasts. Othermulticast stations (HD2 through HD7) areonly available digitally.Note: There is also an additional featurefor stations that have more than 1 HDmulticast (For example, HD1 or HD2). TheHD logo and Radio text appears as a button.Pressing this button allows you to cyclethrough all of the HD stations on thatspecific frequency. For example, if you areon 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressingthe button repeatedly causes the radio tocycle through the HD stations in a cyclicincreasing order.

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:

Action and DescriptionMessage

Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Soundreturns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digitalaudio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digitalsignal.

Presets

Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle isoutside the station’s reception area.

439



HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting


If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on thefringe of the reception area, the station may mute due toweak signal strength.

Reception area

If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to theanalog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unlessit is able to connect to the digital signal again.

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analogversion. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radiostation, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the stationquality, you may hear a slight sound change when the stationchanges from analog to digital. Blending is the shift fromanalog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.

Station blending

In order to provide the best possibleexperience, use the contact form to reportany station issues found while listening toa station broadcasting with HD Radiotechnology. Independent entities own andoperate each station. These stations areresponsible for ensuring all audio streamsand data fields are accurate.


ActionCauseIssues

No action required. This is abroadcast issue.

This is poor time alignment bythe radio broadcaster.

Echo, stutter, skip orrepeat in audio.Increase or decrease inaudio volume.

No action required. The recep-tion issue may clear up as youcontinue to drive.

The radio is shifting betweenanalog and digital audio.

Sound fading orblending in and out.

No action required. This isnormal behavior. Wait until theaudio is available.

The digital multicast is notavailable until the HD Radiobroadcast is decoded. Oncedecoded, the audio is available.

There is an audio mutedelay when selectingHD2 or HD3, multicastpreset or Direct Tune.

440




ActionCauseIssues

No action required. The stationis not available in your currentlocation.

The previously stored multicastpreset or direct tune is notavailable in your current recep-tion area.

Cannot access HD2 orHD3 multicast channelwhen recalling a presetor from a direct tune.

Fill out the station issue form.1Data service issue by the radiobroadcaster.

Text information doesnot match currentlyplaying audio.

Fill out the station issue form.1

Data service issue by the radiobroadcaster.

There is no textinformation shown forcurrently selectedfrequency.

1 You can find the form here:

Website

http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback

HD Radio Technology manufactured underlicense from iBiquity Digital Corporationand foreign patents. HD Radio and the HDand HD Radio logos are proprietarytrademarks of DTS. The vehiclemanufacturer and DTS are not responsiblefor the content sent using HD Radiotechnology. Content may be changed,added or deleted at any time at the stationowner's discretion.

CD (If equipped)Once you select this option, the systemreturns you to the main audio screen.The current audio information appears onthe screen.

The following buttons are also available:

FunctionButton

You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse

Select this button and a small number one displays to indicatethe track is set to repeat.

Repeat

441



FunctionButton

For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeatoff, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeatcurrent folder (a small folder displays).

Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk playin random order.

Shuffle

You can use the forward, reverse, pause orplay buttons to control the audio playback.

Bluetooth Stereo or USBBluetooth Stereo and USB allow you toaccess media that you store on yourBluetooth device or USB device such asmusic, audio books or podcasts.

The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:

FunctionButton

Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting throughthree modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted witha small number one).

Repeat

Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle

You can use the forward, reverse, pause orplay buttons to control the audio playback.To get more information about thecurrently playing track, press the cover artor Info button.

For some devices, SYNC 3 is able toprovide 30-second skip buttons when youlisten to audio books or podcasts. Thesebuttons allow you to skip forward orbackward within a track.While playing audio from a USB device youcan look for certain music by selecting thefollowing:

FunctionButton

If available, displays the list of tracks in theNow Playing playlist.

Browse

This option, which is available underbrowse, allows you to play all tracks or tofilter the available media into one of thebelow categories.

New Search

Play All

442



FunctionButton

Playlists

Artist

Albums

Songs

Genres

Podcasts

Audio books

Composers

This button allows you to choose a specificletter to view within the category you arebrowsing.

A-Z Jump

If available, this allows you to browse thefolders and files on your USB device.

Explore Device

USB Ports

E211463

The USB ports are in the center console orbehind a small access door in theinstrument panel.This feature allows you to plug in USBmedia devices, memory sticks, flash drivesor thumb drives, and charge devices if theysupport this feature.

Select this option to play audio from yourUSB device.

AppsThe system supports the use of certainaudio apps such as iHeartRadio through aUSB or Bluetooth enabled device.Each app gives you different on-screenoptions depending on the app's content.See Apps (page 460).

Supported Media Players, Formatsand Metadata InformationThe system is capable of hosting nearlyany digital media player, including iPod,iPhone, and most USB drives.Supported audio formats include MP3,WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.Supported audio file extensions includeMP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, andFLAC.

443



Supported USB file systems include: FAT,exFAT, and NTFS.SYNC 3 is also able to organize the mediafrom your USB device by metadata tags.Metadata tags, which are descriptivesoftware identifiers embedded in themedia files, provide information about thefile.If your indexed media files contain noinformation embedded in these metadatatags, SYNC 3 may classify the emptymetadata tags as unknown.SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10devices.

CLIMATETouch the climate button on thetouchscreen to access your climate controlfeatures.Note: You can switch temperature unitsbetween Fahrenheit and Celsius. SeeSettings (page 463).

Accessing the Climate ControlMenu

E265038

Touch the button to accessadditional controls for the frontclimate system.

Directing the AirflowTouch the button to directairflow to the windshield airvents and de-mister.

Touch the button to directairflow to the instrument panelair vents.

Touch the button to directairflow to the footwell air vents.

You can direct air through any combinationof these air vents.

Setting the Blower Motor SpeedTouch up or down to increase ordecrease the volume of air thatcirculates in your vehicle.

Setting the TemperatureTouch up or down on the left-handtemperature control to set the left-handtemperature.Note: This control also adjusts theright-hand side temperature when youswitch off dual zone mode.Touch up or down on the right-handtemperature control to set the right-handtemperature.

Switching Auto Mode On and OffTouch the button to switch onautomatic operation, then setthe temperature.

The system adjusts the blower motorspeed, air distribution, air conditioningoperation, and outside or recirculated airto reach and maintain the temperature youhave set.


A pop-up appears on the screento display the air conditioningoptions.

MAX A/C: Touch the button to activateand maximize cooling. The driver andpassenger temperatures are set to LO,recirculated air flows through theinstrument panel vents, air conditioningautomatically turns on and the fanautomatically adjusts to the highest speed.

444



A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioningon or off. Use A/C with recirculated air toimprove cooling performance andefficiency.Note: In certain conditions, such asmaximum defrost, the air conditioningcompressor may continue to operate eventhough you switch off the air conditioning.


Touch the button.

Switching the Climate ControlledSeats On and Off

E265282

Touch the button to cyclethrough the various climatecontrolled seat settings and off.


E265280

Touch the button to switch ontemperature control for theright-hand side of the vehicle.

Switching the Heated ExteriorMirrors On and Off

E266189

Touch the button.

Switching the Heated RearWindow On and Off

E184884

Touch the button to clear therear window of thin ice and fog.


Touch the button to cyclethrough the various heat settingsand off.

Switching the Heated SteeringWheel On and Off

Touch the button.


Touch the button for maximumcooling.

Recirculated air flows through theinstrument panel air vents, air conditioningturns on and the blower motor adjusts tothe highest speed.


Touch the button for maximumdefrosting.

Air flows through the windshield air vents,and the blower motor adjusts to thehighest speed.You can also use this setting to defog andclear the windshield of a thin covering ofice.Note: To prevent window fogging, youcannot select recirculated air whenmaximum defrost is on.Note: The heated rear window also turnson when you select maximum defrost.


Touch the button to switchbetween outside air andrecirculated air.

The air currently in the passengercompartment recirculates. This mayreduce the time needed to cool the interior,when used with A/C, and reduce unwantedodors from entering your vehicle.

445



Note: Recirculated air may turn off, orprevent you from switching on, in all air flowmodes except MAX A/C to reduce the riskof fogging. Recirculation may also turn onand off in various air distribution controlcombinations during hot weather to improvecooling efficiency.

Switching the Ventilated Seats Onand Off

E268558

Touch the button to cyclethrough the various ventilatedseat settings and off.

Accessing Rear Climate Controls

E270447

Touch the button to accessadditional controls for the rearclimate system.

Rear Climate Control LockIndicator

E265289

Touch the button.When on, you can only operatethe rear passenger settings

through the front controls.

Switching Rear Auto Mode On andOff

Touch the button to switch onrear automatic operation, thenset the temperature.

Switching the Rear ClimateControlled Seats On and Off

E265282

Touch the button to cyclethrough the various climatecontrolled seat settings and off.

Switching the Rear Heated SeatsOn and Off

Touch the button to cyclethrough the various heat settingsand off.

Switching the Rear VentilatedSeats On and Off

E268558

Touch the button to cyclethrough the various ventilatedseat settings and off.

PHONE


Hands-free calling is one of the mainfeatures of the system. Once you pair yourcell phone, you can access many optionsusing the touchscreen or voice commands.While the system supports a variety offeatures, many are dependent on your cellphone’s functionality.

Pairing Your Cell Phone for theFirst TimePair your Bluetooth enabled phone withthe system before using the functions inhands-free mode.

446



Switch on Bluetooth on your device tobegin pairing. See your phone’s manual ifnecessary.

To add a phone, select:

Menu Item

Add a Bluetooth Device

1. Follow the on-screen instructions.2. A prompt alerts you to search for the

system on your phone.3. Select your vehicle on your phone.4. Confirm that the six-digit number

appearing on your phone matches thesix-digit number on the touchscreen.

5. The touchscreen indicates when thepairing is successful.

6. Your phone may prompt you to givethe system permission to accessinformation. To check your phone’scompatibility, see your phone’s manualor visit the website.

Alternatively, to add a phone, select:

Menu Item

Add a Bluetooth Device

Then select:

Discover Other Bluetooth Devices

1. Follow the on-screen instructions.2. Select your phone's name when it

appears on the touchscreen.3. Confirm that the six-digit number




At a minimum, most cell phones withBluetooth wireless technology support thefollowing functions:• Answering an incoming call.• Ending a call.• Dialing a number.• Call waiting notification.• Caller identification.Other features, such as text messagingusing Bluetooth and automatic phonebookdownload, are phone-dependent features.

Phone MenuThis menu becomes available after pairinga phone.

447



E251249

G


Displays your recent calls.RecentCall List

AYou can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop downmenu at the top of the screen. You can choose:

MissedOutgoingIncomingAll

All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabet-ical order.

ContactsB

Selecting this button allowsyou to choose a specific letterto view.

A-Z Jump

Displays the name of your phone and takes you to thephone settings options.

PhoneSettings

C

From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ringtones and alerts.

448




Gives you access to the list of paired or connectedBluetooth devices allowing you to change or select adevice.

ChangeDevice

D

Displays all recent text messages.TextMessages

E

Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.PhoneKeypad

FUse the backspace button to delete numbers.

Press this button to begin acall.

Call

Touch this button to reject all incoming calls automatic-ally. Text message notifications do not display on thescreen. All ringtones and alerts are set to silent.

Do NotDisturb

G

Users with phones having voice servicesmay see a button to access the feature.For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.A press and hold of the voice button on thesteering wheel also accesses this feature.

Making CallsThere are many ways to make calls fromthe SYNC 3 system, including using voicecommands. See Using VoiceRecognition (page 427). You can use thetouchscreen to place calls as well.

449



To call a number in your contacts,select:


You can then select thename of the contact youwant to call. Any numbersstored for that contactdisplay along with anystored contact photos. Youcan then select thenumber that you want tocall. The system begins thecall.

Contacts

To call a number from your recent calls,select:


You can then select anentry that you want to call.The system begins the call.

Recent CallList

To call a number that is not stored inyour phone, select:


Select the digits of thenumber you wish to call.

PhoneKeypad

The system begins the call.Call

Pressing the backspace button deletes thelast digit you typed.

Receiving CallsDuring an incoming call, an audible tonesounds. Caller information appears in thedisplay if it is available.

To accept the call, select:

Menu Item

AcceptNote: You can also accept the call bypressing the phone button on the steeringwheel.

To reject the call, select:

Menu Item

RejectNote: You can also reject the call bypressing the phone button on the steeringwheel.

Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3logs it as a missed call.

During a Phone CallDuring a phone call, the contacts nameand number display on the screen alongwith the call duration.The phone status items are also visible:• Signal Strength.• Battery.You can select any of the following duringan active phone call:

450



Item

Immediately end aphone call. You canalso press thebutton on thesteering wheel.

End Call

Press this to accessthe phone keypad.

Keypad

You can switch themicrophone off sothe caller does nothear you.

Mute

Item

Privacy Transfer the call tothe cell phone orback to SYNC 3.

Text MessagingNote: Downloading and sending textmessages using Bluetooth are cellphone-dependent features.Note: Certain features in text messagingare speed-dependent and not availablewhen your vehicle is traveling at speeds over3 mph (5 km/h).

Receiving a Text Message

When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays apop-up with the sender name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You canselect:


Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.Hear It

View the text on the touchscreen.View

To call the sender.Call

You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the messagethat you would like to use and confirm to send the message.SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.

Reply

To exit the screen.Close

Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)

SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlayand Android Auto to access your phone.When you use Apple CarPlay or AndroidAuto, you can:• Make calls.• Send and receive messages.• Listen to music.• Use your phone's voice assistant.

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disablesome SYNC 3 features.Most Apple CarPlay and Android Autofeatures use mobile data.

Apple CarPlayApple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 ornewer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating tothe latest iOS version is recommended.1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See

USB Port (page 375).

451



2. Follow the prompts on thetouchscreen.

3. Follow the prompts that appear onyour phone to allow access to AppleCarPlay.

After completing the setup, your phoneconnects to CarPlay automatically whenplugged into a USB port.

To disable this feature from theSettings screen, select:

Menu Item

Apple CarPlay Preferences

Your device is listed if SYNC detectsApple CarPlay. Select the name of yourdevice and set the Apple CarPlay switchto off.

To return to SYNC 3, go to the AppleCarPlay home screen and select the SYNCapp.Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlaysupport.

Android AutoAndroid Auto is compatible with mostdevices with Android 5.0 or newer.1. Download the Android Auto app to

your device from Google Play toprepare your device (this may requiremobile data usage).

Note: The Android Auto App may not beavailable within your current market.2. Plug your device into a USB port. See

USB Port (page 375).3. Follow the prompt on the touchscreen.4. Follow the prompts that appear on

your device.Note: You may be prompted to updateadditional apps on your device (this mayrequire mobile data usage).

To disable this feature from theSettings screen, select:

Menu Item

Android Auto Preferences

Your device is listed if SYNC detectsAndroid Auto. Select the name of yourdevice and set the Android Auto switchto off.

Note: You may need to slide your Settingsscreen to the left to select Apple CarPlayPreferences or Android Auto Preferences.To return to SYNC 3, select thespeedometer icon in the Android Automenu bar at the bottom of thetouchscreen, and then touch the option toreturn to SYNC.Note: Contact Google for Android Autosupport.

NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED)

Your navigation system is comprised oftwo main features, destination mode andmap mode.

Map ModeMap mode shows advanced viewingcomprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarksand 3D city models (when available). 2Dcity maps show detailed outlines ofbuildings, visible land use, landscapefeatures, and detailed railroadinfrastructure for the most essential citiesaround the globe.3D landmarks appear as clear, visibleobjects that are typically recognizable andhave a certain tourism value.

452



3D city models are complete 3D modelsof entire city areas including navigableroads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings.3D landmarks and city models appear in3D map mode only. Coverage of thesevaries and improves with updated mapreleases.

E207752

Select the zoom in icon to see acloser view of the map.

E207753

Select the zoom out icon to seea farther away view of the map.

You can adjust the view in presetincrements. You can also pinch to zoom inor out of the map.The information bar tells you the namesof streets, cities or landmarks as you hoverover them with the crosshair curser.You can change your view of the map bytapping on the location indicator icon onthe right hand side of the screen. You canchoose from the following options:

E207750

Heading up (2D map) Thisalways shows the direction offorward travel to be upward onthe screen. This view is availablefor map scales up to 3 mi (5 km).

E207749

North up (2D map) alwaysshows the northern direction tobe upward on the screen.

E207748

3D map mode provides anelevated perspective of the map.Adjust this viewing angle androtate the map 180 degrees bytouching the map twice, and

then dragging your finger along the shadedbar with arrows at the bottom of the map.

E207751

Re-center the map by pressingthis icon whenever you scroll themap away from your vehicle’scurrent location.

E251780

E251779

Mute: Press to mute the audionavigation guidance. Press thebutton again to un-mute theguidance.

E207754

Points of Interest (POI)grouping icon: You can chooseup to three POI icons to displayon the map. If the chosen POIsare located close together or are

at the same location a box is used todisplay a single category icon instead ofrepeating the same icon, in order to reduceclutter. When you select the box on themap, a pop-up appears indicating howmany POIs are in this location. Select thepop up to see a list of the available POIs.You can scroll through and select POIsfrom this list.

If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,station icons automatically display on themap.If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Trafficand Travel Link (where available), trafficflow will be indicated on the map by green(clear), yellow (slowing), and red(stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow isindicated where the information isavailable and varies across the US.You can choose to display traffic icons onthe map representing twelve differenttypes of incidents. See Settings (page463).You can set a destination by hoveringabove a location and selecting:

453



ButtonButton

Start

Destination ModeTo set a destination, press:

DescriptionMenu Item

Destination

Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:

Street AddressSearch

(number, street, city, state)

For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"

Partial Address(number, street) if searching in current state(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searchingout of stateYou can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixeswith or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".

City

(name or zip code)

Point of Interest

(name or category)

Intersection

(street 1 / street 2)(street 1 and street 2)(street 1 & street 2)(street 1 @ street 2)(street 1 at street 2)

Latitude and Longitude

(##.###### , ##.######)This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places areaccepted.

You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to selectas you type.

454




If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with yourpossible selections.

Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.Previous Destina-tions You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.

Select this option to remove all previous destinations.DeleteAll

Select to navigate to your set Home destination.HomeThe time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.To set your Home, press:

A prompt appears asking if you would like to create afavorite for home. Select:

Home

Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes

Save

Select to navigate to your set Work destination.WorkThe time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.To set your Work:

A prompt appears asking if you would like to create afavorite for work. Select:

Work

Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes

Save

Favorites include any location you have previously saved.FavoritesTo add Favorites:

Select this button and enter a location into the destinationbar.

Add aFavorite

Select this option to have the system locate the addressyou have entered.

Search

Select this button when the address you have enteredappears on the screen.

Save

The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. Youcan now select this address from the favorites screen.

POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicleconfiguration):

Point of Interest(POI) Categories

Food

455




Fuel

Hotel

ATM

Press to view additional categories. Once you have selecteda category, follow the menus to find what you are lookingfor.

See All

Inside of these categories you can search by:

Nearby

Along Route

Near Destination

In a City

Once you have chosen your destination, press:


This saves the destination to your favorites.Save

This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose yourroute from three different options.

Start

Uses the fastest moving roadspossible.

Fastest

Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest

Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Economical Route

The time and distance for each route also displays.

On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation.The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map modescreen.

Cancel

Once you have chosen your destination, press:


The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to yourdestination.

Start

456




During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on themap if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions.When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates thedistance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that thevehicle is moving.The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remainingtravel time and the distance to your destination.SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact pointof your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually.

Navigation MenuIn map mode and during active navigationyou can access the navigation menu.

During active navigation, touch the bottomof the screen to view the menu and otherbuttons.

To access the Navigation menu, press:

Button

Menu

You can then select:

A full screen map displays during navigation.Full MapScreen View

Highway exit information displays on the right hand sideof the screen during navigation.

HighwayExit Info

Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels,fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at theexit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing ofspecific locations. You can select the POI location as awaypoint or destination if desired.

Only available during an active route. Displays all of theturns on the current route.

Turn List

You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list byselecting the road from the list. A screen then appearsand you can press:

Avoid

The system calculates a new route and displays a newturn list.

You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information bypressing this button. This information requires an active subscriptionto SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.

Traffic List

457



Button

When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays(if any are present).When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearbyor on the route.

Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 463).NavigationSettings

Provides your current location city and the nearest road.Where Am I?

The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:

The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the mapmode screen.

Cancel Route

Press this to see a map of the full route.View Route

An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.Detour

Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. SeeWaypoints later in this section for information on how to setwaypoints.

Edit Waypoints

Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.

Optimize OrderYou canalso havethe systemset theorder foryou bypressing:

GoTo return toyour routepress:

WaypointsYou can add a waypoint to a navigationroute as a destination along your route.To add a waypoint:

1. Select the search icon (magnifyingglass) while on an active route. Thisbrings up the destination menu.

2. Set your destination using any of thegiven methods. Once the destinationhas been selected, the screen allowsyou to set the destination as awaypoint by selecting:

458



Menu Item

The waypoint list then appears and you areable to re-order all of your waypoints byselecting the menu icon on the right handside of the location. You can select up tofive waypoints.

Add Waypoint

Optimize OrderYou can also have the system set the orderfor you by pressing:

GoTo return to your route, press:

SYNC AppLinkThe AppLink app allows you to use someSYNC 3 navigation features on your phone.

First Mile NavigationWhen you switch your ignition off, thelocation of your vehicle is recorded andsent to your SYNC AppLink app. Thelocation of your vehicle can be viewedwithin the app. You can also view walkingdirections to your vehicle.

Last Mile NavigationWhen you park near your destination, thesystem provides walking directions to yourdestination.

POI SearchYour paired phone can be used to accessadditional points of interest (POI). Thesepoints of interest can only be access whenyour phone is paired.

Send To CarYou can send destinations to yournavigation system using a computer orphone using AppLink.

cityseeker (If Equipped)

Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)information is limited to approximately 1,110cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 inCanada and 15 in Mexico).

E225487

cityseeker, when available, is a service thatprovides more information about certainpoints of interest such as restaurants,hotels and attractions.When you have selected a point of interest,the location and information appear, suchas address, phone number and a starrating.Press More Information to see a photo,a review, a list of services and facilities, theaverage room or meal price and the webaddress. This screen displays the point ofinterest icons.

459



For restaurants, cityseeker can provideinformation such as star rating, averagecost, review, handicap access, hours ofoperation, and website address.For hotels, cityseeker can provideinformation such as star rating, pricecategory, review, check-in and checkouttimes, hotel service icons and websiteaddress. Hotel service icons include:• Restaurant• Business center• Handicap facilities• Laundry• Refrigerator• 24 hour room service• Fitness center• Internet access• Pool• Wi-FiAttractions include nearby landmarks,amusement parks, historic buildings andmore. cityseeker can provide informationsuch as star rating, reviews, hour ofoperation and admission price.

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If

Equipped)

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is availableon vehicles equipped with navigation andonly in select markets. You must activateand subscribe to receive SiriusXM Trafficand Travel Link information. It helps youlocate the best gas prices, find movielistings, get current traffic alerts, view theweather map, get accurate ski conditionsand see current sports scores. See Apps(page 460).

The system calculates a reasonableefficient route based on available speedlimits, traffic, and road conditions. You mayknow a local short cut that is more efficientat a given time than the route provided bySYNC 3, but you should expect a slightdifference in minutes or miles with theSYNC 3 route.

Navigation Map UpdatesAnnual navigation map updates areavailable for purchase through yourdealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 inthe United States and Canada or01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can alsovisit:

Website

www.navigation.com/sync

You need to specify the make and modelof your vehicle to determine if there is anupdate available.HERE is the digital map provider for thenavigation application. If you find map dataerrors, you may report them directly toHERE by going towww.here.com/mapcreator. HEREevaluates all reported map errors andresponds with the result of theirinvestigation by e-mail.Map coverage includes the USA (includingPuerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),Canada and Mexico.

APPSThe system enables voice, steering wheel,and touch screen control of SYNC 3AppLink enabled smartphone apps.Once an app is running through AppLink,you can control main features of the appthrough voice commands and steeringwheel controls.

460



Note: Available AppLink enabled apps willvary by market.Note: You must pair and connect yoursmartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 toaccess AppLink.Note: iPhone users need to connect thephone to the USB port.Note: For information on available apps,supported smartphone devices andtroubleshooting tips please visit:

Websites

owner.ford.comwww.syncmyride.ca

www.syncmaroute.ca

Note: Make sure you have an active accountfor the app that you have downloaded.Some apps will work automatically with nosetup. Other apps will want you to configureyour personal settings and personalize yourexperience by creating stations orfavorites.We recommend you do this athome or outside of your vehicle.Note: We encourage you to review thesmartphone app’s terms of service andprivacy policies because Ford is notresponsible for your app or its use of data.Note: AppLink is a native SYNC systemfeature. Accessing mobile apps throughAppLink is only possible when Android Autoor Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some appsmay only be accessible in the car throughAppLink and others only through AndroidAuto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to theSmartphone Connectivity information todisable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,the app needs to be running in thebackground of your phone. If you shut downthe app on your phone, it shuts down theapp on SYNC 3 as well.

Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible appis not shown in the Apps Domain, make surethe required app is running on the mobiledevice.


Menu Item

SYNC 3 will searchand connect tocompatible app(s)running on yourmobile device.

Find Mobile Apps

Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile AppsIn order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3requires user consent to send and receiveapp authorization information and updatesusing the data plan associated with theconnected device.The connected device sends data to Fordin the United States. The information isencrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3module number, odometer, usagestatistics and debugging information. Weretain this data for only as long asnecessary to provide this service,troubleshoot, and improve products andservices and to offer you products andservices that may interest you whereallowed by law.Note: You must enable mobile apps foreach connected device the first time youselect a mobile app using the system.Note: Ford reserves the right to limitfunctionality or deactivate mobile apps atany time.Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford isnot responsible for any additional chargesyou may receive from your service provider,when your vehicle sends or receives datathrough the connected device. This includesany additional charges incurred due todriving in areas when roaming out of a homenetwork.

461



You can enable and disable apps throughsettings. See Settings (page 463).

App PermissionsThe system organizes the App permissionsinto groups. You can grant these grouppermissions individually. You can changea permission group status any time whennot driving, by using the settings menu.While in the settings menu, you can alsosee the data included in each group.When you launch an app using SYNC 3,the system may ask you to grant certainpermissions, for example Vehicleinformation, Driving characteristics, GPSand Speed, and/or Push notifications. Youcan enable all groups or none of themduring the initial app permissions prompts.The settings menu offers individual grouppermission control.Note: You are only prompted to grantpermissions the first time you use an appwith SYNC 3.Note: If you disable group permissions,apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC3 unless you deactivate All Apps in thesettings menu.

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If

Equipped)

WARNING: Driving whiledistracted can result in loss of vehiclecontrol, crash and injury. We stronglyrecommend that you use extremecaution when using any device that maytake your focus off the road. Your

primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. Werecommend against the use of anyhand-held device while driving andencourage the use of voice-operatedsystems when possible. Make sure youare aware of all applicable local lawsthat may affect the use of electronicdevices while driving.

Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link maynot be available in all markets.Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic andTravel Link, your vehicle must havenavigation.Note: A paid subscription is required toaccess and use these features. Go towww.siriusxm.com/travellink for moreinformation.Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic andclick on Coverage map and details for acomplete listing of all traffic areas coveredby SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsiblefor any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXMTraffic and Travel Link services or its use invehicles.When you subscribe to SiriusXM Trafficand Travel Link, it can help you locate thebest gas prices, find movie listings, getcurrent traffic alerts, view the currentweather map, get accurate ski conditionsand see scores to current sports games.

462




Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favoriteplaces, if programmed.

Traffic on Route

Traffic Nearby

Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to yourvehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.

Fuel Prices

Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and theirshow times, if available.

Movie Listings

Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.

Weather

Select to see the weather map,which can show storms, radarinformation, charts and winds.

Map

Select to choose from a listing ofweather locations.

Area

Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a varietyof sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easieraccess. The score automatically refreshes when a game is inprogress.

Sports Info

Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions

SETTINGSUnder this menu, you can access andadjust the settings for many of the systemfeatures. To access additional settings,swipe the screen left or right.

SoundPressing this button allows you to adjustthe following:

Sound Settings

Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.Reset All

Adjusts the high frequency level.Treble

Adjusts the middle frequency level.Midrange

Adjusts the low frequency level.Bass

Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.Balance / Fade

463



Sound Settings

Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,or turns the feature off.

SpeedCompensatedVol.

Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.Occupancy Mode

StereoSound Settings

Surround

Your vehicle might not have all of these features.

Media PlayerThis button is available when a mediadevice such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USBdevice is the active audio source. Pressingthe button allows you to access thefollowing options for active devices only.


For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed ofpodcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:

Podcast Speed

FasterNormalSlower

For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed ofaudiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:

Audiobook Speed

FasterNormalSlower

Cover art displays from your device’s musicfiles. If no cover art for the files exists on thedevice, then the Gracenote Database providescover art.

Media PlayerCover Art Priority

The Gracenote Database supplied cover art isused for your music files. This overrides anycover art from your device.

Gracenote®

Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata informationsuch as genre, artist, album.

Gracenote®Management

464




This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.Gracenote® Data-base Info

This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of yourmedia device.

Device Informa-tion

Erase the stored in media information in order to re-index.Update MediaIndex

ClockTo adjust the time, select the up and downarrows on either side of the screen. Thearrows on the left adjust the hour andarrows on the right adjust the minute. Youcan then select AM or PM.

You can adjust the following features:


Select how time displays.Clock Format

When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.Auto Time ZoneUpdate This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.

When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.Reset Clock toGPS Time

The system automatically saves anyupdates you make to the settings.

BluetoothPressing this button allows you to accessthe following:

ActionMenu Item

Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permitnew connections.

Bluetooth

You must activate Bluetooth to pair aBluetooth-enabled device.The processes of pairing a Bluetoothdevice is the same as pairing a phone. SeePairing a Device in Phone settings for howto pair a device and the available options.

PhonePair your Bluetooth-enabled phone withthe system before using the functions inhands-free mode.Switch on Bluetooth on your device tobegin pairing. See your phone’s manual ifnecessary.

465



To add a phone, select:

Menu Item

Add Phone

1. Follow the on-screen instructions.2. A prompt alerts you to search for the

system on your phone.3. Select your vehicle's make and model

as it displays on your phone.4. Confirm that the six-digit number




Alternatively, to add a phone, select:

Menu Item

Add Phone

Then select:

Discover Other Bluetooth Devices

1. Follow the on-screen instructions.2. Select your phone's name when it

appears on the touchscreen.3. Confirm that the six-digit number




Other features, such as text messagingusing Bluetooth and automatic phonebookdownload, are phone-dependent features.

To check your phone’s compatibility,see your phone’s manual or visit thewebsite:

Website

owner.ford.comwww.syncmyride.ca

www.syncmaroute.ca

Once you have paired a device you canadjust the following options.


View Devices


You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps inthe previous table.

Add a BluetoothDevice

You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You thenhave the following options:

Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of theseoptions to interact with the selected device.

Connect

466




Disconnect

Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.Make Primary

Removes the selected device from the system.Delete

Pressing the info icon next to the devicename allows you to see phone and deviceinformation


Manage Contacts


Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download yourphonebook to keep your contact list up to date.

Auto-DownloadContacts

Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. Youcan choose:

Sort By:

Last NameFirst Name

Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.Re-downloadContacts

Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting thein vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.

Delete Contacts


Set Phone Ringtone


No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.No Ringtone

The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receivea call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this optionis available, it is the default setting.

Use Phone Ring-tone

You can also select one of the three available ringers.

467




Text Messaging


No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.No Alert(Silence)

You can select one of the three available notification sounds.

When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a newmessage.

Voice Readout

You can enable and disable the following options as well:


When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for theduration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.

Mute Audio inPrivacy

When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming whenyou attempt to place a call.

RoamingWarning

When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phoneis running low.

Low BatteryNotification

911 AssistNote: This service is only available in theUnited States and Canada.

Select this button to modify the on or offsetting for this feature. If the mobilephone’s contacts have been downloaded,you can adjust the following option:


You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phone-book as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the 911Assist call process.

Set EmergencyContacts

RadioThis button is available if a Radio sourcesuch as AM or FM is the active mediasource. Pressing the button allows you toaccess the following features:

468




Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.FM HD Radio

AM HD Radio

(Dependent oncurrent radiosource, If Avail-able)

This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source.Activate this feature to have the system display radio text.

Radio Text

RefreshAutoset Presets(AST)

Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your currentlocation to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source.

Sirius XM (If equipped)


After selecting a category, the seek function only stops on channelsthat are inside that selected category.

Set Category forSeek

Select to create a personal identification number (PIN). This allowsyou to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.

ParentalLockout

Select to switch on, off or delete alerts.Edit Alerts

The Electronic Serial Number is on this screen. This number is necessary to activate,modify or track your account through Sirius XM.

NavigationYou can adjust many of the Navigationpreferences by selecting the followingmenus.

469



Map Preferences


Map Preferences

Then select any of the following:

When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of build-ings.

3D City Model

When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays withwhite dots.

Breadcrumbs

Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.POI IconsA rest area POI icon may display on the map regardless of this setting.

Select POIsWhen this feature is active you can select theicons you want displayed by selecting:

This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would liketo have displayed on the navigation map.

Incident MapIcons

Route Preferences

Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item

Route Preferences


Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred Route

EcoFastestShortest

Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system onlycalculates one route based on your preferred route setting.

Always Use ___Route

When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculateonly one route to the desired destination.

The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes whenproviding route guidance.

Use HOV Lanes

The system searches for and displays available parking locations asyou approach your destination.

AutomaticallyFind Parking

Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher thesetting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.

Eco TimePenalty

470



Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item

Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning aroute. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flowinformation or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour routeif possible.

Dynamic RouteGuidance

If selected, SYNC 3 avoids freeways when computing a navigationroute.

Avoid Freeways

If selected, SYNC 3 avoids Toll Roads when computing a navigationroute.

Avoid TollRoads

If selected, SYNC 3 avoids the use of Ferries or Trains when computinga navigation route.

AvoidFerries/CarTrains

Navigation Preferences


Navigation Preferences

You can adjust how the system provides prompts.GuidancePrompts


A tone sounds followed by voice instructions.Voice and Tones

Only voice instructions are given.Voice Only

Only a tone sounds to prompt you.Tones Only

Mobile AppsYou can enable the control of compatiblemobile apps running on your Bluetooth orUSB device on SYNC 3. In order to enablemobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consentto send and receive app authorizationinformation and updates using the dataplan associated with the connected device.

The connected devices send data to us inthe United States. The encryptedinformation includes your VIN, SYNC 3module number, anonymous usagestatistics and debugging information.Updates may take place.Note: All Mobile Apps may not becompatible with the system.

471



Note: Standard data rates will apply. Weare not responsible for any additionalcharges you may receive from your serviceprovider, when your vehicle sends or receivesdata through the connected device. Thisincludes any additional charges incurred dueto driving in areas when roaming out of ahome network.


Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.Mobile AppsDisabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automaticupdates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.

You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settingsmenu.

Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:

This provides information on the current state of available appupdates.

Update MobileApps

There are three possible statuses:

Updating Mobile Apps…Up-To-DateUpdate Needed

The system is trying to receivean update.

No update isrequired.

The system hasdetected a new apprequiring authoriza-tion or a generalpermissions update isrequired.

Select this button if anupdate is required and youwant to request this updatemanually. For example, whenyour mobile device isconnected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,select:

Request Update

472




Request Update

Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.All Apps

Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permis-sions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, youcan see which signals are included in each group.

There may alsobe SYNC 3enabled appslisted underthese options.

Note: We are not responsible or liable forany damages or loss of privacy relating tousage of an app, or dissemination of anyvehicle data that you give us approval toprovide to an app.

GeneralAccess and adjust the system settings,voice features, as well as phone, navigationand wireless settings.

Menu Item

Select to have the touchscreen display in English,Spanish or French.

Language

Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance

Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature

Select to have the system beep to confirm choicesmade through the touchscreen.

Touch Panel Beep

When you activate this option, the system automatic-ally updates when you have an available Internetconnection through a Wi-Fi network or mobileconnection.

Automatic System Updates

Information pertaining to the system and its software.About SYNC

Documentation of the software license for the system.Software Licenses

Select to restore factory defaults. This erases allpersonal settings and personal data.

Master Reset

Wi-Fi & HotspotAccess SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspotsettings and information.

System Wi-FiYou can access the following:

473




Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle softwareupdates.

Wi-Fi

This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.AvailableNetworks

Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnectfrom that network. The system may require a security code toconnect.

When you click the information button next to a network, moreinformation about the network displays such as the signal strength,connection status and security type.

The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Finetwork is within range if SYNC is not already connected.

Wi-Fi AvailableNotifications

Vehicle Hotspot (If Equipped)You can access the following:


Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off.Wi-Fi HotspotOn/Off

Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID andpassword.

Settings

Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage.Data Usage

Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot.Manage Devices

Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (VehicleHotspot) may be operational while ignitionis On and may remain operational while theignition is Off.Note: The vehicle network carrier providesVehicle Hotspot services, subject to yourvehicle network carrier agreement, coverageand availability.

Note: It is the account owner’sresponsibility to remove the vehicle fromthe vehicle network carrier account whenownership of the vehicle is transferred. If theowner would like to remove the vehicle fromthe account for any reason, please contactyour vehicle network carrier for moreinformation.

474



Note: Data you share, e.g. the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), SIM Card ID,and data plan usage, between us and thevehicle network carrier is used to providethe Vehicle Hotspot service in accordancewith your vehicle network carrier agreement,coverage and availability, and may be usedto enable a seamless transition from an oldto new embedded modem and to confirmany successfully delivered updates.Note: For your convenience data usage maybe available for monitoring under Settingsbut may not reflect actual or current usage.The vehicle network carrier is responsiblefor providing information about youraccount. Please contact the vehicle networkcarrier for more information.Note: We may need to update operatingsystem software on your vehicle, includingsecurity updates and bug fixes, to keepconnected services current, like VehicleHotspot, without prior notice to you.Note: If you do not have an active vehiclehotspot data plan, open your web browserand go to a website using the HTTP protocolto be automatically redirected to the vehiclenetwork carrier landing page where you canpurchase data. Websites using HTTPS willnot automatically redirect.

Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)

Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.This sets the color to the highest intensity.You can drag the colors up and down toincrease or decrease the intensity.To switch ambient lighting off, press theactive color once or drag the active colorall the way down to zero intensity.

VehicleNote: Your vehicle may not have all ofthese features.You can select the following features toupdate their settings.

Door Keypad Code (If equipped)Select this button to add or erase apersonal door keypad code. To add orerase a personal code, you first need toenter the five-digit factory set code. Youcan find this code on the owner's walletcard in the glove box or from yourauthorized dealer.

Camera Settings

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:

Action and DescriptionMessage

Camera Settings

Then select from the following:

When the reverse sensing system detects an object, it displays red,yellow and green highlights at the top of the image.

Enhanced ParkAids

You can enable or disable this option using the slider.Rear CameraDelay

You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapterof your owner manual.

475



Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)Selecting this button on the settings menu

shows you the ESN number for yoursystem. You need this number for certainregistrations such as Satellite Radio.

DisplayTo make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:


The screen goes black and does not display anything. To switch thescreen back on, simply tap the screen.

Display Off

Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness

Enable this option to have your screen display minimal content.Pressing anywhere on the screen, using the reverse camera, or touchingan interactive icon returns the screen to normal content.

Calm Screen

Allows you to select a screen background color.Background

You can select:Mode

The screen automatically switches between day andnight modes based on the outside light level.

Auto

The screen displays with a light background to enhancedaytime viewing.

Day

The screen displays with a darker background to makenighttime viewing easier.

Night

Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness basedon ambient lighting conditions.

Auto Dim

Voice ControlYou can adjust the voice control settingsby selecting the following options.

476



Menu Item

Enable this option to remove additional voice promptsand confirmations.

Advanced Mode

Enable this option to have the system confirm a contactsname with you before making a call.

Phone Confirmation

Enable this option to have the system display a list ofavailable voice commands when the voice button ispressed.

Voice Command List

Valet ModeValet mode allows you to lock the system.No information is accessible until thesystem is unlocked with the correct PIN.When you select valet mode a pop upappears informing you that a four digitcode must be entered to enable anddisable valet mode. You can use any PINyou chose but you must use the same PINto disable valet mode. The system asksyou to input the code.Note: If the system is locked and youcannot remember the PIN, please contactthe Customer Relationship Center.United States: 1-800-392-3673Canada: 1-800-565-3673

To enable valet mode, enter your chosenPIN. The system then asks to confirm yourPIN by reentering it. The system then locks.To unlock the system, enter the same pinnumber. The system reconnects to yourphone and all of your options are availableagain.

SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTINGYour SYNC 3 system is easy to use.However, should questions arise, pleaserefer to the tables below.To check your cell phone's compatibility,refer to the regional Ford or Lincolnwebsite.

Cell phone issues

Possible solutionPossible causeIssue

Refer to your device's manual about audioadjustments.

The audio controlsettings on your cellphone may be affectingSYNC 3 performance.

There is back-ground noiseduring a phonecall.

Try switching your cell phone off, resettingit or removing the battery, then try again.

Possible cell phonemalfunction.

During a call, Ican hear theother personbut they cannothear me.

Make sure that the microphone for SYNC3 is not set to off. Look for the microphoneicon on the phone screen.

477



Cell phone issues


To restart your system, shut down theengine, open and close the door, and thenlock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is blackand the lighted USB port is off.

The system may need tobe restarted.

During a call, Icannot hear theother personand they cannothear me.

Check your cell phone's compatibility.This is a cell phone-dependent feature.

SYNC 3 is notable to down-load my phone-book.

Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrievecontacts from your phone. Refer to yourcell manual.


You must switch on your cell phone andthe automatic phonebook downloadfeature on SYNC 3.


Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrievecontacts from your phone. Refer to yourcell manual.

Limitations on your cellphone's capability.

The systemsays "Phone-book down-loaded" but mySYNC 3 phone-book is empty oris missingcontacts.

If the missing contacts are stored on yourSIM card, move them to your cell phone'smemory.

You must switch on your cell phone andthe automatic phonebook downloadfeature on SYNC 3.


I am havingtroubleconnecting mycell phone toSYNC 3.



Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 anddeleting SYNC from your device, then tryingagain.

Always check the security and auto acceptprompt settings relative to the SYNC 3Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.

Update your cell phone's firmware.

478



Cell phone issues


Switch the auto download setting off.


Text messagingis not workingon SYNC 3.



iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.• Press the blue circle to the right of the

device named with your vehicle makeand model to enter the next menu.

• Turn Show Notifications on.• Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone

from the SYNC 3 system to activate thissettings update.

Your iPhone is now set up to forwardincoming text messages to SYNC 3.Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone willonly forward incoming text messages toSYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in themessaging application.Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 isnot supported by iPhone.Text messages from WhatsApp and Face-book Messenger are not supported.

Your cell phone must support downloadingtext messages through Bluetooth to receiveincoming text messages.

This is a cell phone-dependent feature.

Audible textmessages donot work on mycell phone.

Because each cell phone is different, referto your device's manual for the specific cellphone you are pairing. In fact, there can bedifferences between cell phones due tobrand, model, service provider and softwareversion.

This is a cell phone limita-tion.

479



USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues


Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Tryswitching your device off, resetting it orremoving the battery, then reconnect it toSYNC 3.

Possible device malfunc-tion.I am having

troubleconnecting mydevice.

Make sure you are using the manufacturer'scable.

Make sure to correctly insert the USB cableinto the device and your vehicle's USB port.

Make sure that the device does not havean auto-install program or active securitysettings.

Make sure your device is unlocked beforeconnecting it to SYNC 3.

The device has a lockscreen enabled.

Make sure you are not leaving the device inyour vehicle during very hot or coldtemperatures.

This is a device limitation.

SYNC 3 doesnot recognizemy device whenI start myvehicle.

Make sure you connect the device to SYNC3 and that you have started the mediaplayer on your device.

This is a device-dependent feature.

Bluetooth audiodoes notstream.

The device is notconnected.

Try switching your device off, resetting it orremoving the battery, then reconnect it toSYNC 3.

The device is in a badstate.

Make sure that all song details are popu-lated.

Your music files may notcontain the correct artist,song title, album or genreinformation.SYNC 3 does

not recognizemusic that is onmy device.

Try replacing the corrupt file with a newversion.

The file may becorrupted.

Some devices require you to change theUSB settings from mass storage to mediatransfer protocol class.

The song may havecopyright protection thatdoes not allow it to play.

480



USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues


Convert the file to a supported format. SeeEntertainment (page 434).

The file format is notsupported by SYNC 3.

Update media index. See Settings (page463).

The device needs to bere-indexed.

Make sure your device is unlocked beforeconnecting it to SYNC 3.

The device has a lockscreen enabled.

Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Tryswitching your device off, resetting it orremoving the battery, then connect it backto SYNC 3.

This is a device limitation.

When I connectmy device, Isometimes donot hear anysound.

To listen to Apple devices through USB,select AirPlay from the devices ControlCenter, then select Dock Connector.

To listen to Apple devices throughBluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from thedevices Control Center, then select SYNC.

Connect a compatible device or mediaplayer.

The device or mediaplayer is incompatible.

SYNC 3 doesnot display thesong informa-tion, repeat, orshuffle buttons.

Wi-Fi Access Point issues


Verify password.Password error.Failed connec-tion.

Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.Weak signal.

Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t usethe default name unless it contains aunique identifier, such as part of the MACaddress.

Multiple Access pointswithin range with thesame SSID.

481





Position the vehicle close to the accesspoint with the front of the vehicle facing theaccess point direction and removeobstacles if possible. Other Wi-Fi,Bluetooth, microwave and cordless phonesmay cause interference.

Weak signal probablydue to distance from theaccess point, obstructionor high interference.

Disconnectingafter successfulconnection.

If the vehicle is equipped with heatedwindshield, try positioning the vehicle sothat the windshield is not facing the accesspoint. If you have metallic window tintingbut not on the windshield, position thevehicle to face the access point. If allwindows are tinted, you can open thewindows in the direction of the access pointif that is feasible.

There may be anobstruction betweenSYNC 3 and the accesspoint.

Poor signal seenby SYNC 3despite beingnear a accesspoint.

Try to remove other obstructions that mayimpact signal quality such as opening thegarage door.

Please set the network to visible and tryagain.

The access point wasdefined as a hiddennetwork.

An access pointis not listed inthe list of avail-able networks.

482





SYNC 3 currently does not provide anaccess point.

SYNC 3 does notcurrently provide aaccess point.

SYNC 3 is notseen whensearching forWi-Fi networksfrom your phoneor other devices.

Check the signal quality (under networkdetails), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excel-lent, test with another high-speed equippedaccess point where the environment ismore predictable.

Poor signal strength, toofar from the access point,access point issupporting multipleconnections, slowInternet connection orother problems.

Software down-load takes toolong.

Test the connection with another device, ifthe access point requires a subscription,you may contact the service provider.

It is possible that there isno new software. Theconnected access pointmay be a managed oneand it requires either asubscription or agreeingto the terms and condi-tions.

SYNC 3 seemsto connect witha access pointand the signalstrength isexcellent butthe software isnot beingupdated.

483



AppLink Issues


Make sure you have a compatible smart-phone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher oran iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 orhigher. Additionally, make sure you pair andconnect your phone to SYNC 3 in order tofind AppLink-capable apps on your device.iPhone users must also connect to a USBport with an Apple USB cable.

You did not connect anApplink Compatiblephone to SYNC 3.

AppLink MobileApplications:When I select"Find MobileApps," SYNC 3does not findany applica-tions.

Make sure you have downloaded andinstalled the latest version of the app fromyour phone's app store. Make sure the appis running on your phone. Some appsrequire you to register or login to the appon the phone before using them withAppLink. Also, some may have a "FordSYNC" setting, so check the app's settingsmenu on the phone.

AppLink-enabled appsare not installed andrunning on your mobiledevice.

My phone isconnected, but Istill cannot findany apps.

Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC3 find the application if you cannot discoverit inside the vehicle. On an Android device,if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, thenselect it and restart the app. If the app doesnot have that option, select the phone'ssettings menu and select 'Apps', then findthe particular app and choose 'Force stop.'Do not forget to restart the app afterward,then select "Find Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3.

Sometimes apps do notproperly close and re-open their connection toSYNC 3, over ignitioncycles, for example.

My phone isconnected, myapp(s) arerunning, but Istill cannot findany apps. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an

app, double tap the home button thenswipe up on the app to close it. Tap thehome button again, then select the appagain to restart it. After a few seconds, theapp should then appear in SYNC 3's MobileApp's Menu.

484



AppLink Issues


Switch Bluetooth off and then on to resetit on your phone. If you are in your vehicle,SYNC 3 should be able to automatically re-connect to your phone if you press the"Phone" button.

There is a Bluetooth issueon some older versionsof the Android operatingsystem that may causeapps that were found onyour previous vehicledrive to not be foundagain if you did notswitch Bluetooth off.

My Androidphone isconnected, myapp(s) arerunning, Irestarted them,but I still cannotfind any apps.

Unplug the USB cable from the phone, waita moment, and plug the USB cable back into the phone. After a few seconds, the appshould appear in SYNC 3's Mobile AppsMenu. If not, "Force Close" the applicationand restart it.

You may need to resetthe USB connection toSYNC 3.

My iPhone isconnected, myapp is running, Irestarted theapp but I stillcannot find it onSYNC 3.

Increase the Bluetooth volume of thedevice by using the device's volume controlbuttons which are most often found on theside of the device.

The Bluetooth volume onthe phone may be low.

I have anAndroid phone.I found andstarted mymedia app onSYNC 3, butthere is nosound or thesound is verylow.

Force close or uninstall the apps you do notwant SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "FordSYNC" setting, disable that setting in theapp's settings menu on the phone.

Some Android deviceshave a limited number ofBluetooth ports thatapps can use to connect.If you have more AppLinkapps on your phone thanthe number of availableBluetooth ports, you willnot see all of your appslisted in the SYNC 3mobile apps menu.

I can only seesome of theAppLink appsrunning on myphone listed inthe SYNC 3Mobile AppsMenu.

485





Review the cell phone voice commandsand the media voice commands at thebeginning of their respective sections.You may be using the

wrong voice commands.SYNC 3 doesnot understandwhat I amsaying.

Refer to the audio display during an activevoice session to find a list of voicecommands there.

Wait for the system to prompt you beforeyou state your command.

You may be speaking toosoon or at the wrongtime.

Review the media voice commands at thebeginning of the media section.

You may be using thewrong voice commands.

SYNC 3 doesnot understandthe name of asong or artist.

Say the song or artist name exactly as it isdisplayed on your device. For example, say"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song PurpleRain".

You may not be sayingthe name exactly as itappears on your device.

Make sure you are saying the complete titlesuch as "California remix featuring JenniferNettles".

If there are any abbreviations in the name,like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".

Make sure that song titles, artists, album,and playlists names do not have any specialcharacters like *, - or +.

The song or artist namemay have some specialcharacters that are notbeing recognized bySYNC 3.

Make sure that you are saying the nameexactly as it appears on your phone. Forexample, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact nameis "Mom", say "Call Mom".

You may not be sayingthe name exactly as itappears on your phone-book.

SYNC 3 doesnot understandor is calling thewrong contactwhen I want tomake a call. Make sure that your contact names do not

have any special characters like *, - or +.The contact name maycontain special charac-ters.

486





SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciationrules of the selected language to thecontact names stored on your cell phone.

You may not be sayingthe name exactly as itappears on your phone-book.

The SYNC 3voice controlsystem is havingtrouble recog-nizing foreignnames storedon my cellphone.

Helpful Hint: You can select your contactmanually. Press PHONE. Select the optionfor phonebook and then contact name.Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC3 will read the contact name to you, givingyou some idea of the pronunciation it isexpecting.

SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciationrules of the selected language to the namesstored on your media player or USB flashdrive. It is able to make some exceptionsfor very popular artist names (for example,U2) such that you can always use theEnglish pronunciation for these artists.

You may be saying theforeign names using thecurrently selectedlanguage for SYNC 3.

The SYNC 3voice controlsystem is havingtrouble recog-nizing foreigntracks, artists,albums, genresand playlistnames from mymedia player orUSB flash drive.

SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generatedvoice rather than pre-recorded humanvoice.

SYNC 3 uses text-to-speech voice prompttechnology.

The systemgenerates voiceprompts andthe pronunci-ation of somewords may notbe accurate formy language.

SYNC 3 offers several new voice controlfeatures for a wide range of languages.Dialing a contact name directly from thephonebook without pre-recording (forexample, “call John Smith”) or selecting atrack, artist, album, genre or playlist directlyfrom your media player (for example, "playartist Madonna").

487



Personal Profiles

Possible cause and solutionIssue

Personal Profiles have not been set up.

I cannot create a profile.

An invalid profile name was entered.

A memory button was not selected whenprompted.

The vehicle’s ignition was not On and inPark or was shifted out of Run or Park whilecreating a profile.

Personal Profiles is turned off.

The lock button was not selected on akeyfob when prompted.

I cannot link a keyfob.

The keyfob selected was already associ-ated to another profile and an overwritewas declined.

A profile recall was performed while linkinga keyfob.

The vehicle’s ignition was not On and inPark, or was shifted out of Run or Park whilelinking a keyfob.

The old linking method is used.

The unsaved setting is not supported byPersonal Profiles.

My personalized settings do not save. A different Personal Profile is active thanexpected.

Another user has changed settings for thewrong Personal Profile.

A Personal Profile has not been created.

My profile will not recall.Personal Profiles is turned off.

The requested profile is already active.

The memory button being used is not linkedto a profile.

488



Personal Profiles

Possible cause and solutionIssue

The keyfob being used is not linked to aprofile.

The wrong keyfob is being used.

A button other than unlock or remote startis being pressed on a linked keyfob.

The Personal Profile was deleted.

Personal Profiles is turned off.My preset positions recall but my profiledoes not.

The vehicle is in motion.My profile recalls but my preset positionsdo not. The preset positions are the same as the

Guest or previously active profile.

Unlink and relink your keyfob in thePersonal Profiles menu. You may need tosee your authorized dealer.

I lost a keyfob.

Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed.This could happen if you let dealership adda new keyfob to replace lost one.I lost all profiles.Master Reset had been performed withoutyour acknowledgement.

489



General


SYNC 3 only supports four languages in asingle module for text display, voice controland voice prompts. The country where youbought your vehicle dictates the fourlanguages based on the most popularlanguages spoken. If the selected languageis not available, SYNC 3 remains in thecurrent active language.

SYNC 3 does not supportthe currently selectedlanguage for the instru-ment cluster and inform-ation and entertainmentdisplay.

The languageselected for theinstrumentcluster andinformation andentertainmentdisplay does notmatch theSYNC 3 SYNC 3 offers several new voice control

features for a wide range of languages.Dialing a contact name directly from thephonebook without pre-recording (forexample, “call John Smith”) or selecting atrack, artist, album, genre or playlist directlyfrom your media player (for example, "playartist Madonna").

language(phone, USB,Bluetoothaudio, voicecontrol andvoice prompts).

SYNC 3 System Reset

The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase anyinformation previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, callhistory, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and holdthe Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. Afterapproximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the systemreset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.

For additional assistance with SYNC 3troubleshooting, refer to the regional Fordor Lincoln website.

490



For a complete listing of the accessoriesthat are available for your vehicle, pleasecontact your authorized dealer or visit theonline store web site:

Web Address (United States)

www.Accessories.Ford.com

Web Address (Canada)

www.Accessories.Ford.ca

Ford Motor Company will repair or replaceany properly authorized dealer-installedFord Original Accessory found to bedefective in factory-supplied materials orworkmanship during the warranty period,as well as any component damaged by thedefective accessories.Ford Motor Company will warrant yourFord Original Accessory through thewarranty that provides the greatestbenefit:• 24 months, unlimited mileage.• The remainder of your new vehicle

limited warranty.Contact an authorized dealer for detailsand a copy of the warranty.

Exterior Style• Bumper protector.• Hood deflectors.• Running boards.• Side window deflectors*.• Splash guards.

Interior Style• Ambient lighting.• Cargo area protector.• Floor mats.

• Rear console.• Seat covers*.

Lifestyle• Ash cup or smoker's package.• Bluetooth speaker*.• Camping tent*.• Car covers*.• Cargo organization and management.• Rear seat entertainment*.• Roof crossbars.• Roof racks and carriers*.• Telematics*.• Trailer hitch balls.• Trailer hitch drawbars and towing

accessories.

Peace of Mind• Cargo shade.• In-vehicle safe*.• Keyless entry keypad.• Parking sensors*.• Remote start.• Roadside assistance kits*.• Vehicle security systems.• Wheel locks.*Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessorymanufacturer designs, develops andtherefore warrants Ford LicensedAccessories, and does not design or testthese accessories to Ford Motor Companyengineering requirements. Contact anauthorized Ford dealer for themanufacturer’s limited warranty details,and request a copy of the Ford LicensedAccessories product limited warranty fromthe accessory manufacturer.

491


Accessories

For maximum vehicle performance, keepthe following information in mind whenadding accessories or equipment to yourvehicle:• When adding accessories, equipment,

passengers and luggage to yourvehicle, do not exceed the total weightcapacity of the vehicle or of the frontor rear axle (GVWR or GAWR asindicated on the Safety ComplianceCertification label). Ask an authorizeddealer for specific weight information.

• The Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) and CanadianRadio TelecommunicationsCommission (CRTC) regulate the useof mobile communications systemsthat are equipped with radiotransmitters, for example two-wayradios, telephones and theft alarms.Any such equipment installed in yourvehicle should comply with FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)and Canadian RadioTelecommunications Commission(CRTC) regulations and should beinstalled only by an authorized dealer.

• An authorized dealer needs to installmobile communications systems.Improper installation may harm theoperation of your vehicle, particularlyif the manufacturer did not design themobile communication systemspecifically for automotive use.

• If you or an authorized Ford dealer addany non-Ford electrical or electronicaccessories or components to yourvehicle, you may adversely affectbattery performance and durability. Inaddition, you may also adversely affectthe performance of other electricalsystems in the vehicle.

492


Accessories

PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISINGCOST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORDPROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.

Ford Protect Extended ServicePlans (U.S. Only)Ford Protect extended service plan meanspeace of mind. It’s the extended serviceplan backed by Ford Motor Company, andprovides more protection beyond the NewVehicle Limited Warranty coverage. Whenyou visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on FordProtect extended service plans!

Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for ItselfOne trip to the Service Center could easilyexceed the price of your Ford Protectextended service plan. With Ford Protectextended service plan you minimize yourrisk for unexpected repair bills and risingrepair costs.

Up to 1,000+ Covered VehicleComponentsThere are four mechanical Ford Protectextended service plans with different levelsof coverage. Ask your authorized dealer fordetails.1. PremiumCARE - Our most

comprehensive coverage. With over1,000 covered components, this planis so complete it’s probably easier tolist what’s not covered.

2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,and includes many high-tech items.

3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical

components.Ford Protect extended service plans arehonored by all authorized Ford dealers inthe U.S., Canada and Mexico.

That means you get:• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or

Lincoln dealership.• Repairs performed by factory trained

technicians, using genuine parts.

Rental Car Reimbursement

1st day Rental BenefitIf you bring your car into your dealer forservice, we’ll give you a loaner to use forthe day.

Extended Rental BenefitsIf your vehicle is kept overnight for coveredrepairs, you are eligible for rental carcoverage, including warranty repairs, andField Service Actions.

Roadside AssistanceExclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,including:• Towing, flat-tire change and battery

jump starts.• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.• Travel expense reimbursement for

lodging, meals and rental car.• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car

coverage or other transportation.

Transferable CoverageIf you sell your vehicle before your FordProtect extended service plan coverageexpires, you can transfer any remainingcoverage to the new owner. Which shouldgive you and your potential buyer a littlemore peace of mind.

493


Ford Protect

Less Cost to Properly Maintain YourVehicleFord Protect extended service plan alsooffers a Premium Maintenance Plan thatcovers all scheduled maintenance, andselected wear items. The coverage isprepaid, so you never have to worry aboutthe cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.Covered maintenance includes:• Windshield wiper blades.• Spark plugs.• The clutch disc (if equipped).• Brake pads and linings.• Shock absorbers.• Struts.• Engine Belts.• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and

o-rings.• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if

equipped).• Cabin air filter replacement every

20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electricvehicles only).

Interest Free Finance OptionsJust a 10% down payment will provide youwith an affordable, no interest, no feepayment program allowing you all thesecurity and benefits Ford Protectextended service plan has to offer whilepaying over time. You are pre-approvedwith no credit check or hassles. To learnmore, call our Ford Protect extendedservice plan specialists at 800-367-3377.Ford Protect Extended Service PlanP.O. Box 321067Detroit, MI 48232

Ford Protect Extended ServicePlan (CANADA ONLY)You can get more protection for yourvehicle by purchasing a Ford Protectextended service plan. Ford Protectextended service plan is the only servicecontract backed by Ford Motor Companyof Canada, Limited. Depending on the planyou purchase, Ford Protect extendedservice plan provides benefits such as:• Rental reimbursement.• Coverage for certain maintenance and

wear items.• Protection against repair costs after

your New Vehicle Limited WarrantyCoverage expires.

• Roadside Assistance benefits.There are several Ford Protect extendedservice plans available in various time,distance and deductible combinations.Each plan is tailored to fit your own drivingneeds, including reimbursement for towingand rental. When you purchase FordProtect extended service plan, you receiveadded peace-of-mind protectionthroughout Canada, the United States andMexico, provided by a network ofparticipating authorized Ford MotorCompany dealers.Note: Repairs performed outside ofCanada, the United States and Mexico arenot eligible for Ford Protect extendedservice plan coverage.This information is subject to change. Formore information; visit your local Ford ofCanada dealer or www.ford.ca to find theFord Protect extended service plan that isright for you.

494


Ford Protect

GENERAL MAINTENANCEINFORMATIONWhy Maintain Your Vehicle?Carefully following the maintenanceschedule helps protect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance and may help toincrease the value of your vehicle whenyou sell or trade it. Keep all receipts forcompleted maintenance with your vehicle.We have established regular maintenanceintervals for your vehicle based uponrigorous testing. It is important that youhave your vehicle serviced at the propertimes. These intervals serve two purposes;one is to maintain the reliability of yourvehicle and the second is to keep your costof owning your vehicle down.It is your responsibility to have allscheduled maintenance performed and tomake sure that the materials used meetthe specifications identified in this owner'smanual. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 340).Failure to perform scheduled maintenanceinvalidates warranty coverage on partsaffected by the lack of maintenance.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle at YourDealership?Factory-Trained TechniciansService technicians participate in extensivefactory-sponsored certification training tohelp them become experts on theoperation of your vehicle. Ask yourdealership about the training andcertification their technicians havereceived.

Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®Replacement PartsDealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft andFord-authorized branded re-manufacturedreplacement parts. These parts meet orexceed our specifications. Parts installedat your dealership carry a nationwide24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)parts and labor limited warranty.If you do not use Ford authorized parts theymay not meet our specifications anddepending on the part, it could affectemissions compliance.

ConvenienceMany dealerships have extended eveningand Saturday hours to make your servicevisit more convenient and they offer onestop shopping. They can perform anyservices that are required on your vehicle,from general maintenance to collisionrepairs.Note: Not all dealers have extended hoursor body shops. Please contact your dealerfor details.

Protecting Your InvestmentMaintenance is an investment that paysdividends in the form of improvedreliability, durability and resale value. Tomaintain the proper performance of yourvehicle and its emission control systems,make sure you have scheduledmaintenance performed at the designatedintervals.Your vehicle is equipped with theIntelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, whichdisplays a message in the informationdisplay at the proper oil change interval.This interval may be up to one year or10,000 mi (16,000 km).

495


Scheduled Maintenance

When the oil change message appears inthe information display, it is time for an oilchange. Make sure you perform the oilchange within two weeks or 500 mi(800 km) of the message appearing. Makesure you reset the Intelligent Oil-LifeMonitor after each oil change. See OilChange Indicator Reset (page 288).If your information display resetsprematurely or becomes inoperative, youshould perform the oil change interval atsix months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) fromyour last oil change. Never exceed one yearor 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oilchange intervals.Your vehicle is very sophisticated and builtwith multiple, complex, performancesystems. Every manufacturer developsthese systems using differentspecifications and performance features.That is why it is important to rely upon yourdealership to properly diagnose and repairyour vehicle.Ford Motor Company has recommendedmaintenance intervals for various partsand component systems based uponengineering testing. Ford Motor Companyrelies upon this testing to determine themost appropriate mileage for replacementof oils and fluids to protect your vehicle atthe lowest overall cost to you andrecommends against maintenanceschedules that deviate from the scheduledmaintenance information.We strongly recommend the use of onlygenuine Ford, Motorcraft orFord-authorized re-manufacturedreplacement parts engineered for yourvehicle.

Additives and ChemicalsThis owner's manual and the FordWorkshop Manual list the recommendedadditives and chemicals for your vehicle.We do not recommend using chemicals oradditives not approved by us as part ofyour vehicle’s normal maintenance. Pleaseconsult your warranty information.

Oils, Fluids and FlushingIn many cases, fluid discoloration is anormal operating characteristic and, byitself, does not necessarily indicate aconcern or that the fluid needs to bechanged. However, a qualified expert, suchas the factory-trained technicians at yourdealership, should inspect discolored fluidsthat also show signs of overheating orforeign material contaminationimmediately.Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils andfluids at the specified intervals or inconjunction with a repair. Flushing is aviable way to change fluid for many vehiclesub-systems during scheduledmaintenance. It is critical that systems areflushed only with new fluid that is the sameas that required to fill and operate thesystem or using a Ford-approved flushingchemical.

Owner Checks and ServicesMake sure you perform the following basicmaintenance checks and inspections everymonth or at six-month intervals.

496



Check Every Month

Engine oil level.

Function of all interior and exterior lights.

Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.

Windshield washer fluid level.

Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display).

Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.

Check Every Six Months

Battery connections. Clean if necessary.

Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.

Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.

Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.

Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.

Parking brake for proper operation.

Seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function.

Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt) for operation.

Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.

Multi-Point InspectionIn order to keep your vehicle running right,it is important to have the systems on yourvehicle checked regularly. This can helpidentify potential issues and prevent majorproblems. We recommend having thefollowing multi-point inspection performedat every scheduled maintenance intervalto help make sure your vehicle keepsrunning great.

497



Multi-Point Inspection

Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)

Horn operationBattery performance

Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioninghoses

Engine air filter

Suspension components for leaks ordamage

Exhaust system

Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation

Tires (including spare) for wear and properpressure2

Fluid levels1; fill if necessary

Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks

Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots1 Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer2If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expirationUse By date on the canister. Replace as needed.

Be sure to ask your dealership serviceadvisor or technician about the multi-pointvehicle inspection. It is a comprehensiveway to perform a thorough inspection ofyour vehicle. Your checklist gives youimmediate feedback on the overallcondition of your vehicle.

NORMAL SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCEIntelligent Oil-Life Monitor™Your vehicle is equipped with an IntelligentOil-Life Monitor that determines when youshould change the engine oil based on howyour vehicle is used. By using severalimportant factors in its calculations, themonitor helps reduce the cost of owningyour vehicle and reduces environmentalwaste at the same time.

This means you do not have to rememberto change the oil on a mileage-basedschedule. Your vehicle lets you know whenan oil change is due by displaying amessage in the information display.The following table provides examples ofvehicle use and its impact on oil changeintervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oilchange intervals depend on several factorsand generally decrease with severity ofuse.

498



When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message

Vehicle Use and ExampleInterval

Normal

7,500–10,000 mi(12,000–16,000 km)

Normal commuting with highway drivingNo, or moderate, load or towingFlat to moderately hilly roadsNo extended idling

Severe

5,000–7,500 mi(8,000–12,000 km)

Moderate to heavy load or towingMountainous or off-road conditionsExtended idlingExtended hot or cold operation

Extreme3,000–5,000 mi

(5,000–8,000 km) Maximum load or towingExtreme hot or cold operation

Normal Maintenance Intervals

At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display1

Change engine oil and filter.2

Rotate the tires.

Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.

Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.

Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.

Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.

Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.

Inspect the rear axle and U-joints (four wheel drive only).

Inspect the half-shaft boots.

Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.

499



At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display1

Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.

Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness ordrag.

1 Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.2 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine OilCheck (page 287).

Other Maintenance Items 1

Replace cabin air filter.2Every 20,000 mi(32,000 km)

Replace engine air filter.Every 30,000 mi(48,000 km)

Change engine coolant. 3At 100,000 mi(160,000 km)

Replace spark plugs.Every 100,000 mi(160,000 km) Inspect accessory drive belt or belts. 4

Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 150,000 mi(240,000 km) Replace accessory drive belt or belts. 5

1 Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil andfilter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.2 Should be performed by an authorized dealer.3 Initial replacement at six years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km), then every three years or50,000 mi (80,000 km).4 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.5 If not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).

500



SPECIAL OPERATINGCONDITIONS SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCEIf you operate your vehicle primarily in anyof the following conditions, you need toperform extra maintenance as indicated.If you operate your vehicle occasionallyunder any of these conditions, it is notnecessary to perform the extramaintenance. For specificrecommendations, see your dealershipservice advisor or technician.

Perform the services shown in thefollowing tables when specified or within3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the messageappearing in the information displayprompting you to change your oil.• Example 1: The message comes on at

28,750 mi (46,270 km). Perform the30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatictransmission fluid replacement.

• Example 2: The message has notcome on, but the odometer reads30,000 mi (48,000 km) (for example,the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor wasreset at 25,000 mi (40,000 km).Perform the engine air filterreplacement.

Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the informationdisplay and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-uled Maintenance chart.

As required

Inspect rear axle and U-joints (four wheel drive only).Inspect frequently, serviceas required

Inspect half-shaft boots.

See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.

Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi(48,000 km)

Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi(96,000 km)

501



Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the informationdisplay and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-uled Maintenance chart.

As required

Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, serviceas required

Replace engine air filter.


Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi(96,000 km)

Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)

Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, serviceas required

Replace engine air filter.

Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormalnoise, wear, looseness or drag.

Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)

Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure treaddepth.

Change engine oil and filter.1Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)or six months

Perform multi-point inspection.


1Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil ChangeIndicator Reset (page 288).

Exclusive use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles Only)

If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regularunleaded fuel.

Every oil change

ExceptionsThere are several exceptions to the NormalSchedule:

502



Axle and PTU maintenance: The PowerTransfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle (fourwheel drive only) in your vehicle does notrequire any normal scheduledmaintenance. Vehicles are electronicallymonitored and notify the driver requiredservice by displaying a message in theinformation display. The PTU lubricant willbe more likely to require a change if thevehicle has experienced extended periodsof extreme/severe duty cycle driving.Changing or checking the PTU lubricant isnot necessary unless the unit has beensubmerged in water, shows signs ofleakage or a message indicating requiredservice is displayed. Contact yourauthorized dealer for service.California fuel filter replacement: If youregister your vehicle in California, theCalifornia Air Resources Board hasdetermined that the failure to perform thismaintenance item does not nullify theemission warranty or limit recall liabilitybefore the completion of your vehicle'suseful life. Ford Motor Company, however,urges you to have all recommendedmaintenance services performed at thespecified intervals and to record all vehicleservice.

Hot climate oil change intervals:Vehicles operating in the Middle East,North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa orlocations with similar climates using anAmerican Petroleum Institute (API)Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certificationmark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normaloil change interval is 5,000 mi (8,000 km).If the available API SM or SN oils are notavailable, then the oil change interval is3,000 mi (4,800 km).Engine air filter and cabin air filterreplacement: The life of the engine airfilter and cabin air filter is dependent onexposure to dusty and dirty conditions.Vehicles operated in these conditionsrequire frequent inspection andreplacement of the engine air filter andcabin air filter.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCERECORD

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):Signature:

Dealer stamp

503



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

504



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

505



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

506



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

507



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

508



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

509



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

510



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

511



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

512



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

513



ELECTROMAGNETICCOMPATIBILITY

WARNING: Do not place objectsor mount equipment on or near theairbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks(of the front seats), or in front seat areasthat may come into contact with adeploying airbag. Failure to follow theseinstructions may increase the risk ofpersonal injury in the event of a crash.

WARNING: Do not fasten antennacables to original vehicle wiring, fuelpipes and brake pipes.

WARNING: Keep antenna andpower cables at least 4 in (10 cm) fromany electronic modules and airbags.

Note: We test and certify your vehicle tomeet electromagnetic compatibilitylegislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or otherapplicable local requirements). It is yourresponsibility to make sure that anyequipment an authorized dealer installs onyour vehicle complies with applicable locallegislation and other requirements.Note: Any radio frequency transmitterequipment in your vehicle (such as cellulartelephones and amateur radio transmitters)must keep to the parameters in thefollowing table. We do not provide specialprovisions or conditions for installations oruse.

Car

E239120

514


Appendices

Van

E239122

Truck

E239121

515


Appendices

Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (PeakRMS)

Frequency BandMHz

1501-30

2, 35050-54

2, 35068-88

2, 350142-176

2, 350380-512

2, 310806-870

Note: After the installation of radiofrequency transmitters, check fordisturbances from and to all electricalequipment in your vehicle, both in thestandby and transmit modes.Check all electrical equipment:• With the ignition ON.• With the engine running.• During a road test at various speeds.Check that electromagnetic fieldsgenerated inside your vehicle cabin by thetransmitter installed do not exceedapplicable human exposure requirements.

END USER LICENSEAGREEMENTVEHICLE SOFTWARE END USERLICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)

have acquired a vehicle having severaldevices, including SYNC ® and variouscontrol modules, ("DEVICES") thatinclude software licensed or owned byFord Motor Company and its affiliates("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Thosesoftware products of FORD MOTORCOMPANY origin, as well as associatedmedia, printed materials, and "online"or electronic documentation("SOFTWARE") are protected byinternational intellectual property lawsand treaties. The SOFTWARE islicensed, not sold. All rights reserved.

• The SOFTWARE may interface withand/or communicate with, or may belater upgraded to interface with and/orcommunicate with additional softwareand/or systems provided by FORDMOTOR COMPANY.

516


Appendices

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS ENDUSER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPYTHE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THESOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENTTO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OFANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: ThisEULA grants you the following license:• You may use the SOFTWARE as

installed on the DEVICES and asotherwise interfacing with systemsand/or services provide by or throughFORD MOTOR COMPANY or its thirdparty software and service providers.

Description of Other Rights andLimitations• Speech Recognition: If the

SOFTWARE includes speechrecognition component(s), you shouldunderstand that speech recognition isan inherently statistical process andthat recognition errors are inherent inthe process. Neither FORD MOTOR

COMPANY nor its suppliers shall beliable for any damages arising out oferrors in the speech recognitionprocess. It is your responsibility tomonitor any speech recognitionfunctions included in the system.

• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,Decompilation and Disassembly:You may not reverse engineer,decompile, translate, disassemble orattempt to discover any source codeor underlying ideas or algorithms of theSOFTWARE nor permit others toreverse engineer, decompile ordisassemble the SOFTWARE, exceptand only to the extent that such activityis expressly permitted by applicablelaw notwithstanding this limitation orto the extent as may be permitted bythe licensing terms governing use ofany open source components includedwith the SOFTWARE.

• Limitations on Distributing,Copying, Modifying and CreatingDerivative Works: You may notdistribute, copy, make modificationsto or create derivative works based onthe SOFTWARE, except and only to theextent that such activity is expresslypermitted by applicable lawnotwithstanding this limitation or tothe extent as may be permitted by thelicensing terms governing use of anyopen source components included withthe SOFTWARE.

• Single EULA: The end userdocumentation for the DEVICES andrelated systems and services maycontain multiple EULAs, such asmultiple translations and/or multiplemedia versions (e.g., in the userdocumentation and in the software).Even if you receive multiple EULAs, youare licensed to use only one (1) copy ofthe SOFTWARE.

517


Appendices

• SOFTWARE Transfer: You maypermanently transfer your rights underthis EULA only as part of a sale ortransfer of the DEVICES, provided youretain no copies, you transfer all of theSOFTWARE (including all componentparts, the media and printed materials,any upgrades, and, if applicable, theCertificate(s) of Authenticity), and therecipient agrees to the terms of thisEULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,any transfer must include all priorversions of the SOFTWARE.

• Termination: Without prejudice to anyother rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANYmay terminate this EULA if you fail tocomply with the terms and conditionsof this EULA.

• Internet-Based ServicesComponents: The SOFTWARE maycontain components that enable andfacilitate the use of certainInternet-based services. Youacknowledge and agree that FORDMOTOR COMPANY, third partysoftware and service suppliers, itsaffiliates and/or its designated agentmay automatically check the versionof the SOFTWARE and/or itscomponents that you are utilizing andmay provide upgrades or supplementsto the SOFTWARE that may beautomatically downloaded to yourDEVICES.

• Additional Software/Services: TheSOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTORCOMPANY, third party software andservice suppliers, its affiliates and/orits designated agent to provide or makeavailable to you SOFTWARE updates,supplements, add-on components, orInternet-based services componentsof the SOFTWARE after the date youobtain your initial copy of theSOFTWARE ("SupplementalComponents".) SOFTWARE updatesmay cause you to incur additional

charges from your wireless serviceprovider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANYor third party software and servicessuppliers provide or make available toyou Supplemental Components andno other EULA terms are providedalong with the SupplementalComponents, then the terms of thisEULA shall apply. FORD MOTORCOMPANY, its affiliates and/or itsdesignated agent reserve the right todiscontinue without liability anyInternet-based services provided toyou or made available to you throughthe use of the SOFTWARE.

• Links to Third Party Sites: TheSOFTWARE may provide you with theability to link to third party sites. Thethird party sites are not under thecontrol of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,its affiliates and/or its designatedagent. Neither FORD MOTORCOMPANY nor its affiliates nor itsdesignated agent are responsible for(I) the contents of any third party sites,any links contained in third party sites,or any changes or updates to thirdparty sites, or (ii) webcasting or anyother form of transmission receivedfrom any third party sites. If theSOFTWARE provides links to thirdparty sites, those links are provided toyou only as a convenience, and theinclusion of any link does not imply anendorsement of the third party site byFORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliatesand/or its designated agent.

• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:You recognize your obligation to driveresponsibly and keep attention on theroad. You will read and abide with theDEVICES operating instructionsparticularly as they pertain to safetyand you agree to assume any riskassociated with the use of theDEVICES.

518


Appendices

UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORDMOTOR COMPANY separate from theDEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,CD ROM disk(s) or via web download orother means, and is labeled "For UpgradePurposes Only" or "For Recovery PurposesOnly" you may install one (1) copy of suchSOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as areplacement copy for the existingSOFTWARE, and use it in accordance withthis EULA, including any additional EULAterms accompanying the upgradeSOFTWARE.INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:All title and intellectual property rights inand to the SOFTWARE (including but notlimited to any images, photographs,animations, video, audio, music, text and"applets" incorporated into theSOFTWARE), the accompanying printedmaterials, and any copies of theSOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTORCOMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. TheSOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You maynot copy the printed materialsaccompanying the SOFTWARE. All titleand intellectual property rights in and tothe content which may be accessedthrough use of the SOFTWARE is theproperty of the respective content ownerand may be protected by applicablecopyright or other intellectual propertylaws and treaties. This EULA grants you norights to use such content outside itsintended use. All rights not specificallygranted under this EULA are reserved byFORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,and third party software and serviceproviders and suppliers. Use of any on-lineservices which may be accessed throughthe SOFTWARE may be governed by therespective terms of use relating to suchservices. If this SOFTWARE containsdocumentation that is provided only inelectronic form, you may print one copy ofsuch electronic documentation.

EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: Youacknowledge that the SOFTWARE issubject to U.S. and European Union exportjurisdiction. You agree to comply with allapplicable international and national lawsthat apply to the SOFTWARE, includingthe U.S. Export Administration Regulations,as well as end-user, end-use anddestination restrictions issued by U.S. andother governments.TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grantyou any rights in connection with anytrademarks or service marks of FORDMOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and thirdparty software and service providers.PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer toFORD MOTOR COMPANY instructionsprovided in the documentation for theDEVICES product support, such as thevehicle owner guide.Should you have any questions concerningthis EULA, or if you desire to contact FORDMOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,please refer to the address provided in thedocumentation for the DEVICES.No Liability for Certain Damages:EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORDMOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NOLIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES ARISING FROM OR INCONNECTION WITH THE USE ORPERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THISLIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANYREMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIALPURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIESOTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BEEXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEWVEHICLE.

519


Appendices

SYNC® Automotive Important SafetyInformation Read and followinstructions:• Before using your SYNC® system, read

and follow all instructions and safetyinformation provided in this end usermanual ("Owner Guide".) Notfollowing precautions found in theOwner Guide can lead to an accidentor other serious injuries.

General Operation• Voice Command Control: Certain

functions within the SYNC® systemmay be accomplished using voicecommands. Using voice commandswhile driving helps you to operate thesystem without removing your handsfrom the wheel or eyes from the road.

• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do notaccess any function requiring aprolonged view of the screen while youare driving. Pull over in a safe and legalmanner before attempting to access afunction of the system requiringprolonged attention.

• Volume Setting: Do not raise thevolume excessively. Keep the volumeat a level where you can still hearoutside traffic and emergency signalswhile driving. Driving while unable tohear these sounds could cause anaccident.

• Navigation Features: Any navigationfeatures included in the system areintended to provide turn by turninstructions to get you to a desireddestination. Please make certain allpersons using this system carefullyread and follow instructions and safetyinformation fully.

• Distraction Hazard: Any navigationfeatures may require manual(non-verbal) setup. Attempting toperform such set-up or insert datawhile driving can distract your attentionand could cause an accident or otherserious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safeand legal manner before attemptingthese operations.

• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Anynavigation features are provided onlyas an aid. Make your driving decisionsbased on your observations of localconditions and existing trafficregulations. Any such feature is not asubstitute for your personal judgment.Any route suggestions made by thissystem should never replace any localtraffic regulations or your personaljudgment or knowledge of safe drivingpractices.

• Route Safety: Do not follow the routesuggestions if doing so would result inan unsafe or illegal maneuver, if youwould be placed in an unsafe situation,or if you would be directed into an areathat you consider unsafe. The driver isultimately responsible for the safeoperation of the vehicle and therefore,must evaluate whether it is safe tofollow the suggested directions.

• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Mapsused by this system may be inaccuratebecause of changes in roads, trafficcontrols or driving conditions. Alwaysuse good judgment and common sensewhen following the suggested routes.

• Emergency Services: Do not rely onany navigation features included in thesystem to route you to emergencyservices. Ask local authorities or anemergency services operator for theselocations. Not all emergency servicessuch as police, fire stations, hospitalsand clinics are likely to be contained inthe map database for such navigationfeatures.

520


Appendices

Your Responsibilities and Assumptions ofRisk• You agree to each of the following:(a)

Any use of the SOFTWARE whiledriving an automobile or other vehiclein violation of applicable law orotherwise driving in an unsafe mannerpresents a significant risk of distracteddriving and should not be attemptedunder any circumstances;(b) Use ofthe SOFTWARE at excessive volumeposes a significant risk of hearingdamage and should not be attemptedunder any circumstances;(c) TheSOFTWARE may not be compatiblewith new or different versions of anoperating system, third party software,or third party services, and theSOFTWARE may potentially cause acritical failure of an operating system,third party software, or third partyservice.(d) Any third party serviceaccessed by or third party softwareused with the SOFTWARE (I) maycharge an additional fee for access, (ii)may not work correctly, on anuninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)may change streaming formats ordiscontinue operation, (iv) may containadult, profane or offensive content; and(v) may contain inaccurate, false ormisleading traffic, weather, financialor safety information or other content;and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE maycause you to incur additional chargesfrom your wireless service provider(WSP) and any data or minutecalculators that may be included in thesoftware program are for referenceonly, are not warranted in any way andshould not be relied upon in anyway.

• When using the SOFTWARE, you agreeto be responsible for and assume theentire risk to the items set forth inSection (a) – (e) above.

Disclaimer of WarrantyYOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE ANDAGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES ANDSOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK ANDTHAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TOSATISFACTORY QUALITY,PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTEDBY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWAREAND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE ORTHIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALLFAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANYHEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIESAND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TOTHE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTYSERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED ORSTATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIESAND/OR CONDITIONS OFMERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORYQUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR ANARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTYRIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOESNOT WARRANT (a) AGAINSTINTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENTOF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICESWILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)THAT THE OPERATION OF THESOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BEUNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, ORTHIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BECORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTENINFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BYFORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITSAUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL

521


Appendices

CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THESOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVEDEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRECOST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOMEJURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THEDISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIESOR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLESTATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOTFULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLEWARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTORCOMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THEWARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDINGWITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THEEXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICTBETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTIONAND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THEWARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.

Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction• The laws of the State of Michigan

govern this EULA and Your use of theSOFTWARE. Your use of theSOFTWARE may also be subject toother local, state, national, orinternational laws. Any litigation arisingout of or related to this EULA shall bebrought and maintained exclusively ina court of the State of Michiganlocated in Wayne County or in theUnited States District Court for theEastern District of Michigan. You herebyconsent to submit to the personaljurisdiction of a court in the State ofMichigan located in Wayne County andthe United States District Court for theEastern District of Michigan for anydispute arising out of or relating to thisEULA.

Binding Arbitration and Class ActionWaiver(a) Application. This Section applies toany dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOTINCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TOCOPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THEENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OFFORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.Dispute means any dispute, action, or othercontroversy between You and FORDMOTOR COMPANY, other than theexceptions listed above, concerning theSOFTWARE (including its price) or thisEULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,statute, regulation, ordinance, or any otherlegal or equitable basis.(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of aDispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANYmust give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,which is a written statement of the name,address, and contact information of theparty giving it, the facts giving rise to thedispute, and the relief requested. You andFORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt toresolve any dispute through informalnegotiation within 60 days from the datethe Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY maycommence arbitration.(c) Small claims court. You may alsolitigate any dispute in small claims courtin your county of residence or FORDMOTOR COMPANY’S principal place ofbusiness, if the dispute meets allrequirements to be heard in the smallclaims court. You may litigate in smallclaims court whether or not Younegotiated informally first.(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORDMOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve anydispute by informal negotiation or in smallclaims court, any other effort to resolvethe dispute will be conducted exclusivelyby binding arbitration. You are giving up

522


Appendices

the right to litigate (or participate in as aparty or class member) all disputes in courtbefore a judge or jury. Instead, all disputeswill be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,whose decision will be final except for alimited right of appeal under the FederalArbitration Act. Any court with jurisdictionover the parties may enforce thearbitrator’s award.(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedingsto resolve or litigate any dispute in anyforum will be conducted solely on anindividual basis. Neither you nor FORDMOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have anydispute heard as a class action, as a privateattorney general action, or in any otherproceeding in which any party acts orproposes to act in a representativecapacity. No arbitration or proceeding willbe combined with another without theprior written consent of all parties to allaffected arbitrations or proceedings.(f) Arbitration procedure. Anyarbitration will be conducted by theAmerican Arbitration Association (the“AAA”), under its Commercial ArbitrationRules. If You are an individual and use theSOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, orif the value of the dispute is $75,000 orless whether or not You are an individualor how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAASupplementary Procedures forConsumer-Related Disputes will alsoapply. To commence arbitration, submit aCommercial Arbitration Rules Demand forArbitration form to the AAA. You mayrequest a telephonic or in-person hearingby following the AAA rules. In a disputeinvolving $10,000 or less, any hearing willbe telephonic unless the arbitrator findsgood cause to hold an in-person hearinginstead. For more information, see adr.orgor call 1-800-778-7879. You agree tocommence arbitration only in your countyof residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’Sprincipal place of business. The arbitrator

may award the same damages to Youindividually as a court could. The arbitratormay award declaratory or injunctive reliefonly to You individually, and only to theextent required to satisfy Your individualclaim.(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.

FORD MOTOR COMPANY willpromptly reimburse your filing fees andpay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees andexpenses. If you reject FORD MOTORCOMPANY’S last written settlementoffer made before the arbitrator wasappointed (“last written offer”), yourdispute goes all the way to anarbitrator’s decision (called an“award”), and the arbitrator awardsyou more than the last written offer,FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give youthree incentives: (1) pay the greater ofthe award or $1,000; (2) pay twice yourreasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and(3) reimburse any expenses (includingexpert witness fees and costs) thatyour attorney reasonably accrues forinvestigating, preparing, and pursuingyour claim in arbitration. The arbitratorwill determine the amounts.

• ii. Disputes involving more than$75,000. The AAA rules will governpayment of filing fees and the AAA’sand arbitrator’s fees and expenses.

• iii. Disputes involving any amount. Inany arbitration you commence, FORDMOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAAor arbitrator’s fees and expenses, orYour filing fees it reimbursed, only if thearbitrator finds the arbitration frivolousor brought for an improper purpose. Inany arbitration FORD MOTORCOMPANY commences, it will pay all

523


Appendices

filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees andexpenses. It will not seek its attorney’sfees or expenses from you in anyarbitration. Fees and expenses are notcounted in determining how much adispute involves.

(h) Claims or disputes must be filedwithin one year. To the extent permittedby law, any claim or dispute under thisEULA to which this Section applies mustbe filed within one year in small claimscourt (Section c) or in arbitration (Sectiond). The one-year period begins when theclaim or dispute first could be filed. If sucha claim or dispute is not filed within oneyear, it is permanently barred.(I) Severability. If the class action waiver(Section e) is found to be illegal orunenforceable as to all or some parts of adispute, then that portion of Section e willnot apply to those parts. Instead, thoseparts will be severed and proceed in a courtof law, with the remaining parts proceedingin arbitration. If any other provision of thatportion Section e is found to be illegal orunenforceable, that provision will besevered with the remainder of Section eremaining in full force and effect.

Telenav Software End User LicenseAgreementPlease read these terms and conditionscarefully before you use the TeleNavSoftware. Your use of the TeleNavSoftware indicates that you accept theseterms and conditions. If you do not acceptthese terms and conditions, do not breakthe seal of the package, launch, orotherwise use the TeleNav Software.TeleNav may revise this Agreement andthe privacy policy at any time, with orwithout notice to you. You agree to visithttp://www.telenav.com from time to timeto review the then current version of thisAgreement and of the privacy policy.

1. Safe and Lawful UseYou acknowledge that devoting attentionto the TeleNav Software may pose a riskof injury or death to you and others insituations that otherwise require yourundivided attention, and you thereforeagree to comply with the following whenusing the TeleNav Software:(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwisedrive safely;(b) use your own personal judgment whiledriving. If you feel that a route suggestedby the TeleNav Software instructs you toperform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,places you in an unsafe situation, or directsyou into an area that you consider to beunsafe, do not follow such instructions;(c) do not input destinations, or otherwisemanipulate the TeleNav Software, unlessyour vehicle is stationary and parked;(d) do not use the TeleNav Software forany illegal, unauthorized, unintended,unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,or in any manner inconsistent with thisAgreement;(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devicesand cables necessary for use of theTeleNav Software in a secure manner inyour vehicle so that they will not interferewith your driving and will not prevent theoperation of any safety device (such as anairbag).You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNavharmless against all claims resulting fromany dangerous or otherwise inappropriateuse of the TeleNav Software in any movingvehicle, including as a result of your failureto comply with the directions above.

524


Appendices

2. Account InformationYou agree: (a) when registering theTeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav withtrue, accurate, current, and completeinformation about yourself, and (b) toinform TeleNav promptly of any changesto such information, and to keep it true,accurate, current and complete.

3. Software License• Subject to your compliance with the

terms of this Agreement, TeleNavhereby grants to you a personal,non-exclusive, non-transferable license(except as expressly permitted belowin connection with your permanenttransfer of the TeleNav Softwarelicense), without the right tosublicense, to use the TeleNavSoftware (in object code form only) inorder to access and use the TeleNavSoftware. This license shall terminateupon any termination or expiration ofthis Agreement. You agree that you willuse the TeleNav Software only for yourpersonal business or leisure purposes,and not to provide commercialnavigation services to other parties.

3.1 License Limitations• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,

disassemble, translate, modify, alteror otherwise change the TeleNavSoftware or any part thereof; (b)attempt to derive the source code,audio library or structure of theTeleNav Software without the priorexpress written consent of TeleNav;(c) remove from the TeleNavSoftware, or alter, any of TeleNav's orits suppliers' trademarks, trade names,logos, patent or copyright notices, orother notices or markings; (d)

distribute, sublicense or otherwisetransfer the TeleNav Software toothers, except as part of yourpermanent transfer of the TeleNavSoftware; or (e) use the TeleNavSoftware in any manner that

I. infringes the intellectual property orproprietary rights, rights of publicity orprivacy or other rights of any party,ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance orregulation, including but not limited to lawsand regulations related to spamming,privacy, consumer and child protection,obscenity or defamation, oriii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,obscene, libelous, or otherwiseobjectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, orotherwise permit unauthorized access bythird parties to the TeleNav Softwarewithout advanced written permission ofTeleNav.

4. Disclaimers• To the fullest extent permissible

pursuant to applicable law, in no eventwill TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,or agents or employees of any of theforegoing, be liable for any decisionmade or action taken by you or anyoneelse in reliance on the informationprovided by the TeleNav Software.TeleNav also does not warrant theaccuracy of the map or other data usedfor the TeleNav Software. Such datamay not always reflect reality due to,among other things, road closures,construction, weather, new roads andother changing conditions. You areresponsible for the entire risk arisingout of your use of the TeleNavSoftware. For example but withoutlimitation, you agree not to rely on theTeleNav Software for criticalnavigation in areas where thewell-being or survival of you or others

525


Appendices

is dependent on the accuracy ofnavigation, as the maps or functionalityof the TeleNav Software are notintended to support such high riskapplications, especially in more remotegeographical areas.

• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMSAND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES INCONNECTION WITH THE TELENAVSOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALLWARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISEFROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOMOR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENTOF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITHRESPECT TO THE TELENAVSOFTWARE.

• Certain jurisdictions do not permit thedisclaimer of certain warranties, so thislimitation may not apply to you.

5. Limitation of Liability• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER

APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NOCIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAVOR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERSBE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRDPARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THEINABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENTOR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OFPROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONOR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THEUSE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THETELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IFTELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGESTHAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY

REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGESREFERENCED HEREIN AND ALLDIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES INCONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THEENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV ANDOF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERSSHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNTACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THETELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATESAND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOTALLOW THE EXCLUSION ORLIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THEABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONSMAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

6. Arbitration and Governing Law• You agree that any dispute, claim or

controversy arising out of or relating tothis Agreement or the TeleNavSoftware shall be settled byindependent arbitration involving aneutral arbitrator and administered bythe American Arbitration Associationin the County of Santa Clara, California.The arbitrator shall apply theCommercial Arbitration Rules of theAmerican Arbitration Association, andthe judgment upon the award renderedby the arbitrator may be entered by anycourt having jurisdiction. Note thatthere is no judge or jury in an arbitrationproceeding and the decision of thearbitrator shall be binding upon bothparties. You expressly agree to waiveyour right to a jury trial. This Agreementand performance hereunder will begoverned by and construed inaccordance with the laws of the Stateof California, without giving effect toits conflict of law provisions. To theextent judicial action is necessary inconnection with the binding arbitration,both TeleNav and you agree to submit

526


Appendices

to the exclusive jurisdiction of thecourts of the County of Santa Clara,California. The United NationsConvention on Contracts for theInternational Sale of Goods shall notapply.

7. Assignment• You may not resell, assign, or transfer

this Agreement or any of your rights orobligations, except in totality, inconnection with your permanenttransfer of the TeleNav Software, andexpressly conditioned upon the newuser of the TeleNav Software agreeingto be bound by the terms andconditions of this Agreement. Any suchsale, assignment or transfer that is notexpressly permitted under thisparagraph will result in immediatetermination of this Agreement, withoutliability to TeleNav, in which case youand all other parties shall immediatelycease all use of the TeleNav Software.Notwithstanding the foregoing,TeleNav may assign this Agreement toany other party at any time withoutnotice, provided the assignee remainsbound by this Agreement.

8. Miscellaneous

8.1This Agreement constitutes the entireagreement between TeleNav and you withrespect to the subject matter hereof.

8.2Except for the limited licenses expresslygranted in this Agreement, TeleNav retainsall right, title and interest in and to theTeleNav Software, including withoutlimitation all related intellectual propertyrights. No licenses or other rights which arenot expressly granted in this Agreementare intended to, or shall be, granted or

conferred by implication, statute,inducement, estoppel or otherwise, andTeleNav and its suppliers and licensorshereby reserve all of their respective rightsother than the licenses explicitly grantedin this Agreement.

8.3By using the TeleNav Software, youconsent to receive from TeleNav allcommunications, including notices,agreements, legally required disclosuresor other information in connection with theTeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")electronically. TeleNav may provide suchNotices by posting them on TeleNav'sWebsite or by downloading such Noticesto your wireless device. If you desire towithdraw your consent to receive Noticeselectronically, you must discontinue youruse of the TeleNav Software.

8.4TeleNav's or your failure to requireperformance of any provision shall notaffect that party's right to requireperformance at any time thereafter, norshall a waiver of any breach or default ofthis Agreement constitute a waiver of anysubsequent breach or default or a waiverof the provision itself.

8.5If any provision herein is heldunenforceable, then such provision will bemodified to reflect the intention of theparties, and the remaining provisions ofthis Agreement will remain in full force andeffect.

527


Appendices

8.6The headings in this Agreement are forconvenience of reference only, will not bedeemed to be a part of this Agreement,and will not be referred to in connectionwith the construction or interpretation ofthis Agreement. As used in this Agreement,the words "include" and "including" andvariations thereof, will not be deemed tobe terms of limitation, but rather will bedeemed to be followed by the words"without limitation".

9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions• The Telenav Software utilizes map and

other data licensed to Telenav by thirdparty vendors for the benefit of you andother end users. This Agreementincludes end-user terms applicable tothese companies (included at the endof this Agreement), and thus your useof the Telenav Software is also subjectto such terms. You agree to complywith the following additional terms andconditions, which are applicable toTelenav’s third party vendor licensors::

9.1 End User Terms Required by HERENorth America, LLCThe data (“Data”) is provided for yourpersonal, internal use only and not forresale. It is protected by copyright, and issubject to the following terms andconditions which are agreed to by you, onthe one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) andits licensors (including their licensors andsuppliers) on the other hand.© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.The Data for areas of Canada includesinformation taken with permission fromCanadian authorities, including: © HerMajesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada PostCorporation, GeoBase®, © Department ofNatural Resources Canada.

HERE holds a non-exclusive license fromthe United States Postal Service® topublish and sell ZIP+4® information.©United States Postal Service® 2014.Prices are not established, controlled orapproved by the United States PostalService®. The following trademarks andregistrations are owned by the USPS:United States Postal Service, USPS, andZIP+4The Data for Mexico includes certain datafrom Instituto Nacional de Estadística yGeografía.

9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2(Shanghai) Co., LtdThe data (“Data”) is provided for yourpersonal, internal use only and not forresale. It is protected by copyright, and issubject to the following terms andconditions which are agreed to by you, onthe one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (includingtheir licensors and suppliers) on the otherhand. 20xx. All rights reserved

Terms and ConditionsPermitted Use. You agree to use this Datatogether with the Telenav Software solelyfor the internal business and personalpurposes for which you were licensed, andnot for service bureau, time-sharing orother similar purposes. Accordingly, butsubject to the restrictions set forth in thefollowing paragraphs, you agree not tootherwise reproduce, copy, modify,decompile, disassemble, create anyderivative works of, or reverse engineer anyportion of this Data, and may not transferor distribute it in any form, for any purpose,except to the extent permitted bymandatory laws.

528


Appendices

Restrictions. Except where you have beenspecifically licensed to do so by Telenav,and without limiting the precedingparagraph, you may not use this Data (a)with any products, systems, or applicationsinstalled or otherwise connected to or incommunication with vehicles, capable ofvehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,real time route guidance, fleetmanagement or similar applications; or (b)with or in communication with anypositioning devices or any mobile orwireless-connected electronic or computerdevices, including without limitationcellular phones, palmtop and handheldcomputers, pagers, and personal digitalassistants or PDAs.Warning. The Data may containinaccurate or incomplete information dueto the passage of time, changingcircumstances, sources used and thenature of collecting comprehensivegeographic data, any of which may lead toincorrect results.No Warranty. This Data is provided to you“as is,” and you agree to use it at your ownrisk. Telenav and its licensors (and theirlicensors and suppliers) make noguarantees, representations or warrantiesof any kind, express or implied, arising bylaw or otherwise, including but not limitedto, content, quality, accuracy,completeness, effectiveness, reliability,fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,use or results to be obtained from thisData, or that the Data or server will beuninterrupted or error-free.Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV ANDITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIMANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ORNON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,Territories and Countries do not allowcertain warranty exclusions, so to thatextent the above exclusion may not applyto you.Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV ANDITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOTBE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANYCLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THECAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND ORACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY ORDAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICHMAY RESULT FROM THE USE ORPOSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; ORFOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANYOTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, ORTHE BREACH OF THESE TERMS ORCONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONIN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON AWARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITSLICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SomeStates, Territories and Countries do notallow certain liability exclusions ordamages limitations, so to that extent theabove may not apply to you.Export Control. You shall not export fromanywhere any part of the Data or any directproduct thereof except in compliance with,and with all licenses and approvalsrequired under, applicable export laws,rules and regulations, including but notlimited to the laws, rules and regulationsadministered by the Office of ForeignAssets Control of the U.S. Department ofCommerce and the Bureau of Industry andSecurity of the U.S. Department ofCommerce. To the extent that any such

529


Appendices

export laws, rules or regulations prohibitHERE from complying with any of itsobligations hereunder to deliver ordistribute Data, such failure shall beexcused and shall not constitute a breachof this Agreement.Entire Agreement. These terms andconditions constitute the entire agreementbetween Telenav (and its licensors,including their licensors and suppliers) andyou pertaining to the subject matter hereof,and supersedes in their entirety any andall written or oral agreements previouslyexisting between us with respect to suchsubject matter.Governing Law. The above terms andconditions shall be governed by the lawsof the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”where European HERE Data is used],without giving effect to (i) its conflict oflaws provisions, or (ii) the United NationsConvention for Contracts for theInternational Sale of Goods, which isexplicitly excluded. You agree to submit tothe jurisdiction of the State of Illinois[insert “The Netherlands” where EuropeanHERE Data is used] for any and alldisputes, claims and actions arising fromor in connection with the Data provided toyou hereunder.Government End Users. If the Data isbeing acquired by or on behalf of theUnited States government or any otherentity seeking or applying rights similar tothose customarily claimed by the UnitedStates government, this Data is a“commercial item” as that term is definedat 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed inaccordance with these End-User Terms,and each copy of Data delivered orotherwise furnished shall be marked andembedded as appropriate with thefollowing “Notice of Use,” and shall betreated in accordance with such Notice:

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425

West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois60606

This Data is a commercial item asdefined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to

these End-User Terms under which thisData was provided.

© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.

If the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency, or any federal officialrefuses to use the legend provided herein,the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency, or any federal officialmust notify HERE prior to seekingadditional or alternative rights in the Data.

I. US/Canada Territory

A. United States Data. The End-UserTerms for any Application containingData for the United States shall containthe following notices:

“HERE holds a non-exclusive licensefrom the United States PostalService® to publish and sell ZIP+4®information.”

“©United States Postal Service®20XX. Prices are not established,controlled or approved by the UnitedStates Postal Service®. The followingtrademarks and registrations areowned by the USPS: United StatesPostal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”

530


Appendices

B. Canada Data. The following provi-sions apply to the Data for Canada,which may include or reflect data fromthird party licensors (“Third PartyData”), including Her Majesty the Queenin Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),Canada Post Corporation (“CanadaPost”) and the Department of NaturalResources of Canada (“NRCan”):

1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Clientagrees that its use of the Third PartyData is subject to the following provi-sions:

a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Datais licensed on an “as is” basis. Thelicensors of such data, including HerMajesty, Canada Post and NRCan,make no guarantees, representa-tions or warranties respecting suchdata, either express or implied,arising by law or otherwise, includingbut not limited to, effectiveness,completeness, accuracy or fitnessfor a particular purpose.

b. Limitation on Liability: The ThirdParty Data licensors, including HerMajesty, Canada Post and NRCan,shall not be liable: (i) in respect ofany claim, demand or action, irre-spective of the nature of the causeof the claim, demand or actionalleging any loss, injury or damages,direct or indirect, which may resultfrom the use or possession of suchData; or (ii) in any way for loss ofrevenues or contracts, or any otherconsequential loss of any kindresulting from any defect in theData.

2. Copyright Notice: In connection witheach copy of all or any portion of theData for the Territory of Canada, Clientshall affix in a conspicuous manner thefollowing copyright notice on at leastone of: (i) the label for the storagemedia of the copy; (ii) the packagingfor the copy; or (iii) other materialspackaged with the copy, such as usermanuals or end user license agree-ments: “This data includes informationtaken with permission from Canadianauthorities, including © Her Majestythe Queen in Right of Canada, ©Queen's Printer for Ontario, © CanadaPost Corporation, GeoBase®, © TheDepartment of Natural ResourcesCanada. All rights reserved.”

3. End-User Terms: Except as other-wise agreed by the parties, in connec-tion with the provision of any portionof the Data for the Territory of Canadato End-Users as may be authorizedunder the Agreement, Client shallprovide such End-Users, in a reason-ably conspicuous manner, with terms(set forth with other end user termsrequired to be provided under theAgreement, or as otherwise may beprovided, by Client) which shall includethe following provisions on behalf ofthe Third Party Data licensors,including Her Majesty, Canada Postand NRCan:

The Data may include or reflectdata of licensors, including HerMajesty the Queen in the Right ofCanada (“Her Majesty”), CanadaPost Corporation (“Canada Post”)and the Department of NaturalResources Canada (“NRCan”). Suchdata is licensed on an “as is” basis.The licensors, including Her Majesty,Canada Post and NRCan, make noguarantees, representations orwarranties respecting such data,

531


Appendices

either express or implied, arising bylaw or otherwise, including but notlimited to, effectiveness, complete-ness, accuracy or fitness for aparticular purpose. The licensors,including Her Majesty, Canada Postand NRCan, shall not be liable inrespect of any claim, demand oraction, irrespective of the nature ofthe cause of the claim, demand oraction alleging any loss, injury ordamages, direct or indirect, whichmay result from the use or posses-sion of the data or the Data. Thelicensors, including Her Majesty,Canada Post and NRCan, shall notbe liable in any way for loss ofrevenues or contracts, or any otherconsequential loss of any kindresulting from any defect in the dataor the Data.End User shall indemnify and saveharmless the licensors, including HerMajesty, Canada Post and NRCan,and their officers, employees andagents from and against any claim,demand or action, irrespective ofthe nature of the cause of the claim,demand or action, alleging loss,costs, expenses, damages or injuries(including injuries resulting in death)arising out of the use or possessionof the data or the Data.

4. Additional Provisions: The termscontained in this Section are in addi-tion to all of the rights and obligationsof the parties under the Agreement.To the extent that any of the provi-sions of this Section are inconsistentwith, or conflict with, any other provi-sions of the Agreement, the provisionsof this Section shall prevail.

II. Mexico. The following provision appliesto the Data for Mexico, which includescertain data from the Instituto Nacionalde Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):

A. Any and all copies of the Data and/orpackaging containing Data for Mexicoshall contain the following notice:“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional deEstadística y Geografía)”

III. Latin America Territory

A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copiesof the Data and/or packaging relatingthereto shall include the respective ThirdParty Notices set forth below and usedas described below corresponding tothe Territory (or portion thereof)included in such copy:

NoticeTerritory

IGN “INSTITUTOGEOGRAFICO NACIONALARGENTINO”

Argen-tina

“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICOMILITAR DEL ECUADORAUTORIZACION N° IGM-2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DEENERO DE 2011”

Ecuador

“source: © IGN 2009 - BDTOPO ®”

“Fuente: INEGI (InstitutoNacional de Estadística yGeografía)”

Guade-loupe,FrenchGuianaandMarti-niqueMexico

IV. Middle East Territory

532


Appendices


NoticeCountry

“© Royal JordanianGeographic Centre”. Theforegoing notice requirementfor Jordan Data is a materialterm of the Agreement. IfClient or any of its permitted

Jordan

sublicensees (if any) fail tomeet such requirement,HERE shall have the right toterminate Client’s licensewith respect to the JordanData.

B. Jordan Data. Client and its permittedsublicensees (if any) are restricted fromlicensing and/or otherwise distributingHERE’s database for the country ofJordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanianentities for use of the Jordan Data solelyin Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.In addition, Client, its permitted subli-censees (if any) and End-Users arerestricted from using the Jordan Data inEnterprise Applications if such party is(i) a non-Jordanian entity using theJordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) aJordan-based customer. For purposesof the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-ations, GIS applications, mobile businessasset management applications, callcenter applications, telematics applica-tions, public organization Internetapplications or for providing geocodingservices.

V. Europe Territory

A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe

1. General Restrictions Applicable toTraffic Codes. Client acknowledgesand agrees that in certain countries ofthe Europe Territory, Client will needto obtain rights directly from thirdparty RDS-TMC code providers toreceive and use the Traffic Codes inthe Data and to deliver to End-UsersTransactions in any way derived fromor based on such Traffic Codes. Forsuch countries, HERE shall deliver theData incorporating Traffic Codes toClient only after receiving certificationfrom Client of its having obtained suchrights.

2. Display of Third Party RightsLegends for Belgium. Client shall, foreach Transaction that uses TrafficCodes for Belgium, provide thefollowing notice to the End-User:“Traffic Codes for Belgium areprovided by the Ministerie van deVlaamse Gemeenschap and theMinistèrie de l’Equipement et desTransports.”

B. Paper Maps. With respect to anylicense granted to Client relating tomaking, selling or distributing papermaps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper orpaper-like medium): (a) such licensewith respect to Data for the Territory ofGreat Britain is conditioned on Client’sentering into and complying with aseparate written agreement with theOrdnance Survey (“OS”) to create andsell paper maps, Client’s paying to theOS any and all applicable paper maproyalties, and Client’s complying withthe OS copyright notice requirements;(b) such license for selling or otherwisedistributing for charge with respect toData for the Territory of Czech Republic

533


Appendices

is conditioned on Client’s obtaining priorwritten consent from Kartografie a.s.;(c) such license for selling or distributingwith respect to Data for the Territory ofSwitzerland is conditioned on Client’sobtaining a permit from Bundesamt fürLandestopografie of Switzerland; (d)Client is restricted from using Data forthe Territory of France to create papermaps with a scale between 1:5,000 and1:250,000; and (e) Client is restrictedfrom using any Data to create, sell ordistribute paper maps that are the sameor substantially similar, in terms of datacontent and specific use of color,symbols and scale, to paper mapspublished by the European nationalmapping agencies, including withoutlimitation, Landervermessungämter ofGermany, Topografische Dienst of theNetherlands, Nationaal GeografischInstituut of Belgium, Bundesamt fürLandestopografie of Switzerland,Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-swesen of Austria, and the NationalLand Survey of Sweden.

C. OS Enforcement. Without limitingSection IV(B) above, with respect toData for the Territory of Great Britain,Client acknowledges and agrees thatthe Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bringa direct action against Client to enforcecompliance with the OS copyright notice(see Section IV(D) below) and papermap requirements (see Section IV(B)above) contained in this Agreement.

D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copiesof the Data and/or packaging relatingthereto shall include the respective ThirdParty Notices set forth below and usedas described below corresponding tothe Territory (or portion thereof)included in such copy:

NoticeCountry(ies)

“© Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen”

Austria

“© EuroGeographics”

CroatiaCyprus,Estonia,Latvia,Lithuania,Moldova,Poland,Sloveniaand/orUkraine

“source: © IGN 2009 – BDTOPO ®”

France

“Die Grundlagendatenwurden mit Genehmigungder zuständigen Behördenentnommen”

Germany

“Contains OrdnanceSurvey data © Crowncopyright and databaseright 2010 Contains RoyalMail data © Royal Mailcopyright and databaseright 2010”

Great Britain

“Copyright GeomaticsLtd.”

Greece

“Copyright © 2003; Top-Map Ltd.”

Hungary

“La Banca Dati Italiana èstata prodotta usandoquale riferimento anchecartografia numerica edal tratto prodotta e fornitadalla Regione Toscana.”

Italy

“Copyright © 2000;Norwegian MappingAuthority”

Norway

“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal

534


Appendices

“Información geográficapropiedad del CNIG”

Spain

“Based upon electronicdata © National LandSurvey Sweden.”

Sweden

“TopografischeGrundlage: © Bundesamtfür Landestopographie.

Switzerland

E. Respective Country Distribution. Clientacknowledges that HERE has notreceived approvals to distribute mapdata for the following countries in suchrespective countries: Albania, Belarus,Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.HERE may update such list from time totime. The license rights granted to Clientunder this TL with respect to the Datafor such countries are contingent uponClient’s compliance with all applicablelaws and regulations, including, withoutlimitation, any required licenses orapprovals to distribute the Applicationincorporating such Data in suchrespective countries.

VI. Australia Territory


Copyright. Based on data providedunder license from PSMA AustraliaLimited (www.psma.com.au).

Product incorporates data which is ©20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GMHolden Limited, Intelematics AustraliaPty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.

B. Third Party Notices for Australia. Inaddition to the foregoing, the End-UserTerms for any Application containingRDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australiashall contain the following notice:“Product incorporates traffic locationcodes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-tion Limited and its licensors.”

AT&T Vehicle Network CarrierTelematics DisclosureEND USER FOR PURPOSES OF THISSECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONALREPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITEDASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THISSECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESSSERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITSAFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS ANDTHEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORSAND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NOCONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITHTHE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICECARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRDPARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANYAGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD ANDUNDERLYING CARRIER. END USERUNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THEUNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANYKIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THEACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OFCONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OROTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVEREMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANYWAY IN CONNECTION WITH THISAGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSEWHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR

535


Appendices

DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDEDHEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENTOF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TOEXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USERFOR THE SERVICES DURING THETWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THEDATE THE CLAIM AROSE.(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFYAND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYINGWIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITSOFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTSAGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATIONCLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANYPROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURYOR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, INCONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENTOR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, ORINABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPTWHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THEUNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSSNEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THETERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHTIN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THEDEVICE.(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THATFORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIERCANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OFWIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILLNOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OFSECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THESERVICESTHE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USEONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELLTHE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY ENDUSER UNDERSTANDS THAT THEUNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOTGUARANTEE ANY END USERUNINTERRUPTED SERVICE ORCOVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIERDOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERSCAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THESERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER

MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY ORFITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCEREGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BELIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITSOWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OROMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICEPROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THEUNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE ORINJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION ORTERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYINGCARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURYCAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY INCONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHEREMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULLEXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE ENDUSER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES ANDHOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIERHARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANYAND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON ORENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATUREARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATINGTO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICESPROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIEROR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLEOR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGEDNEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYINGCARRIER.

VII. China Territory

Personal Use OnlyYou agree to use this Data together with[insert name of Client Application] for thesolely personal, non-commercial purposesfor which you were licensed, and not forservice bureau, time-sharing or othersimilar purposes. Accordingly, but subjectto the restrictions set forth in the followingparagraphs, you may copy this Data onlyas necessary for your personal use to (i)

536


Appendices

view it, and (ii) save it, provided that youdo not remove any copyright notices thatappear and do not modify the Data in anyway. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,copy, modify, decompile, disassemble orreverse engineer any portion of this Data,and may not transfer or distribute it in anyform, for any purpose, except to the extentpermitted by mandatory laws.

RestrictionsExcept where you have been specificallylicensed to do so by NAV2 , and withoutlimiting the preceding paragraph, you maynot (a) use this Data with any products,systems, or applications installed orotherwise connected to or incommunication with vehicles, capable ofvehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,real time route guidance, fleetmanagement or similar applications; or (b)with or in communication with anypositioning devices or any mobile orwireless-connected electronic or computerdevices, including without limitationcellular phones, palmtop and handheldcomputers, pagers, and personal digitalassistants or PDAs. You agree to ceaseusing this Data if you fail to comply withthese terms and conditions.

Limited WarrantyNAV2 warrants that (a) the Data willperform substantially in accordance withthe accompanying written materials for aperiod of ninety (90) days from the dateof receipt, and (b) any support servicesprovided by NAV2 shall be substantially asdescribed in applicable written materialsprovided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’ssupport engineers will make commerciallyreasonable efforts to solve any problemissues.

rigCustomer RemediesNAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability andyour exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’ssole discretion, either (a) return of the pricepaid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement ofthe Data that do not meet NAV2’s LimitedWarranty and that are returned to NAV2with a copy of your receipt. This LimitedWarranty is void if failure of the Data hasresulted from accident, abuse, ormisapplication. Any replacement Data willbe warranted for the remainder of theoriginal warranty period or thirty (30) days,whichever is longer. Neither these remediesnor any product support services offeredby NAV2 are available without proof ofpurchase from an authorized internationalsource.

No Other Warranty:EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTYSET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENTPERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIMANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP ORNON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warrantyexclusions may not be permitted underapplicable law, so to that extent the aboveexclusion may not apply to you.

Limited Liability:TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BYAPPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITSLICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOTBE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANYCLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THECAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND ORACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY ORDAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICHMAY RESULT FROM THE USE ORPOSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR

537


Appendices

FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANYOTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, ORTHE BREACH OF THESE TERMS ORCONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONIN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON AWARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITSLICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDERNO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s ORITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDEREXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liabilityexclusions may not be permitted underapplicable law, so to that extent the aboveexclusion may not apply to you.

Export ControlYou agree not to export to anywhere anypart of the Data provided to you or anydirect product thereof except incompliance with, and with all licenses andapprovals required under, applicableexport laws, rules and regulations.

IP ProtectionThe Data are owned by NAV2 or itssuppliers and are protected by applicablecopyright and other intellectual propertylaw and treaties. The Data are providedsolely on the basis of a license to use, notsale.

Entire AgreementThese terms and conditions constitute theentire agreement between NAV2(and itslicensors, including their licensors andsuppliers) and you pertaining to the subjectmatter hereof, and supersedes in theirentirety any and all written or oralagreements previously existing betweenus with respect to such subject matter.

Governing Law.The above terms and conditions shall begoverned by the laws of the People’sRepublic of China, without giving effect to(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) theUnited Nations Convention for Contractsfor the International Sale of Goods, whichis explicitly excluded. Any dispute arisingfrom or in connection with the Dataprovided to you hereunder shall besubmitted to the Shanghai InternationalEconomic and Trade ArbitrationCommission for arbitration.

Gracenote® CopyrightCD and music-related data fromGracenote, Inc., copyright©2000-2007 Gracenote. GracenoteSoftware, copyright © 2000-2007Gracenote. This product and service maypractice one or more of the following U.S.Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;6,330,593 and other patents issued orpending. Some services supplied underlicense from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.Patent 6,304,523.Gracenote and CDDB are registeredtrademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenotelogo and logotype, and the "Powered byGracenote™" logo are trademarks ofGracenote.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement(EULA)This device contains software fromGracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell StreetEmeryville, California 94608("Gracenote").The software from Gracenote (the"Gracenote Software") enables this deviceto do disc and music file identification andobtain music-related information, includingname, artist, track, and title information("Gracenote Data") from online servers

538


Appendices

("Gracenote Servers"), and to performother functions. You may use GracenoteData only by means of the intended EndUser functions of this device. This devicemay contain content belonging toGracenote's providers. If so, all of therestrictions set forth herein with respect toGracenote Data shall also apply to suchcontent and such content providers shallbe entitled to all of the benefits andprotections set forth herein that areavailable to Gracenote. You agree that youwill use the content from Gracenote("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,the Gracenote Software, and GracenoteServers for your own personal,non-commercial use only. You agree notto assign, copy, transfer or transmit theGracenote Content, Gracenote Softwareor any Gracenote Data (except in a Tagassociated with a music file) to any thirdparty. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTESOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN.You agree that your non-exclusive licensesto use the Gracenote Content, GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers will terminate if youviolate these restrictions. If your licensesterminate, you agree to cease any and alluse of the Gracenote Content, GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers.Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rightsin Gracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the Gracenote Servers andGracenote Content, including all ownershiprights. Under no circumstances will eitherGracenote become liable for any paymentto you for any information that you provide,

including any copyrighted material ormusic file information. You agree thatGracenote may enforce its respectiverights, collectively or separately, under thisagreement against you, directly in eachcompany's own name.Gracenote uses a unique identifier to trackqueries for statistical purposes. Thepurpose of a randomly assigned numericidentifier is to allow Gracenote to countqueries without knowing anything aboutwho you are. For more information, see theweb page at www.gracenote.com for theGracenote Privacy Policy.THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEMOF GRACENOTE DATA AND THEGRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSEDTO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTEMAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS ORWARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANYGRACENOTE DATA FROM THEGRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTECONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELYAND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHTTO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENTFROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVESERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OFGRACENOTE, CHANGE DATACATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THATGRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NOWARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHERGRACENOTE CONTENT OR THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE ORGRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREEOR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE ORGRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BEUNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOTOBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANYENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPESTHAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TOPROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREETO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICESAT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALLWARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

539


Appendices

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHERGRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTSTHAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USEOF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANYGRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILLGRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANYCONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITSOR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASONWHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.

Radio Frequency StatementFCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-LIC: 216B-SYNCG3-LThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

WARNING: Changes ormodifications not expressively approvedby the party responsible for compliancecould void the user's authority to operatethe equipment. The term "IC:" before theradio certification number only signifiesthat Industry Canada technicalspecifications were met.

The antenna used for this transmitter mustnot be co-located or operating inconjunction with any other antenna ortransmitter.

Taiwan TerritoryNote: In accordance with the managementapproach of low-power radio waveradiation motors:Article 12: For approved and certifiedlow-power radiation motor models,companies, firms or users must not alterthe frequency, increase the power orchange the characteristics and functionsof the original design without authorization.Article 14: The usage of low-powerradio-frequency motors must not affectaviation safety and interfere with legaltelecommunications. Should interferencebe detected, immediately stop using thedevice and only resume usage afterensuring that there is no longer anyinterference. For the legaltelecommunication and wirelesstelecommunication of the telco, thelow-power radio frequency motor must beable to tolerate legal limits of interferencefrom telecommunication, industrial,scientific and radio wave equipment.

SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMSAND CONDITIONSBy activating, using and/or accessing theSUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive orother content or material provided byIntelematics (together, SUNA Productsand/or Services), you must acceptcertain terms and conditions. The followingis a brief summary of the terms andconditions that apply to you. To view thefull terms and conditions relevant to youruse of the SUNA Products and/or Services,please consult:

Website

www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-ditions/

1. Acceptance

540


Appendices

By using SUNA Products and/or Services,you will be deemed to have accepted andagreed to be bound by the terms andconditions fully detailed at:

Website

www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-ditions/

2. Intellectual PropertySUNA Products and/or Services are foryour personal use. You may not record, orretransmit the content, nor use the contentin association with any other trafficinformation or route guidance service ordevice not approved by Intelematics. Youobtain no right of ownership in anyIntellectual Property Rights (includingcopyright) in the data that is used toprovide SUNA Products and/or Services.3. Appropriate UseSUNA Products and/or Services areintended as an aid to personal motoringand travel planning, and do not providecomprehensive or accurate information onall occasions. On occasions, you mayexperience additional delay as a result ofusing SUNA Products and/or Services. Youacknowledge that it is not intended, orsuitable, for use in applications where timeof arrival or driving directions may impactthe safety of the public or yourself.4. Use of SUNA Products and Serviceswhile drivingYou, and other authorised drivers of thevehicle in which SUNA Products and/orServices are available or installed andactive, remain at all times responsible forobserving all relevant laws and codes ofsafe driving. In particular, you agree to onlyactively operate SUNA Products and/orServices when the Vehicle is at a completestop and it is safe to do so.

5. Service Continuity and Reception ofthe SUNA Traffic ChannelWe will use reasonable endeavours toprovide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hoursa day, 365 days a year. The SUNA TrafficChannel may occasionally be unavailablefor technical reasons or for plannedmaintenance. We will try to performmaintenance at times when congestion islight. We reserve the right to withdrawSUNA Products and/or Services at anytime.Also, we cannot assure the uninterruptedreception of the SUNA Traffic ChannelRDS-TMC signal at any particular location.6. Limitation of LiabilityNeither Intelematics (nor its suppliers orthe manufacturer of your device (the“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or toany third party for any damages eitherdirect, indirect, incidental, consequentialor otherwise arising out of the use of orinability to use SUNA Products and/orServices even if Intelematics or a Supplierhas been advised of the possibility of suchdamages. You also acknowledge that theneither Intelematics nor any Supplierguarantees nor make any warranties thatrelate to the availability, accuracy orcompleteness of SUNA Products and/orServices, and to the extent which it islawful to do so, both Intelematics and eachSupplier excludes any warranties whichmight otherwise be implied by any Stateor Federal legislation in relation to SUNAProducts and/or Services.7. Please NoteGreat care has been taken in preparing thismanual. Constant product developmentmay mean that some information is notentirely up-to-date. The information in thisdocument is subject to change withoutnotice.

541


Appendices

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Radio Frequency Statement

IC Identification NumberFCC Identification NumberSYNC Version

216B-SYNCG3-LACJ-SYNCG3-L3.0

216B-FA170BCARHSACJ-FA-170-BCARHS3.1

216B-FG185SG32MHACJ-FG-185-SG32MH3.2

WARNING: Changes ormodifications not expressively approvedby the party responsible for compliancecould void the user's authority to operatethe equipment. The term "IC:" before theradio certification number only signifiesthat Industry Canada technicalspecifications were met.

These devices comply with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. The device does not cause harmful

interference.2. The device accepts any interference

received, including interference thatcould cause undesired operation.

TYPE APPROVALSRadio Frequency Certifications forTire Pressure MonitoringSensor(s)Argentina

E207816

Brazil

E197509

542


Appendices

CanadaIC: 850K-11545917

European Union EU

E207818

Ghana

E253824

Jordan

E253823

Malaysia

E253822

Mexico

E253812

E253813

Moldova

E197811

Morocco

E207821

Oman

E253817

543


Appendices

Philippines

E198001

Russia

E253816

Serbia

E197844

Singapore

E253820

South Africa

E198002

South Korea

E253819

Taiwan

E203679

Ukraine

E253818

544


Appendices

United Arab Emirates

E207817

United States of AmericaFCC ID: OUC11545917

Radio Frequency Certifications forMid Range RadarArgentina

E269659

Ghana

E269662

Jordan

E269660

Morocco

E269661

South Africa

E269664

545


Appendices


E269663

Radio Frequency Certifications forPassive Anti-Theft SystemArgentina

E274065

Brazil

E269675

CanadaIC: 850K-11545917

Djibouti

E274068

Ghana

E269674

546


Appendices

Jamaica

E274067

Jordan

E269666

Malaysia

E269673

Morocco

E269670

Paraguay

E274066

Pakistan

E275754

547


Appendices

Serbia

E269672

Singapore

E269676

South Africa

E269667

Ukraine

E269671


E269668

United States of AmericaFCC ID: OUC11545917

548


Appendices

Vietnam

E269677

Radio Frequency Certifications forRadio Transceiver ModuleCanadaIC: 3659A-F03AM315RXIC: 3659A-F04AM902TRX

Djibouti

E272192

Jamaica

E272193

Jordan

E272194

Morocco

E269683

549


Appendices

Pakistan

E269684

E287633

Paraguay

E272195

Serbia

E269681

South Africa

E269685

Ukraine

E269682

550


Appendices


E272196

United States of AmericaFCC ID: LTQF03AM315RXFCC ID: LTQF04AM902TRX

Radio Frequency Certifications forBlind Spot Information SystemCanadaRSS-310 compliant, per FCC Test reportno.: 1-8707/14-01-03

Ghana

E269695

Malaysia

E269697

South Africa

E269696


E269694

551


Appendices

United States of AmericaFCC ID: OAYSRR3B

Vietnam

E269693

Radio Frequency Certifications forWireless ChargingUnited Arab Emirates

E272903

South Korea

E273475

Radio Frequency Certifications forSYNC 3Brazil

E252722

E282218

552


Appendices

Radio Frequency Certifications forCruise Control ModuleCanadaIC: 3432A-0065TR

United States of AmericaFCC ID: L2C0065TR

Radio Frequency Certifications forBody Control ModuleCanadaIC: 7812A-A2C738448Model # : M : A2C750526Model # : M : A2C750561

United States of AmericaFCC ID: M3NA2C738448Model # : M : A2C750526Model # : M : A2C750561

Radio Frequency Certification forKeys and Remote ControlsCanadaIC : 7812A-A2C931423IC: 7812A-A2C931426IC: 3248A-A08TAAIC: 3248A-A08TDA

United States of AmericaFCC ID : M3N-A2C931423FCC ID : M3N-A2C931426FCC ID : N5F-A08TAAFCC ID : N5F-A08TDA

Radio Frequency Statement forAudio UnitCanadaIC: 3043A-UP375AHU

United StatesFCC ID: NT8-16UP375AHU

553


Appendices

554


1180 Degree Camera.....................................215

Camera Views......................................................216Using the System................................................216

44WD

See: Four-Wheel Drive.....................................188

AA/C

See: Climate Control.........................................129About This Manual...........................................7ABS

See: Brakes...........................................................193ABS driving hints

See: Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes................................................................193

Accessories.....................................................491Exterior Style........................................................491Interior Style.........................................................491Lifestyle..................................................................491Peace of Mind......................................................491

AccessoriesSee: Replacement Parts

Recommendation............................................12ACC

See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............218Active Park Assist........................................206

Using Active Park Assist..................................207Adjusting the Headlamps........................299

Vertical Aim Adjustment................................299Adjusting the Pedals......................................81Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles

With: Manual Adjustable SteeringColumn.............................................................77

Adjusting the Steering Wheel - VehiclesWith: Power Adjustable SteeringColumn.............................................................77End of Travel Position.........................................78Memory Feature....................................................78

Airbag Disposal...............................................52Air Conditioning

See: Climate Control.........................................129

Air FilterSee: Changing the Engine Air Filter............304

AlarmSee: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................76

Ambient Lighting...........................................89Adjusting the Brightness...................................89Changing the Color.............................................89Switching Ambient Lighting Off.....................89Switching Ambient Lighting On.....................89

Anti-Theft Alarm............................................76Arming the Alarm.................................................76Disarming the Alarm...........................................76

Appendices.....................................................514Apps.................................................................460

.................................................................................460SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................462

At a Glance........................................................16Audible Warnings and Indicators...........102

Automatic Transmission WarningChime.................................................................103

Engine On Warning Chime..............................102Headlamps On Warning Chime....................102Key in Ignition Warning Chime.......................102Keyless Warning Alert ......................................102Parking Brake On Warning Chime................102

Audio Control...................................................79Seek and Media....................................................79

Audio System................................................362General Information.........................................362

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/SYNC.............................................................366Accessing the Clock Settings.......................366Accessing the Media Source Menu............366Accessing the Menu.........................................366Accessing the Phone Features.....................366Accessing the Sound Settings.....................366Adjusting the Volume......................................366Changing Radio Stations................................367Ejecting the CD...................................................367Inserting a CD......................................................367Listening to a CD................................................367Listening to Satellite Radio............................367Listening to the Radio......................................367Menu Structure..................................................368Muting the Audio................................................367Playing or Pausing Media................................367Switching the Audio Unit On and Off.........367Using a Cell Phone............................................367

555


Index

Using Seek, Fast Forward andReverse.............................................................368

Using the Display Control...............................367Using the Number Block.................................368

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: PremiumAM/FM/CD.................................................364Adjusting the Volume......................................365Changing Radio Stations................................365Ejecting the CD...................................................365Inserting a CD......................................................365Selecting the Audio Modes............................365Switching the Audio Unit On and Off........365Using Seek, Fast Forward and

Reverse.............................................................365Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/

FM/CD...........................................................363Accessing the Sound Settings......................363Adjusting the Volume......................................364Changing Radio Stations................................364Ejecting the CD...................................................364Inserting a CD.....................................................364Switching the Audio Unit On and Off........364Using Seek, Fast Forward and

Reverse.............................................................364Autolamps........................................................85

Windshield Wiper ActivatedHeadlamps........................................................85

Automatic Climate Control - VehiclesWith: Premium AM/FM/CD....................132Directing Air to the Footwell Air

Vents...................................................................132Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air

Vents...................................................................132Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................132Setting the Temperature..................................132Switching Auto Mode On and Off................132Switching Defrost On and Off........................133Switching Dual Zone Mode On and

Off........................................................................133Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On

and Off...............................................................133Switching Maximum Defrost On and

Off........................................................................133Switching Recirculated Air On and

Off........................................................................133Switching the Air Conditioning On and

Off........................................................................133

Switching the Climate Control On andOff........................................................................133

Switching the Heated Seats On andOff........................................................................133

Automatic Climate Control - VehiclesWith: Sony AM/FM/CD...........................130Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................130Setting the Temperature.................................130Switching Auto Mode On and Off.................131Switching Defrost On and Off.........................131Switching Dual Zone Mode On and

Off.........................................................................131Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On

and Off................................................................131Switching Maximum Defrost On and

Off........................................................................132Switching Recirculated Air On and

Off........................................................................132Switching the Air Conditioning On and

Off.........................................................................131Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On

and Off................................................................131Switching the Climate Control On and

Off.........................................................................131Switching the Heated Seats On and

Off.........................................................................131Automatic High Beam Control..................87

Automatic High Beam Indicator....................88Switching the System On and Off.................87

Automatic Transmission...........................184Brake-Shift Interlock Override......................186If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or

Snow...................................................................187SelectShift Automatic™

Transmission...................................................185Understanding the Positions of Your

Automatic Transmission............................184Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -

2.3L EcoBoost™.......................................293Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -

3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™............293Adding Transmission Fluid ............................294Checking the Transmission Fluid

Level...................................................................293Autowipers.......................................................82

Autowipers Settings............................................83Auxiliary Power Points................................162

110 Volt AC Power Point...................................162

556


Index

12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................162Locations...............................................................162

BBattery

See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................296Blind Spot Information System...............231

....................................................................................231Switching the System On and Off...............232System Errors......................................................232Using the Blind Spot Information

System...............................................................231BLIS

See: Blind Spot Information System...........231Bonnet Lock

See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........282Booster Seats..................................................29

Types of Booster Seats......................................30Brake Fluid Check........................................295Brakes...............................................................193

General Information..........................................193Breaking-In.....................................................255Bulb Specification Chart..........................360

CCabin Air Filter...............................................138Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L

EcoBoost™.................................................347Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold

Climates...........................................................350Specifications.....................................................348

Capacities and Specifications - 3.5LDuratec..........................................................351Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold

Climates...........................................................355Specifications......................................................352

Capacities and Specifications - 3.5LEcoboost™.................................................355Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold

Climates...........................................................359Specifications......................................................357

Capacities and Specifications...............340Cargo Nets......................................................239Car Wash

See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................306

Catalytic Converter.......................................181On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................182Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance

(I/M) Testing...................................................182Center Console..............................................164

Rear Seat Armrest..............................................164Second Row Center Console.........................164

Changing a Bulb..........................................300Front Direction Indicator..................................301Front Fog Lamp..................................................302Headlamp.............................................................301Headlamp High Beam.....................................302LED Lamps...........................................................303License Plate Lamp..........................................304Rear Direction Indicator and Reversing

Lamp.................................................................303Changing a Fuse..........................................280

Fuses......................................................................280Changing a Road Wheel...........................334

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire AssemblyInformation.....................................................334

Tire Change Procedure....................................335Changing the 12V Battery.........................296Changing the Engine Air Filter................304Changing the Wiper Blades.....................298

Front Wiper Blades...........................................298Rear Window Wiper Blade.............................299

Checking MyKey System Status...............62MyKey Distance....................................................62Number of Admin Keys......................................63Number of MyKeys..............................................63

Checking the Wiper Blades.....................298Child Restraint and Seatbelt

Maintenance.................................................42Child Restraint Positioning..........................31Child Safety.......................................................18

General Information.............................................18Child Safety Locks..........................................33

Left-Hand Side......................................................34Right-Hand Side...................................................34

Cleaning Leather Seats..............................310Cleaning Products......................................306

Materials...............................................................306Cleaning the Engine...................................308Cleaning the Exterior.................................306

Cleaning the Headlamps................................307Exterior Chrome Parts......................................307Exterior Plastic Parts........................................307

557


Index

Stripes or Graphics............................................307Underbody............................................................307Under Hood..........................................................307

Cleaning the Instrument Panel andInstrument Cluster Lens........................309

Cleaning the Interior...................................309Mirrors....................................................................309

Cleaning the Wheels....................................311Cleaning the Windows and Wiper

Blades...........................................................308Clearing All MyKeys.......................................62Climate............................................................444

Accessing Rear Climate Controls................446Accessing the Climate Control Menu........444Directing the Airflow........................................444Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator..........446Setting the Blower Motor Speed.................444Setting the Temperature................................444Switching Auto Mode On and Off...............444Switching Dual Zone Mode On and

Off......................................................................445Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On

and Off.............................................................445Switching Maximum Defrost On and

Off......................................................................445Switching Rear Auto Mode On and

Off......................................................................446Switching Recirculated Air On and

Off......................................................................445Switching the Air Conditioning On and

Off......................................................................444Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On

and Off.............................................................445Switching the Climate Control On and

Off......................................................................445Switching the Heated Exterior Mirrors On

and Off.............................................................445Switching the Heated Rear Window On and

Off......................................................................445Switching the Heated Seats On and

Off......................................................................445Switching the Heated Steering Wheel On

and Off.............................................................445Switching the Rear Climate Controlled

Seats On and Off.........................................446Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and

Off......................................................................446

Switching the Rear Ventilated Seats Onand Off.............................................................446

Switching the Ventilated Seats On andOff......................................................................446

Climate Control.............................................129Climate Controlled Seats..........................155

Cooled Seats........................................................156Heated Seats........................................................155

Coolant CheckSee: Engine Coolant Check...........................289

Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........51Creating a MyKey............................................61

Programming and Changing ConfigurableSettings...............................................................62

Cross Traffic Alert........................................232Blocked Sensors.................................................234Switching the System Off and On...............235System Errors......................................................235System Lights, Messages and Audible

Alerts.................................................................234System Limitations...........................................235Using the Cross Traffic Alert System..........233

Cruise Control.................................................80Principle of Operation........................................217

Cruise controlSee: Using Cruise Control.................................217

Customer Assistance.................................264

DData Recording..................................................9

Event Data Recording..........................................10Service Data Recording........................................9

Daytime Running Lamps............................86Type One - Conventional

(Non-Configurable).......................................86Type Two - Configurable...................................86

Declaration of Conformity........................542Radio Frequency Statement.........................542

Digital Radio..................................................370HD Radio Reception and Station

Troubleshooting..............................................371Direction Indicators.......................................88Doors and Locks.............................................65Driver Alert......................................................225

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION...........................225USING DRIVER ALERT.....................................226

558


Index

Driver and Passenger Airbags...................45Children and Airbags..........................................46Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating

Adjustment........................................................45Driving Aids.....................................................225Driving Hints...................................................255Driving Through Water...............................256DRL

See: Daytime Running Lamps........................86

EEconomical Driving.....................................255Electromagnetic Compatibility...............514Emission Law................................................180

Noise Emissions Warranty, ProhibitedTampering Acts and Maintenance...........181

Tampering With a Noise ControlSystem..............................................................180

End User License Agreement..................516VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE

AGREEMENT (EULA) ..................................516Engine Block Heater....................................170

Using the Engine Block Heater........................171Engine Coolant Check...............................289

Adding Coolant..................................................289Coolant Change..................................................291Engine Coolant Temperature

Management..................................................292Fail-Safe Cooling................................................291Recycled Coolant................................................291Severe Climates..................................................291

Engine Emission Control...........................180Engine Immobilizer

See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................75Engine Oil Check..........................................287

Adding Engine Oil...............................................287Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.3L

EcoBoost™.................................................286Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L Duratec/3.5L

Ecoboost™.................................................287Engine Specifications - 2.3L

EcoBoost™................................................340Drivebelt Routing...............................................340

Engine Specifications - 3.5LDuratec.........................................................340Drivebelt Routing................................................341

Engine Specifications - 3.5LEcoboost™..................................................341Drivebelt Routing...............................................342

Entertainment..............................................434AM/FM Radio......................................................435Apps.......................................................................443Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................442CD (If equipped).................................................441HD Radio™ Information (If

Available)........................................................438SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If

Activated)........................................................436Sources..................................................................435Supported Media Players, Formats and

Metadata Information................................443USB Ports.............................................................443

Environment......................................................15Essential Towing Checks..........................250

Before Towing a Trailer.....................................251Hitches..................................................................250Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal

Watercraft (PWC)........................................252Safety Chains......................................................250Trailer Brakes........................................................251Trailer Lamps........................................................251When Towing a Trailer......................................251

Event Data RecordingSee: Data Recording..............................................9

Export Unique Options.................................14Exterior Mirrors.................................................91

Auto-dimming Feature......................................93Auto-Folding Mirrors...........................................92Blind Spot Information System......................94Direction Indicator Mirrors ...............................93Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................92Heated Exterior Mirrors .....................................93Integrated Blind Spot Mirror............................93Memory Mirrors ....................................................93Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................91Puddle Lamps.......................................................93

FFastening the Seatbelts..............................36

Rear Inflatable Seatbelt....................................38Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................37Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................36

559


Index

Flat TireSee: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334

Floor Mats......................................................256Fog Lamps - Front

See: Front Fog Lamps........................................88Foot Pedals

See: Adjusting the Pedals..................................81Ford Credit..........................................................11

US Only......................................................................11Ford Protect...................................................493

Ford Protect Extended Service Plan(CANADA ONLY)..........................................494

Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.Only)..................................................................493

Four-Wheel Drive.........................................188Principle of Operation......................................188

Front Fog Lamps............................................88Front Parking Aid.........................................203

Obstacle Distance Indicator.........................204Front Passenger Sensing System............46Fuel and Refueling........................................172Fuel Consumption........................................179

Advertised Capacity...........................................179Fuel Economy.......................................................179

Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................174Fuel Quality - E85.........................................173

Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex FuelVehicles..............................................................173

Switching Between E85 andGasoline.............................................................174

Fuel Quality - Gasoline................................172Choosing the Right Fuel...................................172

Fuel Shutoff...................................................259Fuses..................................................................271Fuse Specification Chart............................271

Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel........276Power Distribution Box.....................................271

GGarage Door Opener....................................157Garage Door Opener

See: Universal Garage Door Opener............157Gauges...............................................................96

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............99Fuel Gauge.............................................................99Information Display.............................................98Type 1........................................................................96

Type 2........................................................................97Type 3.......................................................................98

GearboxSee: Transmission..............................................184

General Information on RadioFrequencies...................................................53Intelligent Access.................................................53

General Maintenance Information.......495Multi-Point Inspection.....................................497Owner Checks and Services.........................496Protecting Your Investment..........................495Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................495Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your

Dealership?.....................................................495Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and

Canada..........................................................267Getting the Services You Need..............264

Away From Home.............................................264Global Opening................................................91

Moonroof..................................................................91Remote Control Front Windows.....................91

HHandbrake

See: Parking Brake.............................................194Hazard Flashers...........................................259HDC

See: Using Hill Descent Control...................200Headlamp Adjusting

See: Adjusting the Headlamps....................299Headlamp Exit Delay....................................86Headrest

See: Head Restraints.........................................139Head Restraints............................................139

Adjusting the Head Restraint........................140Tilting Head Restraints .....................................141

Heated Exterior Mirrors...............................137Heated Rear Window..................................137Heated Seats.................................................154

Front Seats............................................................154Second Row Heated Seats.............................155

Heated Steering Wheel...............................80Heating

See: Climate Control.........................................129Hill Start Assist..............................................194

Switching the System On and Off...............195Using Hill Start Assist.......................................194

560


Index

Hints on Controlling the InteriorClimate..........................................................134Defogging the Side Windows in Cold

Weather.............................................................136General Hints.......................................................134Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................135Quickly Heating the Interior............................135Recommended Settings for Cooling...........136Recommended Settings for Heating..........135

Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes............................................................193

Home Screen................................................426Hood Lock

See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........282

IIgnition Switch...............................................166In California (U.S. Only)............................265Information Display Control......................80Information Displays...................................104

General Information..........................................104Information Messages.................................115

4WD..........................................................................116Adaptive Cruise Control....................................116AdvanceTrac™.....................................................116Alarm........................................................................117Automatic Engine Shutdown..........................117Automatic High Beam Control........................117Battery and Charging System.........................118Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic

Alert System.....................................................118Brake System........................................................119Doors and Locks..................................................119Driver Alert..............................................................119Electronic Stability Control.............................120Engine.....................................................................120Fuel..........................................................................120Hill Descent Control..........................................120Hill Start Assist.....................................................121Keys and Intelligent Access.............................121Lane Keeping System........................................122Maintenance.........................................................122MyKey......................................................................123Park Aid..................................................................124Park Brake..............................................................124Power Steering....................................................124Pre-Collision Assist............................................125

Remote Start........................................................125Seats........................................................................125Starting System..................................................126Terrain Management System.........................126Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................126Traction Control...................................................127Trailer.......................................................................127Transmission.........................................................127

Installing Child Restraints............................19Child Seats...............................................................19Using Lap and Shoulder Belts.........................20Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren (LATCH)............................................25Using Tether Straps.............................................27

Instrument Cluster........................................96Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................85Instrument Panel Overview........................16Interior Lamps.................................................88

Battery Saver.........................................................89Dome Lamp...........................................................88Front Interior Lamps...........................................89Rear Interior Lamps............................................89

Interior Mirror...................................................94Automatic Dimming Mirror...............................94Manual Dimming Mirror.....................................94

Introduction.........................................................7

JJump Starting the Vehicle........................260

Connecting the Jumper Cables....................260Jump Starting.......................................................261Preparing Your Vehicle....................................260Removing the Jumper Cables........................261

KKeyless Entry...................................................68

SECURICODE™ Keyless EntryKeypad................................................................68

Keyless Starting............................................166Ignition Modes......................................................167

Keys and Remote Controls.........................53

LLane Keeping System................................226

Switching the System On and Off...............227

561


Index

Liftgate...............................................................70Lighting Control..............................................84

Flashing the Headlamp High Beam..............85Headlamp High Beam.......................................84

Lighting..............................................................84General Information...........................................84

Load CarriersSee: Roof Racks and Load Carriers............240

Load Carrying................................................239Load Limit........................................................241

Special Loading Instructions for Owners ofPick-up Trucks and Utility-typeVehicles............................................................246

Vehicle Loading - with and without aTrailer..................................................................241

Locking and Unlocking.................................65Activating Intelligent Access...........................66Autolock...................................................................67Battery Saver.........................................................68Illuminated Entry..................................................67Illuminated Exit.....................................................68Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the

Key Blade...........................................................65Power Door Locks................................................65Remote Control....................................................65Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead

Transmitter........................................................66Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access

Keys.......................................................................67Luggage Covers............................................240Lug Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334

MMaintenance..................................................282

General Information.........................................282Manual Climate Control.............................129

Directing Air to the Footwell AirVents...................................................................129

Directing Air to the Instrument Panel AirVents...................................................................129

Locking the Rear Climate Control................130Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................129Setting the Rear Blower Motor

Speed.................................................................130Setting the Rear Temperature.......................130Setting the Temperature.................................129

Switching Defrost On and Off.......................129Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On

and Off..............................................................130Switching Recirculated Air On and

Off.......................................................................130Switching the Air Conditioning On and

Off........................................................................129Switching the Climate Control On and

Off........................................................................129Switching the Rear Climate Control On and

Off.......................................................................130Manual Liftgate...............................................70

Closing the Liftgate.............................................70Opening the Liftgate...........................................70

Manual Seats.................................................142Lumbar Adjustment..........................................143Moving the Seat Backward and

Forward.............................................................142Recline Adjustment...........................................142

Media Hub.......................................................375Memory Function.........................................146

Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................147Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote

Control or Intelligent Access KeyFob......................................................................146

Saving a PreSet Position.................................146Message Center

See: Information Displays...............................104Mirrors

See: Windows and Mirrors...............................90Mobile Communications Equipment.......13Moonroof..........................................................94

Bounce-Back.........................................................95Opening and Closing the Moonroof..............95Opening and Closing the Sunscreen............95Venting the Moonroof........................................95

Motorcraft Parts - 2.3LEcoBoost™.................................................342

Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec.............343Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L

Ecoboost™.................................................344MyKey – Troubleshooting...........................63MyKey™............................................................60

Principle of Operation........................................60

562


Index

NNavigation......................................................452

cityseeker.............................................................459Destination Mode..............................................454Map Mode............................................................452Navigation Map Updates...............................460Navigation Menu................................................457SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link..................460SYNC AppLink....................................................459Waypoints............................................................458

Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........498Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™........................498Normal Maintenance Intervals....................499

OOil Change Indicator Reset......................288Oil Check

See: Engine Oil Check......................................287Opening and Closing the Hood..............282

Closing the Hood...............................................283Opening the Hood.............................................282

Ordering Additional Owner'sLiterature.....................................................269Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual.........269

Overhead Console.......................................165

PParking Aids...................................................202

Principle of Operation......................................202Parking Brake.................................................194Passenger Knee Airbag................................49Passive Anti-Theft System.........................75

SecuriLock®...........................................................75PATS

See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................75Pedals..................................................................81Perchlorate.........................................................11Personal Safety System™..........................43

How Does the Personal Safety SystemWork?..................................................................43

Phone..............................................................446During a Phone Call..........................................450Making Calls........................................................449Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First

Time..................................................................446

Phone Menu.........................................................447Receiving Calls...................................................450Smartphone Connectivity...............................451Text Messaging....................................................451

Post-Crash Alert System..........................262Power Door Locks

See: Locking and Unlocking.............................65Power Liftgate...................................................71

Hands-Free Feature.............................................73Obstacle Detection..............................................73Opening and Closing the Liftgate....................71Setting the Liftgate Open Height...................72Stopping the Liftgate Movement...................72

Power Seats....................................................143Adjusting the Lumbar Support.....................144Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front Seats

With Active Motion ......................................144Power Steering Fluid Check....................296Power Windows.............................................90

Accessory Delay.....................................................91Bounce-Back.........................................................90One-Touch Down................................................90One-Touch Up......................................................90Window Lock..........................................................91

Pre-Collision Assist.....................................236Using the Pre-Collision Assist

System...............................................................237Protecting the Environment........................15Puncture

See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334

RRear Parking Aid...........................................202

Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................203Rear Passenger Climate Controls..........136

Directing Air to the Overhead AirVents..................................................................136

Directing Air to the Rear Footwell AirVents..................................................................136

Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator...........136Setting the Rear Blower Motor Speed........137Setting the Rear Temperature........................137Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and

Off........................................................................137Rear Seats........................................................147

Adjusting the Rear Seats..................................147

563


Index

Rear Under Floor Storage.........................239Adjustable Load Floor......................................239Cargo Management System.........................239

Rear View Camera........................................212Camera Guidelines.............................................213Manual Zoom.......................................................215Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................214Rear Camera Delay............................................215Using the Rear View Camera System.........213

Rear View CameraSee: Rear View Camera....................................212

Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........83Rear Camera Washer..........................................83Rear Window Washer.........................................83Rear Window Wiper Blade...............................83

Recommended Towing Weights...........248Refueling..........................................................176

Refueling System Overview............................176Refueling System Warning..............................178Refueling Your Vehicle.......................................177

Remote Control..............................................53Car Finder................................................................58Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................53Intelligent Access Key.........................................54Memory Feature....................................................57Remote Start.........................................................58Replacing the Battery.........................................55Sounding the Panic Alarm................................58

Remote Start.................................................138Automatic Settings............................................138Heated and Cooled Features.........................138Last Settings........................................................138

Repairing Minor Paint Damage.................311Replacement Parts

Recommendation........................................12Collision Repairs....................................................12Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical

Repairs..................................................................12Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12

Replacing a Lost Key or RemoteControl............................................................59

Reporting Safety Defects (CanadaOnly)..............................................................269

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.Only)..............................................................269

Roadside Assistance..................................258Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside

Assistance.......................................................259

Vehicles Sold in the United States: GettingRoadside Assistance...................................258

Vehicles Sold in the United States: UsingRoadside Assistance...................................258

Roadside Emergencies..............................258Roof Racks and Load Carriers................240

Adjusting the Crossbar.....................................241Thumbwheel Kit..................................................241

Running-InSee: Breaking-In.................................................255

Running Out of Fuel.....................................174Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel

Container...........................................................175Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................175

SSafety Canopy™............................................49Safety Precautions.......................................172Satellite Radio...............................................372

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number(ESN).................................................................373

Satellite Radio Reception Factors...............373SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service..................373Troubleshooting.................................................374

Scheduled Maintenance Record...........503Scheduled Maintenance..........................495Seatbelt Extension........................................42Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................39Seatbelt Reminder........................................40

Belt-Minder™.......................................................40Seatbelts...........................................................35

Principle of Operation.........................................35Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Chime..............................................................40Conditions of operation....................................40

Seats.................................................................139Security...............................................................75Settings...........................................................463

911 Assist..............................................................468Ambient Lighting................................................475Bluetooth..............................................................465Clock......................................................................465Display....................................................................476General...................................................................473Media Player.......................................................464Mobile Apps..........................................................471Navigation............................................................469

564


Index

Phone.....................................................................465Radio......................................................................468Sound.....................................................................463Valet Mode............................................................477Vehicle....................................................................475Voice Control.......................................................476Wi-Fi & Hotspot..................................................473

Side Airbags.....................................................48Side Sensing System.................................204

Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................205Sitting in the Correct Position..................139Snow Chains

See: Using Snow Chains.................................329Spare Wheel

See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334Special Notices................................................12

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and

Utility Type Vehicles........................................13On Board Diagnostics Data Link

Connector............................................................13Special Instructions..............................................12Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance............13Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow............13

Special Operating Conditions ScheduledMaintenance...............................................501Exceptions............................................................502

Speed ControlSee: Cruise Control.............................................217

Stability Control............................................197Principle of Operation.......................................197

Starter SwitchSee: Ignition Switch...........................................166

Starting a Gasoline Engine........................167Automatic Engine Shutdown........................169Failure to Start.....................................................168Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................170Important Ventilating Information...............170Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is

Moving...............................................................169Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is

Stationary.........................................................169Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................167Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................167

Starting and Stopping the Engine.........166General Information..........................................166

Steering...........................................................235Electric Power Steering...................................235

Steering Wheel................................................77Storage Compartments.............................164Sunroof

See: Moonroof.......................................................94Sun Visors.........................................................94

Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................94Supplementary Restraints System.........44

Principle of Operation........................................44Switching Off the Engine...........................170

Vehicles With a Turbocharger........................170Symbols Glossary.............................................7SYNC™ 3.........................................................414

General Information..........................................414SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.......................477SYNC™ Applications and

Services........................................................392911 Assist...............................................................392SYNC Mobile Apps............................................394

SYNC™............................................................376General Information..........................................376

SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................406

TTechnical Specifications

See: Capacities and Specifications............340Terrain Control...............................................199The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto

Line Program (U.S. Only)......................266Tire Care...........................................................316

Glossary of Tire Terminology..........................317Information About Uniform Tire Quality

Grading..............................................................316Information Contained on the Tire

Sidewall............................................................318Temperature A B C..............................................317Traction AA A B C...............................................316Treadwear.............................................................316

Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........330Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System........................................331Understanding Your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System ......................................332Tires

See: Wheels and Tires......................................314Towing a Trailer.............................................247

Load Placement.................................................247

565


Index

Towing Points................................................263Installing the Recovery Hook.........................263Recovery Hook Location.................................263

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -2.3L EcoBoost™........................................252Emergency Towing............................................252

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™............252Emergency Towing............................................253Recreational Towing.........................................253

Towing..............................................................247Traction Control............................................196

Principle of Operation......................................196Trailer Sway Control...................................248Transmission Code Designation............346Transmission..................................................184Transporting the Vehicle...........................262Type Approvals.............................................542

Radio Frequency Certification for Keys andRemote Controls...........................................553

Radio Frequency Certifications for BlindSpot Information System...........................551

Radio Frequency Certifications for BodyControl Module..............................................553

Radio Frequency Certifications for CruiseControl Module..............................................553

Radio Frequency Certifications for MidRange Radar...................................................545

Radio Frequency Certifications for PassiveAnti-Theft System.......................................546

Radio Frequency Certifications for RadioTransceiver Module.....................................549

Radio Frequency Certifications for SYNC3...........................................................................552

Radio Frequency Certifications for TirePressure Monitoring Sensor(s)...............542

Radio Frequency Certifications for WirelessCharging...........................................................552

Radio Frequency Statement for AudioUnit.....................................................................553

UUnder Hood Overview - 2.3L

EcoBoost™.................................................283Under Hood Overview - 3.5L

Duratec.........................................................284

Under Hood Overview - 3.5LEcoboost™.................................................285

Universal Garage Door Opener................157HomeLink Wireless Control System............157

USB Port..........................................................375Using Adaptive Cruise Control................218

Automatic Cancellation...................................221Blocked Sensor...................................................223Canceling the Set Speed.................................221Changing the Set Speed..................................221Detection Issues.................................................222Following a Vehicle............................................219Hilly Condition Usage........................................221Overriding the Set Speed...............................220Resuming the Set Speed.................................221Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed..............219Setting the Gap Distance...............................220Switching Adaptive Cruise Control

Off.......................................................................222Switching Adaptive Cruise Control

On........................................................................219Switching to Normal Cruise Control...........224System Not Available.......................................223

Using Cruise Control....................................217Canceling the Set Speed..................................217Changing the Set Speed...................................217Resuming the Set Speed.................................218Setting the Cruise Speed..................................217Switching Cruise Control Off..........................218Switching Cruise Control On...........................217

Using Four-Wheel Drive............................188Driving In Special Conditions With

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)...........................189How Your Vehicle Differs From Other

Vehicles.............................................................189Using Hill Descent Control......................200

Principle of operation......................................200Using hill descent control..............................200

Using MyKey With Remote StartSystems..........................................................63

Using Snow Chains.....................................329Using Stability Control...............................198Using Summer Tires...................................329Using SYNC™ With Your Media

Player.............................................................397Accessing Your USB Song Library................401Bluetooth Devices and System

Settings............................................................403

566


Index

Connecting Your Digital Media Player to theUSB Port...........................................................397

Media Menu Features.....................................400Media Voice Commands................................398USB 2.....................................................................403Voice Commands for Audio Sources........404

Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........380Accessing Features through the Phone

Menu..................................................................385Accessing Your Phone Settings...................388Bluetooth Devices.............................................389Making Calls........................................................384Pairing a Phone for the First Time................381Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................382Phone Options during an Active Call.........384Phone Voice Commands................................382Receiving Calls...................................................384System Settings................................................390Text Messaging..................................................386

Using Terrain Control..................................199Using Traction Control...............................196

Switching the System Off...............................196System Indicator Lights and

Messages..........................................................196Using a Switch.....................................................196Using the Information Display

Controls.............................................................196Using Voice Recognition...........................378

Audio Voice Commands.................................428Climate Voice Commands.............................429Initiating a Voice Session................................378Mobile App Voice Commands......................432Navigation Voice Commands........................431Phone Voice Commands................................429SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice

Commands.....................................................432System Interaction and Feedback..............379Voice Settings Commands............................433

Utilizing the Mediation/ArbitrationProgram (Canada Only).........................267

VVehicle Care..................................................306

General Information.........................................306Vehicle Certification Label.......................346Vehicle Identification Number................345

Vehicle Storage...............................................311Battery.....................................................................312Body..........................................................................311Brakes......................................................................312Cooling system....................................................312Engine......................................................................312Fuel system...........................................................312General....................................................................311Miscellaneous......................................................312Removing Vehicle From Storage...................312Tires..........................................................................312

VentilationSee: Climate Control.........................................129

VINSee: Vehicle Identification Number............345

Voice Control....................................................79

WWarning Lamps and Indicators................99

Adaptive Cruise Control....................................99Anti-Lock Braking System................................99Automatic High Beam Control.....................100Battery....................................................................100Blind Spot Monitor............................................100Brake System.......................................................100Cruise Control......................................................100Direction Indicator.............................................100Door Ajar...............................................................100Engine Coolant Temperature........................100Engine Oil..............................................................100Fasten Safety Belt...............................................101Front Airbag...........................................................101Front Fog Lamps.................................................101Heads Up Display................................................101High Beam.............................................................101Hood Ajar................................................................101Lane Keeping Aid.................................................101Liftgate Ajar...........................................................101Low Fuel Level......................................................101Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................101Low Washer Fluid................................................101Parking Lamps......................................................101Powertrain Fault..................................................101Service Engine Soon..........................................102Stability Control..................................................102Stability Control Off..........................................102Transmission Tow/Haul...................................102

567


Index

Washer Fluid Check....................................296Washers

See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................306Waxing............................................................308Wheel Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334Wheels and Tires..........................................314

General Information..........................................314Technical Specifications.................................338

Windows and Mirrors...................................90Windshield Washers.....................................83

Front Camera Washer........................................83Windshield Wipers.........................................82

Speed Dependent Wipers................................82Wiper Blades

See: Checking the Wiper Blades.................298Wipers and Washers.....................................82

568


Index

2019 EXPLORER Owner's Manual - Dealer E Process

Documents

Transcript of 2019 EXPLORER Owner's Manual - Dealer E Process